SecureStack B2

Stackable Switches

Configuration Guide
Firmware Version 4.1.xx

P/N 9034133-13

Notice
EnterasysNetworksreservestherighttomakechangesinspecificationsandotherinformationcontainedinthisdocumentand itswebsitewithoutpriornotice.ThereadershouldinallcasesconsultEnterasysNetworkstodeterminewhetheranysuch changeshavebeenmade. Thehardware,firmware,orsoftwaredescribedinthisdocumentissubjecttochangewithoutnotice. INNOEVENTSHALLENTERASYSNETWORKSBELIABLEFORANYINCIDENTAL,INDIRECT,SPECIAL,OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGESWHATSOEVER(INCLUDINGBUTNOTLIMITEDTOLOSTPROFITS)ARISINGOUTOF ORRELATEDTOTHISDOCUMENT,WEBSITE,ORTHEINFORMATIONCONTAINEDINTHEM,EVENIFENTERASYS NETWORKSHASBEENADVISEDOF,KNEWOF,ORSHOULDHAVEKNOWNOF,THEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCH DAMAGES. EnterasysNetworks,Inc. 50MinutemanRoad Andover,MA01810 2008 Enterasys Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. PartNumber: 903413313 February 2008 ENTERASYS,ENTERASYSNETWORKS,ENTERASYSNETSIGHT,WEBVIEW,andany logosassociatedtherewith,aretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofEnterasysNetworks,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandother countries. Allotherproductnamesmentionedinthismanualmaybetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectivecompanies. DocumentationURL:http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals DocumentacionURL:http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals DokumentationimInternet:http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals

Version:

Information in this guide refers to SecureStack B2 firmware version 4.1.xx

ENTERASYS NETWORKS, INC. FIRMWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

BEFORE OPENING OR UTILIZING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT, CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
Thisdocumentisanagreement(Agreement)betweentheenduser(You)andEnterasysNetworks,Inc.,onbehalfofitself anditsAffiliates(ashereinafterdefined)(Enterasys)thatsetsforthYourrightsandobligationswithrespecttotheEnterasys softwareprogram/firmware(includinganyaccompanyingdocumentation,hardwareormedia)(Program)inthepackage andprevailsoveranyadditional,conflictingorinconsistenttermsandconditionsappearingonanypurchaseorderorother documentsubmittedbyYou.Affiliatemeansanyperson,partnership,corporation,limitedliabilitycompany,otherformof enterprisethatdirectlyorindirectlythroughoneormoreintermediaries,controls,oriscontrolledby,orisundercommon controlwiththepartyspecified.ThisAgreementconstitutestheentireunderstandingbetweentheparties,withrespecttothe subjectmatterofthisAgreement.TheProgrammaybecontainedinfirmware,chipsorothermedia. BYINSTALLINGOROTHERWISEUSINGTHEPROGRAM,YOUREPRESENTTHATYOUAREAUTHORIZEDTO ACCEPTTHESETERMSONBEHALFOFTHEENDUSER(IFTHEENDUSERISANENTITYONWHOSEBEHALFYOU AREAUTHORIZEDTOACT,YOUANDYOURSHALLBEDEEMEDTOREFERTOSUCHENTITY)ANDTHATYOU AGREETHATYOUAREBOUNDBYTHETERMSOFTHISAGREEMENT,WHICHINCLUDES,AMONGOTHER PROVISIONS,THELICENSE,THEDISCLAIMEROFWARRANTYANDTHELIMITATIONOFLIABILITY.IFYOUDONOT AGREETOTHETERMSOFTHISAGREEMENTORARENOTAUTHORIZEDTOENTERINTOTHISAGREEMENT, ENTERASYSISUNWILLINGTOLICENSETHEPROGRAMTOYOUANDYOUAGREETORETURNTHEUNOPENED PRODUCTTOENTERASYSORYOURDEALER,IFANY,WITHINTEN(10)DAYSFOLLOWINGTHEDATEOFRECEIPT FORAFULLREFUND. IFYOUHAVEANYQUESTIONSABOUTTHISAGREEMENT,CONTACTENTERASYSNETWORKS,LEGAL DEPARTMENTAT(978)6841000. YouandEnterasysagreeasfollows: 1. LICENSE. Youhavethenonexclusiveandnontransferablerighttouseonlytheone(1)copyoftheProgramprovidedin thispackagesubjecttothetermsandconditionsofthisAgreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS. ExceptasotherwiseauthorizedinwritingbyEnterasys,Youmaynot,normayYoupermitanythird partyto: (a) Reverseengineer,decompile,disassembleormodifytheProgram,inwholeorinpart,includingforreasonsoferror correctionorinteroperability,excepttotheextentexpresslypermittedbyapplicablelawandtotheextenttheparties shallnotbepermittedbythatapplicablelaw,suchrightsareexpresslyexcluded.Informationnecessarytoachieve interoperabilityorcorrecterrorsisavailablefromEnterasysuponrequestanduponpaymentofEnterasysapplicable fee. (b) IncorporatethePrograminwholeorinpart,inanyotherproductorcreatederivativeworksbasedontheProgram,in wholeorinpart. (c) Publish,disclose,copyreproduceortransmittheProgram,inwholeorinpart. (d) Assign,sell,license,sublicense,rent,lease,encumberbywayofsecurityinterest,pledgeorotherwisetransferthe Program,inwholeorinpart. (e) Removeanycopyright,trademark,proprietaryrights,disclaimerorwarningnoticeincludedonorembeddedinany partoftheProgram. 3. APPLICABLELAW. ThisAgreementshallbeinterpretedandgovernedunderthelawsandinthestateandfederalcourts oftheCommonwealthofMassachusettswithoutregardtoitsconflictsoflawsprovisions.Youacceptthepersonaljurisdiction andvenueoftheCommonwealthofMassachusettscourts.Noneofthe1980UnitedNationsConventionontheLimitationPeriod intheInternationalSaleofGoods,andtheUniformComputerInformationTransactionsActshallapplytothisAgreement. 4. EXPORTRESTRICTIONS. YouunderstandthatEnterasysanditsAffiliatesaresubjecttoregulationbyagenciesofthe U.S.Government,includingtheU.S.DepartmentofCommerce,whichprohibitexportordiversionofcertaintechnicalproducts tocertaincountries,unlessalicensetoexporttheproductisobtainedfromtheU.S.Governmentoranexceptionfromobtaining suchlicensemayberelieduponbytheexportingparty. IftheProgramisexportedfromtheUnitedStatespursuanttotheLicenseExceptionCIVundertheU.S.Export AdministrationRegulations,YouagreethatYouareacivilenduseroftheProgramandagreethatYouwillusetheProgramfor civilendusesonlyandnotformilitarypurposes. IftheProgramisexportedfromtheUnitedStatespursuanttotheLicenseExceptionTSRundertheU.S.Export AdministrationRegulations,inadditiontotherestrictionontransfersetforthinSection1or2ofthisAgreement,Youagreenot to(i)reexportorreleasetheProgram,thesourcecodefortheProgramortechnologytoanationalofacountryinCountry GroupsD:1orE:2(Albania,Armenia,Azerbaijan,Belarus,Cambodia,Cuba,Georgia,Iraq,Kazakhstan,Laos,Libya,Macau,

ii

Moldova,Mongolia,NorthKorea,thePeoplesRepublicofChina,Russia,Tajikistan,Turkmenistan,Ukraine,Uzbekistan, Vietnam,orsuchothercountriesasmaybedesignatedbytheUnitedStatesGovernment),(ii)exporttoCountryGroupsD:1or E:2(asdefinedherein)thedirectproductoftheProgramorthetechnology,ifsuchforeignproduceddirectproductissubjectto nationalsecuritycontrolsasidentifiedontheU.S.CommerceControlList,or(iii)ifthedirectproductofthetechnologyisa completeplantoranymajorcomponentofaplant,exporttoCountryGroupsD:1orE:2thedirectproductoftheplantora majorcomponentthereof,ifsuchforeignproduceddirectproductissubjecttonationalsecuritycontrolsasidentifiedonthe U.S.CommerceControlListorissubjecttoStateDepartmentcontrolsundertheU.S.MunitionsList. 5. UNITEDSTATESGOVERNMENTRESTRICTEDRIGHTS. TheenclosedProgram(i)wasdevelopedsolelyatprivate expense;(ii)containsrestrictedcomputersoftwaresubmittedwithrestrictedrightsinaccordancewithsection52.22719(a) through(d)oftheCommercialComputerSoftwareRestrictedRightsClauseanditssuccessors,and(iii)inallrespectsis proprietarydatabelongingtoEnterasysand/oritssuppliers.ForDepartmentofDefenseunits,theProgramisconsidered commercialcomputersoftwareinaccordancewithDFARSsection227.72023anditssuccessors,anduse,duplication,or disclosurebytheU.S.Governmentissubjecttorestrictionssetforthherein. 6. DISCLAIMEROFWARRANTY. EXCEPTFORTHOSEWARRANTIESEXPRESSLYPROVIDEDTOYOUINWRITING BYENTERASYS,ENTERASYSDISCLAIMSALLWARRANTIES,EITHEREXPRESSORIMPLIED,INCLUDINGBUTNOT LIMITEDTOIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITY,SATISFACTORYQUALITY,FITNESSFORAPARTICULAR PURPOSE,TITLEANDNONINFRINGEMENTWITHRESPECTTOTHEPROGRAM.IFIMPLIEDWARRANTIESMAYNOT BEDISCLAIMEDBYAPPLICABLELAW,THENANYIMPLIEDWARRANTIESARELIMITEDINDURATIONTOTHIRTY (30)DAYSAFTERDELIVERYOFTHEPROGRAMTOYOU. 7. LIMITATIONOFLIABILITY. INNOEVENTSHALLENTERASYSORITSSUPPLIERSBELIABLEFORANY DAMAGESWHATSOEVER(INCLUDING,WITHOUTLIMITATION,DAMAGESFORLOSSOFBUSINESS,PROFITS, BUSINESSINTERRUPTION,LOSSOFBUSINESSINFORMATION,SPECIAL,INCIDENTAL,CONSEQUENTIAL,OR RELIANCEDAMAGES,OROTHERLOSS)ARISINGOUTOFTHEUSEORINABILITYTOUSETHEPROGRAM,EVENIF ENTERASYSHASBEENADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGES.THISFOREGOINGLIMITATIONSHALL APPLYREGARDLESSOFTHECAUSEOFACTIONUNDERWHICHDAMAGESARESOUGHT. THECUMULATIVELIABILITYOFENTERASYSTOYOUFORALLCLAIMSRELATINGTOTHEPROGRAM,IN CONTRACT,TORTOROTHERWISE,SHALLNOTEXCEEDTHETOTALAMOUNTOFFEESPAIDTOENTERASYSBY YOUFORTHERIGHTSGRANTEDHEREIN. 8. AUDITRIGHTS. YouherebyacknowledgethattheintellectualpropertyrightsassociatedwiththeProgramareofcritical valuetoEnterasys,and,accordingly,Youherebyagreetomaintaincompletebooks,recordsandaccountsshowing(i)license feesdueandpaid,and(ii)theuse,copyinganddeploymentoftheProgram.YoualsogranttoEnterasysanditsauthorized representatives,uponreasonablenotice,therighttoauditandexamineduringYournormalbusinesshours,Yourbooks,records, accountsandhardwaredevicesuponwhichtheProgrammaybedeployedtoverifycompliancewiththisAgreement,including theverificationofthelicensefeesdueandpaidEnterasysandtheuse,copyinganddeploymentoftheProgram.Enterasysright ofexaminationshallbeexercisedreasonably,ingoodfaithandinamannercalculatedtonotunreasonablyinterferewithYour business.IntheeventsuchauditdiscoversnoncompliancewiththisAgreement,includingcopiesoftheProgrammade,used ordeployedinbreachofthisAgreement,YoushallpromptlypaytoEnterasystheappropriatelicensefees.Enterasysreserves theright,tobeexercisedinitssolediscretionandwithoutpriornotice,toterminatethislicense,effectiveimmediately,forfailure tocomplywiththisAgreement.Uponanysuchtermination,YoushallimmediatelyceasealluseoftheProgramandshallreturn toEnterasystheProgramandallcopiesoftheProgram. 9. OWNERSHIP. Thisisalicenseagreementandnotanagreementforsale.YouacknowledgeandagreethattheProgram constitutestradesecretsand/orcopyrightedmaterialofEnterasysand/oritssuppliers.Youagreetoimplementreasonable securitymeasurestoprotectsuchtradesecretsandcopyrightedmaterial.Allright,titleandinterestinandtotheProgramshall remainwithEnterasysand/oritssuppliers.AllrightsnotspecificallygrantedtoYoushallbereservedtoEnterasys. 10. ENFORCEMENT. YouacknowledgeandagreethatanybreachofSections2,4,or9ofthisAgreementbyYoumaycause Enterasysirreparabledamageforwhichrecoveryofmoneydamageswouldbeinadequate,andthatEnterasysmaybeentitled toseektimelyinjunctiverelieftoprotectEnterasysrightsunderthisAgreementinadditiontoanyandallremediesavailableat law. 11. ASSIGNMENT. Youmaynotassign,transferorsublicensethisAgreementoranyofYourrightsorobligationsunderthis Agreement,exceptthatYoumayassignthisAgreementtoanypersonorentitywhichacquiressubstantiallyallofYourstock assets.EnterasysmayassignthisAgreementinitssolediscretion.ThisAgreementshallbebindinguponandinuretothebenefit oftheparties,theirlegalrepresentatives,permittedtransferees,successorsandassignsaspermittedbythisAgreement.Any attemptedassignment,transferorsublicenseinviolationofthetermsofthisAgreementshallbevoidandabreachofthis Agreement. 12. WAIVER. AwaiverbyEnterasysofabreachofanyofthetermsandconditionsofthisAgreementmustbeinwritingand willnotbeconstruedasawaiverofanysubsequentbreachofsuchtermorcondition.Enterasysfailuretoenforceatermupon YourbreachofsuchtermshallnotbeconstruedasawaiverofYourbreachorpreventenforcementonanyotheroccasion.

iii

13. SEVERABILITY. IntheeventanyprovisionofthisAgreementisfoundtobeinvalid,illegalorunenforceable,thevalidity, legalityandenforceabilityofanyoftheremainingprovisionsshallnotinanywaybeaffectedorimpairedthereby,andthat provisionshallbereformed,construedandenforcedtothemaximumextentpermissible.Anysuchinvalidity,illegality,or unenforceabilityinanyjurisdictionshallnotinvalidateorrenderillegalorunenforceablesuchprovisioninanyother jurisdiction. 14. TERMINATION. EnterasysmayterminatethisAgreementimmediatelyuponYourbreachofanyofthetermsand conditionsofthisAgreement.Uponanysuchtermination,YoushallimmediatelyceasealluseoftheProgramandshallreturn toEnterasystheProgramandallcopiesoftheProgram.

iv

Contents
About This Guide
Using This Guide ............................................................................................................................................. xix Structure of This Guide .................................................................................................................................... xix Related Documents ..........................................................................................................................................xx Conventions Used in This Guide ..................................................................................................................... xxi Getting Help ..................................................................................................................................................... xxi

Chapter 1: Introduction
SecureStack B2 CLI Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1 Switch Management Methods ........................................................................................................................ 1-1 Factory Default Settings ................................................................................................................................. 1-2 Using the Command Line Interface ................................................................................................................ 1-5 Starting a CLI Session ............................................................................................................................. 1-5 Logging In ................................................................................................................................................ 1-6 Navigating the Command Line Interface .................................................................................................. 1-6

Chapter 2: Configuring Switches in a Stack

About SecureStack B2 Switch Operation in a Stack ...................................................................................... 2-1 Installing a New Stackable System of Up to Eight Units ................................................................................ 2-2 Installing Previously-Configured Systems in a Stack ..................................................................................... 2-3 Adding a New Unit to an Existing Stack ......................................................................................................... 2-3 Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration .......................................................................................................... 2-4 Considerations About Using Clear Config in a Stack ..................................................................................... 2-5 Issues Related to Mixed Type Stacks ............................................................................................................ 2-5 Feature Support ....................................................................................................................................... 2-5 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................ 2-5 Stacking Configuration and Management Commands ................................................................................... 2-6 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 2-6 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 2-6 show switch ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6 show switch switchtype ...................................................................................................................... 2-7 show switch stack-ports...................................................................................................................... 2-8 set switch ............................................................................................................................................ 2-9 set switch copy-fw .............................................................................................................................. 2-9 set switch description ....................................................................................................................... 2-10 set switch movemanagement ........................................................................................................... 2-11 set switch member............................................................................................................................ 2-11 clear switch member......................................................................................................................... 2-12

Chapter 3: Basic Configuration

Setting User Accounts and Passwords .......................................................................................................... 3-1 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 3-1 show system login .............................................................................................................................. 3-2 set system login .................................................................................................................................. 3-3 clear system login ............................................................................................................................... 3-3 set password ...................................................................................................................................... 3-4 set system password length ............................................................................................................... 3-5 set system password aging ................................................................................................................3-5 set system password history .............................................................................................................. 3-6 show system lockout .......................................................................................................................... 3-6

set system lockout .............................................................................................................................. 3-7 Setting Basic Switch Properties ...................................................................................................................... 3-8 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 3-8 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 3-8 show ip address.................................................................................................................................. 3-9 set ip address ..................................................................................................................................... 3-9 clear ip address ................................................................................................................................ 3-10 show ip protocol................................................................................................................................ 3-10 set ip protocol ................................................................................................................................... 3-11 show system..................................................................................................................................... 3-11 show system hardware..................................................................................................................... 3-12 show system utilization..................................................................................................................... 3-13 set system enhancedbuffermode ..................................................................................................... 3-14 show time ......................................................................................................................................... 3-15 set time ............................................................................................................................................. 3-15 show summertime ............................................................................................................................ 3-16 set summertime ................................................................................................................................ 3-16 set summertime date ........................................................................................................................ 3-17 set summertime recurring ................................................................................................................. 3-17 clear summertime ............................................................................................................................. 3-18 set prompt......................................................................................................................................... 3-19 show banner motd ............................................................................................................................ 3-19 set banner motd................................................................................................................................ 3-20 clear banner motd............................................................................................................................. 3-20 show version..................................................................................................................................... 3-21 set system name .............................................................................................................................. 3-22 set system location ........................................................................................................................... 3-22 set system contact............................................................................................................................ 3-23 set width ........................................................................................................................................... 3-23 set length .......................................................................................................................................... 3-24 show logout ...................................................................................................................................... 3-24 set logout ......................................................................................................................................... 3-25 show console .................................................................................................................................... 3-25 set console baud .............................................................................................................................. 3-26 Activating Licensed Features ....................................................................................................................... 3-26 License Key Field Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 3-26 Licensing Procedure in a Stack Environment ........................................................................................ 3-27 Adding a New Member to a Licensed Stack .......................................................................................... 3-27 Clearing, Showing, and Moving Licenses .............................................................................................. 3-28 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-28 set license......................................................................................................................................... 3-28 show license ..................................................................................................................................... 3-29 clear license...................................................................................................................................... 3-30 Configuring Power over Ethernet (PoE) ....................................................................................................... 3-31 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-31 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-31 show inlinepower .............................................................................................................................. 3-31 set inlinepower threshold.................................................................................................................. 3-32 set inlinepower trap .......................................................................................................................... 3-32 show port inlinepower ....................................................................................................................... 3-33 set port inlinepower .......................................................................................................................... 3-33 Downloading a New Firmware Image ........................................................................................................... 3-34 Downloading from a TFTP Server .......................................................................................................... 3-34 Downloading via the Serial Port ............................................................................................................. 3-35 Reviewing and Selecting a Boot Firmware Image ........................................................................................ 3-36 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-36
ii

Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-37 show boot system ............................................................................................................................. 3-37 set boot system ................................................................................................................................ 3-37 Starting and Configuring Telnet .................................................................................................................... 3-38 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-38 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-38 show telnet ....................................................................................................................................... 3-38 set telnet ........................................................................................................................................... 3-38 telnet................................................................................................................................................. 3-39 Managing Switch Configuration and Files .................................................................................................... 3-40 Configuration Persistence Mode ............................................................................................................ 3-40 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-40 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-40 show snmp persistmode ................................................................................................................... 3-41 set snmp persistmode ...................................................................................................................... 3-41 save config ....................................................................................................................................... 3-42 dir...................................................................................................................................................... 3-42 show file............................................................................................................................................ 3-43 show config....................................................................................................................................... 3-44 configure ........................................................................................................................................... 3-45 copy .................................................................................................................................................. 3-45 delete................................................................................................................................................ 3-46 show tftp settings.............................................................................................................................. 3-46 set tftp timeout .................................................................................................................................. 3-47 clear tftp timeout ............................................................................................................................... 3-48 set tftp retry....................................................................................................................................... 3-48 clear tftp retry.................................................................................................................................... 3-49 Clearing and Closing the CLI ........................................................................................................................ 3-49 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-49 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-49 cls (clear screen) .............................................................................................................................. 3-49 exit .................................................................................................................................................... 3-50 Resetting the Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 3-50 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-50 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-50 reset.................................................................................................................................................. 3-51 clear config ....................................................................................................................................... 3-51 Using and Configuring WebView .................................................................................................................. 3-52 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-52 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-53 show webview .................................................................................................................................. 3-53 set webview ...................................................................................................................................... 3-53 show ssl............................................................................................................................................ 3-54 set ssl ............................................................................................................................................... 3-54

Chapter 4: Discovery Protocol Configuration

Configuring CDP ............................................................................................................................................. 4-1 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1 show cdp ............................................................................................................................................ 4-1 set cdp state ....................................................................................................................................... 4-3 set cdp auth ........................................................................................................................................ 4-3 set cdp interval ................................................................................................................................... 4-4 set cdp hold-time ................................................................................................................................ 4-5 clear cdp ............................................................................................................................................. 4-5

iii

show neighbors .................................................................................................................................. 4-6 Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol ............................................................................................................ 4-6 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 4-6 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 4-7 show ciscodp ...................................................................................................................................... 4-7 show ciscodp port info ........................................................................................................................ 4-8 set ciscodp status ............................................................................................................................... 4-9 set ciscodp timer................................................................................................................................. 4-9 set ciscodp holdtime ......................................................................................................................... 4-10 set ciscodp port ................................................................................................................................ 4-10 clear ciscodp..................................................................................................................................... 4-12 Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED ........................................................................ 4-13 Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 4-13 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 4-13 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 4-13 Configuration Tasks ............................................................................................................................... 4-15 show lldp........................................................................................................................................... 4-15 show lldp port status......................................................................................................................... 4-16 show lldp port trap ............................................................................................................................ 4-16 show lldp port tx-tlv........................................................................................................................... 4-17 show lldp port location-info ............................................................................................................... 4-17 show lldp port local-info .................................................................................................................... 4-18 show lldp port remote-info ................................................................................................................ 4-20 set lldp tx-interval.............................................................................................................................. 4-22 set lldp hold-multiplier ....................................................................................................................... 4-22 set lldp trap-interval .......................................................................................................................... 4-23 set lldp med-fast-repeat .................................................................................................................... 4-24 set lldp port status ............................................................................................................................ 4-24 set lldp port trap................................................................................................................................ 4-25 set lldp port med-trap........................................................................................................................ 4-25 set lldp port location-info................................................................................................................... 4-26 set lldp port tx-tlv .............................................................................................................................. 4-26 clear lldp ........................................................................................................................................... 4-28 clear lldp port status ......................................................................................................................... 4-29 clear lldp port trap ............................................................................................................................. 4-29 clear lldp port med-trap..................................................................................................................... 4-29 clear lldp port location-info................................................................................................................ 4-30 clear lldp port tx-tlv ........................................................................................................................... 4-30

Chapter 5: Port Configuration

Port Configuration Summary .......................................................................................................................... 5-1 B2H124-48 and B2H124-48P Switch Ports ............................................................................................. 5-1 B2G124-24, B2G124-48, and B2G124-48P Switch Ports ........................................................................ 5-1 Port String Syntax Used in the CLI .......................................................................................................... 5-2 Reviewing Port Status .................................................................................................................................... 5-3 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 5-3 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 5-3 show port ............................................................................................................................................ 5-3 show port status ................................................................................................................................. 5-4 show port counters ............................................................................................................................. 5-5 Disabling / Enabling and Naming Ports .......................................................................................................... 5-6 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 5-6 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 5-6 set port disable ................................................................................................................................... 5-6 set port enable.................................................................................................................................... 5-7

iv

show port alias.................................................................................................................................... 5-7 set port alias ....................................................................................................................................... 5-8 Setting Speed and Duplex Mode .................................................................................................................... 5-9 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 5-9 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 5-9 show port speed ................................................................................................................................. 5-9 set port speed................................................................................................................................... 5-10 show port duplex .............................................................................................................................. 5-10 set port duplex .................................................................................................................................. 5-11 Enabling / Disabling Jumbo Frame Support ................................................................................................. 5-11 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 5-11 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 5-11 show port jumbo ............................................................................................................................... 5-11 set port jumbo................................................................................................................................... 5-12 clear port jumbo ................................................................................................................................ 5-13 Setting Auto-Negotiation and Advertised Ability ........................................................................................... 5-13 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 5-13 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 5-13 show port negotiation ....................................................................................................................... 5-14 set port negotiation ........................................................................................................................... 5-14 show port advertise .......................................................................................................................... 5-15 set port advertise .............................................................................................................................. 5-16 clear port advertise ........................................................................................................................... 5-16 Setting Flow Control ..................................................................................................................................... 5-17 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 5-17 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 5-17 show flowcontrol ............................................................................................................................... 5-17 set flowcontrol................................................................................................................................... 5-18 Setting Port Link Traps and Link Flap Detection .......................................................................................... 5-18 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 5-18 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 5-19 show port trap................................................................................................................................... 5-19 set port trap ...................................................................................................................................... 5-20 show linkflap ..................................................................................................................................... 5-20 set linkflap globalstate ...................................................................................................................... 5-22 set linkflap portstate.......................................................................................................................... 5-23 set linkflap interval ............................................................................................................................ 5-23 set linkflap action .............................................................................................................................. 5-24 clear linkflap action ........................................................................................................................... 5-25 set linkflap threshold......................................................................................................................... 5-25 set linkflap downtime ........................................................................................................................ 5-26 clear linkflap down ............................................................................................................................ 5-26 clear linkflap...................................................................................................................................... 5-27 Configuring Broadcast Suppression ............................................................................................................. 5-27 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 5-27 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 5-27 show port broadcast ......................................................................................................................... 5-28 set port broadcast............................................................................................................................. 5-28 clear port broadcast.......................................................................................................................... 5-29 Port Mirroring ................................................................................................................................................ 5-29 Mirroring Features .................................................................................................................................. 5-29 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 5-30 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 5-30 show port mirroring........................................................................................................................... 5-30 set port mirroring .............................................................................................................................. 5-31 clear port mirroring ........................................................................................................................... 5-31
v

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) ................................................................................................... 5-32 LACP Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 5-32 LACP Terminology ................................................................................................................................. 5-33 SecureStack B2 Usage Considerations ................................................................................................. 5-34 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 5-34 show lacp.......................................................................................................................................... 5-35 set lacp ............................................................................................................................................. 5-36 set lacp asyspri................................................................................................................................. 5-37 set lacp aadminkey........................................................................................................................... 5-37 clear lacp .......................................................................................................................................... 5-38 set lacp static.................................................................................................................................... 5-38 clear lacp static ................................................................................................................................. 5-39 set lacp singleportlag........................................................................................................................ 5-40 clear lacp singleportlag..................................................................................................................... 5-40 show port lacp .................................................................................................................................. 5-41 set port lacp ...................................................................................................................................... 5-42 clear port lacp ................................................................................................................................... 5-44 Configuring Protected Ports ......................................................................................................................... 5-45 Protected Port Operation ....................................................................................................................... 5-45 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 5-45 set port protected.............................................................................................................................. 5-46 show port protected .......................................................................................................................... 5-46 clear port protected........................................................................................................................... 5-47 set port protected name.................................................................................................................... 5-47 show port protected name ................................................................................................................ 5-48 clear port protected name................................................................................................................. 5-48

Chapter 6: SNMP Configuration

SNMP Configuration Summary ...................................................................................................................... 6-1 SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c ........................................................................................................................... 6-1 SNMPv3 ................................................................................................................................................... 6-2 About SNMP Security Models and Levels ............................................................................................... 6-2 Using SNMP Contexts to Access Specific MIBs ...................................................................................... 6-3 Configuration Considerations ................................................................................................................... 6-3 Reviewing SNMP Statistics ............................................................................................................................ 6-3 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 6-4 show snmp engineid........................................................................................................................... 6-4 show snmp counters........................................................................................................................... 6-5 Configuring SNMP Users, Groups, and Communities .................................................................................... 6-7 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 6-7 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 6-8 show snmp user ................................................................................................................................. 6-8 set snmp user ..................................................................................................................................... 6-9 clear snmp user ................................................................................................................................ 6-10 show snmp group ............................................................................................................................. 6-10 set snmp group ................................................................................................................................. 6-12 clear snmp group .............................................................................................................................. 6-12 show snmp community ..................................................................................................................... 6-13 set snmp community......................................................................................................................... 6-13 clear snmp community...................................................................................................................... 6-14 Configuring SNMP Access Rights ................................................................................................................ 6-15 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 6-15 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 show snmp access ........................................................................................................................... 6-15

vi

set snmp access............................................................................................................................... 6-17 clear snmp access............................................................................................................................ 6-18 Configuring SNMP MIB Views ...................................................................................................................... 6-18 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 6-18 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 6-18 show snmp view ............................................................................................................................... 6-19 show snmp context........................................................................................................................... 6-20 set snmp view................................................................................................................................... 6-20 clear snmp view................................................................................................................................ 6-21 Configuring SNMP Target Parameters ......................................................................................................... 6-22 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 6-22 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 6-22 show snmp targetparams ................................................................................................................. 6-22 set snmp targetparams..................................................................................................................... 6-23 clear snmp targetparams.................................................................................................................. 6-24 Configuring SNMP Target Addresses .......................................................................................................... 6-25 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 6-25 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 6-25 show snmp targetaddr ...................................................................................................................... 6-25 set snmp targetaddr.......................................................................................................................... 6-26 clear snmp targetaddr....................................................................................................................... 6-27 Configuring SNMP Notification Parameters ................................................................................................. 6-28 About SNMP Notify Filters ..................................................................................................................... 6-28 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 6-28 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 6-28 show newaddrtrap ............................................................................................................................ 6-28 set newaddrtrap................................................................................................................................ 6-29 show snmp notify .............................................................................................................................. 6-30 set snmp notify ................................................................................................................................. 6-31 clear snmp notify .............................................................................................................................. 6-32 show snmp notifyfilter ....................................................................................................................... 6-32 set snmp notifyfilter........................................................................................................................... 6-33 clear snmp notifyfilter........................................................................................................................ 6-34 show snmp notifyprofile .................................................................................................................... 6-34 set snmp notifyprofile........................................................................................................................ 6-35 clear snmp notifyprofile..................................................................................................................... 6-35 Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration ................................................................................................. 6-36 Example ................................................................................................................................................. 6-37

Chapter 7: Spanning Tree Configuration

Spanning Tree Configuration Summary ......................................................................................................... 7-1 Overview: Single, Rapid, and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocols ............................................................. 7-1 Spanning Tree Features .......................................................................................................................... 7-2 Loop Protect ............................................................................................................................................. 7-2 Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters .............................................................................................. 7-3 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 7-4 show spantree stats............................................................................................................................ 7-5 set spantree........................................................................................................................................ 7-7 show spantree version........................................................................................................................ 7-7 set spantree version ........................................................................................................................... 7-8 clear spantree version ........................................................................................................................ 7-8 show spantree bpdu-forwarding ......................................................................................................... 7-9 set spantree bpdu-forwarding............................................................................................................. 7-9 show spantree bridgeprioritymode ................................................................................................... 7-10

vii

set spantree bridgeprioritymode ....................................................................................................... 7-10 clear spantree bridgeprioritymode .................................................................................................... 7-11 show spantree mstilist ...................................................................................................................... 7-12 set spantree msti .............................................................................................................................. 7-12 clear spantree msti ........................................................................................................................... 7-13 show spantree mstmap .................................................................................................................... 7-13 set spantree mstmap ........................................................................................................................ 7-14 clear spantree mstmap ..................................................................................................................... 7-14 show spantree vlanlist ...................................................................................................................... 7-15 show spantree mstcfgid .................................................................................................................... 7-15 set spantree mstcfgid ....................................................................................................................... 7-16 clear spantree mstcfgid .................................................................................................................... 7-16 set spantree priority .......................................................................................................................... 7-17 clear spantree priority ....................................................................................................................... 7-17 set spantree hello ............................................................................................................................. 7-18 clear spantree hello .......................................................................................................................... 7-18 set spantree maxage ........................................................................................................................ 7-19 clear spantree maxage ..................................................................................................................... 7-19 set spantree fwddelay....................................................................................................................... 7-20 clear spantree fwddelay.................................................................................................................... 7-20 show spantree backuproot ............................................................................................................... 7-21 set spantree backuproot ................................................................................................................... 7-21 clear spantree backuproot ................................................................................................................ 7-22 show spantree tctrapsuppress.......................................................................................................... 7-22 set spantree tctrapsuppress ............................................................................................................. 7-23 clear spantree tctrapsuppress .......................................................................................................... 7-23 set spantree protomigration .............................................................................................................. 7-24 show spantree spanguard ................................................................................................................ 7-24 set spantree spanguard .................................................................................................................... 7-25 clear spantree spanguard ................................................................................................................. 7-26 show spantree spanguardtimeout .................................................................................................... 7-26 set spantree spanguardtimeout ........................................................................................................ 7-26 clear spantree spanguardtimeout ..................................................................................................... 7-27 show spantree spanguardlock .......................................................................................................... 7-27 clear / set spantree spanguardlock................................................................................................... 7-28 show spantree spanguardtrapenable ............................................................................................... 7-28 set spantree spanguardtrapenable ................................................................................................... 7-29 clear spantree spanguardtrapenable ................................................................................................ 7-29 show spantree legacypathcost ......................................................................................................... 7-30 set spantree legacypathcost............................................................................................................. 7-30 clear spantree legacypathcost .......................................................................................................... 7-31 Configuring Spanning Tree Port Parameters ............................................................................................... 7-31 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-31 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-32 set spantree portadmin..................................................................................................................... 7-32 clear spantree portadmin.................................................................................................................. 7-32 show spantree portadmin ................................................................................................................. 7-33 show spantree portpri ....................................................................................................................... 7-33 set spantree portpri........................................................................................................................... 7-34 clear spantree portpri........................................................................................................................ 7-35 show spantree adminpathcost .......................................................................................................... 7-35 set spantree adminpathcost ............................................................................................................. 7-36 clear spantree adminpathcost .......................................................................................................... 7-36 show spantree adminedge ............................................................................................................... 7-37 set spantree adminedge ................................................................................................................... 7-37 clear spantree adminedge ................................................................................................................ 7-38
viii

Configuring Spanning Tree Loop Protect Parameters .................................................................................. 7-39 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-39 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-39 set spantree lp .................................................................................................................................. 7-40 show spantree lp .............................................................................................................................. 7-40 clear spantree lp ............................................................................................................................... 7-41 show spantree lplock ........................................................................................................................ 7-42 clear spantree lplock......................................................................................................................... 7-42 set spantree lpcapablepartner .......................................................................................................... 7-43 show spantree lpcapablepartner ...................................................................................................... 7-44 clear spantree lpcapablepartner ....................................................................................................... 7-44 set spantree lpthreshold ................................................................................................................... 7-45 show spantree lpthreshold................................................................................................................ 7-45 clear spantree lpthreshold ................................................................................................................ 7-46 set spantree lpwindow ...................................................................................................................... 7-46 show spantree lpwindow .................................................................................................................. 7-47 clear spantree lpwindow ................................................................................................................... 7-47 set spantree lptrapenable ................................................................................................................. 7-48 show spantree lptrapenable ............................................................................................................. 7-48 clear spantree lptrapenable .............................................................................................................. 7-49 set spantree disputedbpduthreshold ................................................................................................ 7-49 show spantree disputedbpduthreshold ............................................................................................. 7-50 clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold ............................................................................................. 7-50 show spantree nonforwardingreason ............................................................................................... 7-51

Chapter 8: 802.1Q VLAN Configuration

VLAN Configuration Summary ....................................................................................................................... 8-1 Port String Syntax Used in the CLI .......................................................................................................... 8-1 Creating a Secure Management VLAN .................................................................................................... 8-1 Viewing VLANs ............................................................................................................................................... 8-2 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 8-2 Command ................................................................................................................................................. 8-3 show vlan............................................................................................................................................ 8-3 Creating and Naming Static VLANs ............................................................................................................... 8-4 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 8-4 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 8-4 set vlan ............................................................................................................................................... 8-4 set vlan name ..................................................................................................................................... 8-5 clear vlan ............................................................................................................................................ 8-5 clear vlan name .................................................................................................................................. 8-6 Assigning Port VLAN IDs (PVIDs) and Ingress Filtering ................................................................................ 8-6 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 8-6 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 8-7 show port vlan .................................................................................................................................... 8-7 set port vlan ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7 clear port vlan ..................................................................................................................................... 8-8 show port ingress filter........................................................................................................................ 8-9 set port ingress filter ........................................................................................................................... 8-9 show port discard ............................................................................................................................. 8-10 set port discard ................................................................................................................................. 8-11 Configuring the VLAN Egress List ................................................................................................................ 8-12 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-12 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 8-12 show port egress .............................................................................................................................. 8-12 set vlan forbidden ............................................................................................................................. 8-13

ix

set vlan egress ................................................................................................................................. 8-13 clear vlan egress .............................................................................................................................. 8-14 show vlan dynamicegress ................................................................................................................ 8-15 set vlan dynamicegress .................................................................................................................... 8-16 Setting the Host VLAN .................................................................................................................................. 8-16 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-16 Commands. ............................................................................................................................................ 8-17 show host vlan.................................................................................................................................. 8-17 set host vlan ..................................................................................................................................... 8-17 clear host vlan .................................................................................................................................. 8-18 Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) .................................................................. 8-18 About GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) ................................................................................ 8-18 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-20 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 8-20 show gvrp ......................................................................................................................................... 8-20 show garp timer ................................................................................................................................ 8-21 set gvrp............................................................................................................................................. 8-22 clear gvrp .......................................................................................................................................... 8-22 set garp timer.................................................................................................................................... 8-23

Chapter 9: Differentiated Services Configuration

Globally Enabling or Disabling Diffserv .......................................................................................................... 9-1 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 9-1 Command ................................................................................................................................................. 9-1 set diffserv adminmode ...................................................................................................................... 9-2 Creating Diffserv Classes and Matching Conditions ...................................................................................... 9-2 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 9-2 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 9-2 show diffserv info ................................................................................................................................ 9-2 show diffserv class ............................................................................................................................. 9-3 set class create................................................................................................................................... 9-4 set diffserv class delete ...................................................................................................................... 9-4 set diffserv class match ...................................................................................................................... 9-5 set diffserv class rename .................................................................................................................... 9-8 Configuring Diffserv Policies and Assigning Classes ..................................................................................... 9-9 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 9-9 show diffserv policy ............................................................................................................................ 9-9 set diffserv policy create ................................................................................................................... 9-10 set diffserv policy delete ................................................................................................................... 9-10 set diffserv policy class..................................................................................................................... 9-11 set diffserv policy mark ..................................................................................................................... 9-11 set diffserv policy police style simple ................................................................................................ 9-12 set diffserv policy police action conform ........................................................................................... 9-13 set diffserv policy police action nonconform ..................................................................................... 9-13 set diffserv policy rename ................................................................................................................. 9-14 Assigning Policies to Service Ports .............................................................................................................. 9-15 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 9-15 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 9-15 show diffserv service info ................................................................................................................. 9-15 show diffserv service stats................................................................................................................ 9-16 set diffserv service............................................................................................................................ 9-16

DiffServ Configuration Examples .................................................................................................................. 9-17

Chapter 10: Policy Classification Configuration

Policy Classification Configuration Summary ............................................................................................... 10-1 Configuring Policy Profiles ............................................................................................................................ 10-1 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 10-1 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 10-2 show policy profile ............................................................................................................................ 10-2 set policy profile ................................................................................................................................ 10-3 clear policy profile ............................................................................................................................. 10-5 Configuring Classification Rules ................................................................................................................... 10-5 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 10-5 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 10-5 show policy rule ................................................................................................................................ 10-6 show policy capability ....................................................................................................................... 10-8 set policy rule.................................................................................................................................... 10-9 clear policy rule............................................................................................................................... 10-12 clear policy all-rules ........................................................................................................................ 10-13 Assigning Ports to Policy Profiles ............................................................................................................... 10-14 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 10-14 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 10-14 set policy port ................................................................................................................................. 10-14 clear policy port .............................................................................................................................. 10-15 Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS) ................................................................................................. 10-15 Using Port-Based or Policy-Based CoS Settings ................................................................................. 10-15 About Policy-Based CoS Configurations .............................................................................................. 10-16 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 10-18 set cos state ................................................................................................................................... 10-18 show cos state................................................................................................................................ 10-19 clear cos state ................................................................................................................................ 10-19 set cos settings............................................................................................................................... 10-20 clear cos settings ............................................................................................................................ 10-21 show cos settings ........................................................................................................................... 10-21 set cos port-config .......................................................................................................................... 10-22 show cos port-config....................................................................................................................... 10-23 clear cos port-config ....................................................................................................................... 10-24 set cos port-resource...................................................................................................................... 10-25 show cos port-resource .................................................................................................................. 10-26 clear cos port-resource................................................................................................................... 10-26 set cos reference ............................................................................................................................ 10-27 show cos reference ........................................................................................................................ 10-28 clear cos reference ......................................................................................................................... 10-29 show cos unit.................................................................................................................................. 10-30 clear cos all-entries......................................................................................................................... 10-30 show cos port-type ......................................................................................................................... 10-31

Chapter 11: Port Priority and Rate Limiting Configuration

Port Priority Configuration Summary ............................................................................................................ 11-1 Configuring Port Priority ............................................................................................................................... 11-1 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 11-1 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 11-2 show port priority .............................................................................................................................. 11-2 set port priority.................................................................................................................................. 11-2 clear port priority............................................................................................................................... 11-3

xi

Configuring Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping ......................................................................................... 11-4 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 11-4 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 11-4 show port priority-queue ................................................................................................................... 11-4 set port priority-queue....................................................................................................................... 11-5 clear port priority-queue.................................................................................................................... 11-6 Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) ........................................................................................................... 11-6 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 11-6 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 11-6 show port txq .................................................................................................................................... 11-7 set port txq........................................................................................................................................ 11-7 clear port txq..................................................................................................................................... 11-8 Configuring Port Traffic Rate Limiting ........................................................................................................... 11-9 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 11-9 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 11-10 show port ratelimit .......................................................................................................................... 11-10 set port ratelimit .............................................................................................................................. 11-11 clear port ratelimit ........................................................................................................................... 11-12

Chapter 12: IGMP Configuration

IGMP Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 12-1 About IP Multicast Group Management ................................................................................................. 12-1 About Multicasting .................................................................................................................................. 12-1 Configuring IGMP at Layer 2 ........................................................................................................................ 12-2 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 12-2 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 12-2 show igmpsnooping .......................................................................................................................... 12-2 set igmpsnooping adminmode.......................................................................................................... 12-3 set igmpsnooping interfacemode...................................................................................................... 12-3 set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval .................................................................................... 12-4 set igmpsnooping maxresponse ....................................................................................................... 12-5 set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime.................................................................................................... 12-5 set igmpsnooping add-static ............................................................................................................. 12-6 set igmpsnooping remove-static ....................................................................................................... 12-7 show igmpsnooping static ................................................................................................................ 12-7 show igmpsnooping mfdb ................................................................................................................. 12-8 clear igmpsnooping .......................................................................................................................... 12-8

Chapter 13: Logging and Network Management

Configuring System Logging ........................................................................................................................ 13-1 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 13-1 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 13-1 show logging server.......................................................................................................................... 13-2 set logging server ............................................................................................................................. 13-3 clear logging server .......................................................................................................................... 13-4 show logging default......................................................................................................................... 13-4 set logging default ............................................................................................................................ 13-5 clear logging default ......................................................................................................................... 13-5 show logging application .................................................................................................................. 13-6 set logging application ...................................................................................................................... 13-7 clear logging application ................................................................................................................... 13-8 show logging local ............................................................................................................................ 13-9 set logging local................................................................................................................................ 13-9 clear logging local........................................................................................................................... 13-10 show logging buffer ........................................................................................................................ 13-10

xii

Monitoring Network Events and Status ...................................................................................................... 13-11 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 13-11 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 13-11 history ............................................................................................................................................. 13-11 show history.................................................................................................................................... 13-12 set history ....................................................................................................................................... 13-12 ping................................................................................................................................................. 13-13 show users ..................................................................................................................................... 13-13 disconnect ...................................................................................................................................... 13-14 Managing Switch Network Addresses and Routes ..................................................................................... 13-15 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 13-15 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 13-15 show arp ......................................................................................................................................... 13-15 set arp............................................................................................................................................. 13-16 clear arp.......................................................................................................................................... 13-17 traceroute ....................................................................................................................................... 13-17 show mac ....................................................................................................................................... 13-18 show mac agetime.......................................................................................................................... 13-19 set mac agetime ............................................................................................................................. 13-20 clear mac agetime .......................................................................................................................... 13-20 set mac algorithm ........................................................................................................................... 13-21 show mac algorithm........................................................................................................................ 13-21 clear mac algorithm ........................................................................................................................ 13-22 set mac multicast ............................................................................................................................ 13-22 clear mac address .......................................................................................................................... 13-23 show mac unreserved-flood ........................................................................................................... 13-24 set mac unreserved-flood ............................................................................................................... 13-24 Configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) ................................................................................... 13-25 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 13-25 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 13-25 show sntp ....................................................................................................................................... 13-25 set sntp client.................................................................................................................................. 13-27 clear sntp client............................................................................................................................... 13-27 set sntp server ................................................................................................................................ 13-28 clear sntp server ............................................................................................................................. 13-28 set sntp poll-interval........................................................................................................................ 13-29 clear sntp poll-interval..................................................................................................................... 13-29 set sntp poll-retry ............................................................................................................................ 13-30 clear sntp poll-retry ......................................................................................................................... 13-30 set sntp poll-timeout ....................................................................................................................... 13-31 clear sntp poll-timeout .................................................................................................................... 13-31 Configuring Node Aliases ........................................................................................................................... 13-32 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 13-32 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 13-32 show nodealias config .................................................................................................................... 13-32 set nodealias .................................................................................................................................. 13-33 clear nodealias config ..................................................................................................................... 13-34

Chapter 14: RMON Configuration

RMON Monitoring Group Functions ............................................................................................................. 14-1 Statistics Group Commands ......................................................................................................................... 14-3 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 14-3 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 14-3 show rmon stats ............................................................................................................................... 14-3 set rmon stats ................................................................................................................................... 14-5

xiii

clear rmon stats ................................................................................................................................ 14-6 History Group Commands ............................................................................................................................ 14-6 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 14-6 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 14-6 show rmon history ............................................................................................................................ 14-7 set rmon history ................................................................................................................................ 14-7 clear rmon history ............................................................................................................................. 14-8 Alarm Group Commands .............................................................................................................................. 14-9 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 14-9 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 14-9 show rmon alarm .............................................................................................................................. 14-9 set rmon alarm properties............................................................................................................... 14-10 set rmon alarm status ..................................................................................................................... 14-11 clear rmon alarm............................................................................................................................. 14-12 Event Group Commands ............................................................................................................................ 14-13 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 14-13 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 14-13 show rmon event ............................................................................................................................ 14-13 set rmon event properties ............................................................................................................... 14-14 set rmon event status ..................................................................................................................... 14-15 clear rmon event............................................................................................................................. 14-15 Filter Group Commands ............................................................................................................................. 14-16 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 14-16 show rmon channel ........................................................................................................................ 14-16 set rmon channel ............................................................................................................................ 14-17 clear rmon channel ......................................................................................................................... 14-18 show rmon filter .............................................................................................................................. 14-18 set rmon filter .................................................................................................................................. 14-19 clear rmon filter ............................................................................................................................... 14-20 Packet Capture Commands ....................................................................................................................... 14-20 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 14-20 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 14-21 show rmon capture ......................................................................................................................... 14-21 set rmon capture............................................................................................................................. 14-22 clear rmon capture.......................................................................................................................... 14-22

Chapter 15: DHCP Server Configuration

DHCP Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 15-1 DHCP Server ......................................................................................................................................... 15-1 Configuring a DHCP Server ................................................................................................................... 15-2 Configuring General DHCP Server Parameters ........................................................................................... 15-3 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 15-3 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 15-3 set dhcp ............................................................................................................................................ 15-3 set dhcp bootp .................................................................................................................................. 15-4 set dhcp conflict logging ................................................................................................................... 15-4 show dhcp conflict ............................................................................................................................ 15-5 clear dhcp conflict............................................................................................................................. 15-5 set dhcp exclude............................................................................................................................... 15-6 clear dhcp exclude............................................................................................................................ 15-6 set dhcp ping .................................................................................................................................... 15-7 clear dhcp ping ................................................................................................................................. 15-7 show dhcp binding............................................................................................................................ 15-8 clear dhcp binding ............................................................................................................................ 15-9 show dhcp server statistics............................................................................................................... 15-9 clear dhcp server statistics ............................................................................................................. 15-10
xiv

Configuring IP Address Pools ..................................................................................................................... 15-10 Manual Pool Configuration Considerations .......................................................................................... 15-10 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 15-11 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 15-11 set dhcp pool .................................................................................................................................. 15-12 clear dhcp pool ............................................................................................................................... 15-12 set dhcp pool network..................................................................................................................... 15-13 clear dhcp pool network.................................................................................................................. 15-14 set dhcp pool hardware-address .................................................................................................... 15-14 clear dhcp pool hardware-address ................................................................................................. 15-15 set dhcp pool host .......................................................................................................................... 15-15 clear dhcp pool host ....................................................................................................................... 15-16 set dhcp pool client-identifier .......................................................................................................... 15-16 clear dhcp pool client-identifier ....................................................................................................... 15-17 set dhcp pool client-name............................................................................................................... 15-18 clear dhcp pool client-name............................................................................................................15-18 set dhcp pool bootfile...................................................................................................................... 15-19 clear dhcp pool bootfile................................................................................................................... 15-19 set dhcp pool next-server ............................................................................................................... 15-20 clear dhcp pool next-server ............................................................................................................15-20 set dhcp pool lease......................................................................................................................... 15-21 clear dhcp pool lease...................................................................................................................... 15-21 set dhcp pool default-router ............................................................................................................15-22 clear dhcp pool default-router......................................................................................................... 15-22 set dhcp pool dns-server ................................................................................................................ 15-23 clear dhcp pool dns-server ............................................................................................................. 15-23 set dhcp pool domain-name ........................................................................................................... 15-24 clear dhcp pool domain-name ........................................................................................................ 15-24 set dhcp pool netbios-name-server ................................................................................................ 15-25 clear dhcp pool netbios-name-server ............................................................................................. 15-25 set dhcp pool netbios-node-type .................................................................................................... 15-26 clear dhcp pool netbios-node-type ................................................................................................. 15-26 set dhcp pool option ....................................................................................................................... 15-27 clear dhcp pool option .................................................................................................................... 15-28 show dhcp pool configuration ......................................................................................................... 15-28

Chapter 16: Security Configuration

Overview of Security Methods ...................................................................................................................... 16-1 RADIUS Filter-ID Attribute and Dynamic Policy Profile Assignment ...................................................... 16-2 Configuring RADIUS ..................................................................................................................................... 16-3 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 16-3 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 16-3 show radius ...................................................................................................................................... 16-4 set radius .......................................................................................................................................... 16-5 clear radius ....................................................................................................................................... 16-7 show radius accounting .................................................................................................................... 16-7 set radius accounting........................................................................................................................ 16-8 clear radius accounting..................................................................................................................... 16-9 Configuring 802.1X Authentication ............................................................................................................... 16-9 Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 16-9 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 16-10 show dot1x ..................................................................................................................................... 16-10 show dot1x auth-config................................................................................................................... 16-11 set dot1x ......................................................................................................................................... 16-13 set dot1x auth-config ...................................................................................................................... 16-13 clear dot1x auth-config ................................................................................................................... 16-15 show eapol ..................................................................................................................................... 16-15
xv

set eapol ......................................................................................................................................... 16-17 clear eapol ...................................................................................................................................... 16-18 Configuring MAC Authentication ................................................................................................................ 16-19 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 16-19 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 16-19 show macauthentication ................................................................................................................. 16-20 show macauthentication session .................................................................................................... 16-21 set macauthentication..................................................................................................................... 16-22 set macauthentication password .................................................................................................... 16-22 clear macauthentication password ................................................................................................. 16-23 set macauthentication port ............................................................................................................. 16-23 set macauthentication portinitialize................................................................................................. 16-24 set macauthentication portquietperiod............................................................................................ 16-25 clear macauthentication portquietperiod......................................................................................... 16-25 set macauthentication macinitialize ................................................................................................ 16-26 set macauthentication reauthentication .......................................................................................... 16-26 set macauthentication portreauthenticate.......................................................................................16-27 set macauthentication macreauthenticate ...................................................................................... 16-27 set macauthentication reauthperiod ...............................................................................................16-28 clear macauthentication reauthperiod ............................................................................................ 16-28 set macauthentication significant-bits ............................................................................................. 16-29 clear macauthentication significant-bits .......................................................................................... 16-29 Configuring Multiple Authentication Methods ............................................................................................. 16-30 About Multiple Authentication Types .................................................................................................... 16-30 Configuring Multi-User Authentication (User + IP phone) .................................................................... 16-30 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 16-31 show multiauth................................................................................................................................ 16-31 set multiauth mode ......................................................................................................................... 16-32 clear multiauth mode ...................................................................................................................... 16-32 set multiauth precedence ............................................................................................................... 16-33 clear multiauth precedence ............................................................................................................16-34 show multiauth port ........................................................................................................................ 16-34 set multiauth port ............................................................................................................................ 16-35 clear multiauth port ......................................................................................................................... 16-35 show multiauth station .................................................................................................................... 16-36 show multiauth session .................................................................................................................. 16-36 show multiauth idle-timeout ............................................................................................................16-37 set multiauth idle-timeout................................................................................................................ 16-38 clear multiauth idle-timeout............................................................................................................. 16-39 show multiauth session-timeout ..................................................................................................... 16-39 set multiauth session-timeout ......................................................................................................... 16-40 clear multiauth session-timeout ...................................................................................................... 16-41 Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580) ............................................................................................. 16-41 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 16-41 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 16-42 show policy maptable response ..................................................................................................... 16-42 set policy maptable response ......................................................................................................... 16-42 set vlanauthorization....................................................................................................................... 16-43 set vlanauthorization egress ........................................................................................................... 16-44 clear vlanauthorization.................................................................................................................... 16-44 show vlanauthorization ................................................................................................................... 16-45 Configuring MAC Locking ........................................................................................................................... 16-46 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 16-46 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 16-46 show maclock ................................................................................................................................. 16-47 show maclock stations.................................................................................................................... 16-48
xvi

set maclock enable......................................................................................................................... 16-49 set maclock disable ........................................................................................................................ 16-50 set maclock..................................................................................................................................... 16-50 clear maclock.................................................................................................................................. 16-51 set maclock static ........................................................................................................................... 16-52 clear maclock static ........................................................................................................................ 16-52 set maclock firstarrival .................................................................................................................... 16-53 clear maclock firstarrival ................................................................................................................. 16-54 set maclock agefirstarrival .............................................................................................................. 16-54 clear maclock agefirstarrival ........................................................................................................... 16-55 set maclock move ........................................................................................................................... 16-55 set maclock trap ............................................................................................................................. 16-56 Configuring Port Web Authentication (PWA) .............................................................................................. 16-57 About PWA ........................................................................................................................................... 16-57 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 16-57 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 16-57 show pwa........................................................................................................................................ 16-58 set pwa ........................................................................................................................................... 16-59 show pwa banner ........................................................................................................................... 16-60 set pwa banner ............................................................................................................................... 16-60 clear pwa banner ............................................................................................................................ 16-61 set pwa displaylogo ........................................................................................................................ 16-61 set pwa ipaddress........................................................................................................................... 16-62 set pwa protocol ............................................................................................................................. 16-62 set pwa guestname ........................................................................................................................ 16-63 clear pwa guestname ..................................................................................................................... 16-63 set pwa guestpassword .................................................................................................................. 16-64 set pwa gueststatus........................................................................................................................ 16-64 set pwa initialize ............................................................................................................................. 16-65 set pwa quietperiod ........................................................................................................................ 16-66 set pwa maxrequest ....................................................................................................................... 16-66 set pwa portcontrol ......................................................................................................................... 16-67 show pwa session .......................................................................................................................... 16-67 set pwa enhancedmode ................................................................................................................. 16-68 Configuring Secure Shell (SSH) ................................................................................................................. 16-69 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 16-69 Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 16-69 show ssh status .............................................................................................................................. 16-69 set ssh ............................................................................................................................................ 16-69 set ssh hostkey............................................................................................................................... 16-70

Index Figures
1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 8-7 SecureStack B2 Startup Screen ......................................................................................................... 1-5 Sample CLI Defaults Description........................................................................................................ 1-7 Performing a Keyword Lookup ........................................................................................................... 1-7 Performing a Partial Keyword Lookup ................................................................................................ 1-7 Scrolling Screen Output...................................................................................................................... 1-8 Abbreviating a Command ................................................................................................................... 1-8 Example of VLAN Propagation via GVRP ........................................................................................ 8-19

Tables
1-1 1-2 Default Settings for Basic Switch Operation ....................................................................................... 1-2 Basic Line Editing Commands............................................................................................................ 1-9
xvii

3-3 3-4 3-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 7-28 8-29 8-30 8-31 9-32 10-33 10-34 10-35 11-36 13-37 13-38 13-39 13-40 13-41 13-42 13-43 14-44 14-45 14-46 14-47 16-48 16-49 16-50 16-51 16-52 16-53 16-54 16-55

show system lockout Output Details................................................................................................... 3-7 show system Output Details ............................................................................................................. 3-12 show version Output Details ............................................................................................................. 3-21 show cdp Output Details..................................................................................................................... 4-2 show ciscodp Output Details .............................................................................................................. 4-7 show ciscodp port info Output Details ................................................................................................ 4-8 show lldp port local-info Output Details ............................................................................................ 4-19 show lldp port remote-info Output Display........................................................................................ 4-21 show port status Output Details.......................................................................................................... 5-4 show port counters Output Details ..................................................................................................... 5-6 show linkflap parameters Output Details .......................................................................................... 5-22 show linkflap metrics Output Details................................................................................................. 5-22 LACP Terms and Definitions ............................................................................................................ 5-33 show lacp Output Details.................................................................................................................. 5-36 SNMP Security Levels........................................................................................................................ 6-2 show snmp engineid Output Details ................................................................................................... 6-4 show snmp counters Output Details ................................................................................................... 6-6 show snmp user Output Details.......................................................................................................... 6-9 show snmp group Output Details ..................................................................................................... 6-11 show snmp access Output Details ................................................................................................... 6-16 show snmp view Output Details ....................................................................................................... 6-20 show snmp targetparams Output Details ......................................................................................... 6-23 show snmp targetaddr Output Details .............................................................................................. 6-26 show snmp notify Output Details ...................................................................................................... 6-31 Basic SNMP Trap Configuration....................................................................................................... 6-36 show spantree Output Details ............................................................................................................ 7-6 Command Set for Creating a Secure Management VLAN ................................................................. 8-2 show vlan Output Details.................................................................................................................... 8-4 show gvrp configuration Output Details ............................................................................................ 8-21 Valid IP DSCP Numeric and Keyword Values .................................................................................... 9-6 show policy profile Output Details .................................................................................................... 10-3 show policy rule Output Details ........................................................................................................ 10-7 Valid Values for Policy Classification Rules ................................................................................... 10-11 show port ratelimit Output Details................................................................................................... 11-10 show logging server Output Details.................................................................................................. 13-2 show logging application Output Details........................................................................................... 13-7 Mnemonic Values for Logging Applications...................................................................................... 13-8 show arp Output Details ................................................................................................................. 13-16 show mac Output Details................................................................................................................ 13-19 show sntp Output Details................................................................................................................ 13-26 show nodealias config Output Details ............................................................................................ 13-33 RMON Monitoring Group Functions and Commands ....................................................................... 14-2 show rmon stats Output Details........................................................................................................ 14-4 show rmon alarm Output Details .................................................................................................... 14-10 show rmon event Output Details .................................................................................................... 14-14 show radius Output Details............................................................................................................... 16-4 show eapol Output Details.............................................................................................................. 16-16 show macauthentication Output Details ......................................................................................... 16-20 show macauthentication session Output Details ............................................................................ 16-22 show vlanauthorization Output Details ........................................................................................... 16-46 show maclock Output Details ......................................................................................................... 16-48 show maclock stations Output Details............................................................................................ 16-49 show pwa Output Details................................................................................................................ 16-59

xviii

About This Guide

WelcometotheEnterasysNetworksSecureStackB2ConfigurationGuide.Thismanualexplains howtoaccessthedevicesCommandLineInterface(CLI)andhowtouseittoconfigure SecureStackB2switchdevices.

Important Notice
Depending on the firmware version used in your SecureStack device, some features described in this document may not be supported. Refer to the Release Notes shipped with your device to determine which features are supported.

Using This Guide

AgeneralworkingknowledgeofbasicnetworkoperationsandanunderstandingofCLI managementapplicationsishelpfulbeforeconfiguringtheSecureStackdevice. Thismanualdescribeshowtodothefollowing: AccesstheSecureStackCLI. UseCLIcommandstoperformnetworkmanagementanddeviceconfigurationoperations EstablishandmanageVirtualLocalAreaNetworks(VLANs). Establishandmanagestaticanddynamicallyassignedpolicyclassifications. Establishandmanagepriorityclassification. Configuresecurityprotocols,including802.1XandRADIUS,SSHv2,MAClocking,andMAC authentication.

Structure of This Guide

Theguideisorganizedasfollows: Chapter 1,Introduction,providesanoverviewofthetasksthatcanbeaccomplishedusingthe CLIinterface,anoverviewoflocalmanagementrequirements,anoverviewofthedevicesfactory defaultsettings,andinformationaboutusingtheCommandLineInterface(CLI). Chapter 2,ConfiguringSwitchesinaStack,providesinformationabouthowtoconfigureand managestackedswitches. Chapter 3,BasicConfiguration,provideshowtosetbasicsystemproperties,howtodownloada firmwareimage,howtoconfigureWebViewandTelnet,howtomanageconfigurationfiles,how tosettheloginpassword,andhowtoexittheCLI. Chapter 4,DiscoveryProtocolConfigurationprovideshowtoconfigurediscoveryprotocols supportedbythedevice. Chapter 5,PortConfiguration,describeshowtoreviewandconfigureconsoleportsettings,and howtoenableordisableswitchportsandconfigureswitchportsettings,includingportspeed, duplexmode,autonegotiation,flowcontrol,portmirroring,linkaggegationandbroadcast suppression.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

xix

Related Documents

Chapter 6,SNMPConfiguration,describeshowtoconfigureSNMPusersandusergroups,access rights,targetaddresses,andnotificationparameters. Chapter 7,SpanningTreeConfiguration,describeshowtoreviewandsetSpanningTreebridge parametersforthedevice,includingbridgepriority,hellotime,maximumagingtimeandforward delay;andhowtoreviewandsetSpanningTreeportparameters,includingportpriorityandpath costs.ConfiguringtheSpanGuardandLoopProtectfunctionsisalsodescribed. Chapter 8,802.1QVLANConfiguration,describeshowtocreatestaticVLANs,selectthemodeof operationforeachport,establishVLANforwarding(egress)lists,routeframesaccordingto VLANID,displaythecurrentportsandporttypesassociatedwithaVLANandprotocol,createa securemanagementVLAN,andconfigureportsonthedeviceasGVRPawareports. Chapter 9,DifferentiatedServicesConfiguration,describeshowtodisplayandconfigure Diffservparameters. Chapter 10,PolicyClassificationConfiguration,describeshowtocreate,changeorremoveuser rolesorprofilesbasedonbusinessspecificuseofnetworkservices;howtopermitordenyaccess tospecificservicesbycreatingandassigningclassificationruleswhichmapuserprofilestoframe filteringpolicies;howtoclassifyframestoaVLANorClassofService(CoS);andhowtoassignor unassignportstopolicyprofilessothatonlyportsactivatedforaprofilewillbeallowedto transmitframesaccordingly. Chapter 11,PortPriorityandRateLimitingConfiguration,describeshowtosetthetransmit priorityofeachportandconfigurearatelimitforagivenportandlistofpriorities. Chapter 12,IGMPConfiguration,describeshowtoconfigureInternetGroupManagement Protocol(IGMP)settingsformulticastfiltering. Chapter 13,LoggingandNetworkManagement,describeshowtoconfigureSyslog,howto managegeneralswitchsettings,howtomonitornetworkeventsandstatus,andhowtoconfigure SNTPandnodealiases. Chapter 14,RMONConfiguration,describeshowtouseRMON(RemoteNetworkMonitoring), whichprovidescomprehensivenetworkfaultdiagnosis,planning,andperformancetuning informationandallowsforinteroperabilitybetweenSNMPmanagementstationsandmonitoring agents. Chapter 15,DHCPServerConfiguration,describeshowtoreviewandconfigureDHCPserver parameters,howtoreviewandconfigureDHCPaddresspools,andhowtodisplayDHCPserver information. Chapter 16,SecurityConfiguration,describeshowtoconfigure802.1Xauthenticationusing EAPOL,howtoconfigureRADIUSserver,SecureShellserver,MACauthentication,MAC locking,andPortWebAuthentication.

Related Documents
ThefollowingEnterasysNetworksdocumentsmayhelpyoutosetup,control,andmanagethe SecureStackdevice: EthernetTechnologyGuide CablingGuide SecureStackB2InstallationGuide(s) SecureStackRedundantPowerSystemInstallationGuide

Documentslistedabove,canbeobtainedfromtheWorldWideWebinAdobeAcrobatPortable DocumentFormat(PDF)atthefollowingwebsite: http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

xx About This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

Thefollowingconventionsareusedinthetextofthisdocument:
Convention Bold font italic font Courier font Courier font in italics [] {} | [x | y | z] {x | y | z} [x {y | z} ] Description Indicates mandatory keywords, parameters or keyboard keys. Indicates complete document titles. Used for examples of information displayed on the screen. Indicates a user-supplied value, either required or optional. Square brackets indicate an optional value. Braces indicate required values. One or more values may be required. A vertical bar indicates a choice in values. Square brackets with a vertical bar indicate a choice of a value. Braces with a vertical bar indicate a choice of a required value. A combination of square brackets with braces and vertical bars indicates a required choice of an optional value.

Thefollowingiconsareusedinthisguide:

Note: Calls the readers attention to any item of information that may be of special importance.

Caution: Contains information essential to avoid damage to the equipment.

Getting Help
Foradditionalsupportrelatedtothisswitchordocument,contactEnterasysNetworksusingone ofthefollowingmethods:
World Wide Web Phone http://www.enterasys.com/support 1-800-872-8440 (toll-free in U.S. and Canada) or 1-978-684-1000 For the Enterasys Networks Support toll-free number in your country: http://www.enterasys.com/support Internet mail support@enterasys.com To expedite your message, type [SWITCHING] in the subject line. To send comments or suggestions concerning this document to the Technical Publications Department: techpubs@enterasys.com Make sure to include the document Part Number in the email message.

BeforecallingEnterasysNetworks,havethefollowinginformationready: YourEnterasysNetworksservicecontractnumber Adescriptionofthefailure

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

xxi

Getting Help

Adescriptionofanyaction(s)alreadytakentoresolvetheproblem(forexample,changing modeswitchesorrebootingtheunit) TheserialandrevisionnumbersofallinvolvedEnterasysNetworksproductsinthenetwork Adescriptionofyournetworkenvironment(forexample,layout,cabletype) Networkloadandframesizeatthetimeoftrouble(ifknown) Theswitchhistory(forexample,haveyoureturnedtheswitchbefore,isthisarecurring problem?) AnypreviousReturnMaterialAuthorization(RMA)numbers

xxii About This Guide

1
Introduction
ThischapterprovidesanoverviewoftheSecureStackB2suniquefeaturesandfunctionality,an overviewofthetasksthatmaybeaccomplishedusingtheCLIinterface,anoverviewofwaysto managetheswitch,factorydefaultsettings,andinformationabouthowtousetheCommandLine Interfacetoconfiguretheswitch.
For information about... SecureStack B2 CLI Overview Switch Management Methods Factory Default Settings Using the Command Line Interface Refer to page... 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-5

SecureStack B2 CLI Overview

EnterasysNetworksSecureStackB2CLIinterfaceallowsyoutoperformavarietyofnetwork managementtasks,includingthefollowing: UseCLIcommandstoperformnetworkmanagementandswitchconfigurationoperations. Downloadanewfirmwareimage. AssignIPaddressandsubnetmask. Selectadefaultgateway. EstablishandmanageVirtualLocalAreaNetworks(VLANs). Establishandmanagepolicyprofilesandclassifications. Establishandmanagepriorityclassification. Configuresecurityprotocols,including802.1XandRADIUS,SSHv2,PWA,MAClocking,and MACauthentication.

Switch Management Methods

TheSecureStackB2switchcanbemanagedusingthefollowingmethods: LocallyusingaVTtypeterminalconnectedtotheconsoleport. RemotelyusingaVTtypeterminalconnectedthroughamodem. RemotelyusinganSNMPmanagementstation. InbandthroughaTelnetconnection. InbandusingtheEnterasysNetSightmanagementapplication.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 1-1

Factory Default Settings

RemotelyusingWebView,EnterasysNetworksembeddedwebserverapplication.

TheInstallationGuideforyourSecureStackB2deviceprovidessetupinstructionsforconnectinga terminalormodemtotheswitch.

Factory Default Settings

ThefollowingtableslistfactorydefaultsettingsavailableontheSecureStackB2switch. Table 1-1
Feature Switch Mode Defaults CDP discovery protocol CDP authentication code CDP hold time CDP interval Cisco discovery protocol Cisco DP hold time Cisco DP interval timer Community name Console (serial) port required settings Auto enabled on all ports. Set to 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00 Set to 180 seconds. Transmit frequency of CDP messages set to 60 seconds. Auto enabled on all ports. Set to 180 seconds. Set to 60 seconds. Public. Baud rate: 9600 Data bits: 8 Flow control: disabled Stop bits: 1 Parity: none DHCP server Diffserv EAPOL EAPOL authentication mode GARP timer GVRP History buffer size IEEE 802.1 authentication IGMP snooping IP mask and gateway IP routes Jumbo frame support Link aggregation control protocol (LACP) Disabled. Disabled. Disabled. When enabled, set to auto for all ports. Join timer set to 20 centiseconds; leave timer set to 60 centiseconds; leaveall timer set to 1000 centiseconds. Globally enabled. 20 lines. Disabled. Disabled. When enabled, query interval is set to 260 seconds and response time is set to 10 seconds. Subnet mask set to 0.0.0.0; default gateway set to 0.0.0.0. No static routes configured. Enabled on all ports. Enabled.

Default Settings for Basic Switch Operation

Default Setting

1-2

Introduction

Factory Default Settings

Table 1-1
Feature

Default Settings for Basic Switch Operation (Continued)

Default Setting Set to 32768 for all ports. Disabled. Set to 32768 for all ports. Set to DIP-SIP. Set to disable Read-Write and Read-Only users, and to lockout the default admin (Super User) account for 15 minutes, after 3 failed login attempts. Syslog port set to UDP port number 514. Logging severity level set to 6 (significant conditions) for all applications. Set to 300 seconds. Disabled (globally and on all ports). Set to an empty string for all default user accounts. User must press ENTER at the password prompt to access CLI. Disabled. No passwords are checked for duplication. Classification rules are automatically enabled when created. Enabled on all ports. Maximum ability advertised on all ports.

Link aggregation admin key Link aggregation flow regeneration Link aggregation system priority Link aggregation outport algorithm Lockout Logging MAC aging time MAC locking Passwords Password aging Password history Policy classification Port auto-negotiation Port advertised ability

Port broadcast suppression Enabled and set to limit broadcast packets to 14,881 per second on all switch ports. Port duplex mode Port enable/disable Port priority Port speed Port trap Power over Ethernet port admin state Priority classification RADIUS client RADIUS last resort action RADIUS retries RADIUS timeout Rate limiting SNMP Set to half duplex, except for 100BASE-FX and 1000BASE-X, which is set to full duplex. Enabled. Set to 0. Set to 10 Mbps, except for 1000BASE-X, which is set to 1000 Mbps, and 100BASE-FX, which is set to 100 Mbps. All ports are enabled to send link traps. Administrative state is on (auto). Classification rules are automatically enabled when created. Disabled. When the client is enabled, set to Challenge. When the client is enabled, set to 3. When the client is enabled, set to 20 seconds. Disabled (globally and on all ports). Enabled.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

1-3

Factory Default Settings

Table 1-1
Feature SNTP

Default Settings for Basic Switch Operation (Continued)

Default Setting Disabled. Globally enabled and enabled on all ports. Edge port administrative status begins with the value set to false initially after the device is powered up. If a Spanning Tree BDPU is not received on the port within a few seconds, the status setting changes to true. Enabled. Set to 15 seconds. Set to 2 seconds. Set to 0. Set to 20 seconds. All ports with bridge priority are set to 128 (medium priority). Bridge priority is set to 32768. Enabled. Set to mstp (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol). Disabled. Set to 9600 baud. Set to empty string. Set to empty string. Set to empty string. CLI display set to 80 columns and 24 rows. Set to 5 minutes. Login accounts set to ro for Read-Only access; rw for Read-Write access; and admin for Super User access. Disabled on all VLANs. All ports use a VLAN identifier of 1. Default host VLAN is 1.

Spanning Tree Spanning Tree edge port administrative status Spanning Tree edge port delay Spanning Tree forward delay Spanning Tree hello interval Spanning Tree ID (SID) Spanning Tree maximum aging time Spanning Tree port priority Spanning Tree priority Spanning Tree topology change trap suppression Spanning Tree version SSH System baud rate System contact System location System name Terminal Timeout User names VLAN dynamic egress VLAN ID Host VLAN

1-4

Introduction

Using the Command Line Interface

Using the Command Line Interface

Starting a CLI Session
Connecting Using the Console Port
ConnectaterminaltothelocalconsoleportasdescribedinyourSecureStackB2InstallationGuide. Thestartupscreen,Figure 11,willdisplayontheterminal.YoucannowstarttheCommandLine Interface(CLI)by usingadefaultuseraccount,asdescribedinUsingaDefaultUserAccountonpage 16,or usinganadministrativelyassigneduseraccountasdescribedinUsinganAdministratively ConfiguredUserAccountonpage 16. SecureStack B2 Startup Screen

Figure 1-1

Username:admin Password: Enterasys SecureStack B2 Command Line Interface Enterasys Networks, Inc. 50 Minuteman Rd. Andover, MA 01810-1008 U.S.A. Phone: +1 978 684 1000 E-mail: support@enterasys.com WWW: http://www.enterasys.com (c) Copyright Enterasys Networks, Inc. 2006 Chassis Serial Number: Chassis Firmware Revision: 041800249041 4.1.xx

B2(su)->

Connecting Using Telnet

OncetheSecureStackB2devicehasavalidIPaddress,youcanestablishaTelnetsessionfromany TCP/IPbasednodeonthenetwork.ForinformationaboutsettingtheswitchsIPaddress,referto setipaddressonpage 39. ToestablishaTelnetsession: 1. 2. TelnettotheswitchsIPaddress. Enterlogin(username)andpasswordinformationinoneofthefollowingways: Iftheswitchsdefaultloginandpasswordsettingshavenotbeenchanged,followthe stepslistedinUsingaDefaultUserAccountonpage 16,or Enteranadministrativelyconfiguredusernameandpassword.

ThenoticeofauthorizationandthepromptdisplaysasshowninFigure 11. ForinformationaboutconfiguringTelnetsettings,refertoStartingandConfiguringTelneton page 338.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 1-5

Using the Command Line Interface

RefertotheinstructionsincludedwiththeTelnetapplicationforinformationaboutestablishinga Telnetsession.

Logging In
Bydefault,theSecureStackB2switchisconfiguredwiththreeuserloginaccountsrofor ReadOnlyaccess,rwforReadWriteaccess,andadminforsuperuseraccesstoallmodifiable parameters.Thedefaultpasswordissettoablankstring.Forinformationonchangingthese defaultsettings,refertoSettingUserAccountsandPasswordsonpage 31.

Using a Default User Account

IfthisisthefirsttimeyouareloggingintotheSecureStackB2switch,orifthedefaultuser accountshavenotbeenadministrativelychanged,proceedasfollows: 1. Attheloginprompt,enteroneofthefollowingdefaultusernames: 2. 3. roforReadOnlyaccess. rwforReadWriteaccess. adminforSuperUseraccess.

PressENTER.ThePasswordpromptdisplays. LeavethisstringblankandpressENTER.Theswitchinformationandpromptdisplaysas showninFigure 11.

Using an Administratively Configured User Account

Iftheswitchsdefaultuseraccountsettingshavebeenchanged,proceedasfollows: 1. 2. Attheloginprompt,enteryouradministrativelyassignedusernameandpressENTER. AtthePasswordprompt,enteryourpasswordandpressENTER.

ThenoticeofauthorizationandthepromptdisplaysasshowninFigure 11.
Note: Users with Read-Write (rw) and Read-Only access can use the set password command (page 3-4) to change their own passwords. Administrators with Super User (su) access can use the set system login command (page 3-3) to create and change user accounts, and the set password command to change any local account password.

Navigating the Command Line Interface

Getting Help with CLI Syntax
TheSecureStackB2switchallowsyoutodisplayusageandsyntaxinformationforindividual commandsbytypinghelpor?afterthecommand.

CLI Command Defaults Descriptions

EachcommanddescriptioninthisguideincludesasectionentitledDefaultswhichcontains differentinformationfromthefactorydefaultsettingsontheswitchdescribedinTable 11.The sectiondefinesCLIbehavioriftheuserentersacommandwithouttypingoptionalparameters (indicatedbysquarebrackets[]).Forcommandswithoutoptionalparameters,thedefaults sectionlistsNone.Forcommandswithoptionalparameters,thissectiondescribeshowtheCLI respondsiftheuseroptstoenteronlythekeywordsofthecommandsyntax.Figure 12provides anexample.

1-6

Introduction

Using the Command Line Interface

Figure 1-2

Sample CLI Defaults Description

Syntax
show port status [port-string]

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,statusinformationforallportswillbedisplayed.

CLI Command Modes

EachcommanddescriptioninthisguideincludesasectionentitledModewhichstateswhether thecommandisexecutableinAdmin(SuperUser),ReadWrite,orReadOnlymode.Userswith ReadOnlyaccesswillonlybepermittedtoviewReadOnly(show)commands.UserswithRead Writeaccesswillbeabletomodifyallmodifiableparametersinsetandshowcommands,aswell asviewReadOnlycommands.AdministratorsorSuperUserswillbeallowedallReadWriteand ReadOnlyprivileges,andwillbeabletomodifylocaluseraccounts.TheSecureStackB2switch indicateswhichmodeauserisloggedinasbydisplayingoneofthefollowingprompts: Admin:B2(su)> ReadWrite:B2(rw)> ReadOnly:B2(ro)>

Performing Keyword Lookups

Enteringaspaceandaquestionmark(?)afterakeywordwilldisplayallcommandsbeginning withthekeyword.Figure 13showshowtoperformakeywordlookupfortheshowsnmp command.Inthiscase,fouradditionalkeywordsareusedbytheshowsnmpcommand.Entering aspaceandaquestionmark(?)afteranyoftheseparameters(suchasshowsnmpcommunity) willdisplayadditionalparametersnestedwithinthesyntax. Figure 1-3 Performing a Keyword Lookup

B2(su)->show snmp ? community notify targetaddr targetparams SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP v1/v2c notify target target community name configuration configuration address configuration parameters configuration

Enteringaquestionmark(?)withoutaspaceafterapartialkeywordwilldisplayalistof commandsthatbeginwiththepartialkeyword.Figure 14showshowtousethisfunctionforall commandsbeginningwithco: Figure 1-4 Performing a Partial Keyword Lookup
copy

B2(rw)->co? configure B2(su)->co

Note: At the end of the lookup display, the system will repeat the command you entered without the ?.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

1-7

Using the Command Line Interface

Displaying Scrolling Screens

IftheCLIscreenlengthhasbeensetusingthesetlengthcommandasdescribedonpage324,CLI outputrequiringmorethanonescreenwilldisplay--More-- toindicatecontinuingscreens.To displayadditionalscreenoutput: PressanykeyotherthanENTERtoadvancetheoutputonescreenatatime. PressENTERtoadvancetheoutputonelineatatime.

TheexampleinFigure 15showshowtheshowmaccommandindicatesthatoutputcontinueson morethanonescreen. Figure 1-5 Scrolling Screen Output

B2(su)->show mac MAC Address FID Port Type ---------------------------------------------------------00-00-1d-67-68-69 1 host Management 00-00-02-00-00-00 1 ge.1.2 Learned 00-00-02-00-00-01 1 ge.1.3 Learned 00-00-02-00-00-02 1 ge.1.4 Learned 00-00-02-00-00-03 1 ge.1.5 Learned 00-00-02-00-00-04 1 ge.1.6 Learned 00-00-02-00-00-05 1 ge.1.7 Learned 00-00-02-00-00-06 1 ge.1.8 Learned 00-00-02-00-00-07 1 ge.1.9 Learned 00-00-02-00-00-08 1 ge.1.10 Learned --More--

Abbreviating and Completing Commands

TheSecureStackB2switchallowsyoutoabbreviateCLIcommandsandkeywordsdowntothe numberofcharactersthatwillallowforauniqueabbreviation.Figure 16showshowto abbreviatetheshownetstatcommandtoshnet. Figure 1-6 Abbreviating a Command

B2(su)->sh net Active Internet connections (including servers) Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address ----- ------ ------ --------------------- --------------------TCP 0 0 10.21.73.13.23 134.141.190.94.51246 TCP 0 275 10.21.73.13.23 134.141.192.119.4724 TCP 0 0 *.80 *.* TCP 0 0 *.23 *.* UDP 0 0 10.21.73.13.1030 134.141.89.113.514 UDP 0 0 *.161 *.* UDP 0 0 *.1025 *.* UDP 0 0 *.123 *.*

State ------ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED LISTEN LISTEN

1-8

Introduction

Using the Command Line Interface

Basic Line Editing Commands

TheCLIsupportsEMACslikelineeditingcommands.Table 12listssomecommonlyused commands. Table 1-2 Basic Line Editing Commands
Command Move cursor to beginning of line. Move cursor back one character. Delete a character. Move cursor to end of line. Move cursor forward one character. Delete character to left of cursor. Complete word. Delete all characters after cursor. Scroll to next command in command history (use the CLI history command to display the history). Scroll to previous command in command history. Resume the CLI process. Pause the CLI process (for scrolling). Transpose characters. Delete all characters before cursor. Delete word to the left of cursor. Restore the most recently deleted item.

Key Sequence Ctrl+A Ctrl+B Ctrl+D Ctrl+E Ctrl+F Ctrl+H Ctrl+I or TAB Ctrl+K Ctrl+N Ctrl+P Ctr1+Q Ctr1+S Ctrl+T Ctrl+U or Ctrl+X Ctrl+W Ctrl+Y

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

1-9

Using the Command Line Interface

1-10

Introduction

2
Configuring Switches in a Stack
ThischapterprovidesinformationaboutconfiguringSecureStackB2switchesinastack.
For information about ... About SecureStack B2 Switch Operation in a Stack Installing a New Stackable System of Up to Eight Units Installing Previously-Configured Systems in a Stack Adding a New Unit to an Existing Stack Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration Considerations About Using Clear Config in a Stack Issues Related to Mixed Type Stacks Stacking Configuration and Management Commands Refer to page ... 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-6

About SecureStack B2 Switch Operation in a Stack

TheSecureStackB2productsarestackableswitchesthatcanbeadaptedandscaledtohelpmeet yournetworkneeds.Theseswitchesprovideamanagementplatformanduplinktoanetwork backboneforastackedgroupofuptoeightSecureStackB2switches.
Note: You can mix SecureStack B2 and B3 switches in a single stack, although only the lowest common denominator of functionality will be supported in a mixed stack. Refer to Issues Related to Mixed Type Stacks on page 2-5 for information about configuring a mixed stack.

Onceinstalledinastack,theswitchesbehaveandperformasasingleswitchproduct.Assuch, youcanstartwithasingleunitandaddmoreunitsasyournetworkexpands.Youcanalsomix differentproductsinthefamilyinasinglestacktoprovideadesiredcombinationofporttypes andfunctionstomatchtherequirementsofindividualapplications.Inallcases,astackofunits performsasonelargeproduct,andismanagedasasinglenetworkentity. WhenswitchesareinstalledandconnectedasdescribedintheSecureStackB2InstallationGuides, thefollowingoccursduringinitialization: Theswitchthatwillmanagethestackisautomaticallyestablished.Thisisknownasthe managerswitch. Allotherswitchesareestablishedasmembersinthestack. Thehierarchyoftheswitchesthatwillassumethefunctionofbackupmanagerisalso determinedincasethecurrentmanagermalfunctions,ispowereddown,orisdisconnected fromthestack.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

2-1

Installing a New Stackable System of Up to Eight Units

Theconsoleportonthemanagerswitchremainsactiveforoutofband(local)switch management,buttheconsoleportoneachmemberswitchisdeactivated.Thisenablesyouto settheIPaddressandsystempasswordusingasingleconsoleport.Noweachswitchcanbe configuredlocallyusingonlythemanagersconsoleport,orinbandusingaremotedevice andtheCLIsetofcommandsdescribedinthissection.

Onceastackiscreated(morethanoneswitchisinterconnected),thefollowingprocedureoccurs: 1. 2. Bydefault,unitIDsarearbitrarilyassignedonafirstcome,firstservedbasis. UnitIDsaresavedagainsteachmodule.Then,everytimeaboardispowercycled,itwill initializewiththesameunitID.Thisisimportantforportspecificinformation(forexample: ge.4.12isthe12thGigabitEthernetportonUnit#4). Themanagementelectionprocessusesthefollowingprecedencetoassignamanagement switch: a. b. c. Previouslyassigned/electedmanagementunit Managementassignedpriority(values115) Hardwarepreferencelevel

3.

d. HighestMACAddress Usethefollowingrecommendedprocedureswheninstallinganewstackablesystemoraddinga newunittoanexistingstack.

Important
The following procedures assume that all units have a clean configuration from manufacturing. When adding a new unit to an already running stack, it is also assumed that the new unit is using the same firmware image version as other units in the stack.

Installing a New Stackable System of Up to Eight Units

Usethefollowingprocedureforinstallinganewstackofuptoeightunitsoutofthebox. 1. 2. Beforeapplyingpower,makeallphysicalconnectionswiththestackcablesasdescribedin theSecureStackB2InstallationGuides. Onceallofthestackcableshavebeenconnected,individuallypoweroneachunitfromtopto bottom.
Notes: Ensure that each switch is fully operational before applying power to the next switch. Since unit IDs are assigned on a first-come, first-served basis, this will ensure that unit IDs are ordered sequentially. Once unit IDs are assigned, they are persistent and will be retained during a power cycle to any or all of the units.

3. 4. 5.

(Optional)Ifdesired,changethemanagementunitusingthesetswitchmovemanagement commandasdescribedinsetswitchmovemanagementonpage211. Oncethedesiredmasterunithasbeenselected,resetthesystemusingtheresetcommandas describedinresetonpage351. Afterthestackhasbeenconfigured,youcanusetheshowswitchunitcommand(show switchonpage26)tophysicallyidentifyeachunit.Whenyouenterthecommandwitha unitnumber,theMGRLEDofthespecifiedswitchwillblinkfor10seconds.Thenormalstate ofthisLEDisoffformemberunitsandsteadygreenforthemanagerunit.

2-2

Configuring Switches in a Stack

Installing Previously-Configured Systems in a Stack

Installing Previously-Configured Systems in a Stack

Ifmemberunitsinastackhavebeenpreviousmembersofadifferentstack,youmayneedto configuretherenumberingofthestackasfollows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Stacktheunitsinthemethoddesired,andconnectthestackcables. Poweruponlytheunityouwishtobemanager. Oncethemanagementunitispoweredup,logintotheCLI,andusetheshowswitch commandasdescribedinshowswitchonpage26todisplaystackinginformation. Clearanyswitcheswhicharelistedasunassignedusingtheclearswitchmember commandasdescribedinclearswitchmemberonpage212. Powerupthememberofthestackyouwishtobecomeunit2.Oncethesecondunitisfully powered,theCOMsessionoftheCLIwillstatethatanewCPUwasadded. Usetheshowswitchcommandtoredisplaystackinginformation. a. b. Ifthenewmemberdisplaysasunit2,youcanproceedtorepeatthisstepwiththenext unit. Ifthenewmemberdisplaysadifferentunitnumber,youmust: (1) Renumberthestackusingthesetswitchrenumbercommandasdescribedinset switchonpage29,then (2) Cleartheoriginalunitnumberusingtheclearswitchmembercommand. 7. 8. RepeatStep6untilallmembershavebeenrenumberedintheorderyoudesire. Afterthestackhasbeenreconfigured,youcanusetheshowswitchunitcommand(show switchonpage26)tophysicallyconfirmtheidentityofeachunit.Whenyouenterthe commandwithaunitnumber,theMGRLEDofthespecifiedswitchwillblinkfor10seconds. ThenormalstateofthisLEDisoffformemberunitsandsteadygreenforthemanagerunit.

Adding a New Unit to an Existing Stack

Usethefollowingprocedureforinstallinganewunittoanexistingstackconfiguration.This procedureassumesthatthenewunitbeingaddedhasacleanconfigurationfrommanufacturing andisrunningthesamefirmwareimageversionasotherunitsinthestack. 1. 2. Ensurethatpowerisoffonthenewunitbeinginstalled. Useoneofthefollowingmethodstocompletestackcableconnections: Iftherunningstackusesadaisychaintopology,makethestackcableconnectionsfrom thebottomofthestacktothenewunit(thatis,STACKDOWNportfromthebottomunit oftherunningstacktotheSTACKUPportonthenewunit). Iftherunningstackusesaringstacktopology,breaktheringandmakethestackcable connectionstothenewunittoclosethering.

3.

Applypowertothenewunit.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

2-3

Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration

Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration

YoucancreateaconfigurationforaSecureStackB2switchbeforeaddingtheactualphysical devicetoastack.Thispreconfigurationfeatureincludesconfiguringprotocolsontheportsofthe virtualswitch. Tocreateavirtualswitchconfigurationinastackenvironment: 1. 2. 3. Displaythetypesofswitchessupportedinthestack,usingtheshowswitchswitchtype command(page27). Usingtheoutputoftheshowswitchswitchtypecommand,determinetheswitchindex(SID) ofthemodelofswitchbeingconfigured. Addthevirtualswitchtothestackusingthesetswitchmembercommand(page211).Use theSIDoftheswitchmodel,determinedinthepreviousstep,andtheunitIDthatyouwantto assigntothisswitchmember. Proceedtoconfiguretheportsofthevirtualswitchasyouwoulddoforphysicallypresent devices.

4.

ThefollowingexampleaddsaB2G12424modeltoastackasunit2ofthestack.Thefirstporton thatvirtualswitchisthenassociatedwithVLAN555.
B2(su)->show switch switchtype SID --1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Switch Model ID -------------------------------B2G124-24 B2G124-48 B2G124-48P B2H124-48 B2H124-48P B3G124-24P B3G124-48P B3G124-48 B3G124-24 Mgmt Pref ---1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Code Version --------0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245

B2(su)->set switch member 2 1 B2(su)->show switch Management Preconfig Plugged-in Switch Code Switch Status Model ID Model ID Status Version ------ ------------ ------------- ------------- --------------------- -------1 Mgmt Switch B2G124-48 B2G124-48 OK 4.1.xx 2 Unassigned B2G124-24 Not Present 00.00.00 B2(su)->set vlan create 555 B2(su)->clear vlan egress 1 ge.2.1 B2(su)->set port vlan ge.2.1 555 untagged B2(su)->show port vlan ge.2.1 ge.2.1 is set to 555 Note: If you preconfigure a virtual switch and then add a physical switch of a different type to the stack as that unit number, any configured functionality that cannot be supported on the physical switch will cause a configuration mismatch status for that device and the ports of the new device will join detached. You must clear the mismatch before the new device will properly join the stack.

2-4

Configuring Switches in a Stack

Considerations About Using Clear Config in a Stack

Considerations About Using Clear Config in a Stack

Whenusingtheclearconfigcommand(page351)toclearconfigurationparametersinastack,it isimportanttorememberthefollowing: UseclearconfigtoclearconfigparameterswithoutclearingstackunitIDs.Thiscommand WILLNOTclearstackparametersortheIPaddressandavoidstheprocessofrenumbering thestack. Useclearconfigallwhenitisnecessarytoclearallconfigparameters,includingstackunit IDsandswitchpriorityvalues.ThiscommandwillnotcleartheIPaddressnorwillitremove anappliedadvancedfeaturelicense. UseclearipaddresstoremovetheIPaddressofthestack. Useclearlicensetoremoveanappliedlicensefromaswitch.

Configurationparametersandstackinginformationcanalsobeclearedonthemasterunitonly byselectingtherestoreconfigurationtofactorydefaultsoptionfromthebootmenuonswitch startup.Thisselectionwillleavestackingprioritiesonallotherunits.

Issues Related to Mixed Type Stacks

Feature Support
BecausetheSecureStackB2andB3switcheshavedifferenthardwarearchitectures,the functionalitysupportedbythetwoswitchtypesisdifferent.Whenthetwotypesofswitchesare mixedinastack,thefunctionalitysupportedwillbethelowestcommondenominatoroffeatures supportedonallplatforms.RefertothefirmwareReleaseNotesforinformationaboutsupported features.

Configuration
Common Firmware Version
MixedstackingisonlysupportedbySecureStackB2firmwareversion4.00.xxandhigher.Inorder tomixSecureStackB3switcheswithB2switches,youmustinstalltheB2firmware(version 4.00.xxorhigher)ontheB3switch.YoucaninstalltheB2firmwarefirst,withtheB3switchin standalonemode,oryoucanaddtheB3switchtothestackandthencopytheB2firmwaretothe B3switchusingthesetswitchcopyfwcommand(page29).AftercopyingtheB2firmwaretothe B3switch,youmustresetthestack.

Switch Manager
ItisrecommendedthataSecureStackB3switchbemadethemanagerofamixedstack.Usetheset switchmovemanagementcommand(page211)tochangethemanagerunit.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

2-5

Stacking Configuration and Management Commands

Stacking Configuration and Management Commands

Purpose
Toreview,individuallyconfigureandmanageswitchesinaSecureStackB2stack.

Commands
For information about... show switch show switch switchtype show switch stack-ports set switch set switch copy-fw set switch description set switch movemanagement set switch member clear switch member Refer to page... 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-11 2-12

show switch
Usethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutoneormoreunitsinthestack.

Syntax
show switch [status] [unit]

Parameters
status unit (Optional)Displayspowerandadministrativestatusinformationforone ormoreunitsinthestack. (Optional)Specifiestheunit(s)forwhichinformationwilldisplay.

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,statusandotherconfigurationinformationaboutallunitswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
Afterastackhasbeenconfigured,youcanusethiscommandtophysicallyconfirmtheidentityof eachunit.Whenyouenterthecommandwithaunitnumber,theMGRLEDofthespecified switchwillblinkfor10seconds.ThenormalstateofthisLEDisoffformemberunitsandsteady greenforthemanagerunit.

2-6

Configuring Switches in a Stack

show switch switchtype

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayinformationaboutallswitchunitsinthestack:
B2(rw)->show switch Management Switch Status ------ -----------1 Mgmt Switch 2 Stack Member 3 Stack Member 4 Stack Member 5 Stack Member 6 Stack Member 7 Stack Member 8 Stack Member Preconfig Model ID ------------B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 Plugged-in Model ID ------------B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 Switch Status --------------------OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Code Version -------04.1.xx 04.1.xx 04.1.xx 04.1.xx 04.1.xx 04.1.xx 04.1.xx 04.1.xx

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayinformationaboutswitchunit1inthestack:
B2(ro)->show switch 1 Switch Management Status Hardware Management Preference Admin Management Preference Switch Type Preconfigured Model Identifier Plugged-in Model Identifier Switch Status Switch Description Detected Code Version Detected Code in Flash Detected Code in Back Image Up Time 1 Management Switch Unassigned Unassigned B2G124-24 B2G124-24 B2G124-24 OK Enterasys Networks, Inc. B2 -- Model B2G124-24 04.1.xx 03.01.20 02.01.37 0 days 6 hrs 37 mins 54 secs

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaystatusinformationforswitchunit1inthestack:
B2(ro)->show switch status 1 Switch Switch Status Admin State Power State Inserted Switch: Model Identifier Description Configured Switch: Model Identifier Description 1 Full

B2G124-24 Enterasys Networks, Inc. B2 -- Model B2G124-24 B2G124-24 Enterasys Networks, Inc. B2 -- Model B2G124-24

show switch switchtype

Usethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutsupportedswitchtypesinthestack.

Syntax
show switch switchtype [switchindex]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

2-7

show switch stack-ports

Parameters
switchindex (Optional)Specifiestheswitchindex(SID)oftheswitchtypetodisplay.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayswitchtypeinformationaboutallswitchesinthestack:
B2(su)->show switch switchtype SID --1 2 3 4 5 Switch Model ID -------------------------------B2G124-24 B2G124-48 B2G124-48P B2H124-48 B2H124-48P Mgmt Pref ---1 1 1 1 1 Code Version --------0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245 0xa08245

ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayswitchtypeinformationaboutSID1:
B2(rw)->show switch switchtype 1 Switch Type....................... 0x56950200 Model Identifier.................. B2G124-24 Switch Description................ Enterasys Networks, Inc. B2 -- Model B2G124-24 Management Preference............. 1 Expected Code Version............. 0xa08245 Supported Cards: Slot........................... 0 Card Index (CID)............... 1 Model Identifier............... B2G124-24

show switch stack-ports

Usethiscommandtodisplayvariousdataflowanderrorcountersonstackports.

Syntax
show switch stack-ports [unit]

Parameters
unit (Optional)SpecifiestheswitchunitID,anintegerrangingfrom1to8.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.
2-8 Configuring Switches in a Stack

set switch

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaydataanderrorinformationonstackports:
B2(ro)->show switch stack-ports ------------TX-------------- ------------RX----------Data Error Data Error Stacking Rate Rate Total Rate Rate Total Switch Port (Mb/s) (Errors/s) Errors (Mb/s) (Errors/s) Errors ------ ---------- ------ ---------- ---------- ------ ---------- -------1 Up 0 0 0 0 0 0 Down 0 0 0 0 0 0

set switch
UsethiscommandtoassignaswitchID,tosetaswitchspriorityforbecomingthemanagement switchifthepreviousmanagementswitchfails,ortochangetheswitchunitIDforaswitchinthe stack.

Syntax
set switch {unit [priority value | renumber newunit]}

Parameters
unit priorityvalue renumbernewunit Specifiesaunitnumberfortheswitch.Valuecanrangefrom1to8. Specifiesapriorityvaluefortheunit.Validvaluesare1to15withhigher valuesassigninghigherpriority. Specifiesanewnumberfortheunit.
Note: This number must be a previously unassigned unit ID number.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtoassignpriority3toswitch5:
B2(su)->set switch 5 priority 3

Thisexampleshowshowtorenumberswitch5toswitch7:
B2(su)->set switch 5 renumber 7

set switch copy-fw

Usethiscommandtoreplicatethecodeimagefilefromthemanagementswitchtoother switch(es)inthestack.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

2-9

set switch description

Syntax
set switch copy-fw [destination-system unit]

Parameters
destinationsystem (Optional)Specifiestheunitnumberofunitonwhichtocopythe unit managementimagefile.

Defaults
Ifdestinationsystemisnotspecified,themanagementimagefilewillbereplicatedtoallswitches inthestack.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoreplicatethemanagementimagefiletoallswitchesinthestack:
B2(su)->set switch copy-fw Are you sure you want to copy firmware? (y/n) y Code transfer completed successfully.

set switch description

Usethiscommandtoassignanametoaswitchinthestack.

Syntax
set switch description unit description

Parameters
unit description Specifiesaunitnumberfortheswitch. Specifiesatextdescriptionfortheunit.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoassignthenameFirstUnittoswitchunit1inthestack:
B2(su)->set switch description 1 FirstUnit

2-10

Configuring Switches in a Stack

set switch movemanagement

set switch movemanagement

Usethiscommandtomovemanagementswitchfunctionalityfromoneswitchtoanother.

Syntax
set switch movemanagement fromunit tounit

Parameters
fromunit tounit Specifiestheunitnumberofthecurrentmanagementswitch. Specifiestheunitnumberofthenewlydesignatedmanagementswitch.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtomovemanagementfunctionalityfromswitch1toswitch2:
B2(su)->set switch movemenagement 1 2 Moving stack management will unconfigure entire stack including all interfaces. Are you sure you want to move stack management? (y/n) y

set switch member

Usethiscommandtoaddavirtualmembertoastack.Thisallowsyoutopreconfigureaswitch beforethephysicaldeviceisactuallyaddedtothestack.

Syntax
set switch member unit switch-id

Parameters
unit switchid Specifiesaunitnumberfortheswitch. SpecifiesaswitchID(SID)fortheswitch.SIDscanbedisplayedwiththe showswitchswitchtypecommand.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
RefertoCreatingaVirtualSwitchConfigurationonpage24formoreinformationabouthowto addavirtualswitchtoastack.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

2-11

clear switch member

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtospecifyaswitchasunit1withaswitchIDof1:
B2(su)->set switch member 1 1

clear switch member

Usethiscommandtoremoveamemberentryfromthestack.

Syntax
clear switch member unit

Parameters
unit Specifiestheunitnumberoftheswitch.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoremovetheswitch5entryfromthestack:
B2(su)->clear switch member 5

2-12

Configuring Switches in a Stack

3
Basic Configuration
Atstartup,theSecureStackB2switchisconfiguredwithmanydefaultsandstandardfeatures. Thischapterdescribeshowtocustomizebasicsystemsettingstoadapttoyourworkenvironment.
For information about... Setting User Accounts and Passwords Setting Basic Switch Properties Activating Licensed Features Configuring Power over Ethernet (PoE) Downloading a New Firmware Image Reviewing and Selecting a Boot Firmware Image Starting and Configuring Telnet Managing Switch Configuration and Files Clearing and Closing the CLI Resetting the Switch Using and Configuring WebView Refer to page... 3-1 3-8 3-26 3-31 3-34 3-36 3-38 3-40 3-49 3-50 3-52

Setting User Accounts and Passwords

Purpose
Tochangetheswitchsdefaultuserloginandpasswordsettings,andtoaddnewuseraccounts andpasswords.

Commands
Thecommandsusedtoconfigureuseraccountsandpasswordsarelistedbelow.
For information about... show system login set system login clear system login set password Refer to page... 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-4

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-1

show system login

For information about... set system password length set system password aging set system password history show system lockout set system lockout

Refer to page... 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-7

show system login

Usethiscommandtodisplayuserloginaccountinformation.

Syntax
show system login

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,superuser.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayloginaccountinformation.Inthiscase,switchdefaultshave notbeenchanged:
B2(su)->show system login Password history size: 0 Password aging : disabled Username admin ro rw Access super-user read-only read-write State enabled enabled enabled

Table 31providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 3-1

Output Password history size

show system login Output Details

What It Displays... Number of previously used user login passwords that will be checked for duplication when the set password command is executed. Configured with set system password history (page 3-6). Number of days user passwords will remain valid before aging out. Configured with set system password aging (page 3-5). Login user names.

Password aging Username

3-2

Basic Configuration

set system login

Table 3-1
Output Access State

show system login Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Access assigned to this user account: super-user, read-write or read-only. Whether this user account is enabled or disabled.

set system login

Usethiscommandtocreateanewuserloginaccount,ortodisableorenableanexistingaccount. TheSecureStackB2switchsupportsupto16useraccounts,includingtheadminaccount,which cannotbedeleted.

Syntax
set system login username {super-user | read-write | read-only} {enable | disable}

Parameters
username Specifiesaloginnameforaneworexistinguser.Thisstringcanbea maximumof80characters,althoughamaximumof16charactersis recommendedforproperviewingintheshowsystemlogindisplay. Specifiestheaccessprivilegesforthisuser.

superuser| readwrite| readonly enable|disable

Enablesordisablestheuseraccount.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,superuser.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenableanewuseraccountwiththeloginnamenetopswithsuper useraccessprivileges:
B2(su)->set system login netops super-user enable

clear system login

Usethiscommandtoremovealocalloginuseraccount.

Syntax
clear system login username

Parameters
username Specifiestheloginnameoftheaccounttobecleared.
Note: The default admin (su) account cannot be deleted.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-3

set password

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,superuser.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoremovethenetopsuseraccount:
B2(su)->clear system login netops

set password
UsethiscommandtochangesystemdefaultpasswordsortosetanewloginpasswordontheCLI.

Syntax
set password [username]

Parameters
username (Onlyavailabletouserswithsuperuseraccess.)Specifiesasystem defaultorauserconfiguredloginaccountname.Bydefault,the SecureStackB2switchprovidesthefollowingaccountnames: roforReadOnlyaccess. rwforReadWriteaccess. adminforSuperUseraccess.(ThisaccesslevelallowsReadWriteaccess toallmodifiableparameters,includinguseraccounts.)

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite. Switchcommand,superuser.

Usage
ReadWriteuserscanchangetheirownpasswords. SuperUsers(Admin)canchangeanypasswordonthesystem.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowasuperuserwouldchangetheReadWritepasswordfromthesystem default(blankstring):
B2(su)->set password rw Please enter new password: ******** Please re-enter new password: ******** Password changed. B2(su)->

3-4

Basic Configuration

set system password length

ThisexampleshowshowauserwithReadWriteaccesswouldchangehispassword:
B2(su)->set password Please enter old password: ******** Please enter new password: ******** Please re-enter new password: ******** Password changed. B2(su)->

set system password length

Usethiscommandtosettheminimumuserloginpasswordlength.

Syntax
set system password length characters

Parameters
characters Specifiestheminimumnumberofcharactersforauseraccountpassword. Validvaluesare0to40.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,superuser.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosettheminimumsystempasswordlengthto8characters:
B2(su)->set system password length 8

set system password aging

Usethiscommandtosetthenumberofdaysuserpasswordswillremainvalidbeforeagingout,or todisableuseraccountpasswordaging.

Syntax
set system password aging {days | disable}

Parameters
days disable Specifiesthenumberofdaysuserpasswordswillremainvalidbefore agingout.Validvaluesare1to365. Disablespasswordaging.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,superuser.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 3-5

set system password history

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthesystempasswordagetimeto45days:
B2(su)->set system password aging 45

set system password history

Usethiscommandtosetthenumberofpreviouslyuseduserloginpasswordsthatwillbechecked forpasswordduplication.Thispreventsduplicatepasswordsfrombeingenteredintothesystem withthesetpasswordcommand.

Syntax
set system password history size

Parameters
size Specifiesthenumberofpasswordscheckedforduplication.Validvalues are0to10.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,superuser.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoconfigurethesystemtocheckthelast10passwordsforduplication
B2(su)->set system password history 10

show system lockout

Usethiscommandtodisplaysettingsforlockingoutusersafterfailedattemptstologintothe system.

Syntax
show system lockout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,superuser.

3-6

Basic Configuration

set system lockout

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayuserlockoutsettings.Inthiscase,switchdefaultshavenot beenchanged:
B2(su)->show system lockout Lockout attempts: 3 Lockout time: 15 minutes.

Table 33providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.Thesesettingsareconfiguredwiththe setsystemlockoutcommand(setsystemlockoutonpage37). Table 3-3

Output Lockout attempts Lockout time

show system lockout Output Details

What It Displays... Number of failed login attempts allowed before a read-write or read-only users account will be disabled. Number of minutes the default admin user account will be locked out after the maximum login attempts.

set system lockout

Usethiscommandtosetthenumberoffailedloginattemptsbeforelockingout(disabling)aread writeorreadonlyuseraccount,andthenumberofminutestolockoutthedefaultadminsuper useraccountaftermaximumloginattempts.Onceauseraccountislockedout,itcanonlybere enabledbyasuperuserwiththesetsystemlogincommand(page33).

Syntax
set system lockout {[attempts attempts] [time time]}

Parameters
attemptsattempts timetime Specifiesthenumberoffailedloginattemptsallowedbeforeareadwrite orreadonlyusersaccountwillbedisabled.Validvaluesare1to10. Specifiesthenumberofminutesthedefaultadminuseraccountwillbe lockedoutafterthemaximumloginattempts.Validvaluesare0to60.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,superuser.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetloginattemptsto5andlockouttimeto30minutes:
B2(su)->set system lockout attempts 5 time 30

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-7

Setting Basic Switch Properties

Setting Basic Switch Properties

Purpose
TodisplayandsetthesystemIPaddressandotherbasicsystem(switch)properties.

Commands
Thecommandsusedtosetbasicsysteminformationarelistedbelow.
For information about... show ip address set ip address clear ip address show ip protocol set ip protocol show system show system hardware show system utilization set system enhancedbuffermode show time set time show summertime set summertime set summertime date set summertime recurring clear summertime set prompt show banner motd set banner motd clear banner motd show version set system name set system location set system contact set width set length show logout set logout Refer to page... 3-9 3-9 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-23 3-24 3-24 3-25

3-8

Basic Configuration

show ip address

For information about... show console set console baud

Refer to page... 3-25 3-26

show ip address
UsethiscommandtodisplaythesystemIPaddressandsubnetmask.

Syntax
show ip address

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythesystemIPaddressandsubnetmask:
B2(su)->show ip address Name ---------------host Address ---------------10.42.13.20 Mask ---------------255.255.0.0

set ip address
UsethiscommandtosetthesystemIPaddress,subnetmaskanddefaultgateway.

Syntax
set ip address ip-address [mask ip-mask] [gateway ip-gateway]

Parameters
ipaddress SetstheIPaddressforthesystem.ForSecureStackB2systems,thisisthe IPaddressofthemanagementswitchasdescribedinAboutSecureStack B2SwitchOperationinaStackonpage21. (Optional)Setsthesystemssubnetmask. (Optional)Setsthesystemsdefaultgateway(nexthopdevice).

maskipmask gatewayipgateway

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,ipmaskwillbesettothenaturalmaskoftheipaddressandipgatewaywillbesetto theipaddress.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-9

clear ip address

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthesystemIPaddressto10.1.10.1withamaskof255.255.128.0and adefaultgatewayof10.1.0.1:
B2(su)->set ip address 10.1.10.1 mask 255.255.128.0 gateway 10.1.10.1

clear ip address
UsethiscommandtoclearthesystemIPaddress.

Syntax
clear ip address

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearthesystemIPaddress:
B2(rw)->clear ip address

show ip protocol
UsethiscommandtodisplaythemethodusedtoacquireanetworkIPaddressforswitch management.

Syntax
show ip protocol

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

3-10

Basic Configuration

set ip protocol

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythemethodusedtoacquireanetworkIPaddress:
B2(su)->show ip protocol System IP address acquisition method: dhcp

set ip protocol
UsethiscommandtospecifytheprotocolusedtoacquireanetworkIPaddressforswitch management.

Syntax
set ip protocol {bootp | dhcp | none}

Parameters
bootp dhcp none SelectsBOOTPastheprotocoltousetoacquirethesystemIPaddress. SelectsDHCPastheprotocoltousetoacquirethesystemIPaddress. NoprotocolwillbeusedtoacquirethesystemIPaddress.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthemethodusedtoacquireanetworkIPaddresstoDHCP.
B2(su)->set ip protocol dhcp

show system
Usethiscommandtodisplaysysteminformation,includingcontactinformation,powerandfan traystatusanduptime.

Syntax
show system

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-11

show system hardware

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaysysteminformation:
B2(su)->show system System contact: System location: System name: Primary PS Status Secondary PS Status ----------------------------------Ok Not Installed Fan1-Status Fan2-Status --------------------Ok Ok Fan3-Status ----------Ok Thermal Sensor 1 ---------------+28 degrees Celsius (82 degrees Fahrenheit) Thermal Sensor 2 ---------------+31 degrees Celsius (87 degrees Fahrenheit) Uptime d,h:m:s -------------0,0:26:52 Logout ------3 min

Table 34providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 3-4

Output System contact System location System name Primary PS Status Fan Status Thermal Sensor Uptime d,h:m:s Logout

show system Output Details

What It Displays... Contact person for the system. Default of a blank string can be changed with the set system contact command (set system contact on page 3-23). Where the system is located. Default of a blank string can be changed with the set system location command (set system location on page 3-22). Name identifying the system. Default of a blank string can be changed with the set system name command (set system name on page 3-22). Operational status for the primary power supply. Operational status of the fan trays. Temperature reading from thermal sensor(s). System uptime. Time an idle console or Telnet CLI session will remain connected before timing out. Default of 5 minutes can be changed with the set logout command (set logout on page 3-25).

show system hardware

Usethiscommandtodisplaythesystemshardwareconfiguration.

Syntax
show system hardware

3-12

Basic Configuration

show system utilization

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythesystemshardwareconfiguration.Pleasenotethatthe informationyouseedisplayedmaydifferfromthisexample.
B2(su)->show system hardware SLOT HARDWARE INFORMATION -------------------Model: Serial Number: Vendor ID: Base MAC Address: Hardware Version: FirmWare Version: Boot Code Version:

B2G124-24 041800129041 0x0e10 00:01:F4:5F:1D:E0 BCM56504 REV 19 4.1.xx 01.00.17

show system utilization

Usethiscommandtodisplaydetailedinformationabouttheprocessorrunningontheswitch,or theoverallmemoryusageoftheFlashandSDRAMstoragedevicesontheunit,ortheprocesses runningontheswitch.Onlythememoryusageinthemasterunitofastackisshown.

Syntax
show system utilization {cpu | storage | process}

Parameters
cpu storage process Displayinformationabouttheprocessorrunningontheswitch. Displayinformationabouttheoverallmemoryusageontheswitch. Displayinformationabouttheprocessesrunningontheswitch.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-13

set system enhancedbuffermode

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythesystemsCPUutilization:
B2(ro)->show system utilization cpu Total CPU Utilization: Switch CPU 5 sec 1 min 5 min ----------------------------------------------1 1 3% 1% 1%

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythesystemsoverallmemoryusage:
B2(ro)->show system utilization storage Storage Utilization: Type Description Size(Kb) Available (Kb) --------------------------------------------------------------RAM RAM device 262144 97173 Flash Images, Config, Other 31095 8094

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayinformationabouttheprocessesrunningonthesystem.Only partialoutputisshown.
B2(ro)->show system utilization process TID Name 5Sec 8d45148 captureTask 0.00% 8e264f8 poe_monitor 0.00% 8ea6d38 poe_read 0.80% 8eb7140 vlanDynEg 0.00% 8f0be10 tcdpSendTask 0.00% 8f1c0e8 tcdpTask 0.00% 1Min 0.00% 0.01% 0.22% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 5Min 0.00% 0.05% 0.20% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%

set system enhancedbuffermode

Usethiscommandtoenableordisableenhancedbuffermode,whichoptimizesbuffer distributionfornonstackingsingleCoSqueueoperation.Executingthiscommandwillresetthe switch,sothesystempromptsyoutoconfirmwhetheryouwanttoproceed.

Syntax
set system enhancedbuffermode {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable Enablesordisablesenhancedbuffermode.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

3-14

Basic Configuration

show time

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenableenhancedbuffermode:
B2(su)->set system enhancedbuffermode enable Changes in the enhanced buffer mode will require resetting this unit. Are you sure you want to continue? (y/n)

show time
Usethiscommandtodisplaythecurrenttimeofdayinthesystemclock.

Syntax
show time

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecurrenttime.Theoutputshowsthedayoftheweek, month,day,andthetimeofdayinhours,minutes,andsecondsandtheyear:
B2(su)->show time THU SEP 05 09:21:57 2002

set time
Usethiscommandtochangethetimeofdayonthesystemclock.

Syntax
set time [mm/dd/yyyy] [hh:mm:ss]

Parameters
[mm/dd/yyyy] [hh:mm:ss] Setsthetimein: month,day,yearand/or 24hourformat Atleastonesetoftimeparametersmustbeentered.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-15

show summertime

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthesystemclockto7:50a.m:
B2(su)->set time 7:50:00

show summertime
Usethiscommandtodisplaydaylightsavingstimesettings.

Syntax
show summertime

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaydaylightsavingstimesettings:
B2(su)->show summertime Summertime is disabled and set to '' Start : SUN APR 04 02:00:00 2004 End : SUN OCT 31 02:00:00 2004 Offset: 60 minutes (1 hours 0 minutes) Recurring: yes, starting at 2:00 of the first Sunday of April and ending at 2:00 of the last Sunday of October

set summertime
Usethiscommandtoenableordisablethedaylightsavingstimefunction.

Syntax
set summertime {enable | disable} [zone]

Parameters
enable|disable zone Enablesordisablesthedaylightsavingstimefunction. (Optional)Appliesanametothedaylightsavingstimesettings.

Defaults
Ifazonenameisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied.

3-16

Basic Configuration

set summertime date

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenabledaylightsavingstimefunction:
B2(su)->set summertime enable

set summertime date

Usethiscommandtoconfigurespecificdatestostartandstopdaylightsavingstime.These settingswillbenonrecurringandwillhavetoberesetannually.

Syntax
set summertime date start_month start_date start_year start_hr_min end_month end_date end_year end_hr_min [offset_minutes]

Parameters
start_month start_date start_year start_hr_min end_month end_date end_year end_hr_min offset_minutes Specifiesthemonthoftheyeartostartdaylightsavingstime. Specifiesthedayofthemonthtostartdaylightsavingstime. Specifiestheyeartostartdaylightsavingstime. Specifiesthetimeofdaytostartdaylightsavingstime.Formatishh:mm. Specifiesthemonthoftheyeartoenddaylightsavingstime. Specifiesthedayofthemonthtoenddaylightsavingstime. Specifiestheyeartoenddaylightsavingstime. Specifiesthetimeofdaytoenddaylightsavingstime.Formatishh:mm. (Optional)Specifiestheamountoftimeinminutestooffsetdaylight savingstimefromthenondaylightsavingstimesystemsetting.Valid valuesare11440.

Defaults
Ifanoffsetisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetadaylightsavingstimestartdateofApril4,2004at2a.m.andan endingdateofOctober31,2004at2a.m.withanoffsettimeofonehour:
B2(su)->set summertime date April 4 2004 02:00 October 31 2004 02:00 60

set summertime recurring

Usethiscommandtoconfigurerecurringdaylightsavingstimesettings.Thesesettingswillstart andstopdaylightsavingstimeatthespecifieddayofthemonthandhoureachyearandwillnot havetoberesetannually.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-17

clear summertime

Syntax
set summertime recurring start_week start_day start_month start_hr_min end_week end_day end_month end_hr_min [offset_minutes]

Parameters
start_week start_day start_hr_min end_week end_day end_hr_min offset_minutes Specifiestheweekofthemonthtorestartdaylightsavingstime.Valid valuesare:first,second,third,fourth,andlast. Specifiesthedayoftheweektorestartdaylightsavingstime. Specifiesthetimeofdaytorestartdaylightsavingstime.Formatis hh:mm. Specifiestheweekofthemonthtoenddaylightsavingstime. Specifiesthedayoftheweektoenddaylightsavingstime. Specifiesthetimeofdaytoenddaylightsavingstime.Formatishh:mm. (Optional)Specifiestheamountoftimeinminutestooffsetdaylight savingstimefromthenondaylightsavingstimesystemsetting.Valid valuesare11440.

Defaults
Ifanoffsetisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowsetdaylightsavingstimetorecurstartingonthefirstSundayofAprilat 2a.m.andendingthelastSundayofOctoberat2a.m.withanoffsettimeofonehour:
B2(su)->set summertime recurring first Sunday April 02:00 last Sunday October 02:00 60

clear summertime
Usethiscommandtoclearthedaylightsavingstimeconfiguration.

Syntax
clear summertime

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

3-18

Basic Configuration

set prompt

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthedaylightsavingstimeconfiguration:
B2(su)->clear summertime

set prompt
Usethiscommandtomodifythecommandprompt.

Syntax
set prompt prompt_string

Parameters
prompt_string Specifiesatextstringforthecommandprompt.
Note: A prompt string containing a space in the text must be enclosed in quotes as shown in the example below.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthecommandprompttoSwitch1:
B2(su)->set prompt Switch 1 Switch 1(su)->

show banner motd

Usethiscommandtoshowthebannermessageofthedaythatwilldisplayatsessionlogin.

Syntax
show banner motd

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-19

set banner motd

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythebannermessageoftheday:
B2(rw)->show banner motd O Knights of Ni, you are just and fair, and we will return with a shrubbery -King Arthur

set banner motd

Usethiscommandtosetthebannermessageofthedaydisplayedatsessionlogin.

Syntax
set banner motd message

Parameters
message Specifiesamessageoftheday.Thisisatextstringthatneedstobein doublequotesifanyspacesareused.Usea\nforanewlineand\tfora tab(eightspaces).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthemessageofthedaybannertoreadOKnightsofNi,youare justandfair,andwewillreturnwithashrubberyKingArthur:
B2(rw)->set banner motd "O Knights of Ni, you are just and \n fair, and we will return with a shrubbery \n \t -King Arthur"

clear banner motd

Usethiscommandtoclearthebannermessageofthedaydisplayedatsessionlogintoablank string.

Syntax
clear banner motd

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.
3-20 Basic Configuration

show version

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthemessageofthedaybannertoablankstring:
B2(rw)->clear banner motd

show version
Usethiscommandtodisplayhardwareandfirmwareinformation.RefertoDownloadingaNew FirmwareImageonpage334forinstructionsonhowtodownloadafirmwareimage.

Syntax
show version

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayversioninformation.Pleasenotethatyoumayseedifferent informationdisplayed,dependingonthetypeofhardware.
B2(su)->show version Copyright (c) 2007 by Enterasys Networks, Inc. Model -------------B2G124-48P Serial # ----------------001188021035 Versions ------------------Hw:BCM5665 REV 17 Bp:01.00.29 Fw:4.1.xx BuFw:03.01.13 PoE:500_3

Table 35providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 3-5

Output Model Serial # Versions

show version Output Details

What It Displays... Switchs model number. Serial number of the switch. Hw: Hardware version number. Bp: BootPROM version. Fw: Current firmware version number. BuFw: Backup firmware version number. PoE: Power over Ethernet driver version. (Displays only for PoE switches.)

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-21

set system name

set system name

Usethiscommandtoconfigureanameforthesystem.

Syntax
set system name [string]

Parameters
string (Optional)Specifiesatextstringthatidentifiesthesystem.
Note: A name string containing a space in the text must be enclosed in quotes as shown in the example below.

Defaults
Ifstringisnotspecified,thesystemnamewillbecleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthesystemnametoInformationSystems:
B2(su)->set system name Information Systems

set system location

Usethiscommandtoidentifythelocationofthesystem.

Syntax
set system location [string]

Parameters
string (Optional)Specifiesatextstringthatindicateswherethesystemis located.
Note: A location string containing a space in the text must be enclosed in quotes as shown in the example below.

Defaults
Ifstringisnotspecified,thelocationnamewillbecleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthesystemlocationstring:
B2(su)->set system location Bldg N32-04 Closet 9

3-22

Basic Configuration

set system contact

set system contact

Usethiscommandtoidentifyacontactpersonforthesystem.

Syntax
set system contact [string]

Parameters
string (Optional)Specifiesatextstringthatcontainsthenameofthepersonto contactforsystemadministration.
Note: A contact string containing a space in the text must be enclosed in quotes as shown in the example below.

Defaults
Ifstringisnotspecified,thecontactnamewillbecleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthesystemcontactstring:
B2(su)->set system contact Joe Smith

set width
Usethiscommandtosetthenumberofcolumnsfortheterminalconnectedtotheswitchsconsole port.

Syntax
set width screenwidth [default]

Parameters
screenwidth default Setsthenumberofterminalcolumns.Validvaluesare50to150. (Optional)Makesthissettingpersistentforallfuturesessions(writtento NVRAM).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ThenumberofrowsofCLIoutputdisplayedissetusingthesetlengthcommandasdescribedin setlengthonpage324.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-23

set length

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosettheterminalcolumnsto50:
B2(su)->set width 50

set length
UsethiscommandtosetthenumberoflinestheCLIwilldisplay.Thiscommandispersistent (writtentoNVRAM).

Syntax
set length screenlength

Parameters
screenlength SetsthenumberoflinesintheCLIdisplay.Validvaluesare0,which disablesthescrollingscreenfeaturedescribedinDisplayingScrolling Screensonpage18,andfrom5to512.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosettheterminallengthto50:
B2(su)->set length 50

show logout
Usethiscommandtodisplaythetime(inseconds)anidleconsoleorTelnetCLIsessionwill remainconnectedbeforetimingout.

Syntax
show logout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheCLIlogoutsetting:
3-24 Basic Configuration

set logout

B2(su)->show logout Logout currently set to: 10 minutes.

set logout
Usethiscommandtosetthetime(inminutes)anidleconsoleorTelnetCLIsessionwillremain connectedbeforetimingout.

Syntax
set logout timeout

Parameters
timeout Setsthenumberofminutesthesystemwillremainidlebeforetimingout.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthesystemtimeoutto10minutes:
B2(su)->set logout 10

show console
Usethiscommandtodisplayconsolesettings.

Syntax
show console [baud] [bits] [flowcontrol] [parity] [stopbits]

Parameters
baud bits flowcontrol parity stopbits (Optional)Displaystheinput/outputbaudrate. (Optional)Displaysthenumberofbitspercharacter. (Optional)Displaysthetypeofflowcontrol. (Optional)Displaysthetypeofparity. (Optional)Displaysthenumberofstopbits.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,allsettingswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-25

set console baud

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayallconsolesettings:
B2(su)->show console Baud Flow Bits ------ ------- ---9600 Disable 8 StopBits ---------1 Parity -----none

set console baud

Usethiscommandtosettheconsoleportbaudrate.

Syntax
set console baud rate

Parameters
rate Setstheconsolebaudrate.Validvaluesare:300,600,1200,2400,4800,5760, 9600,14400,19200,38400,and115200.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosettheconsoleportbaudrateto19200:
B2(su)->set console baud 19200

Activating Licensed Features

InordertoenabletheB2advancedfeatures,suchasPolicy,youmustpurchaseandactivatea licensekey.Ifyouhavepurchasedalicense,youcanproceedtoactivateyourlicenseasdescribed inthissection.Ifyouwishtoobtainapermanentorevaluationlicense,usetheEnterasys CustomerPortalorcontacttheEnterasysNetworksSalesDepartment.
Note: All members of a stack must be licensed in order to support licensed features in a stack environment. If the master unit in a stack has an activated license, all member units also must have an activated license in order to operate. If the master unit in a stack does not have an activated license, then the licensed functionality will not be available to member units, even if they have licenses installed.

License Key Field Descriptions

WhenEnterasyssuppliesalicense,itwillbesenttoyouasacharacterstringsimilartothe following:
INCREMENT B2Policy 2006.0127 27-jan-2011 0123456789AB 0123456789AB

Thecontentsofthesixfields,fromtheleft,indicate:

3-26

Basic Configuration

Activating Licensed Features

Typethetypeoflicense.FortheSecureStackB2,thevalueinthisfieldisalways INCREMENT. Featuredescriptionofthefeaturebeinglicensed.Forexample,B2Policyasshowninthe characterstringabove. Datebasedversion(DBV)adaterelatedstring.FortheSecureStackB2,thevalueinthis fieldisnotsignificant. Expirationtypeindicateswhetherthelicenseisapermanentoranevaluationlicense.Ifthe licenseisanevaluationlicense,thisfieldwillcontaintheexpirationdateofthelicense.Ifthe licenseisapermanentlicense,thisfieldwillcontainthewordpermanent. Keythelicensekey. HostIDtheserialnumberoftheswitchtowhichthislicenseapplies.

WhenactivatinglicensesonSecureStackdevices,werecommendthatyoucopyandpastethe licensecharacterstring,ratherthanenteringthetextmanually.

Licensing Procedure in a Stack Environment

ThelicensesforallmembersofanoperatingstackcanbeactivatedduringasingleCLIsession,by followingthesesteps: 1. 2. ObtainvalidlicensesforallmembersofthestackfromtheEnterasysCustomerPortal. Optionally,notetheserialnumbersoftheswitchesinthestack.Youcanusetheshowsystem hardwarecommand(page312)todisplaytheswitchserialnumbers.
Note: Since license keys are applied to the correct stack member switch automatically, based on the switch serial number that is part of the license string, you should know the serial numbers of the switches in order to enable the licenses of the member switches first, before the master unit.

3.

Enablethelicensesonthestackmembersfirst,beforeenablingthemasterunit,usingtheset licensecommand(page328).Forexample:
B2(rw)->set license INCREMENT B2Policy 2006.0127 27-jan-2011 0123456789AB 0123456789AB

4.

Enablethelicenseontheswitchmasterunitlast,usingthesetlicensecommand.

Adding a New Member to a Licensed Stack

WhenaSecureStackB2switchwithoutalicenseisaddedtoastackthathaslicensingenabled,the portsonthenewswitchwillnotpasstrafficuntilalicensehasbeenappliedtothenewswitch.To addanewmembertoalicensedstack: 1. 2. 3. ObtainalicenseforthenewswitchfromtheEnterasysCustomerPortal. Addthenewunittothestack,followingtheprocedureinAddingaNewUnittoanExisting Stackonpage23. Usethesetlicensecommandtoinstallandactivatethenewswitchslicense.Thenewswitch willthenjointhestackanditsportswillbeattached.

Alternatively,youcaninstallandactivatethenewswitchslicensefirst,beforeaddingtheswitch tothestack.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-27

set license

Clearing, Showing, and Moving Licenses

Licensescanbedisplayed,applied,andclearedonlywiththelicensecommandsdescribedinthis chapter.Generalconfigurationcommandssuchasshowconfigorclearconfigdonotapplyto licenses. Everylicenseisassociatedwithaspecifichardwareplatform,basedontheserialnumberofthe hardwareplatform.Ifyouneedtomovealicensefromonehardwareplatformtoanother,you mustcontactEnterasysCustomerSupporttoarrangeforrehostingofthelicense.

Commands
Thecommandsusedtoactivateandverifylicensedfeaturesarelistedbelow.
For information about... set license show license clear license Refer to page... 3-28 3-29 3-30

set license
UsethiscommandtoactivatetheSecureStackB2licensedfeatures.

Syntax
set license type feature DBV expiration key hostid

Parameters
type feature DBV expiration Specifiesthetypeoflicense.FortheSecureStackB2,thevalueinthisfield isalwaysINCREMENT. Thenameofthefeaturebeinglicensed. Adaterelatedstringgeneratedaspartofthelicense. Indicateswhetherthelicenseisapermanentoranevaluationlicense.If thelicenseisanevaluationlicense,thisfieldwillcontaintheexpiration dateofthelicense.Ifthelicenseisapermanentlicense,thisfieldwill containthewordpermanent. Thelicensekey. Theserialnumberoftheswitchtowhichthislicenseapplies.

key hostid

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Ifmultipleswitchesareusedinastack,anindividuallicenseisrequiredforeachstackmember. RefertoLicensingProcedureinaStackEnvironmentonpage327formoreinformation.
3-28 Basic Configuration

show license

Whenactivatinglicenseswiththiscommand,EnterasysNetworksrecommendsthatyoucopyand pastetheentirelicensecharacterstring,ratherthanenterthetextmanually.Ifyouenterthe characterstringmanually,ensurethatyouexactlymatchthecapitalizationofthecharacterstring senttoyou. Everylicenseisassociatedwithaspecifichardwareplatform,basedontheserialnumberofthe hardwareplatform.Ifyouneedtomovealicensefromonehardwareplatformtoanother,you mustcontactEnterasysCustomerSupporttoarrangeforrehostingofthelicense.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoactivateapermanentlicensekeyontheswitchwithserialnumber 045100039001.Inthisexample,theswitchisastandaloneunitsoitsunitnumberis1.
B2(rw)->set license INCREMENT B2Policy 2006.0728 permanent 31173CAC6495 045100039001 Validating license on unit 1 License successfully validated and set on unit 1 B2(rw)->

show license
Usethiscommandtodisplaylicensekeyinformationforswitcheswithactivatedlicenses.

Syntax
show license [unit number]

Parameters
unitnumber (Optional)Specifiestheswitchinastackforwhichtodisplaylicense information. RefertoChapter 2,ConfiguringSwitchesinaStack,formore informationaboutstackunitIDs,ornumbers.

Defaults
Ifnounitnumberisspecified,licensekeyinformationforallswitchesinthestackisdisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
Licensescanbedisplayed,applied,andclearedonlywiththelicensecommandsdescribedinthis chapter.Generalconfigurationcommandssuchasshowconfigorclearconfigdonotaffect licenses.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaylicensekeyinformatioinforswitchunit1inthestack.
B2(ro)->show license unit 1 unit 1 key: INCREMENT B2Policy 2006.0728 permanent 31173CAC6495 045100039001 status: Active

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-29

clear license

clear license
Usethiscommandtoclearthelicensekeysettings.Ifmultipleswitchesareusedinthestack,you canusetheallparametertoclearalltheswitchesatonce.

Syntax
clear license featureId feature {all | unit number}

Parameters
featureIDfeature all unitnumber Thenameofthefeaturebeingcleared. Clearsthelicensekeysettingsonallunitsinthestack. Clearsthelicensekeysettingsonthespecifiedswitch.Unitnumbercan rangefrom1to8. RefertoChapter 2,ConfiguringSwitchesinaStackformore informationaboutstackunitIDs,ornumbers.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Ifyouclearalicensefromamemberunitinastackwhilethemasterunithasanactivatedlicense, thestatusofthememberunitwillchangetoConfigMismatchanditsportswillbedetached fromthestack(thatis,willnotpasstraffic). Ifyouclearalicensefromthemasterunitofastack,thememberunitswillremainattachedtothe stackbutthelicensedfunctionalitywillnolongerbeavailabletothememberunits,evenifthey havelicensesinstalled. Licensescanbedisplayed,applied,andclearedonlywiththelicensecommandsdescribedinthis chapter.Generalconfigurationcommandssuchasshowconfigorclearconfigdonotaffect licenses.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheB2Policylicensedfeatureonstackunit3.
B2(rw)->clear license featureId B2Policy unit 3

ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheB2Policylicensedfeatureonalltheunitsinastack:
B2(rw)->clear license featureId B2Policy all

3-30

Basic Configuration

Configuring Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Configuring Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Important Notice
This section applies only to PoE-equipped SecureStack B2 devices. Consult the Installation Guide shipped with your product to determine if it is PoE-equipped.

Purpose
ToreviewandsetPoEparameters,includingthepoweravailabletothesystem,theusage thresholdforeachmodule,whetherornotSNMPtrapmessageswillbesentwhenpowerstatus changes,andperportPoEsettings.

Commands
ThecommandsusedtoreviewandsetPoEportparametersarelistedbelow.
For information about... show inlinepower set inlinepower threshold set inlinepower trap show port inlinepower set port inlinepower Refer to page... 3-31 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-33

show inlinepower
UsethiscommandtodisplayswitchPoEproperties.

Syntax
show inlinepower

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-31

set inlinepower threshold

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayswitchPoEproperties.Inthiscase,modulesinslots2and3 arePoEmodules,sotheirpowerconfigurationsdisplay:
B2(su)->show inlinepower Detection Mode : Total Power Detected : Total Power Available : Total Power Assigned : Power Allocation Mode : Power Trap Status : Power Redundancy Status: Power Supply 1 Status : Power Supply 2 Status : Slot ---2 3 Status -----auto auto Power(W) -------360 360 auto 400 Watts 250 Watts 0 Watts auto enable not redundant Ok Not Installed Consumption(W) -------------0.00 5.20 Usage(%) -------0.00 1.44 Threshold(%) -----------80 80 Trap ---enable enable

set inlinepower threshold

UsethiscommandtosetthePoEusagethresholdonaspecifiedunitormodule.

Syntax
set inlinepower threshold usage-threshold unit-number

Parameters
thresholdvalue modulenumber SpecifiesaPoEthresholdasapercentageoftotalsystempowerusage. Validvaluesare11to100. SpecifiesthemoduleonwhichtosetthePoEthreshold.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthePoEthresholdto50onmodule/unit1:
B2(su)->set inlinepower threshold 50 1

set inlinepower trap

UsethiscommandtoenableordisablethesendingofanSNMPtrapmessageforaunitormodule wheneverthestatusofitsportschanges,orwhenevertheunitsPoEusagethresholdiscrossed. TheunitsPoEusagethresholdmustbesetusingthesetinlinepowerthresholdcommandas describedonpage332.

3-32

Basic Configuration

show port inlinepower

Syntax
set inlinepower trap {disable | enable} module-number

Parameters
disable|enable modulenumber DisablesorenablesPoEtrapmessaging. Specifiesthemoduleonwhichtodisableorenabletrapmessaging.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenablePoEtrapmessagingonmodule1:
B2(su)->set inlinepower trap enable 1

show port inlinepower

UsethiscommandtodisplayallportssupportingPoE.

Syntax
show port inlinepower [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysinformationforspecificPoEport(s).

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,informationforallPoEportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayPoEinformationforportge.2.1.Inthiscase,theports administrativestate,PoEpriorityandclasshavenotbeenchangedfromdefaultvalues:
B2(su)->show port inlinepower ge.2.1 Port Type Admin Oper -------------ge.2.1 wireless auto searching Priority -------low Class ----0 Power(W) -------360

set port inlinepower

UsethiscommandtoconfigurePoEparametersononeormoreports.

Syntax
set port inlinepower port-string {[admin {off | auto}] [priority {critical | high | low}] [type type]}

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-33

Downloading a New Firmware Image

Parameters
portstring adminoff|auto prioritycritical| high|low typetype Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoconfigurePoE. SetsthePoEadministrativestatetooff(disabled)orauto(on). Setstheport(s)priorityforthePoEallocationalgorithmtocritical (highest),highorlow. Specifiesastringdescribingthetypeofdeviceconnectedtoaport.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenablePoEonportge.3.1withcriticalpriority:
B2(su)->set port inlinepower ge.3.1 admin auto priority critical

Downloading a New Firmware Image

YoucanupgradetheoperationalfirmwareintheSecureStackB2switchwithoutphysically openingtheswitchorbeinginthesamelocation.Therearetwowaystodownloadfirmwaretothe switch: ViaTFTPdownload.ThisprocedureusesaTFTPserverconnectedtothenetworkand downloadsthefirmwareusingtheTFTPprotocol.FordetailsonhowtoperformaTFTP downloadusingthecopycommand,refertocopyonpage345.Forinformationonsetting TFTPtimeoutandretryparameters,refertosettftptimeoutonpage347andsettftp retryonpage348. Viatheserial(console)port.Thisprocedureisanoutofbandoperationthatcopiesthe firmwarethroughtheserialporttotheswitch.Itshouldbeusedincaseswhenyoucannot connecttheswitchtoperformtheinbandcopydownloadprocedureviaTFTP.Serialconsole downloadhasbeensuccessfullytestedwiththefollowingapplications: HyperTerminalCopyright1999 TeraTermProVersion2.3

Anyotherterminalapplicationsmayworkbutarenotexplicitlysupported. TheB2switchallowsyoutodownloadandstoredualimages.Thebackupimagecanbe downloadedandselectedasthestartupimagebyusingthecommandsdescribedinthissection.

Downloading from a TFTP Server

ToperformaTFTPdownload,proceedasfollows: 1. 2. Ifyouhavenotalreadydoneso,settheswitchsIPaddressusingthesetipaddresscommand asdetailedinsetipaddressonpage39. Downloadanewimagefileusingthecopycommandasdetailedincopyonpage345.

3-34

Basic Configuration

Downloading a New Firmware Image

Downloading via the Serial Port

Todownloadswitchfirmwareviatheserial(console)port,proceedasfollows: 1. Withtheconsoleportconnected,poweruptheswitch.Thefollowingmessagedisplays:
Version 01.00.29 05-09-2005 Computing MD5 Checksum of operational code... Select an option. If no selection in 2 seconds then operational code will start. 1 - Start operational code. 2 - Start Boot Menu. Select (1, 2):2 Password: *************

2.

Beforethebootupcompletes,type2toselectStartBootMenu.Useadministratorforthe Password.
Note: The above Boot Menu password administrator can be changed using boot menu option 11. Boot Menu Version 01.00.29 05-09-2005 Options available 1 - Start operational code 2 - Change baud rate 3 - Retrieve event log using XMODEM (64KB). 4 - Load new operational code using XMODEM 5 - Display operational code vital product data 6 - Run Flash Diagnostics 7 - Update Boot Code 8 - Delete operational code 9 - Reset the system 10 - Restore Configuration to factory defaults (delete config files) 11 - Set new Boot Code password [Boot Menu] 2

3.

Type2.Thefollowingbaudrateselectionscreendisplays:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 no change

4.

Type8tosettheswitchbaudrateto115200.Thefollowingmessagedisplays:
Setting baud rate to 115200, you must change your terminal baud rate.

5.

Settheterminalbaudrateto115200andpressENTER.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-35

Reviewing and Selecting a Boot Firmware Image

6.

Fromthebootmenuoptionsscreen,type4toloadnewoperationalcodeusingXMODEM. WhentheXMODEMtransferiscomplete,thefollowingmessageandheaderinformationwill display:

[Boot Menu] 4 Ready to receive the file with XMODEM/CRC.... Ready to RECEIVE File xcode.bin in binary mode Send several Control-X characters to cCKCKCKCKCKCKCK XMODEM transfer complete, checking CRC.... Verified operational code CRC. The following Enterasys Header is in the image: MD5 Checksum....................fe967970996c4c8c43a10cd1cd7be99a Boot File Identifier............0x0517 Header Version..................0x0100 Image Type......................0x82 Image Offset....................0x004d Image length....................0x006053b3 Ident Strings Length............0x0028 Ident Strings................... B2G124-24 B2G124-48 B2H124-48 B2K124_24 Image Version Length............0x7 Image Version Bytes.............0x30 0x2e 0x35 0x2e 0x30 0x2e 0x34 (0.5.0.4)

7. 8.

Fromthebootmenuoptionsscreen,type2todisplaythebaudrateselectionscreenagain. Type4settheswitchbaudrateto9600.Thefollowingmessagedisplays:
Setting baud rate to 9600, you must change your terminal baud rate.

9.

Settheterminalbaudrateto9600andpressENTER.

10. Fromthebootmenuoptionsscreen,type1tostartthenewoperationalcode.Thefollowing messagedisplays:

Operational Code Date: Tue Jun 29 08:34:05 2004 Uncompressing.....

Reviewing and Selecting a Boot Firmware Image

Purpose
Todisplayandsettheimagefiletheswitchloadsatstartup.TheB2switchallowsyouto downloadandstoreabackupimage,whichcanbeselectedasthestartupimagebyusingthe commandsdescribedinthissection.

3-36

Basic Configuration

show boot system

Commands
Thecommandsusedtoreviewandselecttheswitchsbootimagefilearelistedbelow.
For information about... show boot system set boot system Refer to page... 3-37 3-37

show boot system

Usethiscommandtodisplaythefirmwareimagetheswitchloadsatstartup.

Syntax
show boot system

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheswitchsbootfirmwareimage:
B2(su)->show boot system Current system image to boot: bootfile

set boot system

Usethiscommandtosetthefirmwareimagetheswitchloadsatstartup.

Syntax
set boot system filename

Parameters
filename Specifiesthenameofthefirmwareimagefile.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-37

Starting and Configuring Telnet

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthebootfirmwareimagefiletonewimage:
B2(su)->set boot system newimage

Starting and Configuring Telnet

Purpose
ToenableordisableTelnet,andtostartaTelnetsessiontoaremotehost.TheSecureStackB2 switchallowsatotaloffourinboundand/oroutboundTelnetsessiontorunsimultaneously.

Commands
Thecommandsusedtoenable,startandconfigureTelnetarelistedbelow.
For information about... show telnet set telnet telnet Refer to page... 3-38 3-38 3-39

show telnet
UsethiscommandtodisplaythestatusofTelnetontheswitch.

Syntax
show telnet

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayTelnetstatus:
B2(su)->show telnet Telnet inbound is currently: ENABLED Telnet outbound is currently: ENABLED

set telnet
UsethiscommandtoenableordisableTelnetontheswitch.

3-38

Basic Configuration

telnet

Syntax
set telnet {enable | disable} [inbound | outbound | all]

Parameters
enable|disable inbound| outbound|all EnablesordisablesTelnetservices. (Optional)Specifiesinboundservice(theabilitytoTelnettothisswitch), outboundservice(theabilitytoTelnettootherdevices),orall(both inboundandoutbound).

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,bothinboundandoutboundTelnetservicewillbeenabledordisabled.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisableinboundandoutboundTelnetservices:
B2(su)->set telnet disable all Disconnect all telnet sessions and disable now (y/n)? [n]: y All telnet sessions have been terminated, telnet is now disabled.

telnet
UsethiscommandtostartaTelnetconnectiontoaremotehost.TheSecureStackB2switchallows atotaloffourinboundand/oroutboundTelnetsessiontorunsimultaneously.

Syntax
telnet host [port]

Parameters
host port SpecifiesthenameorIPaddressoftheremotehost. (Optional)Specifiestheserverportnumber.

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,thedefaultportnumber23willbeused.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtostartaTelnetsessiontoahostat10.21.42.13:
B2(su)->telnet 10.21.42.13

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-39

Managing Switch Configuration and Files

Managing Switch Configuration and Files

Configuration Persistence Mode
Thedefaultstateofconfigurationpersistencemodeisauto,whichmeansthatwhenCLI configurationcommandsareentered,orwhenaconfigurationfilestoredontheswitchis executed,theconfigurationissavedtoNVRAMautomaticallyatthefollowingintervals: Onastandaloneunit,theconfigurationischeckedeverytwominutesandsavediftherehas beenachange. Onastack,theconfigurationissavedacrossthestackevery30minutesiftherehasbeena change.

IfyouwanttosavearunningconfigurationtoNVRAMmoreoftenthantheautomaticintervals, executethesaveconfigcommandandwaitforthesystemprompttoreturn.Aftertheprompt returns,theconfigurationwillbepersistent. Youcanchangethepersistencemodefromautotomanualwiththesetsnmppersistmode command.Ifthepersistencemodeissettomanual,configurationcommandswillnotbe automaticallywrittentoNVRAM.Althoughtheconfigurationcommandswillactivelymodifythe runningconfiguration,theywillnotpersistacrossaresetunlessthesaveconfigcommandhas beenexecuted.

Purpose
TosetandviewthepersistencemodeforCLIconfigurationcommands,manuallysavethe runningconfiguration,view,manage,andexecuteconfigurationfilesandimagefiles,andsetand viewTFTPparameters.

Commands
For information about... show snmp persistmode set snmp persistmode save config dir show file show config configure copy delete show tftp settings set tftp timeout clear tftp timeout set tftp retry clear tftp retry Refer to page... 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-45 3-46 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-48 3-49

3-40

Basic Configuration

show snmp persistmode

show snmp persistmode

Usethiscommandtodisplaytheconfigurationpersistencemodesetting.

Syntax
show snmp persistmode

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
Bydefault,themodeissettoautosave,whichautomaticallysavesconfigurationchangesat specificintervals.Ifthemodeissettomanual,configurationcommandsareneverautomatically saved.Inordertomakeconfigurationchangespersistentwhenthemodeismanual,thesave configcommandmustbeissuedasdescribedinConfigurationPersistenceModeonpage340.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheconfigurationpersistencemodesetting.Inthiscase, persistencemodeissettomanual,whichmeansconfigurationchangesarenotbeing automaticallysaved.
B2(su)->show snmp persistmode persistmode is manual

set snmp persistmode

Usethiscommandtosettheconfigurationpersistencemode,whichdetermineswhetheruser definedconfigurationchangesaresavedautomatically,orrequireissuingthesaveconfig command.SeeConfigurationPersistenceModeonpage340formoreinformation.

Syntax
set snmp persistmode {auto | manual}

Parameters
auto manual Setstheconfigurationpersistencemodetoautomatic.Thisisthedefault state. Setstheconfigurationpersistencemodetomanual.Inordertomake configurationchangespersistent,thesaveconfigcommandmustbe issuedasdescribedinsaveconfigonpage342.Thismodeisusefulfor revertingbacktooldconfigurations.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-41

save config

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosettheconfigurationpersistencemodetomanual:
B2(su)->set snmp persistmode manual

save config
Usethiscommandtosavetherunningconfiguration.Ifapplicable,thiscommandwillsavethe configurationtoallswitchmembersinastack. Syntax
save config

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosavetherunningconfiguration:
B2(su)->save config

dir
Usethiscommandtolistconfigurationandimagefilesstoredinthefilesystem.

Syntax
dir [filename]

Parameters
filename (Optional)Specifiesthefilenameordirectorytolist.

Defaults
Iffilenameisnotspecified,allfilesinthesystemwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.
3-42 Basic Configuration

show file

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtolistalltheconfigurationandimagefilesinthesystem:
B2(su)->dir Images: ================================================================== Filename: b2-series_03.01.13 Version: 03.01.13 Size: 6275072 (bytes) Date: Wed Jun 21 00:57:48 2006 CheckSum: d064e2420f57c8b03636e6652b4f8ff5 Compatibility: B2G124-24, B2G124-48, B2H124-48, B2G124-48P, B2H124-48P B2K122-24, B2G170-24, B2G134-24P Filename: Version: Size: Date: CheckSum: Compatibility: b2-series_03.00.14 (Active) (Boot) 03.00.14 6109184 (bytes) Tue Apr 25 13:06:18 2006 e60e044f0e340e994d4124c86f0d40f5 B2G124-24, B2G124-48, B2H124-48, B2G124-48P, B2H124-48P B2K122-24, B2G170-24, B2G134-24P

Files: Size ================================ ======== configs: logs: current.log 32529

show file
Usethiscommandtodisplaythecontentsofafile.

Syntax
show file filename

Parameters
filename Specifiesthenameofthefiletodisplay.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayatextfilenamedmypolicyintheconfigs/directory.Note thatonlyaportionofthefileisshowninthisexample.

B2(rw)->show file configs/mypolicy 1 : 2 : 3 : #policy

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-43

show config

4 : 5 : set policy profile 1 name "Check GUEST" pvid-status enable pvid 4095 untaggedvlans 1 6 : 7 : set policy profile 2 name "User LABORATORIES" pvid-status enable pvid 680 cosstatus enable cos 4 untagged-vlans 680 8 : 9 : set policy profile 3 name "Administrator" pvid-status enable pvid 4095 10 : 11 : set policy profile 4 name "Guest" pvid-status enable pvid 999 cos-status enable cos 3 untagged-vlans 999 12 : 13 : set policy port ge.1.1 4 14 : 15 : set policy port ge.1.2 4

show config
Usethiscommandtodisplaythesystemconfigurationorwritetheconfigurationtoafile.

Syntax
show config [all | facility] [outfile {configs/filename}]

Parameters
all facility (Optional)Displaysdefaultandnondefaultconfigurationsettings. (Optional)Specifiestheexactnameofonefacilityforwhichtoshow configuration.Forexample,enterroutertoshowonlyrouter configuration. (Optional)Specifiesthatthecurrentconfigurationwillbewrittentoatext fileintheconfigs/directory. Specifiesafilenameintheconfigs/directorytodisplay.

outfile configs/filename

Defaults
Bydefault,showconfigwilldisplayallnondefaultconfigurationinformationforallfacilities.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
Theseparatefacilitiesthatcanbedisplayedbythiscommandareidentifiedinthedisplayofthe currentconfigurationbya#precedingthefacilityname.Forexample,#portindicatesthefacility nameport. Examples Thisexampleshowshowtowritethecurrentconfigurationtoafilenamedsave_config2:
B2(rw)->show config all outfile configs/save_config2

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayconfigurationforthefacilityport.
B2(rw)->show config port This command shows non-default configurations only. Use 'show config all' to show both default and non-default configurations.
3-44 Basic Configuration

configure

begin ! #***** NON-DEFAULT CONFIGURATION ***** ! ! #port set port jumbo disable ge.1.1 ! end

configure
Usethiscommandtoexecuteapreviouslydownloadedconfigurationfilestoredontheswitch.

Syntax
configure filename [append]

Parameters
filename append Specifiesthepathandfilenameoftheconfigurationfiletoexecute. (Optional)Appendstheconfigurationfilecontentstothecurrent configuration.Thisisequivalenttotypingthecontentsoftheconfigfile directlyintotheCLIandcanbeused,forexample,tomakeincremental adjustmentstothecurrentconfiguration.

Defaults
Ifappendisnotspecified,thecurrentrunningconfigurationwillbereplacedwiththecontentsof theconfigurationfile,whichwillrequireanautomatedresetofthechassis.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoexecutetheJan1_2004.cfgconfigurationfile:
B2(su)->configure configs/Jan1_2004.cfg

copy
UsethiscommandtouploadordownloadanimageoraCLIconfigurationfile.

Syntax
copy source destination

Parameters
source Specifieslocationandnameofthesourcefiletocopy.Optionsarealocalfile pathintheconfigsdirectory,ortheURLofaTFTPserver.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-45

delete

destination

Specifieslocationandnameofthedestinationwherethefilewillbecopied. Optionsareaslotlocationandfilename,ortheURLofaTFTPserver.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtodownloadanimageviaTFTP:
B2(su)->copy tftp://10.1.192.34/version01000 system:image

Thisexampleshowshowtodownloadaconfigurationfiletotheconfigsdirectory:
B2(su)->copy tftp://10.1.192.1/Jan1_2004.cfg configs/Jan1_2004.cfg

delete
UsethiscommandtoremoveanimageoraCLIconfigurationfilefromtheswitch.

Syntax
delete filename

Parameters
filename Specifiesthelocalpathnametothefile.Validdirectoriesare/imagesand /configs.44.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Usethedircommand(page342)todisplaycurrentimageandconfigurationfilenames.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeletetheJan1_2004.cfgconfigurationfile:
B2(su)->delete configs/Jan1_2004.cfg

show tftp settings

UsethiscommandtodisplayTFTPsettingsusedbytheswitchduringdatatransfersusingTFTP.

Syntax
show tftp settings

3-46

Basic Configuration

set tftp timeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
TheTFTPtimeoutvaluecanbesetwiththesettftptimeoutcommand.TheTFTPretryvaluecan besetwiththesettftpretrycommand.

Example
Thisexampleshowstheoutputofthiscommand.
B2(ro)->show tftp settings TFTP packet timeout (seconds): 2 TFTP max retry: 5

set tftp timeout

UsethiscommandtoconfigurehowlongTFTPwillwaitforareplyofeitheranacknowledgement packetoradatapacketduringadatatransfer.

Syntax
set tftp timeout seconds

Parameters
seconds Specifiesthenumberofsecondstowaitforareply.Thevalidrangeis from1to30seconds.Defaultvalueis2seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplesetsthetimeoutperiodto4seconds.
B2(rw)->set tftp timeout 4

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-47

clear tftp timeout

clear tftp timeout

UsethiscommandtoresettheTFTPtimeoutvaluetothedefaultvalueof2seconds.

Syntax
clear tftp timeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthetimeoutvaluetothedefaultof2seconds.
B2(rw)-> clear tftp timeout

set tftp retry

UsethiscommandtoconfigurehowmanytimesTFTPwillresendapacket,eitheran acknowledgementpacketoradatapacket.

Syntax
set tftp retry retry

Parameters
retry Specifiesthenumberoftimesapacketwillberesent.Thevalidrangeis from1to1000.Defaultvalueis5retries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplesetstheretrycountto3.
B2(rw)->set tftp retry 3

3-48

Basic Configuration

clear tftp retry

clear tftp retry

UsethiscommandtoresettheTFTPretryvaluetothedefaultvalueof5retries.

Syntax
clear tftp retry

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtocleartheretryvaluetothedefaultof5retries.
B2(rw)-> clear tftp retry

Clearing and Closing the CLI

Purpose
TocleartheCLIscreenortocloseyourCLIsession.

Commands
ThecommandsusedtoclearandclosetheCLIsessionarelistedbelow.
For information about... cls exit Refer to page... 3-49 3-50

cls (clear screen)

UsethiscommandtoclearthescreenforthecurrentCLIsession.

Syntax
cls

Parameters
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-49

exit

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheCLIscreen:
B2(su)->cls

exit
UseeitherofthesecommandstoleaveaCLIsession.

Syntax
exit

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
Bydefault,switchtimeoutoccursafter15minutesofuserinactivity,automaticallyclosingyour CLIsession.Usethesetlogoutcommand(page325)tochangethisdefault.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoexitaCLIsession:
B2(su)->exit

Resetting the Switch

Purpose
Toresetoneormoreswitches,andtocleartheuserdefinedconfigurationparameters.

Commands
For information about... reset Refer to page... 3-51

3-50

Basic Configuration

reset

For information about... clear config

Refer to page... 3-51

reset
Usethiscommandtoresettheswitchwithoutlosinganyuserdefinedconfigurationsettings.

Syntax
reset [unit]

Parameters
unit Defaults IfnounitIDisspecified,theentiresystemwillbereset. Mode Switchcommand,readwrite. (Optional)Specifiesaunittobereset.

Usage
ASecureStackB2switchcanalsoberesetwiththeRESETbuttonlocatedonitsfrontpanel.For informationonhowtodothis,refertotheSecureStackB2InstallationGuideshippedwithyour switch.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtoresetthesystem:
B2(su)->reset Are you sure you want to reload the stack? (y/n) y Saving Configuration to stacking members Reloading all switches.

Thisexampleshowshowtoresetunit1:
B2(su)->reset 1 Are you sure you want to reload the switch? (y/n) y Reloading switch 1. This switch is manager of the stack. STACK: detach 3 units

clear config
Usethiscommandtocleartheuserdefinedconfigurationparameters.

Syntax
clear config [all]

Parameters

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-51

Using and Configuring WebView

Defaults
all (Optional)Clearsuserdefinedconfigurationparameters(andstackunit numbersandpriorities,ifapplicable).

Ifallisnotspecified,stackingconfigurationparameterswillnotbecleared. Mode Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ExecutingthiscommandwillcleartheconfigurationinbothNVRAMandonthememorycard,if oneisinstalledontheswitch. ThiscommandwillnotcleartheIPaddressoftheswitch.Usetheclearipaddresscommandto cleartheIPaddress. Whenusingtheclearconfigcommandtoclearconfigurationparametersinastack,itisimportant torememberthefollowing: UseclearconfigtoclearconfigurationparameterswithoutclearingstackunitIDs.This commandWILLNOTclearstackparametersandavoidstheprocessofrenumberingthe stack. Useclearconfigallwhenitisnecessarytoclearallconfigurationparameters,includingstack unitIDs(ifapplicable)andswitchpriorityvalues. UsetheclearipaddresscommandtocleartheIPaddress.

Configurationparametersandstackinginformationcanalsobeclearedonthemasterunitonlyby selectingoption10(restoreconfigurationtofactorydefaults)fromthebootmenuonswitch startup.Thisselectionwillleavestackingprioritiesonallotherunits,ifapplicable.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearconfigurationparameters(includingstackingparameters,if applicable):
B2(su)->clear config all

Using and Configuring WebView

Purpose
Bydefault,WebView(TheEnterasysNetworksembeddedwebserverforswitchconfiguration andmanagementtasks)isenabledonTCPportnumber80ontheSecureStackB2switch.Youcan verifyWebViewstatus,andenableordisableWebViewusingthecommandsdescribedinthis section.WebViewcanalsobesecurelyusedoverSSLport443,ifSSLisenabledontheswitch.By default,SSLisdisabled. TouseWebView,typetheIPaddressoftheswitchinyourbrowser.TouseWebViewoverSSL, typeinhttps://thentheIPaddressoftheswitch.Forexample,https://172.16.2.10.

3-52

Basic Configuration

show webview

Commands
For information about... show webview set webview show ssl set ssl Refer to page... 3-53 3-53 3-54 3-54

show webview
UsethiscommandtodisplayWebViewstatus.

Syntax
show webview

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayWebViewstatus:
B2(rw)->show webview WebView is Enabled.

set webview
UsethiscommandtoenableordisableWebViewontheswitch.

Syntax
set webview {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnableordisableWebViewontheswitch.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-53

show ssl

Usage
ItisgoodpracticeforsecurityreasonstodisableHTTPaccessontheswitchwhenfinished configuringwithWebView,andthentoonlyenableWebViewontheswitchwhenchangesneed tobemade.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisableWebViewontheswitch:
B2(rw)->set webview disable

show ssl
UsethiscommandtodisplaySSLstatus.

Syntax
show ssl

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySSLstatus:
B2(rw)->show ssl SSL status: Enabled

set ssl
UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheuseofWebViewoverSSLport443.Bydefault,SSLis disabledontheswitch.Thiscommandcanalsobeusedtoreinitializethehostkeythatisusedfor encryption.

Syntax
set ssl {enabled | disabled | reinitialize | hostkey reinitialize}

Parameters
enabled|disabled reinitialize hostkeyreinitialize EnableordisabletheabilitytouseWebViewoverSSL. StopsandthenrestartstheSSLprocess. StopsSSL,regeneratesnewkeys,andthenrestartsSSL.

Defaults
None.
3-54 Basic Configuration

set ssl

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableSSL:
B2(rw)->set ssl enabled

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

3-55

set ssl

3-56

Basic Configuration

4
Thischapterdescribeshowtoconfigurediscoveryprotocols.
For information about... Configuring CDP Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED

Discovery Protocol Configuration

Refer to page... 4-1 4-6 4-13

Configuring CDP
Purpose
ToreviewandconfiguretheEnterasysCDPdiscoveryprotocol.Thisprotocolisusedtodiscover networktopology.Whenenabled,thisprotocolallowsEnterasysdevicestosendperiodicPDUs aboutthemselvestoneighboringdevices.

Commands
ThecommandsusedtoreviewandconfiguretheCDPdiscoveryprotocolarelistedbelow.
For information about... show cdp set cdp state set cdp auth set cdp interval set cdp hold-time clear cdp show neighbors Refer to page... 4-1 4-3 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-6

show cdp
UsethiscommandtodisplaythestatusoftheCDPdiscoveryprotocolandmessageintervalon oneormoreports.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-1

show cdp

Syntax
show cdp [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysCDPstatusforaspecificport.Foradetaileddescription ofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLI onpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,allCDPinformationwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayCDPinformationforportsge.1.1throughge.1.9:
B2(su)->show cdp ge.1.1-9 CDP Global Status CDP Version Supported CDP Hold Time CDP Authentication Code CDP Transmit Frequency Port Status ----------------ge.1.1 auto-enable ge.1.2 auto-enable ge.1.3 auto-enable ge.1.4 auto-enable ge.1.5 auto-enable ge.1.6 auto-enable ge.1.7 auto-enable ge.1.8 auto-enable ge.1.9 auto-enable :auto-enable :30 hex :180 :00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 hex :60

Table 46providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 4-6

Output CDP Global Status

show cdp Output Details

What It Displays... Whether CDP is globally auto-enabled, enabled or disabled. The default state of auto-enabled can be reset with the set cdp state command. For details, refer to set cdp state on page 4-3. CDP version number(s) supported by the switch. Minimum time interval (in seconds) at which CDP configuration messages can be set. The default of 180 seconds can be reset with the set cdp hold-time command. For details, refer to set cdp hold-time on page 4-5. Authentication code for CDP discovery protocol. The default of 00-00-00-00-00-0000-00 can be reset using the set cdp auth command. For details, refer to set cdp auth on page 4-3.

CDP Versions Supported CDP Hold Time

CDP Authentication Code

4-2

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set cdp state

Table 4-6
Output

show cdp Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Frequency (in seconds) at which CDP messages can be transmitted. The default of 60 seconds can be reset with the set cdp interval command. For details, refer to set cdp interval on page 4-4. Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. Whether CDP is enabled, disabled or auto-enabled on the port.

CDP Transmit Frequency Port Status

set cdp state

UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheCDPdiscoveryprotocolononeormoreports.

Syntax
set cdp state {auto | disable | enable} [port-string]

Parameters
auto|disable| enable portstring Autoenables,disablesorenablestheCDPprotocolonthespecifiedport(s). Inautoenablemode,whichisthedefaultmodeforallports,aport automaticallybecomesCDPenableduponreceivingitsfirstCDPmessage. (Optional)EnablesordisablesCDPonspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,theCDPstatewillbegloballyset.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtogloballyenableCDP:
B2(su)->set cdp state enable

ThisexampleshowshowtoenabletheCDPforportge.1.2:
B2(su)->set cdp state enable ge.1.2

ThisexampleshowshowtodisabletheCDPforportge.1.2:
B2(su)->set cdp state disable ge.1.2

set cdp auth

UsethiscommandtosetaglobalCDPauthenticationcode.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-3

set cdp interval

Syntax
set cdp auth auth-code

Parameters
authcode SpecifiesanauthenticationcodefortheCDPprotocol.Thiscanbeupto16 hexadecimalvaluesseparatedbycommas.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheauthenticationcodevaluedeterminesaswitchsCDPdomain.Iftwoormoreswitcheshave thesameCDPauthenticationcode,theywillbeenteredintoeachothersCDPneighbortables.If theyhavedifferentauthenticationcodes,theyareindifferentdomainsandwillnotbeentered intoeachothersCDPneighbortables. Aswitchwiththedefaultauthenticationcode(16nullcharacters)willrecognizeallswitches,no matterwhattheirauthenticationcode,andenterthemintoitsCDPneighbortable.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheCDPauthenticationcodeto1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8:
B2(su)->set cdp auth 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8:

set cdp interval

Usethiscommandtosetthemessageintervalfrequency(inseconds)oftheCDPdiscovery protocol.

Syntax
set cdp interval frequency

Parameters
frequency SpecifiesthetransmitfrequencyofCDPmessagesinseconds.Validvalues arefrom5to900seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheCDPintervalfrequencyto15seconds:
B2(su)->set cdp interval 15
4-4 Discovery Protocol Configuration

set cdp hold-time

set cdp hold-time

UsethiscommandtosettheholdtimevalueforCDPdiscoveryprotocolconfigurationmessages.

Syntax
set cdp hold-time hold-time

Parameters
holdtime SpecifiestheholdtimevalueforCDPmessagesinseconds.Validvaluesare from15to600.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetCDPholdtimeto60seconds:
B2(su)->set cdp hold-time 60

clear cdp
UsethiscommandtoresetCDPdiscoveryprotocolsettingstodefaults.

Syntax
clear cdp {[state] [port-state port-string] [interval] [hold-time] [auth-code]}

Parameters
state portstateportstring interval holdtime authcode (Optional)ResetstheglobalCDPstatetoautoenabled. (Optional)Resetstheportstateonspecificport(s)toautoenabled. (Optional)Resetsthemessagefrequencyintervalto60seconds. (Optional)Resetstheholdtimevalueto180seconds. (Optional)Resetstheauthenticationcodeto16bytesof00(000000 0000000000).

Defaults
Atleastoneoptionalparametermustbeentered.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheCDPstatetoautoenabled:
B2(su)->clear cdp state

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-5

show neighbors

show neighbors
ThiscommanddisplaysNeighborDiscoveryinformationforeithertheCDPorCiscoDP protocols.

Syntax
show neighbors [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)SpecifiestheportorportsforwhichtodisplayNeighbor Discoveryinformation.

Defaults
Ifnoportisspecified,allNeighborDiscoveryinformationisdisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
ThiscommanddisplaysinformationdiscoveredbyboththeCDPandtheCiscoDPprotocols.

Example
ThisexampledisplaysNeighborDiscoveryinformationforallports.
B2(su)->show neighbors Port Device ID Port ID Type Network Address -----------------------------------------------------------------------------ge.1.1 00036b8b1587 12.227.1.176 ciscodp 12.227.1.176 ge.1.6 0001f496126f 140.2.3.1 ciscodp 140.2.3.1 ge.1.6 00-01-f4-00-72-fe 140.2.4.102 cdp 140.2.4.102 ge.1.6 00-01-f4-00-70-8a 140.2.4.104 cdp 140.2.4.104 ge.1.6 00-01-f4-c5-f7-20 140.2.4.101 cdp 140.2.4.101 ge.1.6 00-01-f4-89-4f-ae 140.2.4.105 cdp 140.2.4.105 ge.1.6 00-01-f4-5f-1f-c0 140.2.1.11 cdp 140.2.1.11 ge.1.19 0001f400732e 165.32.100.10 ciscodp 165.32.100.10

Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol

Purpose
ToreviewandconfiguretheCiscodiscoveryprotocol.Discoveryprotocolsareusedtodiscover networktopology.Whenenabled,theyallowCiscodevicestosendperiodicPDUsabout themselvestoneighboringdevices.Specifically,thisfeatureenablesrecognizingPDUsfromCisco phones.Atableofinformationaboutdetectedphonesiskeptbytheswitchandcanbequeriedby thenetworkadministrator.

4-6

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show ciscodp

Commands
ThecommandsusedtoreviewandconfiguretheCiscodiscoveryprotocolarelistedbelow.Refer alsotoshowneighborsonpage46.
For information about... show ciscodp show ciscodp port info set ciscodp status set ciscodp timer set ciscodp holdtime set ciscodp port clear ciscodp Refer to page... 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-10 4-10 4-12

show ciscodp
UsethiscommandtodisplayglobalCiscodiscoveryprotocolinformation.

Syntax
show ciscodp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayglobalCiscoDPinformation.
B2(su)->show ciscodp CiscoDP :Enabled Timer :5 Holdtime (TTl): 180 Device ID : 001188554A60 Last Change : WED NOV 08 13:19:56 2006

Table 47providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 4-7

Output CiscoDP

show ciscodp Output Details

What It Displays... Whether Cisco DP is globally enabled or disabled. Auto indicates that Cisco DP will be globally enabled only if Cisco DP PDUs are received. Default setting of auto-enabled can be reset with the set ciscodp status command.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-7

show ciscodp port info

Table 4-7
Output Timer Holdtime

show ciscodp Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... The number of seconds between Cisco discovery protocol PDU transmissions. The default of 60 seconds can be reset with the set ciscodp timer command. Number of seconds neighboring devices will hold PDU transmissions from the sending device. Default value of 180 can be changed with the set ciscodp holdtime command. The MAC address of the switch. The time that the last Cisco DP neighbor was discovered.

Device ID Last Change

show ciscodp port info

UsethiscommandtodisplaysummaryinformationabouttheCiscodiscoveryprotocolononeor moreports.

Syntax
show ciscodp port info [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysCiscoDPinformationforaspecificport.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,CiscoDPinformationforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayCiscoDPinformationforGigabitEthernetport1inslot1.
B2(su)->show ciscodp port info ge.1.1 port state vvid trusted cos ---------------------------------------------ge.1.1 enable none yes 0

Table 48providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 4-8

Output Port State vvid

show ciscodp port info Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. Whether Cisco DP is enabled, disabled or auto-enabled on the port. Default state of enabled can be changed using the set ciscodp port command. Whether a voice VLAN ID has been set on this port. Default of none can be changed using the set ciscodp port command.

4-8

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set ciscodp status

Table 4-8
Output trusted cos

show ciscodp port info Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... The trust mode of the port. Default of trusted can be changed using the set ciscodp port command. The Class of Service priority value for untrusted traffic. The default of 0 can be changed using the set ciscodp port command.

set ciscodp status

UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheCiscodiscoveryprotocolgloballyontheswitch.

Syntax
set ciscodp state {auto | disable | enable}

Parameters
auto disable enable GloballyenableonlyifCiscoDPPDUsarereceived. GloballydisableCiscodiscoveryprotocol. GloballyenableCiscodiscoveryprotocol.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtogloballyenableCiscoDP:
B2(su)->set ciscodp state enable

set ciscodp timer

UsethiscommandtosetthenumberofsecondsbetweenCiscodiscoveryprotocolPDU transmissions.

Syntax
set ciscodp timer seconds

Parameters
seconds SpecifiesthenumberofsecondsbetweenCiscoDPPDUtransmissions. Validvaluesarefrom5to254seconds.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-9

set ciscodp holdtime

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheCiscoDPtimerto120seconds.
B2(su)->set ciscodp timer 120

set ciscodp holdtime

Usethiscommandtosetthetimetolive(TTL)forCiscodiscoveryprotocolPDUs.Thisisthe amountoftime,inseconds,neighboringdeviceswillholdPDUtransmissionsfromthesending device.

Syntax
set ciscodp holdtime hold-time

Parameters
holdtime SpecifiesthetimetoliveforCiscoDPPDUs.Validvaluesarefrom10to255 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetCiscoDPholdtimeto180seconds:
B2(su)->set ciscodp hold-time 180

set ciscodp port

Usethiscommandtosetthestatus,voiceVLAN,extendedtrustmode,andCoSpriorityfor untrustedtrafficfortheCiscoDiscoveryProtocolononeormoreports.

Syntax
set ciscodp port {[status {disable | enable}] [vvid {vlan-id | none | dot1p | untagged}] [trusted {yes | no}] [cos value]} port-string

4-10

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set ciscodp port

Parameters
status disable enable vvid vlanid none dot1p untagged trusted yes SetstheCiscoDPportoperationalstatus. DoesnottransmitorprocessCiscoDPPDUs. TransmitsandprocessesCiscoDPPDUs. SetstheportvoiceVLANforCiscoDPPDUtransmission. SpecifiestheVLANID,range14094. NovoiceVLANwillbeusedinCiscoDPPDUs.Thisisthedefault. Instructsattachedphonetosend802.1ptaggedframes. Instructsattachedphonetosenduntaggedframes. Setstheextendedtrustmodeontheport. Instructsattachedphonetoallowthedeviceconnectedtoittotransmit trafficcontaininganyCoSorLayer2802.1pmarking.Thisisthedefault value. Instructsattachedphonetooverwritethe802.1ptagoftraffic transmittedbythedeviceconnectedtoitto0,bydefault,ortothevalue configuredwiththecosparameter. Instructsattachedphonetooverwritethe802.1ptagoftraffic transmittedbythedeviceconnectedtoitwiththespecifiedvalue,when thetrustmodeoftheportissettountrusted.Valuecanrangefrom0to 7,with0indicatingthelowestpriority. Specifiestheport(s)onwhichstatuswillbeset.

no

cosvalue

portstring

Defaults
Status:enabled VoiceVLAN:none Trustmode:trusted CoSvalue:0

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Usage
ThefollowingpointsdescribehowtheCiscoDPextendedtrustsettingsworkontheswitch. ACiscoDPporttruststatusoftrustedoruntrustedisonlymeaningfulwhenaCiscoIPphone isconnectedtoaswitchportandaPCorotherdeviceisconnectedtothebackoftheCiscoIP phone. ACiscoDPportstateoftrustedoruntrustedonlyaffectstaggedtraffictransmittedbythe deviceconnectedtotheCiscoIPphone.Untaggedtraffictransmittedbythedeviceconnected totheCiscoIPphoneisunaffectedbythissetting. IftheswitchportisconfiguredtoaCiscoDPtruststateoftrusted(withthetrustedyes parameterofthiscommand),thissettingiscommunicatedtotheCiscoIPphoneinstructingit toallowthedeviceconnectedtoittotransmittrafficcontaininganyCoSorLayer2802.1p marking.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-11

clear ciscodp

IftheswitchportisconfiguredtoaCiscoDPtruststateofuntrusted(trustedno),thissetting iscommunicatedtotheCiscoIPphoneinstructingittooverwritethe802.1ptagoftraffic transmittedbythedeviceconnectedtoitto0,bydefault,ortothevaluespecifiedbythecos parameterofthiscommand. Thereisaonetoonecorrelationbetweenthevaluesetwiththecosparameterandthe802.1p valueassignedtoingressedtrafficbytheCiscoIPphone.Avalueof0equatestoan802.1p priorityof0.Therefore,avalueof7isgiventhehighestpriority.

Note: The Cisco Discovery Protocol must be globally enabled using the set ciscodp status command before operational status can be set on individual ports.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheCiscoDPportvoiceVLANIDto3onportge.1.6andenable theportoperationalstate.
B2(rw)->set ciscodp port status enable vvid 3 ge.1.6

ThisexampleshowshowtosettheCiscoDPextendedtrustmodetountrustedonportge.1.5and settheCoSpriorityto1.
B2(rw)->set ciscodp port trusted no cos 1 ge.1.5

clear ciscodp
UsethiscommandtocleartheCiscodiscoveryprotocolbacktothedefaultvalues.

Syntax
clear ciscodp [status | timer | holdtime | {port {status | vvid | trust | cos} [port-string]}]

Parameters
status timer holdtime port status vvid trust cos portstring ClearsglobalCiscoDPenablestatustodefaultofauto. ClearsthetimebetweenCiscoDPPDUtransmissionstodefaultof60 seconds. ClearsthetimetoliveforCiscoDPPDUdatatodefaultof180seconds. ClearstheCiscoDPportconfiguration. Clearstheindividualportoperationalstatustothedefaultofenabled. ClearstheindividualportvoiceVLANforCiscoDPPDUtransmission to0. Clearsthetrustmodeconfigurationoftheporttotrusted. ClearstheCoSpriorityforuntrustedtrafficoftheportto0. (Optional)Specifiestheport(s)onwhichstatuswillbeset.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersareentered,allCiscoDPparametersareresettothedefaultsgloballyandforall ports.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.
4-12 Discovery Protocol Configuration

Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearalltheCiscoDPparametersbacktothedefaultsettings.
B2(rw)->clear ciscodp

ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheCiscoDPstatusonportge.1.5.
B2(rw)->clear ciscodp port status ge.1.5

Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED

Overview
TheLinkLayerDiscoveryProtocol(LLPD)issimilartotheEnterasysDiscoveryProtocolandthe CiscoDiscoveryProtocolinthatitprovidesanindustrystandard,vendorneutralwaytoallow networkdevicestoadvertisetheiridentitiesandcapabilitiesonalocalareanetwork,andto discoverthatinformationabouttheirneighbors. LLDPMEDisanenhancementtoLLDPthatprovidesthefollowingbenefits: ExtendedandautomatedpowermanagementofPoweroverEthernetendpoints Inventorymanagement,allowingnetworkadministratorstotracktheirnetworkdevicesand todeterminetheircharacteristics,suchasmanufacturer,softwareandhardwareversions,and serialorassetnumbers

TheinformationsentbyanLLDPenableddeviceisextractedandtabulatedbyitspeers.The communicationcanbedonewheninformationchangesoronaperiodicbasis.Theinformation tabulatedisagedtoensurethatitiskeptuptodate.Portscanbeconfiguredtosendthis information,receivethisinformation,orbothsendandreceive. EitherLLDPorLLDPMED,butnotboth,canbeusedonaninterfacebetweentwodevices.A switchportusesLLDPMEDwhenitdetectsthatanLLDPMEDcapabledeviceisconnectedtoit. LLDPinformationiscontainedwithinaLinkLayerDiscoveryProtocolDataUnit(LLDPDU)sent inasingle802.3Ethernetframe.TheinformationfieldsinLLDPDUareasequenceofshort, variablelength,informationelementsknownasTLVstype,length,andvaluefieldswhere: Typeidentifieswhatkindofinformationisbeingsent Lengthindicatesthelengthoftheinformationstringinoctets Valueistheactualinformationthatneedstobesent

TheLLDPstandardspecifiesthatcertainTLVsaremandatoryintransmittedLLDPDUs,while othersareoptional.YoucanconfigureonaportspecificbasiswhichoptionalLLDPandLLDP MEDTLVsshouldbesentinLLDPDUs.

Purpose
ToreviewandconfigureLLPDandLLPDMED.

Commands
ThecommandsusedtoreviewandconfiguretheCDPdiscoveryprotocolarelistedbelow.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-13

Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED

For information about... show lldp show lldp port status show lldp port trap show lldp port tx-tlv show lldp port location-info show lldp port local-info show lldp port remote-info set lldp tx-interval set lldp hold-multiplier set lldp trap-interval set lldp med-fast-repeat set lldp port status set lldp port trap set lldp port med-trap set lldp port location-info set lldp port tx-tlv clear lldp clear lldp port status clear lldp port trap clear lldp port med-trap clear lldp port location-info clear lldp port tx-tlv clear lldp port tx-tlv

Refer to page... 4-15 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-17 4-18 4-20 4-22 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26 4-26 4-28 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-30 4-30 4-30

4-14

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show lldp

Configuration Tasks
Thecommandsincludedinthisimplementationallowyoutoperformthefollowingconfiguration tasks:
Step 1. Task Configure global system LLDP parameters Command(s) set lldp tx-interval set lldp hold-multiplier set lldp trap-interval set lldp med-fast-repeat clear lldp 2. Enable/disable specific ports to: Transmit and process received LLDPDUs Send LLDP traps Send LLDP-MED traps set/clear lldp port status set/clear lldp port trap set/clear lldp port med-trap

show lldp
UsethiscommandtodisplayLLDPconfigurationinformation.

Syntax
show lldp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayLLDPconfigurationinformation.
B2(ro)->show lldp Message Tx Interval Message Tx Hold Multiplier Notification Tx Interval MED Fast Start Count Tx-Enabled Ports Rx-Enabled Ports Trap-Enabled Ports MED Trap-Enabled Ports : : : : 30 4 5 3

: ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12; : ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12; : ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12; : ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12;

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-15

show lldp port status

show lldp port status

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheLLDPstatusofoneormoreports.Thecommandliststheports thatareenabledtosendandreceiveLLDPPDUs.Portsareenabledordisabledwiththesetlldp portstatuscommand.

Syntax
show lldp port status [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysLLDPstatusforoneorarangeofports.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,LLDPstatusinformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayLLDPportstatusinformationforallports.
B2(ro)->show lldp port status Tx-Enabled Ports Rx-Enabled Ports : ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12 : ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12

show lldp port trap

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheportsthatareenabledtosendanLLDPnotificationwhena remotesystemchangehasbeendetectedoranLLDPMEDnotificationwhenachangeinthe topologyhasbeensensed.PortsareenabledtosendLLDPnotificationswiththesetlldpporttrap commandandtosendLLDPMEDnotificationswiththesetlldpportmedtrapcommand.

Syntax
show lldp port trap [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaystheportorrangeofportsthathavebeenenabled tosendLLDPand/orLLDPMEDnotifications.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,LLDPporttrapinformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

4-16

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show lldp port tx-tlv

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayLLDPporttrapinformationforallports.
B2(ro)->show lldp port trap Trap-Enabled Ports : MED Trap-Enabled Ports:

show lldp port tx-tlv

UsethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutwhichoptionalTLVshavebeenconfiguredtobe transmittedonports.PortsareconfiguredtosendoptionalTLVswiththesetlldpporttxtlv command.

Syntax
showlldpporttxtlv[portstring]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysinformationaboutTLVconfigurationforoneora rangeofports.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,TLVconfigurationinformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytransmitTLVinformationforthreeports.
B2(ro)->show lldp port tx-tlv ge.1.1-3 * Means TLV is supported and enabled on this port o Means TLV is supported on this port Means TLV is not supported on this port Column Pro Id uses letter notation for enable: s-stp, l-lacp, g-gvrp Ports ------ge.1.1 ge.1.2 ge.1.3 Port Desc ---* * * Sys Name ---* * * Sys Desc ---* * * Sys Cap --* * * Mgmt Addr ---* * * Vlan Id ---* * * Pro Id ---slg slg slg MAC PoE Link Max PHY Aggr Frame --- --- ---- ---* * * * * * * * * MED MED MED MED Cap Pol Loc PoE --- --- --- --* * * *

show lldp port location-info

Usethiscommandtodisplayconfiguredlocationinformationforoneormoreports.Portsare configuredwithalocationvalueusingthesetlldpportlocationinfocommand.

Syntax
show lldp port location-info [port-string]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-17

show lldp port local-info

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysportlocationinformationforoneorarangeof ports.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,portlocationconfigurationinformationwillbedisplayedforall ports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayportlocationinformationforthreeports.
B2(ro)->show lldp port location-info ge.1.1-3 Ports -------ge.1.1 ge.1.2 ge.1.3 Type ------------ELIN ELIN ELIN Location ------------------------1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

show lldp port local-info

Usethiscommandtodisplaythelocalsysteminformationstoredforoneormoreports.Youcan usethisinformationtodetectmisconfigurationsorincompatibilitiesbetweenthelocalportand theattachedendpointdevice(remoteport).

Syntax
show lldp port local-info [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displayslocalsysteminformationforoneorarangeof ports.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,localsysteminformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythelocalsysteminformationstoredforportge.4.1.Table 49 describestheoutputfieldsofthiscommand.
B2(rw)->show lldp port local-info ge.4.1 Local Port : ge.4.1 Local Port Id: ge.4.1 -------------------Port Desc : ... 1000BASE-TX RJ45 Gigabit Ethernet Frontpanel Port

4-18

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show lldp port local-info

Mgmt Addr : 10.21.64.100 Chassis ID : 00-E0-63-93-74-A5 Sys Name : LLDP PoE test Chassis Sys Desc : Enterasys Networks, Inc. Sys Cap Supported/Enabled : bridge,router/bridge Auto-Neg Supported/Enabled Auto-Neg Advertised : yes/yes : 10BASE-T, 10BASE-TFD, 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-TXFD, 1000BASE-TFD, Bpause Operational Speed/Duplex/Type : 100 full tx Max Frame Size (bytes) : 1522 Vlan Id : 1 LAG Supported/Enabled/Id : no/no/0 Protocol Id : Spanning Tree v-3 (IEEE802.1s) LACP v-1 GVRP PoE PoE PoE PoE PoE PoE PoE Device Power Source MDI Supported/Enabled Pair Controllable/Used Power Class Power Limit (mW) Power Priority : : : : : : : PSE device primary yes/yes false/spare 2 15400 high

Table 49describestheinformationdisplayedbytheshowlldpportlocalinfocommand. Table 4-9 show lldp port local-info Output Details
What it Displays... Identifies the port for which local system information is displayed. Mandatory basic LLDP TLV that identifies the port transmitting the LLDPDU. Value is ifName object defined in RFC 2863. Optional basic LLDP TLV. Value is ifDescr object defined in RFC 2863. Optional basic LLDP TLV. IPv4 address of host interface. Mandatory basic LLDP TLV that identifies the chassis transmitting the LLDPDU. Value is MAC address of chassis. Optional basic LLDP TLV. Value is the administratively assigned name for the system. Optional basic LLDP TLV. Value is sysDescr object defined in RFC 3418. Optional basic LLDP TLV. System capabilities, value can be bridge and/or router. IEEE 802.3 Extensions MAC-PHY Configuration/Status TLV. Autonegotiation supported and enabled settings should be the same on the two systems attached to the same link. IEEE 802.3 Extensions MAC-PHY Configuration/Status TLV. Lists the configured advertised values on the port. IEEE 802.3 Extensions MAC-PHY Configuration/Status TLV. Lists the operational MAU type, duplex, and speed of the port. If the received TLV indicates that auto-negotiation is supported but not enabled, these values will be used by the port.

Output Field Local Port Local Port Id Port Desc Mgmt Addr Chassis ID Sys Name Sys Desc Sys Cap Supported/Enabled Auto-Neg Supported/Enabled

Auto-Neg Advertised Operational Speed/Duplex/ Type

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-19

show lldp port remote-info

Table 4-9

show lldp port local-info Output Details (Continued)

What it Displays... IEEE 802.3 Extensions Maximum Frame Size TLV. Value indicates maximum frame size capability of the devices MAC and PHY. In normal mode, max frame size is 1522 bytes. In jumbo mode, max frame size is 10239 bytes. IEEE 802.1 Extensions Port VLAN ID TLV. Value is port VLAN ID (pvid). IEEE 802.3 Extensions Link Aggregation TLV. Values indicate whether the link associated with this port can be aggregated, whether it is currently aggregated, and if aggregated, the aggregated port identifier. IEEE 802.1 Extensions Protocol Identity TLV. Values can include Spanning tree, LACP, and GARP protocols and versions. Only those protocols enabled on the port are displayed. LLDP-MED Extensions Location Identification TLV. Emergency Call Services (ECS) Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) is currently the only type supported. Value is the ELIN configured on this port. LLDP-MED Extensions Extended Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port has PoE capabilities. Value is the Power Type of the device. On a switch port, the value is Power Sourcing Entity (PSE). LLDP-MED Extensions Extended Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port has PoE capabilities. Value can be primary or backup, indicating whether the PSE is using its primary or backup power source. IEEE 802.3 Extensions Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port has PoE capabilities. Indicates whether sending the Power via MDI TLV is supported/enabled. Value can be yes or no. IEEE 802.3 Extensions Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port has PoE capabilities. Indicates whether pair selection can be controlled on the given port (refer to RFC 3621). Value for Controllable can be true or false. Value of Used can be signal (signal pairs only are in use) or spare (spare pairs only are in use). IEEE 802.3 Extensions Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port has PoE capabilities. Indicates the power class supplied by the port. Value can range from 0 to 4. LLDP-MED Extensions Extended Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port has PoE capabilities. Indicates the total power the port is capable of sourcing over a maximum length cable, based on its current configuration, in milli-Watts. LLDP-MED Extensions Extended Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port has PoE capabilities. Indicates the power priority configured on the port. Value can be critical, high, or low.

Output Field Max Frame Size (bytes)

Vlan Id LAG Supported/Enabled/Id

Protocol Id

ECS ELIN

PoE Device

PoE Power Source

PoE MDI Supported/Enabled

PoE Pair Controllable/Used

PoE Power Class

PoE Power Limit (mW)

PoE Power Priority

show lldp port remote-info

Usethiscommandtodisplaytheremotesysteminformationstoredforaremotedeviceconnected toalocalport.Youcanusethisinformationtodetectmisconfigurationsorincompatibilities betweenthelocalportandtheattachedendpointdevice(remoteport).

Syntax
show lldp port remote-info [port-string]

4-20

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show lldp port remote-info

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysremotesysteminformationforoneorarangeof ports.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,remotesysteminformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheremotesysteminformationstoredforportge.3.1.The remotesysteminformationwasreceivedfromanIPphone,whichisanLLDPMEDenabled device.Table 410describestheoutputfieldsthatareuniquetotheremotesysteminformation displayedforaMEDenableddevice.
B2(ro)->show lldp port remote-info ge.3.1 Local Port : ge.3.1 Remote Port Id : 00-09-6e-0e-14-3d --------------------Mgmt Addr : 0.0.0.0 Chassis ID : 0.0.0.0 Device Type : Communication Device Endpoint (class III) Sys Name : AVE0E143D Sys Cap Supported/Enabled : bridge,telephone/bridge Auto-Neg Supported/Enabled Auto-Neg Advertised : : : : yes/yes 10BASE-T, 10BASE-TFD 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-TXFD pause, Spause

Operational Speed/Duplex/Type : 100/full/TX Hardware Revision Firmware Revision Software Revision Serial Number Manufacturer Model Number : : : : : : 4610D01A b10d01b2_7.bin a10d01b2_7.bin 05GM42004348 Avaya 4610

Notethattheinformationfieldsdisplayedbytheshowlldpportremoteinfocommandwillvary, dependingonthetypeofremotedevicethatisconnectedtotheport. Table 410describestheoutputfieldsthatareuniquetotheremotesysteminformationdatabase. RefertoTable 49onpage 19fordescriptionsoftheinformationfieldsthatarecommontoboth thelocalandtheremotesysteminformationdatabases. Table 4-10
Output Field Remote Port Id Device Type Hardware Revision Firmware Revision

show lldp port remote-info Output Display

What it Displays... Displays whatever port Id information received in the LLDPDU from the remote device. In this case, the port Id is MAC address of remote device. Mandatory LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV. Displayed only when the port is connected to an LLDP-MED-capable endpoint device. LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component. LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-21

set lldp tx-interval

Table 4-10
Output Field

show lldp port remote-info Output Display

What it Displays... LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component. LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component. LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component. LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component. LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component. In the above example, no asset ID was received from the remote device so the field is not displayed.

Software Revision Serial Number Manufacturer Model Number Asset ID

set lldp tx-interval

Usethiscommandtosetthetime,inseconds,betweensuccessiveLLDPframetransmissions initiatedbychangesintheLLDPlocalsysteminformation.

Syntax
set lldp tx-interval frequency

Parameters
frequency SpecifiesthenumberofsecondsbetweentransmissionsofLLDP frames.Valuecanrangefrom5to32,768seconds.Thedefaultis30 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplesetsthetransmitintervalto20seconds.
B2(rw)->set lldp tx-interval 20

set lldp hold-multiplier

UsethiscommandtosetthetimetolivevalueusedinLLDPframessentbythisdevice.Thetime toliveforLLDPDUdataiscalculatedbymultiplyingthetransmitintervalbytheholdmultiplier value.

Syntax
set lldp hold-multiplier multiplier-val

4-22

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set lldp trap-interval

Parameters
multiplierval Specifiesthemultipliertoapplytothetransmitintervaltodetermine thetimetolivevalue.Valuecanrangefrom2to10.Defaultvalueis 4.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplesetsthetransmitintervalto20secondsandtheholdmultiplierto5,whichwill configureatimetoliveof100tobeusedintheTTLfieldintheLLDPDUheader.
B2(rw)->set lldp tx-interval 20 B2(rw)->set lldp hold-multiplier 5

set lldp trap-interval

UsethiscommandtosettheminimumintervalbetweenLLDPnotificationssentbythisdevice. LLDPnotificationsaresentwhenaremotesystemchangehasbeendetected.

Syntax
set lldp trap-interval frequency

Parameters
frequency SpecifiestheminimumtimebetweenLLDPtraptransmissions,in seconds.Thevaluecanrangefrom5to3600seconds.Thedefault valueis5seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexamplesetstheminimumintervalbetweenLLDPtrapsto10seconds.
B2(rw)->set lldp trap-interval 10

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-23

set lldp med-fast-repeat

set lldp med-fast-repeat

NetworkconnectivitydevicestransmitonlyLLDPTLVsinLLDPDUsuntiltheydetectthatan LLDPMEDendpointdevicehasconnectedtoaport.Atthatpoint,thenetworkconnectivity devicestartssendingLLDPMEDTLVsatafaststartrateonthatport.Usethiscommandtoset thenumberofsuccessiveLLDPDUs(withLLDPMEDTLVs)tobesentforonecompletefaststart interval.

Syntax
set lldp med-fast-repeat count

Parameters
count SpecifiesthenumberoffaststartLLDPDUstobesentwhenan LLDPMEDendpointdeviceisdetected.Valuecanrangefrom1to 10.Defaultis3.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexamplesetsthenumberoffaststartLLDPDUstobesentto4.
B2(rw)->set lldp med-fast-repeat 4

set lldp port status

UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletransmittingandprocessingreceivedLLDPDUsonaport orrangeofports.

Syntax
set lldp port status {tx-enable | rx-enable | both | disable} port-string

Parameters
txenable rxenable both disable portstring EnablestransmittingLLDPDUsonthespecifiedports. EnablesreceivingandprocessingLLDPDUsfromremotesystemson thespecifiedports. EnablesbothtransmittingandprocessingreceivedLLDPDUsonthe specifiedports. DisablesbothtransmittingandprocessingreceivedLLDPDUsonthe specifiedports. Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

Defaults
None.

4-24

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set lldp port trap

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleenablesbothtransmittingLLDPDUsandreceivingandprocessingLLDPDUsfrom remotesystemsonportsge.1.1throughge.1.6.
B2(rw)->set lldp port status both ge.1.1-6

set lldp port trap

UsethiscommandtoenableordisablesendingLLDPnotifications(traps)whenaremotesystem changeisdetected.

Syntax
set lldp port trap {enable | disable} port-string

Parameters
enable disable portstring EnabletransmittingLLDPtrapsonthespecifiedports. DisabletransmittingLLDPtrapsonthespecifiedports. Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleenablestransmittingLLDPtrapsonportsge.1.1throughge.1.6.
B2(rw)->set lldp port trap enable ge.1.1-6

set lldp port med-trap

UsethiscommandtoenableordisablesendinganLLDPMEDnotificationwhenachangeinthe topologyhasbeensensedontheport(thatis,aremoteendpointdevicehasbeenattachedor removedfromtheport).

Syntax
set lldp port med-trap {enable | disable} port-string

Parameters
enable disable portstring EnablestransmittingLLDPMEDtrapsonthespecifiedports. DisablestransmittingLLDPMEDtrapsonthespecifiedports. Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-25

set lldp port location-info

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleenablestransmittingLLDPMEDtrapsonportsge.1.1throughge.1.6.
B2(rw)->set lldp port med-trap enable ge.1.1-6

set lldp port location-info

UsethiscommandtoconfigureLLDPMEDlocationinformationonaportorrangeofports. Currently,onlyEmergencyCallServices(ECS)EmergencyLocationIdentificationNumber (ELIN)issupported.

Syntax
set lldp port location-info elin elin-string port-string

Parameters
elin elinstring portstring SpecifiesthattheECSELINdataformatistobeused. Specifiesthelocationidentifier.Valuecanbefrom10to25numerical characters. Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Afteryouconfigurealocationinformationvalue,youmustalsoconfiguretheporttosendthe LocationInformationTLVwiththesetlldpporttxtlvcommand.Thisexampleconfiguresthe ELINidentifier5551234567onportsge.1.1throughge.1.6andthenconfigurestheportstosend theLocationInformationTLV.
B2(rw)->set lldp port location-info 5551234567 ge.1.1-6 B2(rw)->set lldp port tx-tlv med-loc ge.1.1-6

set lldp port tx-tlv

UsethiscommandtoselecttheoptionalLLDPandLLDPMEDTLVstobetransmittedin LLDPDUsbythespecifiedportorports.Usetheshowlldpportlocalinfocommandtodisplay thevaluesoftheseTLVsfortheport.

4-26

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set lldp port tx-tlv

Syntax
set lldp port tx-tlv {[all] | [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] [mgmtaddr] [vlan-id] [stp] [lacp] [gvrp] [mac-phy] [poe] [link-aggr] [max-frame] [medcap] [med-loc] [med-poe]} port-string

Parameters
all portdesc sysname sysdesc syscap mgmtaddr vlanid stp AddsalloptionalTLVstotransmittedLLDPDUs. PortDescriptionoptionalbasicLLDPTLV.ValuesentisifDescr objectdefinedinRFC2863. SystemNameoptionalbasicLLDPTLV.Valuesentisthe administrativelyassignednameforthesystem. SystemDescriptionoptionalbasicLLDPTLV.ValuesentissysDescr objectdefinedinRFC3418. SystemCapabilitiesoptionalbasicLLDPTLV.Foranetwork connectivitydevice,valuesentcanbebridgeand/orrouter. ManagementAddressoptionalbasicLLDPTLV.ValuesentisIPv4 addressofhostinterface. PortVLANIDIEEE802.1ExtensionsTLV.ValuesentisportVLAN ID(PVID). SpanningTreeinformationdefinedbyProtocolIdentityIEEE802.1 ExtensionsTLV.IfSTPisenabledontheport,valuesentincludes versionofprotocolbeingused. LACPinformationdefinedbyProtocolIdentityIEEE802.1 ExtensionsTLV.IfLACPisenabledontheport,valuesentincludes versionofprotocolbeingused. GVRPinformationdefinedbyProtocolIdentityIEEE802.1 ExtensionsTLV.IfLACPisenabledontheport,valuesentincludes versionofprotocolbeingused. MACPHYConfiguration/StatusIEEE802.3ExtensionsTLV.Value sentincludestheoperationalMAUtype,duplex,andspeedofthe port. PowerviaMDIIEEE802.3ExtensionsTLV.Valuessentinclude whetherpairselectioncanbecontrolledonport,andthepowerclass suppliedbytheport.OnlyvalidforPoEenabledports. LinkAggregationIEEE802.3ExtensionsTLV.Valuessentindicate whetherthelinkassociatedwiththisportcanbeaggregated, whetheritiscurrentlyaggregated,andifaggregated,theaggregated portidentifier. MaximumFrameSizeIEEE802.3ExtensionsTLV.Valuesent indicatesmaximumframesizeoftheportsMACandPHY. LLDPMEDCapabilitiesTLV.Valuesentindicatesthecapabilities (whetherthedevicesupportslocationinformation,extendedpower viaMDI)andDeviceType(networkconnectivitydevice)ofthe sendingdevice. LLDPMEDLocationIdentificationTLV.ValuesentistheECSELIN valueconfiguredontheport.Seethesetlldpportlocationinfo commandformoreinformation.

lacp

gvrp

macphy

poe

linkaggr

maxframe medcap

medloc

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-27

clear lldp

medpoe

LLDPMEDExtendedPowerviaMDITLV.Valuessentincludethe PowerLimit(totalpowertheportiscapableofsourcingovera maximumlengthcable)andthepowerpriorityconfiguredonthe port.OnlyvalidforPoEenabledports. Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

portstring

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleconfiguresthemanagementaddress,MEDcapability,andMEDlocation identificationTLVstobesentinLLDPDUsbyportge.1.1.
B2(rw)->set lldp port tx-tlv mgmt-addr med-cap med-loc ge.1.1

clear lldp
UsethiscommandtoreturnLLDPparameterstotheirdefaultvalues.

Syntax
clear lldp {all | tx-interval | hold-multiplier | trap-interval | med-fast-repeat}

Parameters
all txinterval holdmultiplier trapinterval medfastrepeat ReturnsallLLDPconfigurationparameterstotheirdefaultvalues, includingportLLDPconfigurationparameters. ReturnsthenumberofsecondsbetweentransmissionsofLLDP frames.tothedefaultof30seconds. Returnsthemultipliertoapplytothetransmitintervaltodetermine thetimetolivevaluetothedefaultvalueof4. ReturnstheminimumtimebetweenLLSPtraptransmissionstothe defaultvalueof5seconds. ReturnsthenumberoffaststartLLDPDUstobesentwhenanLLDP MEDendpointdeviceisdetectedtothedefaultof3.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplereturnsthetransmitintervaltothedefaultvalueof30seconds.
B2(rw)->clear lldp tx-interval

4-28

Discovery Protocol Configuration

clear lldp port status

clear lldp port status

Usethiscommandtoreturntheportstatustothedefaultvalueofboth(bothtransmittingand processingreceivedLLDPDUsareenabled).

Syntax
clear lldp port status port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplereturnsportge.1.1tothedefaultstateofenabledforbothtransmittingand processingreceivedLLDPDUs.
B2(rw)->clear lldp port status ge.1.1

clear lldp port trap

UsethiscommandtoreturntheportLLDPtrapsettingtothedefaultvalueofdisabled.

Syntax
clear lldp port trap port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplereturnsportge.1.1tothedefaultLLDPtrapstateofdisabled.
B2(rw)->clear lldp port trap ge.1.1

clear lldp port med-trap

UsethiscommandtoreturntheportLLDPMEDtrapsettingtothedefaultvalueofdisabled.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

4-29

clear lldp port location-info

Syntax
clear lldp port med-trap port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplereturnsportge.1.1tothedefaultLLDPMEDtrapstateofdisabled.
B2(rw)->clear lldp port med-trap ge.1.1

clear lldp port location-info

UsethiscommandtoreturntheportECSELINlocationsettingtothedefaultvalueofnull.

Syntax
clear lldp port location-info elin port-string

Parameters
elin portstring SpecifiesthattheECSELINlocationinformationvalueshouldbe cleared. Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexamplereturnsthelocationinformationELINvalueonportge.1.1tothedefaultvalueof null.
B2(rw)->clear lldp port location-info elin ge.1.1

clear lldp port tx-tlv

UsethiscommandtocleartheoptionalLLDPandLLDPMEDTLVstobetransmittedin LLDPDUsbythespecifiedportorportstothedefaultvalueofdisabled.

4-30

Discovery Protocol Configuration

clear lldp port tx-tlv

Syntax
clear lldp port tx-tlv {[all] | [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] [mgmtaddr] [vlan-id] [stp] [lacp] [gvrp] [mac-phy] [poe] [link-aggr] [max-frame] [medcap] [med-loc] [med-poe]} port-string

Parameters
all portdesc sysname sysdesc syscap mgmtaddr vlanid stp lacp gvrp macphy poe linkaggr maxframe medcap medloc medpoe portstring DisablesalloptionalTLVsfrombeingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablesthePortDescriptionoptionalbasicLLDPTLVfrombeing transmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheSystemNameoptionalbasicLLDPTLVfrombeing transmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheSystemDescriptionoptionalbasicLLDPTLVfrom beingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheSystemCapabilitiesoptionalbasicLLDPTLVfrom beingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheManagementAddressoptionalbasicLLDPTLVfrom beingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablesthePortVLANIDIEEE802.1ExtensionsTLVfrombeing transmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheSpanningTreeinformationdefinedbyProtocolIdentity IEEE802.1ExtensionsTLVfrombeingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheLACPinformationdefinedbyProtocolIdentityIEEE 802.1ExtensionsTLVfrombeingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheGVRPinformationdefinedbyProtocolIdentityIEEE 802.1ExtensionsTLVfrombeingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheMACPHYConfiguration/StatusIEEE802.3Extensions TLVfrombeingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablesthePowerviaMDIIEEE802.3ExtensionsTLVfrombeing transmittedinLLDPDUs.OnlyvalidforPoEenabledports. DisablestheLinkAggregationIEEE802.3ExtensionsTLVfrombeing transmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheMaximumFrameSizeIEEE802.3ExtensionsTLVfrom beingtransmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheLLDPMEDCapabilitiesTLVfrombeingtransmittedin LLDPDUs. DisablestheLLDPMEDLocationIdentificationTLVfrombeing transmittedinLLDPDUs. DisablestheLLDPMEDExtendedPowerviaMDITLVfrombeing transmittedinLLDPDUs.OnlyvalidforPoEenabledports. Specifiestheportorrangeofportstobeaffected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 4-31

clear lldp port tx-tlv

Example
Thisexampledisablesthemanagementaddress,MEDcapability,andMEDlocationidentification TLVsfrombeingsentinLLDPDUsbyportge.1.1.
B2(rw)->clear lldp port tx-tlv mgmt-addr med-cap med-loc ge.1.1

4-32

Discovery Protocol Configuration

Port Configuration
ThischapterdescribesthePortConfigurationsetofcommandsandhowtousethem.
For information about... Port Configuration Summary Reviewing Port Status Disabling / Enabling and Naming Ports Setting Speed and Duplex Mode Enabling / Disabling Jumbo Frame Support Setting Auto-Negotiation and Advertised Ability Setting Flow Control Setting Port Link Traps and Link Flap Detection Configuring Broadcast Suppression Port Mirroring Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Configuring Protected Ports Refer to page... 5-1 5-3 5-6 5-9 5-11 5-13 5-17 5-18 5-27 5-29 5-32 5-45

Port Configuration Summary

B2H124-48 and B2H124-48P Switch Ports
TheB2H12448andB2H12448Pstackabledevicesprovidethefollowingtypesoffrontpanel connections: 48fixedRJ4510/100MbpscopperFastEthernetports 4SFPslots(labeledports49through52)thatprovidetheoptionofinstallingSmallForm Pluggable(SFP)MiniGBICsfor1000BASETcompliantcopperconnectionsor1000BASE SX\LX\ELXfiberopticconnections

B2G124-24, B2G124-48, and B2G124-48P Switch Ports

TheB2G12424,B2G12448andB2G12448Pstackabledevicesprovidethefollowingtypesof switchportconnections: 24or48RJ4510/100/1000Mbps1000BASETGigabitEthernetcopperports

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-1

Port Configuration Summary

4SFPslots(labeledports21through24orports45through48)thatprovidetheoptionof installingSmallFormPluggable(SFP)MiniGBICsfor1000BASETcompliantcopper connectionsor1000BASESX\LX\ELXfiberopticconnections.

Important Notice About B2Gxxx-xx 10/100/100 and SFP Mini-GBIC Ports

SFP Mini-GBIC uplink ports are used in an either / or configuration with their corresponding RJ45 10/100/ 1000 Mbps 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet copper ports. If all Mini-GBIC ports are used, the four corresponding RJ45 ports will be disabled. The maximum number of active ports can be 24 on the B2G124-24, and 48 on the B2G124-48 and B2G124-48P, in any combination of RJ45s and Mini-GBICs. This does not apply to the B2Hxxx-xx switches.

Port String Syntax Used in the CLI

Commandsrequiringaportstringparameterusethefollowingsyntaxtodesignateporttype,slot location,andportnumber: porttype.unitnumber.portnumber Whereporttypecanbe: fefor100MbpsEthernet gefor1GbpsEthernet tgfor10GbpsEthernet hostforthehostport vlanforvlaninterfaces lagforIEEE802.3linkaggregationports Unitnumbercanbe: 18forswitchunitsinaSecureStackB2stack Portnumbercanbe: 152fortheB2H12448andB2H12448P 148fortheB2G12448andB2G12448P 124fortheB2G12424 Thehighestvalidportnumberisdependentonthenumberofportsinthedeviceandtheport type.

Port Slot/Unit Parameters Used in the CLI

TheunitparameterisoftenusedinterchangeablywithmoduleintheSecureStackCLIto indicateamoduleslotlocation.

Examples
Note: You can use a wildcard (*) to indicate all of an item. For example, ge.3.* would represent all 1-Gigabit Ethernet (ge) ports in slot 3.

Thisexampleshowstheportstringsyntaxforspecifyingthe1GigabitEthernetport14inslotunit 3.
ge.3.14

Thisexampleshowstheportstringsyntaxforspecifyingall1GigabitEthernetportsinslotunit3 inthesystem.
ge.3.*

5-2

Port Configuration

Reviewing Port Status

Thisexampleshowstheportstringsyntaxforspecifyingallports(ofanyinterfacetype)inthe system.
*.*.*

Reviewing Port Status

Purpose
Todisplayoperatingstatus,duplexmode,speed,porttype,andstatisticalinformationabout trafficreceivedandtransmittedthroughoneorallswitchportsonthedevice.

Commands
Thecommandsusedtoreviewportstatusarelistedbelow.
For information about... show port show port status show port counters Refer to page... 5-3 5-4 5-5

show port
Usethiscommandtodisplaywhetherornotoneormoreportsareenabledforswitching.

Syntax
show port [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysoperationalstatusforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,operationalstatusinformationforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayoperationalstatusinformationforge.3.14:
B2(su)->show port ge.3.14 Port ge.3.14 enabled

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-3

show port status

show port status

Usethiscommandtodisplayoperatingandadminstatus,speed,duplexmodeandporttypefor oneormoreportsonthedevice.

Syntax
show port status [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysstatusforspecificport(s).Foradetaileddescriptionof possibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIon page52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,statusinformationforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaystatusinformationforge.3.14:
B2(su)->show port status ge.3.14 Port Alias (truncated) ------------ -------------ge.3.14 Oper Status ------up Admin Status ------up Speed -------N/A Duplex Type

------- ------------N/A BaseT RJ45

Table 511providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 5-11 show port status Output Details

Output Port Alias (truncated) Oper Status Admin Status What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. Alias configured for the port. For details on using the set port alias command, refer to set port alias on page 5-8. Operating status (up or down). Whether the specified port is enabled (up) or disabled (down). For details on using the set port disable command to change the default port status of enabled, refer to set port disable on page 5-6. For details on using the set port enable command to re-enable ports, refer to set port enable on page 5-7. Operational speed in Mbps or Kbps of the specified port. For details on using the set port speed command to change defaults, refer to set port speed on page 5-10. Duplex mode (half or full) of the specified port. For details on using the set port duplex command to change defaults, refer to Setting Auto-Negotiation and Advertised Ability on page 5-13. Physical port and interface type.

Speed Duplex

Type

5-4

Port Configuration

show port counters

show port counters

Usethiscommandtodisplayportcounterstatisticsdetailingtrafficthroughthedeviceand throughallMIB2networkdevices.

Syntax
show port counters [port-string] [switch | mib2]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displayscounterstatisticsforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage52. (Optional)DisplaysswitchorMIB2statistics.Switchstatisticsdetail performanceoftheSecureStackB2device.MIB2interfacestatisticsdetail performanceofallnetworkdevices.

switch|mib2

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,counterstatisticswillbedisplayedforallports. Ifmib2orswitcharenotspecified,allcounterstatisticswillbedisplayedforthespecifiedport(s).

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayallcounterstatistics,includingMIB2networktrafficand trafficthroughthedeviceforge.3.1:
B2(su)->show port counters ge.3.1 Port: ge.3.1 MIB2 Interface: 1 No counter discontinuity time ----------------------------------------------------------------MIB2 Interface Counters ----------------------In Octets In Unicast Pkts In Multicast Pkts In Broadcast Pkts In Discards In Errors Out Octets Out Unicasts Pkts Out Multicast Pkts Out Broadcast Pkts Out Errors 802.1Q Switch Counters ---------------------Frames Received Frames Transmitted

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-5

Disabling / Enabling and Naming Ports

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayallge.3.1portcounterstatisticsrelatedtotrafficthroughthe device.
B2(su)->show port counters ge.3.1 switch Port: ge.3.1 Bridge Port: 2

802.1Q Switch Counters ----------------------Frames Received Frames Transmitted

0 0

Table 512providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 5-12

Output Port MIB2 Interface Bridge Port MIB2 Interface Counters 802.1Q Switch Counters

show port counters Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. MIB2 interface designation. IEEE 802.1D bridge port designation. MIB2 network traffic counts Counts of frames received, transmitted, and filtered.

Disabling / Enabling and Naming Ports

Purpose
Todisableandreenableoneormoreports,andtoassignanaliastoaport.Bydefault,allportsare enabledatdevicestartup.Youmaywanttodisableportsforsecurityortotroubleshootnetwork issues.Portsmayalsobeassignedanaliasforconvenience.

Commands
For information about... set port disable set port enable show port alias set port alias Refer to page... 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-8

set port disable

Usethiscommandtoadministrativelydisableoneormoreports.Whenthiscommandis executed,inadditiontodisablingthephysicalEthernetlink,theportwillnolongerlearnentries intheforwardingdatabase.

5-6

Port Configuration

set port enable

Syntax
set port disable port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)todisable.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleport stringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisablege.1.1:
B2(su)->set port disable ge.1.1

set port enable

Usethiscommandtoadministrativelyenableoneormoreports.

Syntax
set port enable port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)toenable.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleport stringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenablege.1.3:
B2(su)->set port enable ge.1.3

show port alias

Usethiscommandtodisplaythealiasnameforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show port alias [port-string]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-7

set port alias

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysaliasname(s)forspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntax UsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,aliasesforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayaliasinformationforports13onslot3:
B2(rw)->show Port ge.3.1 Port ge.3.2 Port ge.3.3 port alias ge.3.1-3 user user Admin

set port alias

Usethiscommandtoassignanaliasnametoaport.

Syntax
set port alias port-string [name]

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheporttowhichanaliaswillbeassigned.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntax UsedintheCLIonpage52. (Optional)Assignsanaliasnametotheport.Ifthealiasnamecontains spaces,thetextstringmustbesurroundedbydoublequotes.Maximum lengthis60characters.

name

Defaults
Ifnameisnotspecified,thealiasassignedtotheportwillbecleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtoassignthealiasAdmintoge.3.3:
B2(rw)->set port alias ge.3.3 Admin

Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthealiasforge.3.3:
B2(rw)->set port alias ge.3.3

5-8

Port Configuration

Setting Speed and Duplex Mode

Setting Speed and Duplex Mode

Purpose
ToreviewandsettheoperationalspeedinMbpsandthedefaultduplexmode:Half,forhalf duplex,orFull,forfullduplexforoneormoreports.

Note: These settings only take effect on ports that have auto-negotiation disabled.

Commands
For information about... show port speed set port speed show port duplex set port duplex Refer to page... 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-13

show port speed

Usethiscommandtodisplaythedefaultspeedsettingononeormoreports.

Syntax
show port speed [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysdefaultspeedsetting(s)forspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,defaultspeedsettingsforallportswilldisplay.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythedefaultspeedsettingfor1GigabitEthernetport14in slot 3:
B2(su)->show port speed ge.3.14 default speed is 10 on port ge.3.14.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-9

set port speed

set port speed

Usethiscommandtosetthedefaultspeedofoneormoreports.Thissettingonlytakeseffecton portsthathaveautonegotiationdisabled.

Syntax
set port speed port-string {10 | 100 | 1000}

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtoaspeedvaluewillbeset.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPort StringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52. Specifiestheportspeed.Validvaluesare:10 Mbps,100 Mbps,or 1000 Mbps.

10|100|1000

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetge.3.3toaportspeedof10 Mbps:
B2(su)->set port speed ge.3.3 10

show port duplex

Usethiscommandtodisplaythedefaultduplexsetting(halforfull)foroneormoreports.

Syntax
show port duplex [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysdefaultduplexsetting(s)forspecificport(s). Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,defaultduplexsettingsforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythedefaultduplexsettingforGigabitEthernetport14in slot 3:
B2(su)->show port duplex ge.3.14
5-10 Port Configuration

set port duplex

default duplex mode is full on port ge.3.14.

set port duplex

Usethiscommandtosetthedefaultduplextypeforoneormoreports.Thiscommandwillonly takeeffectonportsthathaveautonegotiationdisabled.

Syntax
set port duplex port-string {full | half}

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichduplextypewillbeset.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntax UsedintheCLIonpage52. Setstheport(s)tofullduplexorhalfduplexoperation.

full|half

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetge.1.17tofullduplex:
B2(su)->set port duplex ge.1.17 full

Enabling / Disabling Jumbo Frame Support

Purpose
Toreview,enable,anddisablejumboframesupportononeormoreports.ThisallowsGigabit Ethernetportstotransmitframesupto10KBinsize.

Commands
For information about... show port jumbo set port jumbo clear port jumbo Refer to page... 5-11 5-12 5-13

show port jumbo

Usethiscommandtodisplaythestatusofjumboframesupportandmaximumtransmissionunits (MTU)ononeormoreports.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-11

set port jumbo

Syntax
show port jumbo [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysthestatusofjumboframesupportforspecific port(s).Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,jumboframesupportstatusforallportswilldisplay.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythestatusofjumboframesupportforge.1.1:
B2(su)->show port jumbo ge.1.1 Port Number Jumbo Status Max Frame Size ------------- --------------- -----------------ge.1.1 Enable 9216

set port jumbo

Usethiscommandtoenableordisablejumboframesupportononeormoreports.

Syntax
set port jumbo {enable | disable}[port-string]

Parameters
enable|disable portstring Enablesordisablesjumboframesupport. (Optional)Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtodisableorenablejumbo framesupport.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues, refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,jumboframesupportwillbeenabledordisabledonallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenablejumboframesupportforGigabitEthernetport14inslot3:
B2(su)->set port jumbo enable ge.3.14

5-12

Port Configuration

clear port jumbo

clear port jumbo

Usethiscommandtoresetjumboframesupportstatustoenabledononeormoreports.

Syntax
clear port jumbo [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoresetjumboframe supportstatustoenabled.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossible portstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIon page52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,jumboframesupportstatuswillberesetonallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetjumboframesupportstatusforGigabitEthernetport14inslot 3:
B2(su)->clear port jumbo ge.3.14

Setting Auto-Negotiation and Advertised Ability

Purpose
Toreview,disableorenableautonegotiation,andtoconfigureportadvertisementforspeedand duplex. Duringautonegotiation,theporttellsthedeviceattheotherendofthesegmentwhatits capabilitiesandmodeofoperationare.Ifautonegotiationisdisabled,theportrevertstothe valuesspecifiedbydefaultspeed,defaultduplex,andtheportflowcontrolcommands. Innormaloperation,withallcapabilitiesenabled,advertisedabilityenablesaporttoadvertise thatithastheabilitytooperateinanymode.Theusermaychoosetoconfigureaportsothatonly aportionofitscapabilitiesareadvertisedandtheothersaredisabled.

Note: Advertised ability can be activated only on ports that have auto-negotiation enabled.

Commands
For information about... show port negotiation set port negotiation Refer to page... 5-14 5-14

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-13

show port negotiation

For information about... show port advertise set port advertise clear port advertise

Refer to page... 5-15 5-16 5-16

show port negotiation

Usethiscommandtodisplaythestatusofautonegotiationforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show port negotiation [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysautonegotiationstatusforspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,autonegotiationstatusforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayautonegotiationstatusfor1GigabitEthernetport14inslot 3:
B2(su)->show port negotiation ge.3.14 auto-negotiation is enabled on port ge.3.14.

set port negotiation

Usethiscommandtoenableordisableautonegotiationononeormoreports.

Syntax
set port negotiation port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtoenableordisableautonegotiation.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52. Enablesordisablesautonegotiation.

enable|disable

Defaults
None.

5-14

Port Configuration

show port advertise

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisableautonegotiationon1GigabitEthernetport3inslot14:
B2(su)->set port negotiation ge.3.14 disable

show port advertise

Usethiscommandtodisplayportcapabilityandadvertisementasfarasspeedandduplexfor autonegotiation.

Syntax
show port advertise [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysadvertisedabilityforspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPort StringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,advertisementforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayadvertisementstatusforGigabitports13and14:
B2(su)->show port advertise ge.1.13-14 ge.1.13 capability advertised remote ------------------------------------------------10BASE-T yes yes yes 10BASE-TFD yes yes yes 100BASE-TX yes yes yes 100BASE-TXFD yes yes yes 1000BASE-T no no no 1000BASE-TFD yes yes yes pause yes yes no ge.1.14 capability advertised remote ------------------------------------------------10BASE-T yes yes yes 10BASE-TFD yes yes yes 100BASE-TX yes yes yes 100BASE-TXFD yes yes yes 1000BASE-T no no no 1000BASE-TFD yes yes yes pause yes yes no

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-15

set port advertise

set port advertise

Usethiscommandtoconfigurewhataportwilladvertiseforspeed/duplexcapabilitiesinauto negotiation.

Syntax
set port advertise {port-string}{10t | 10tfd | 100tx | 100txfd | 1000t | 1000tfd | pause}

Parameters
portstring Selecttheportsforwhichtoconfigureadvertisements.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage52. Advertise10BASEThalfduplexmode. Advertise10BASETfullduplexmode. Advertise100BASETXhalfduplexmode. Advertise100BASETXfullduplexmode. Advertise1000BASEThalfduplexmode. Advertise1000BASETfullduplexmode. AdvertisePAUSEforfullduplexlinks.

10t 10tfd 100tx 100txfd 1000t 1000tfd pause

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoconfigureport1toadvertise1000BASETfullduplex:
B2(su)->set port advertise ge.1.1 1000tfd

clear port advertise

Usethiscommandtoconfigureaporttonotadvertiseaspecificspeed/duplexcapabilitywhen autonegotiatingwithanotherport.

Syntax
clear port advertise {port-string}{10t | 10tfd | 100tx | 100txfd | 1000t | 1000tfd | pause}

5-16

Port Configuration

Setting Flow Control

Parameters
portstring Clearadvertisementsforspecificport(s).Foradetaileddescriptionof possibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedinthe CLIonpage52. Donotadvertise10BASEThalfduplexmode. Donotadvertise10BASETfullduplexmode. Donotadvertise100BASETXhalfduplexmode. Donotadvertise100BASETXfullduplexmode. Donotadvertise1000BASEThalfduplexmode. Donotadvertise1000BASETfullduplexmode. DonotadvertisePAUSEforfullduplexlinks.

10t 10tfd 100tx 100txfd 1000t 1000tfd pause

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoconfigureport1tonotadvertise10MBcapabilityforauto negotiation:
B2(su)->clear port advertise ge.1.1 10t 10tfd

Setting Flow Control

Purpose
Toreview,enableordisableportflowcontrol.Flowcontrolisusedtomanagethetransmission betweentwodevicesasspecifiedbyIEEE 802.3xtopreventreceivingportsfrombeing overwhelmedbyframesfromtransmittingdevices.

Commands
For information about... show flowcontrol set flowcontrol Refer to page... 5-17 5-18

show flowcontrol
Usethiscommandtodisplaytheflowcontrolstate.

Syntax
show flowcontrol

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-17

set flowcontrol

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheportflowcontrolstate:
B2(su)->show flowcontrol Flow control status: enabled

set flowcontrol
Usethiscommandtoenableordisableflowcontrol.

Syntax
set flowcontrol {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable Enablesordisablesflowcontrolsettings.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenableflowcontrol:
B2(su)->set flowcontrol enable

Setting Port Link Traps and Link Flap Detection

Purpose
Todisableorreenablelinktraps,displaylinktrapstatus,andtoconfigurethelinkflapping detectionfunction.Bydefault,allportsareenabledtosendSNMPtrapmessagesindicating changestotheirlinkstatus(upordown). Thelinkflapfunctiondetectswhenalinkisgoingupanddownrapidly(alsocalledlink flapping)onaphysicalport,andtakestherequiredactions(disableport,andeventuallysend notificationtrap)tostopsuchacondition.Ifleftunresolved,thelinkflappingconditioncanbe

5-18

Port Configuration

show port trap

detrimentaltonetworkstabilitybecauseitcantriggerSpanningTreeandroutingtable recalculation.

Commands
For information about... show port trap set port trap show linkflap set linkflap globalstate set linkflap portstate set linkflap interval set linkflap action clear linkflap action set linkflap threshold set linkflap downtime clear linkflap down clear linkflap Refer to page... 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-22 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-26 5-27

show port trap

UsethiscommandtodisplaywhethertheportisenabledforgeneratinganSNMPtrapmessageif itslinkstatechanges.

Syntax
show port trap [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displayslinktrapstatusforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,thetrapstatusforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaylinktrapstatusforge.3.1through4:
B2(su)->show port trap ge.3.1-4 Link traps enabled on port ge.3.1. Link traps enabled on port ge.3.2.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-19

set port trap

Link traps enabled on port ge.3.3. Link traps enabled on port ge.3.4.

set port trap

UsethiscommandtoenableofdisableportsforsendingSNMPtrapmessageswhentheirlink statuschanges.

Syntax
set port trap port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtoenableordisableporttraps.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52. Enablesordisablessendingtrapmessageswhenlinkstatuschanges.

enable|disable

Defaults
Sendingtrapswhenlinkstatuschangesisenabledbydefault.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thefollowingexampledisablessendingtraponge.3.1.
B2(su)->set port trap ge.3.1 disable

show linkflap
Usethiscommandtodisplaylinkflapdetectionstateandconfigurationinformation.

Syntax
show linkflap {globalstate | portstate | parameters | metrics | portsupported | actsupported | maximum | downports | action | operstatus | threshold | interval] | downtime | currentcount | totalcount | timelapsed | violations [port-string]}

Parameters
globalstate portstate parameters metrics portsupported actsupported maximum Displaystheglobalenablestateoflinkflapdetection. Displaystheportenablestateoflinkflapdetection. Displaysthecurrentvalueofsettablelinkflapdetectionparameters. Displayslinkflapdetectionmetrics. Displaysportswhichcansupportthelinkflapdetectionfunction. Displayslinkflapdetectionactionssupportedbysystemhardware. Displaysthemaximumallowedlinkdownsper10secondssupported bysystemhardware.

5-20

Port Configuration

show linkflap

downports action operstatus threshold interval downtime currentcount totalcount timelapsed violations portstring

Displaysportsdisabledbylinkflapdetectionduetoaviolation. Displayslinkflapactionstakenonviolatingport(s). Displayswhetherlinkflaphasdeactivatedport(s). Displaysthenumberofallowedlinkdowntransitionsbeforeactionis taken. Displaysthetimeperiodforcountinglinkdowntransitions. Displayshowlongviolatingport(s)aredeactivated. Displayshowmanylinkdowntransitionsareinthecurrentinterval. Displayshowmanylinkdowntransitionshaveoccurredsincethelast reset. Displaysthetimeperiodsincethelastlinkdowneventorreset. Displaysthenumberoflinkflapviolationssincethelastreset. (Optional)Displaysinformationforspecificport(s).

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,informationaboutalllinkflapdetectionsettingswillbedisplayed. Ifportstringisnotspecified,informationforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchmode,readonly.

Usage
Thelinkflapdefaultconditionsareshowninthefollowingtable.
Linkflap Parameter Linkflap global state Linkflap port state Linkflap action Linkflap interval Linkflap maximum allowed link downs per 10 seconds Linkflap threshold (number of allowed link down transitions before action is taken) Default Condition Disabled Disabled None 5 20 10

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheglobalstatusofthelinktrapdetectionfunction:
B2(rw)->show linkflap globalstate Linkflap feature globally disabled

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayportsdisabledbylinkflapdetectionduetoaviolation:
B2(rw)->show linkflap downports Ports currently held DOWN for Linkflap violations: None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-21

set linkflap globalstate

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythelinkflapparameterstable:
B2(rw)->show linkflap parameters Linkflap Port Settable Parameter Table (X Port LF Status Actions Threshold -------- --------- ------- ---------ge.1.1 disabled ....... 10 ge.1.2 enabled D..S..T 3 ge.1.3 disabled ...S..T 10 means error Interval ---------5 5 5 occurred) Downtime ---------300 300 300

Table 513providesanexplanationoftheshowlinkflapparameterscommandoutput. Table 5-13

Output... Port LF Status Actions

show linkflap parameters Output Details

What it displays... Port designation. Link flap enabled state. Actions to be taken if the port violates allowed link flap behavior. D = disabled, S = Syslog entry will be generated, T= SNMP trap will be generated.

Threshold Interval Downtime

Number of link down transitions necessary to trigger the link flap action. Time interval (in seconds) for accumulating link down transitions. Interval (in seconds) port(s) will be held down after a link flap violation.

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythelinkflapmetricstable:
B2(rw)->show linkflap metrics Port LinkStatus CurrentCount -------- ----------- -----------ge.1.1 operational 0 ge.1.2 disabled 4 ge.1.3 operational 3 TotalCount ---------0 15 3 TimeElapsed Violations ----------- ------------241437 0 147 5 241402 0

Table 514providesanexplanationoftheshowlinkflapmetricscommandoutput. Table 5-14

Output... Port LinkStatus CurrentCount TotalCount TimeElapsed Violations

show linkflap metrics Output Details

What it displays... Port designation. Link status according to the link flap function. Link down count accruing toward the link flap threshold. Number of link downs since system start, Time (in seconds) since the last link down event. Number of link flap violations on listed ports since system start.

set linkflap globalstate

Usethiscommandtogloballyenableordisablethelinkflapdetectionfunction.

5-22

Port Configuration

set linkflap portstate

Syntax
set linkflap globalstate {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable|enable Globallydisablesorenablesthelinkflapdetectionfunction.

Defaults
Bydefault,thefunctionisdisabledgloballyandonallports.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Usage
Bydefault,thefunctionisdisabledgloballyandonallports.Ifdisabledgloballyafterperport settingshavebeenconfiguredusingthelinkflapcommands,perportsettingswillberetained.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtogloballyenablethelinktrapdetectionfunction.
B2(rw)->set linkflap globalstate enable

set linkflap portstate

Usethiscommandtoenableordisablelinkflapmonitoringononeormoreports.

Syntax
set linkflap portstate {disable | enable} [port-string]

Parameters
disable|enable portstring Disablesorenablesthelinkflapdetectionfunction. (Optional)Specifiestheportorportsonwhichtodisableorenable monitoring.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,allportsareenabledordisabled.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenablethelinktrapmonitoringonallports.
B2(rw)->set linkflap portstate enable

set linkflap interval

Usethiscommandtosetthetimeinterval(inseconds)foraccumulatinglinkdowntransitions.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 5-23

set linkflap action

Syntax
set linkflap interval port-string interval-value

Parameters
portstring intervalvalue Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtosetthelinkflapinterval. Specifiesanintervalinseconds.Avalueof0willsettheintervalto forever.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthelinkflapintervalonportge.1.4to1000seconds.
B2(rw)->set linkflap interval ge.1.4 1000

set linkflap action

Usethiscommandtosetreactionstoalinkflapviolation.

Syntax
set linkflap action port-string {disableInterface | gensyslogentry | gentrap | all}

Parameters
portstring disableInterface gensyslogentry gentrap all Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtosetthelinkflapaction. Setsthereactionasdisablingtheinterface. Setsthereactionasgeneratingasyslogentry. SetsthereactionasgeneratinganSNMPtrap. Setsthereactionasalloftheabove.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthelinkflapviolationactiononportge.1.4togeneratingaSyslog entry.
B2(rw)->set linkflap action ge.1.4 gensyslogentry

5-24

Port Configuration

clear linkflap action

clear linkflap action

Usethiscommandtoclearreactionstoalinkflapviolation.

Syntax
clear linkflap action [port-string] {disableInterface | gensyslogentry | gentrap | all}

Parameters
portstring disableInterface gensyslogentry gentrap all (Optional)Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoclearthelinkflapaction. Clearsthereactionasdisablingtheinterface. Clearsthereactionasgeneratingasyslogentry. ClearsthereactionasgeneratinganSNMPtrap. Clearsthereactionasalloftheabove.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,actionswillbeclearedonallports.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthelinkflapviolationactiononportge.1.4togeneratinga Syslogentry.
B2(rw)->clear linkflap action ge.1.4 gensyslogentry

set linkflap threshold

Usethiscommandtosetthelinkflapactiontriggercount.

Syntax
set linkflap threshold port-string threshold-value

Parameters
portstring thresholdvalue Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtosetthelinkflapactiontriggercount. Specifiesthenumberoflinkdowntransitionsnecessarytotriggerthe linkflapaction.Aminimumof1mustbeconfigured.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthelinkflapthresholdonportge.1.4to5.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 5-25

set linkflap downtime

B2(rw)->set linkflap threshold ge.1.4 5

set linkflap downtime

Usethiscommandtosetthetimeinterval(inseconds)oneormoreportswillbehelddownaftera linkflapviolation.

Syntax
set linkflap downtime port-string downtime-value

Parameters
portstring downtimevalue Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtosetthelinkflapdowntime. Specifiesadowntimeinseconds.Avalueof0willsetthedowntimeto forever.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthelinkflapdowntimeonportge.1.4to5000seconds.
B2(rw)->set linkflap downtime ge.1.4 5000

clear linkflap down

Usethiscommandtotogglelinkflapdisabledportstooperational.

Syntax
clear linkflap down [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Specifiestheportstomakeoperational.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,allportsdisabledbyalinkflapviolationwillbemadeoperational.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtomakedisabledportge.1.4operational.
B2(rw)->clear linkflap down ge.1.4

5-26

Port Configuration

clear linkflap

clear linkflap
Usethiscommandtoclearalllinkflapoptionsand/orstatisticsononeormoreports.

Syntax
clear linkflap {all | stats [port-string] | parameter port-string {threshold | interval | downtime | all}

Parameters
all|stats parameter Clearsalloptionsandstatistics,orclearsonlystatistics. Clearslinkflapparameters.

threshold|interval| Clearslinkflapthreshold,interval,downtimeorallparameters. downtime|all portstring (Optionalunlessparameterisspecified)Specifiestheport(s)onwhich toclearsettings.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,settingsand/orstatisticswillbeclearedonallports.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearalllinkflapoptionsonportge.1.4.
B2(rw)->clear linkflap all ge.1.4

Configuring Broadcast Suppression

Purpose
Toreviewandsetthebroadcastsuppressionthresholdforoneormoreports.Thisfeaturelimits thenumberofreceivedbroadcastframestheswitchwillacceptperport.Broadcastsuppression thresholdsapplyonlytobroadcasttrafficmulticasttrafficisnotaffected.Bydefault,abroadcast suppressionthresholdof14881packetspersecond(pps)willbeused,regardlessofactualport speed.BroadcastsuppressionprotectsagainstbroadcaststormsandARPsweeps.

Commands
For information about... show port broadcast set port broadcast clear port broadcast Refer to page... 5-28 5-28 5-29

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-27

show port broadcast

show port broadcast

Usethiscommandtodisplayportbroadcastsuppressionthresholds.

Syntax
show port broadcast [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Selecttheportsforwhichtoshowbroadcastsuppression thresholds.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refer toPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,broadcaststatusofallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythebroadcastsuppressionthresholdsforports1through4:
B2(su)->show port broadcast ge.1.1-4 Port Total BC Threshold Packets (pkts/s) ---------------------------------------ge.1.1 0 50 ge.1.2 0 50 ge.1.3 0 40 ge.1.4 0 14881

set port broadcast

Usethiscommandtosetthebroadcastsuppressionthreshold,inpacketspersecond,ononeor moreports.Thissetsathresholdonthebroadcasttrafficthatisreceivedandswitchedouttoother ports.

Syntax
set port broadcast port-string threshold-val

Parameters
portstring Selecttheportsforwhichtoconfigurebroadcastsuppressionthresholds. Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPort StringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52. Setsthepacketspersecondthresholdonbroadcasttraffic.Maximum valueis148810forFastEthernetportsand1488100forGigabitports.

thresholdval

Defaults
None.

5-28

Port Configuration

clear port broadcast

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleconfiguresports1through5withabroadcastlimitof50pps:
B2(su)->set port broadcast ge.1.1-5 50

clear port broadcast

Usethiscommandtoclearthebroadcastthresholdlimittothedefaultvalueof14881forthe selectedport.

Syntax
clear port broadcast port-string threshold

Parameters
portstring Selecttheportsforwhichtoclearbroadcastsuppressionthresholds.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleclearsthebroadcastthresholdlimitto14881ppsforports1through5:
B2(su)->clear port broadcast ge.1.1-5 threshold

Port Mirroring
Caution: Port mirroring configuration should be performed only by personnel who are knowledgeable about the effects of port mirroring and its impact on network operation.

TheSecureStackB2deviceallowsyoutomirror(orredirect)thetrafficbeingswitchedonaport forthepurposesofnetworktrafficanalysisandconnectionassurance.Whenportmirroringis enabled,oneportbecomesamonitorportforanotherportwithinthedevice.

Mirroring Features
TheSecureStackB2devicesupportsthefollowingmirroringfeatures: Mirroringcanbeconfiguredinamanytooneconfigurationsothatonetarget(destination) portcanmonitortrafficonupto8sourceports.Onlyonemirrordestinationportcanbe configuredperstack,ifapplicable. Bothtransmitandreceivetrafficwillbemirrored.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-29

show port mirroring

Amirroringsessionwhichisconfiguredtobeactive(enabled)willbeoperationallyactive onlyifbothadestinationportandatleastonesourceporthavebeenconfigured. Adestinationportwillonlyactasamirroringportwhenthesessionisoperationallyactive.If themirroringsessionisnotoperationallyactive,thenthedestinationportwillactasanormal portandparticipateinallnormaloperationwithrespecttotransmittingtrafficand participatinginprotocols.

Purpose
Toreviewandconfigureportmirroringonthedevice.

Commands
For information about... show port mirroring set port mirroring clear port mirroring Refer to page... 5-30 5-31 5-31

show port mirroring

Usethiscommandtodisplaythesourceandtargetportsformirroring,andwhethermirroringis currentlyenabledordisabledforthoseports.

Syntax
show port mirroring

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayportmirroringinformation.Inthiscase,ge.1.4isconfigured asasourceportandge.1.11isatargetandmirroringhasbeenenabledbetweentheseports:
B2(su)->show port mirroring Port Mirroring ============== Source Port = ge.1.4 Target Port = ge.1.11 Frames Mirrored = Rx and Tx Port Mirroring status enabled.

5-30

Port Configuration

set port mirroring

set port mirroring

Usethiscommandtocreateanewmirroringrelationshiportoenableordisableanexisting mirroringrelationshipbetweentwoports.

Syntax
set port mirroring {create | disable | enable} source destination}

Parameters
create|disable| enable source Creates,disablesorenablesmirroringsettingsonthespecifiedports. Specifiesthesourceportdesignation.Thisistheportonwhichthetraffic willbemonitored.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues, refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52. Specifiesthetargetportdesignation.Thisistheportthatwillduplicateor mirrorallthetrafficonthemonitoredport.Onlyonedestinationport canbeconfiguredperstack,ifapplicable. Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPort StringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52.

destination

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
NotethatLAGportsandtheirunderlyingphysicalports,asdescribedinLinkAggregation ControlProtocol(LACP)onpage532,cannotbemirrored.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtocreateandenableportmirroringwithge.1.4asthesourceport,and ge.1.11asthetargetport:
B2(su)->set port mirroring create ge.1.4 ge.1.11 B2(su)->set port mirroring enable ge.1.4 ge.1.11

clear port mirroring

Usethiscommandtoclearaportmirroringrelationship.

Syntax
clear port mirroring source destination

Parameters
source Specifiesthesourceportofthemirroringconfigurationtobecleared.For adetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52. Specifiesthetargetportofthemirroringconfigurationtobecleared.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 5-31

destination

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearportmirroringbetweensourceportge.1.4andtargetport ge.1.11:
B2(su)->clear port mirroring ge.1.4 ge.1.11

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Caution: Link aggregation configuration should only be performed by personnel who are knowledgeable about Spanning Tree and Link Aggregation, and fully understand the ramifications of modifications beyond device defaults. Otherwise, the proper operation of the network could be at risk.

Usingmultiplelinkssimultaneouslytoincreasebandwidthisadesirableswitchfeature,which canbeaccomplishedifbothsidesagreeonasetofportsthatarebeingusedasaLinkAggregation Group(LAG).OnceaLAGisformedfromselectedports,problemswithloopingcanbeavoided sincetheSpanningTreecantreatthisLAGasasingleport. Enabledbydefault,theLinkAggregationControlProtocol(LACP)logicallygroupsinterfaces togethertocreateagreaterbandwidthuplink,orlinkaggregation,accordingtotheIEEE802.3ad standard.ThisstandardallowstheswitchtodeterminewhichportsareinLAGsandconfigure themdynamically.SincetheprotocolisbasedontheIEEE802.3adspecification,anyswitchfrom anyvendorthatsupportsthisstandardcanaggregatelinksautomatically. 802.3adLACPaggregationscanalsoberuntoendusers(thatis,aserver)ortoarouter.
Note: Earlier (proprietary) implementations of port aggregation referred to groups of aggregated ports as trunks.

LACP Operation
Foreachaggregatableportinthedevice,LACP: Maintainsconfigurationinformation(reflectingtheinherentpropertiesoftheindividuallinks aswellasthoseestablishedbymanagement)tocontrolaggregation. ExchangesconfigurationinformationwithotherdevicestoallocatethelinktoaLink AggregationGroup(LAG).
Note: A given link is allocated to, at most, one Link Aggregation Group (LAG) at a time. The allocation mechanism attempts to maximize aggregation, subject to management controls.

AttachestheporttotheaggregatorusedbytheLAG,anddetachestheportfromthe aggregatorwhenitisnolongerusedbytheLAG. Usesinformationfromthepartnerdeviceslinkaggregationcontrolentitytodecidewhether toaggregateports.

TheoperationofLACPinvolvesthefollowingactivities:
5-32 Port Configuration

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Checkingthatcandidatelinkscanactuallybeaggregated. ControllingtheadditionofalinktoaLAG,andthecreationofthegroupifnecessary. Monitoringthestatusofaggregatedlinkstoensurethattheaggregationisstillvalid. RemovingalinkfromaLAGifitsmembershipisnolongervalid,andremovingthegroupifit nolongerhasanymemberlinks.

InordertoallowLACPtodeterminewhetherasetoflinksconnecttothesamedevice,andto determinewhetherthoselinksarecompatiblefromthepointofviewofaggregation,itis necessarytobeabletoestablish Agloballyuniqueidentifierforeachdevicethatparticipatesinlinkaggregation. Ameansofidentifyingthesetofcapabilitiesassociatedwitheachportandwitheach aggregator,asunderstoodbyagivendevice. AmeansofidentifyingaLAGanditsassociatedaggregator.

LACP Terminology
Table 515defineskeyterminologyusedinLACPconfiguration. Table 5-15
Term Aggregator

LACP Terms and Definitions

Definition Virtual port that controls link aggregation for underlying physical ports. Each SecureStack B2 module provides 6 aggregator ports, which are designated in the CLI as lag.0.1 through lag.0.6. Link Aggregation Group. Once underlying physical ports (for example, ge.x.x) are associated with an aggregator port, the resulting aggregation will be represented as one LAG with a lag.x.x port designation. SecureStack B2 LAGs can have up to 8associated physical ports.

LAG

LACPDU

Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit. The protocol exchanges aggregation state/mode information by way of a ports actor and partner operational states. LACPDUs sent by the first party (the actor) convey to the second party (the actors protocol partner) what the actor knows, both about its own state and that of its partner. An actor is the local device sending LACPDUs. Its protocol partner is the device on the other end of the link aggregation. Each maintains current status of the other via LACPDUs containing information about their ports LACP status and operational state. Value assigned to aggregator ports and physical ports that are candidates for joining a LAG. The LACP implementation on SecureStack B2 devices will use this value to form an oper key and will determine which underlying physical ports are capable of aggregating by comparing oper keys. Aggregator ports allow only underlying ports with oper keys matching theirs to join their LAG. On SecureStack B2 devices, the default admin key value is 32768. Value used to build a LAG ID, which determines aggregation precedence. If there are two partner devices competing for the same aggregator, LACP compares the LAG IDs for each grouping of ports. The LAG with the lower LAG ID is given precedence and will be allowed to use the aggregator. Note: Only one LACP system priority can be set on a SecureStack B2 device, using either the set lacp asyspri command (page 5-37), or the set port lacp command (page 5-42).

Actor and Partner

Admin Key

System Priority

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-33

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

SecureStack B2 Usage Considerations

Innormalusage(andtypicalimplementations)thereisnoneedtomodifyanyofthedefault LACPparametersontheswitch.Thedefaultvalueswillresultinthemaximumnumberof aggregationspossible.Iftheswitchisplacedinaconfigurationwithitspeersnotrunningthe protocol,nodynamiclinkaggregationswillbeformedandtheswitchwillfunctionnormally(that is,willblockredundantpaths).Forinformationaboutbuildingstaticaggregations,refertoset lacpstatic(page 538). EachSecureStackB2moduleprovidessixvirtuallinkaggregatorports,whicharedesignatedin theCLIaslag.0.1throughlag.0.6.EachLAGcanhaveuptoeightassociatedphysicalports.Once underlyingphysicalports(forexample,ge.x.x,orge.x.x)areassociatedwithanaggregatorport, theresultingaggregationwillberepresentedasoneLAGwithalag.x.xportdesignation.LACP determineswhichunderlyingphysicalportsarecapableofaggregatingbycomparingoperational keys.AggregatorportsallowonlyunderlyingportswithkeysmatchingtheirstojointheirLAG. LACPusesasystempriorityvaluetobuildaLAGID,whichdeterminesaggregationprecedence. Iftherearetwopartnerdevicescompetingforthesameaggregator,LACPcomparestheLAGIDs foreachgroupingofports.TheLAGwiththelowerLAGIDisgivenprecedenceandwillbe allowedtousetheaggregator. Thereareafewcasesinwhichportswillnotaggregate: Anunderlyingphysicalportisattachedtoanotherportonthissameswitch(loopback). ThereisnoavailableaggregatorfortwoormoreportswiththesameLAGID.Thiscan happeniftherearesimplynoavailableaggregators,orifnoneoftheaggregatorshavea matchingadminkeyandsystempriority. 802.1xauthenticationisenabledusingtheseteapolcommand(page 1617)andportsthat wouldotherwiseaggregatearenot802.1Xauthorized.

TheLACPimplementationontheSecureStackB2devicewillallowuptoeightphysicalportsinto aLAG.ThedevicewiththelowestLAGIDdetermineswhichunderlyingphysicalportsare allowedintoaLAGbasedontheportsLAGportpriority.PortswiththelowestLAGportpriority valuesareallowedintotheLAGandallotherspeedgroupingsgointoastandbystate. WhenanexistingdynamicallycreatedLAGisreducedtooneport,theSecureStackB2removes theLAGfromitsVLANandaddstheremainingunderlyingporttotheVLAN.Forthisreason, youshouldensurethattheLAGandalltheportsintheLAGareassignedtotheegresslistofthe desiredVLAN.Otherwise,whentheLAGisremoved,theremainingportmaybeassignedtothe wrongVLAN.Theotheroptionistoenablethesingleportlagfeatureasdescribedinsetlacp singleportlagonpage540.
Note: To aggregate, underlying physical ports must be running in full duplex mode and must be of the same operating speed.

Commands
For information about... show lacp set lacp set lacp asyspri set lacp aadminkey Refer to page... 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-37

5-34

Port Configuration

show lacp

For information about... clear lacp set lacp static clear lacp static set lacp singleportlag clear lacp singleportlag show port lacp set port lacp clear port lacp

Refer to page... 5-38 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-39 5-41 5-42 5-44

show lacp
Usethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutoneormoreaggregatorports.

Syntax
show lacp [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysLACPinformationforspecificLAGport(s).Valid portdesignationsarelag.0.16.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,linkaggregationinformationforallLAGswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
EachSecureStackB2moduleprovides6virtuallinkaggregatorports,whicharedesignatedinthe CLIaslag.0.1throughlag.0.6.Onceunderlyingphysicalports(thatis,ge.x.x)areassociatedwith anaggregatorport,theresultingaggregationwillberepresentedasoneLinkAggregationGroup (LAG)withalag.x.xportdesignation.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaylacpinformationforlag.0.1.Thefollowingtabledescribesthe outputfields.
B2(su)->show lacp lag.0.1 Global Link Aggregation state: enabled Single Port LAGs: disabled Aggregator: lag.0.1 System Identifier: System Priority: Admin Key: Oper Key: Actor 00:01:F4:5F:1E:20 32768 32768 32768 Partner 00:11:88:11:74:F9 32768 0

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-35

set lacp

Attached Ports:

ge.1.1 ge.1.3

Table 516providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 5-16

Output Global Link Aggregation state Single Port LAGs Aggregator

show lacp Output Details

What It Displays... Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled on the switch. Displays if the single port LAG feature has been enabled on the switch. See set lacp singleportlag on page 5-40 for more about single port LAG. LAG port designation. Each SecureStack B2 module provides 6 virtual link aggregator ports, which are designated in the CLI as lag.0.1 through lag.0.6. Once underlying physical ports (for example, ge.x.x) are associated with an aggregator port, the resulting Link Aggregation Group (LAG) is represented with a lag.x.x port designation. Local device participating in LACP negotiation. Remote device participating in LACP negotiation. MAC addresses for actor and partner. System priority value which determines aggregation precedence. Only one LACP system priority can be set on a SecureStack B2 device, using either the set lacp asyspri command (page 5-37), or the set port lacp command (page 5-42). Ports assigned key. SecureStack B2 devices provide a default admin key value of 32768 for all LAG ports (lag.0.1 though lag.0.6). Ports operational key, derived from the admin key. Only underlying physical ports with oper keys matching the aggregators will be allowed to aggregate. Underlying physical ports associated with this aggregator.

Actor Partner System Identifier System Priority

Admin Key Oper Key Attached Ports

set lacp
UsethiscommandtodisableorenabletheLinkAggregationControlProtocol(LACP)onthe device.

Syntax
set lacp {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable|enable DisablesorenablesLACP.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisableLACP:

5-36

Port Configuration

set lacp asyspri

B2(su)->set lacp disable

set lacp asyspri

UsethiscommandtosettheLACPsystempriority.

Syntax
set lacp asyspri value

Parameters
asyspri value SetsthesystemprioritytobeusedincreatingaLAG(LinkAggregation Group)ID.Validvaluesare0to65535. Specifiesasystempriorityvalue.Validvaluesare0to65535,with precedencegiventolowervalues.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
LACPusesthisvaluetodetermineaggregationprecedence.Iftherearetwopartnerdevices competingforthesameaggregator,LACPcomparestheLAGIDsforeachgroupingofports.The LAGwiththelowerLAGIDisgivenprecedenceandwillbeallowedtousetheaggregator.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheLACPsystempriorityto1000:
B2(su)->set lacp asyspri 1000

set lacp aadminkey

Usethiscommandtosettheadministrativelyassignedkeyforoneormoreaggregatorports.

Syntax
set lacp aadminkey port-string value

Parameters
portstring value SpecifiestheLAGport(s)onwhichtoassignanadminkey. Specifiesanadminkeyvaluetoset.Validvaluesare0to65535.The defaultadminkeyvalueis32768.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-37

clear lacp

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
LACPwillusethisvaluetoformanoperkey.Onlyunderlyingphysicalportswithoperkeys matchingthoseoftheiraggregatorswillbeallowedtoaggregate.Thedefaultadminkeyvaluefor allLAGportsis32768.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheLACPadminkeyto2000forLAGport6:
B2(su)->set lacp aadminkey lag.0.6 2000

clear lacp
UsethiscommandtoclearLACPsystempriorityoradminkeysettings.

Syntax
clear lacp {[asyspri] [aadminkey port-string]}

Parameters
asyspri aadminkeyportstring Clearssystempriority. Resetsadminkeysforoneormoreportstothedefaultvalueof32768.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheactoradminkeyforLAGport6:
B2(su)->clear lacp aadminkey lag.0.6

set lacp static

Usethiscommandtodisableorenablestaticlinkaggregation,ortoassignoneormoreunderlying physicalportstoaLinkAggregationGroup(LAG).

Syntax
set lacp static {disable | enable} | lagportstring [key] port-string

5-38

Port Configuration

clear lacp static

Parameters
disable|enable lagportstring key Disablesorenablesstaticlinkaggregation. SpecifiestheLAGaggregatorporttowhichnewportswillbeassigned. (Optional)SpecifiesthenewmemberportandLAGportaggregator adminkeyvalue.Onlyportswithmatchingkeysareallowedto aggregate.Validvaluesare065535.
Note: This key value must be unique. If ports other than the desired underlying physical ports share the same admin key value, aggregation will fail or undesired aggregations will form.

portstring

Specifiesthememberport(s)toaddtotheLAG.Foradetaileddescription ofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLI onpage52.

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,akeywillbeassignedaccordingtothespecifiedaggregator.Forexampleakeyof 4wouldbeassignedtolag.0.4.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoaddportge.1.6totheLAGofaggregatorport6:
B2(su)->set lacp static lag.0.6 ge.1.6

clear lacp static

UsethiscommandtoremovespecificportsfromaLinkAggregationGroup.

Syntax
clear lacp static lagportstring port-string

Parameters
lagportstring portstring SpecifiestheLAGaggregatorportfromwhichportswillberemoved. Specifiestheport(s)toremovefromtheLAG.Foradetaileddescriptionof possibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLI onpage52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoremovege.1.6fromtheLAGofaggregatorport6:

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-39

set lacp singleportlag

B2(su)->clear lacp static lag.0.6 ge.1.6

set lacp singleportlag

UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheformationofsingleportLAGs.

Syntax
set lacp singleportlag {enable | disable}

Parameters
disable|enable EnablesordisablestheformationofsingleportLAGs.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
WhensingleportLAGsareenabled,LinkAggregrationGroupscanbeformedwhenonlyone portisreceivingprotocoltransmissionsfromapartner.Whenthissettingisdisabled,twoormore portsarerequiredtoformaLAG. ThissettinghasnoeffectonexistingLAGscreatedwithmultiplememberports.Italsodoesnot preventpreviouslyformedLAGsfromcomingupaftertheyhavegonedown,aslongasany previousLAGmemberportscomesupconnectedtothesameswitchasbeforetheLAGwent down.

Example
ThisexampleenablestheformationofsingleportLAGs:
B2(su)->set lacp singleportlag enable

clear lacp singleportlag

UsethiscommandtoresetthesingleportLAGfunctionbacktothedefaultstateofdisabled.

Syntax
clear lacp singleportlag

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

5-40

Port Configuration

show port lacp

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetthesingleportLAGfunctionbacktodisabled:
B2(su)->clear lacp singleportlag

show port lacp

Usethiscommandtodisplaylinkaggregationinformationforoneormoreunderlyingphysical ports.

Syntax
show port lacp port port-string {[status {detail | summary}] | [counters]}

Parameters
portportstring DisplaysLACPinformationforspecificport(s).Foradetaileddescription ofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLI onpage52. DisplaysLACPstatusindetailedorsummaryinformation. DisplaysLACPcounterinformation.

statusdetail| summary counters

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
Statedefinitions,suchasActorAdminStateandPartnerAdminState,areindicatedwithletter abbreviations.Iftheshowportlacpcommanddisplaysoneormoreofthefollowingletters,it meansthestateistruefortheassociatedactororpartnerports: E=Expired F=Defaulted D=Distributing(txenabled) C=Collecting(rxenabled) S=Synchronized(actorandpartneragree) G=Aggregationallowed S/l=Short/LongLACPtimeout A/p=Active/PassiveLACP

Formoreinformationaboutthesestates,refertosetportlacp(page 542)andtheIEEE802.32002 specification.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-41

set port lacp

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaydetailedLACPstatusinformationforportge.1.12:
B2(su)-> show port lacp port ge.1.12 status detail Port Instance: ge.1.12 ActorPort: 1411 PartnerAdminPort: 1411 ActorSystemPriority: 32768 PartnerOperPort: 1411 ActorPortPriority: 32768 PartnerAdminSystemPriority: 32768 ActorAdminKey: 32768 PartnerOperSystemPriority: 32768 ActorOperKey: 32768 PartnerAdminPortPriority: 32768 ActorAdminState: -----GlA PartnerOperPortPriority: 32768 ActorOperState: -F----lA PartnerAdminKey: 1411 ActorSystemID: 00-e0-63-9d-b5-87 PartnerOperKey: 1411 SelectedAggID: none PartnerAdminState: --DCSGlp AttachedAggID: none PartnerOperState: --DC-Glp MuxState: Detached PartnerAdminSystemID: 00-00-00-00-00-00 DebugRxState: port Disabled PartnerOperSystemID: 00-00-00-00-00-00

ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaysummarizedLACPstatusinformationforportge.1.12:
B2(su)->show port lacp port ge.1.12 status summary Port Aggr Actor System Partner System Pri: System ID: Key: Pri: System ID: Key: ge.1.12 none [(32768,00e0639db587,32768),(32768,000000000000, 1411)]

ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayLACPcountersforportge.1.12:
B2(su)->show port lacp port ge.1.12 counters Port Instance: ge.1.12 LACPDUsRx: 11067 LACPDUsTx: 0 IllegalRx: 0 UnknownRx: 0 MarkerPDUsRx: 0 MarkerPDUsTx: 0 MarkerResponsePDUsRx: 0 MarkerResponsePDUsTx: 374

set port lacp

Usethiscommandtosetlinkaggregationparametersforoneormoreports.Thesesettingswill determinethespecifiedunderlyingphysicalportsabilitytojoinaLAG,andtheiradministrative stateonceaggregated.

Syntax
set port lacp port port-string {[aadminkey aadminkey] [aadminstate {lacpactive | lacptimeout | lacpagg | lacpsync | lacpcollect | lacpdist | lacpdef | lacpexpire}] [aportpri aportpri] [asyspri asyspri] [enable | [disable] [padminkey padminkey] [padminport padminport] [padminportpri padminportpri] [padminstate {lacpactive | lacptimeout | lacpagg | lacpsync | lacpcollect | lacpdist | lacpdef | lacpexpire}] [padminsysid padminsysid] [padminsyspri padminsyspri]

Parameters
portportstring Specifiesthephysicalport(s)onwhichtoconfigureLACP.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage52.

5-42

Port Configuration

set port lacp

aadminkey aadminkey

Setstheportsactoradminkey.LACPwillusethisvaluetoformanoper keyandwilldeterminewhichunderlyingphysicalportsarecapableof aggregatingbycomparingoperkeys.Aggregatorportsallowonly underlyingportswithoperkeysmatchingtheirstojointheirLAG.Valid valuesare165535.Thedefaultkeyvalueis32768. SetstheportsactorLACPadministrativestatetoallowfor: lacpactiveTransmittingLACPPDUs. lacptimeoutTransmittingLACPPDUsevery1sec.vs30sec.(default). lacpaggAggregationonthisport. lacpsyncTransitiontosynchronizationstate. lacpcollectTransitiontocollectionstate. lacpdistTransitiontodistributionstate. lacpdefTransitiontodefaultedstate. lacpexpireTransitiontoexpiredstate.

aadminstate lacpactive| lacptimeout| lacpagg|lacpsync |lacpcollect| lacpdist|lacpdef| lacpexpire

aportpriaportpri asyspriasyspri

Setstheportsactorportpriority.Validvaluesare065535,withlower valuesdesignatinghigherpriority. Setstheportsactorsystempriority.TheLACPimplementationonthe SecureStackB2deviceusesthisvaluetodetermineaggregation precedencewhentherearetwodevicescompetingforthesame aggregator.Validvaluesare065535,withhigherprecedencegivento lowervalues.

Note: Only one LACP system priority can be set on a SecureStack B2 device, using either this command, or the set lacp asyspri command (set lacp asyspri on page 5-37).

enable disable padminkey padminkey padminport padminport padminportpri padminportpri

(Optional)EnablesLACPDUprocessingonthisport. (Optional)DisablesLACPDUprocessingonthisport. Setsadefaultvaluetouseastheportspartneradminkey.Onlyports withmatchingadminkeysareallowedtoaggregate.Validvaluesare1 65535. Setsadefaultvaluetouseastheportspartneradminvalue.Validvalues are165535. Setsadefaultvaluetouseastheportspartnerportpriority.Validvalues are065535,withlowervaluesgivenhigherpriority.

SetsaportspartnerLACPadministrativestate.Seeaadminstateforvalid padminstate options. lacpactive| lacptimeout| lacpagg|lacpsync |lacpcollect| lacpdist|lacpdef| lacpexpire padminsysid padminsysid padminsyspri padminsyspri SetsadefaultvaluetouseastheportspartnersystemID.ThisisaMAC address. Setsadefaultvaluetouseastheportspartnerpriority.Validvaluesare0 65535,withlowervaluesgivenhigherpriority.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-43

clear port lacp

Defaults
Atleastoneparametermustbeenteredperportstring. Ifenableordisablearenotspecified,port(s)willbeenabledwiththeLACPparametersentered.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
LACPcommandsandparametersbeginningwithana(suchasaadminkey)setactorvalues. Correspondingcommandsandparametersbeginningwithap(suchaspadminkey)set correspondingpartnervalues.ActorreferstothelocaldeviceparticipatinginLACPnegotiation, whilepartnerreferstoitsremotedevicepartnerattheotherendofthenegotiation.Actorsand partnersmaintaincurrentstatusoftheotherviaLACPDUscontaininginformationabouttheir portsLACPstatusandoperationalstate.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosettheactoradminkeyto3555forportge.3.16:
B2(su)->set port lacp ge.3.16 aadminkey 3555

clear port lacp

Usethiscommandtoclearlinkaggregationsettingsforoneormoreports.

Syntax
clear port lacp port port-string {[aadminkey] [aportpri] [asyspri] [aadminstate {lacpactive | lacptimeout | lacpagg | lacpsync | lacpcollect | lacpdist | lacpdef | lacpexpire | all}] [padminsyspri] [padminsysid] [padminkey] [padminportpri] [padminport] [padminstate {lacpactive | lacptimeout | lacpagg | lacpsync | lacpcollect | lacpdist | lacpdef | lacpexpire | all}]}

Parameters
portportstring Specifiesthephysicalport(s)onwhichLACPsettingswillbecleared.For adetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage52. Clearsaportsactoradminkey. Clearsaportsactorportpriority. Clearstheportsactorsystempriority.

aadminkey aportpri asyspri

aadminstate Clearsaportsspecificactoradminstate,orallactoradminstate(s).For lacpactive| descriptionsofspecificstates,refertothesetportlacpcommand(set lacptimeout| portlacponpage542). lacpagg|lacpsync |lacpcollect| lacpdist|lacpdef| lacpexpire|all padminsyspri padminsysid padminkey Clearstheportsdefaultpartnerpriorityvalue. ClearstheportsdefaultpartnersystemID. Clearstheportsdefaultpartneradminkey.

5-44

Port Configuration

Configuring Protected Ports

padminportpri padminport

Clearstheportsdefaultpartnerportpriority. DeletesapartnerportfromtheLACPconfiguration.

padminstate Clearstheportsspecificpartneradminstate,orallpartneradminstate(s). lacpactive| lacptimeout| lacpagg|lacpsync |lacpcollect| lacpdist|lacpdef| lacpexpire|all

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearalllinkaggregationparametersforportge.3.16:
B2(su)->clear port lacp port ge.3.16

Configuring Protected Ports

TheProtectedPortfeatureisusedtopreventportsfromforwardingtraffictoeachother,even whentheyareonthesameVLAN.Portsmaybedesignatedaseitherprotectedorunprotected. Portsareunprotectedbydefault.Multiplegroupsofprotectedportsaresupported.

Protected Port Operation

Portsthatareconfiguredtobeprotectedcannotforwardtraffictootherprotectedportsinthe samegroup,regardlessofhavingthesameVLANmembership.However,protectedportscan forwardtraffictoportswhichareunprotected(notlistedinanygroup).Protectedportscanalso forwardtraffictoprotectedportsinadifferentgroup,iftheyareinthesameVLAN.Unprotected portscanforwardtraffictobothprotectedandunprotectedports.Aportmaybelongtoonlyone groupofprotectedports. Thisfeatureonlyappliestoportswithinaswitch.Itdoesnotapplyacrossmultipleswitchesina network.

Commands
For information about... set port protected show port protected clear port protected set port protected name show port protected name Refer to page... 5-46 5-46 5-47 5-47 5-48

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-45

set port protected

For information about... clear port protected name

Refer to page... 5-48

set port protected

Usethiscommandtospecifyaporttobeprotectedandassigntheporttoagroupofprotected ports.Aportcanbeassignedtoonlyonegroup.

Syntax
set port protected port-string group-id

Parameters
portstring groupid Specifiestheportorportstobeprotected. Specifiestheidofthegrouptowhichtheportsshouldbeassigned.Idcan rangefrom0to2.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoassignportsge.1.1throughge.1.3toprotectedportgroup1:
B2(rw)->set port protected ge.1.1-3 1

show port protected

Usethiscommandtodisplayinformationabouttheportsconfiguredforprotectedmode.

Syntax
show port protected [port-string] | [group-id]

Parameters
portstring groupid (Optional)Specifiestheportorportsforwhichtodisplayinformation. (Optional)Specifiestheidofthegroupforwhichtodisplayinformation. Idcanrangefrom0to2.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersareentered,informationaboutallprotectedportsisdisplayed.

Mode
Readonly.

5-46

Port Configuration

clear port protected

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayinformationaboutallprotectedports:
B2(ro)->show port protected Group id Port ---------------------1 ge.1.1 1 ge.1.2 1 ge.1.3

clear port protected

Usethiscommandtoremoveaportorgroupfromprotectedmode.

Syntax
clear port protected [port-string] | [group-id]

Parameters
portstring groupid (Optional)Specifiestheportorportstoremovefromprotectedmode. (Optional)Specifiestheidofthegrouptoremovefromprotectedmode. Idcanrangefrom0to2.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersareentered,allprotectedportsandgroupsarecleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearprotectedportsge.1.1throughge.1.3:
B2(rw)->clear port protected ge.1.1-3

set port protected name

Usethiscommandtoassignanametoaprotectedportgroupid.

Syntax
set port protected name group-id name

Parameters
groupid name Specifiestheidofthisgroup.Idcanrangefrom0to2. Specifiesanameforthegroup.Thenamecanbeupto32charactersin length.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-47

show port protected name

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoassignthenamegroup1toprotectedportgroup1:
B2(rw)->set port protected name 1 group1

show port protected name

Usethiscommandtodisplaythenameforthegroupidsspecified.

Syntax
show port protected name group-id

Parameters
groupid Specifiestheidofthegrouptodisplay.Idcanrangefrom0to2.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoshowthenameofprotectedportgroup1:
B2(ro)->show port protected name 1 Group ID Group Name ----------------------------1 group1

clear port protected name

Usethiscommandtoclearthenameofaprotectedgroup.

Syntax
clear port protected name group-id

Parameters
groupid Specifiestheidofthegroupforwhichtoclearthename.Idcanrange from0to2.

Defaults
None.

5-48

Port Configuration

clear port protected name

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthenameofprotectedportgroup1:
B2(rw)->clear port protected name 1

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

5-49

clear port protected name

5-50

Port Configuration

6
SNMP Configuration
ThischapterdescribestheSimpleNetworkManagementProtocol(SNMP)setofcommandsand howtousethem.
For information about... SNMP Configuration Summary Reviewing SNMP Statistics Configuring SNMP Users, Groups, and Communities Configuring SNMP Access Rights Configuring SNMP MIB Views Configuring SNMP Target Parameters Configuring SNMP Target Addresses Configuring SNMP Notification Parameters Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration Refer to page... 6-1 6-3 6-7 6-15 6-18 6-22 6-25 6-28 6-36

SNMP Configuration Summary

SNMPisanapplicationlayerprotocolthatfacilitatestheexchangeofmanagementinformation betweennetworkdevices.SNMPenablesnetworkadministratorstomanagenetwork performance,findandsolvenetworkproblems,andplanfornetworkgrowth. SecureStackB2devicessupportthreeversionsofSNMP: Version1(SNMPv1)ThisistheinitialimplementationofSNMP.RefertoRFC1157fora fulldescriptionoffunctionality. Version2(SNMPv2c)ThesecondreleaseofSNMP,describedinRFC1907,hasadditions andenhancementstodatatypes,countersize,andprotocoloperations. Version3(SNMPv3)ThisisthemostrecentversionofSNMP,andincludessignificant enhancementstoadministrationandsecurity.SNMPv3isfullydescribedinRFC2571, RFC 2572,RFC2573,RFC2574,andRFC2575.

SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c

ThecomponentsofSNMPv1andSNMPv2cnetworkmanagementfallintothreecategories: Manageddevices(suchasaswitch). SNMPagentsandMIBs,includingSNMPtraps,communitystrings,andRemoteMonitoring (RMON)MIBs,whichrunonmanageddevices.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 6-1

SNMP Configuration Summary

SNMPnetworkmanagementapplications,suchastheEnterasysNetSightapplication,which communicatewithagentstogetstatisticsandalertsfromthemanageddevices.

SNMPv3
SNMPv3isaninteroperablestandardsbasedprotocolthatprovidessecureaccesstodevicesby authenticatingandencryptingframesoverthenetwork.Theadvancedsecurityfeaturesprovided inSNMPv3areasfollows: MessageintegrityCollectsdatasecurelywithoutbeingtamperedwithorcorrupted. AuthenticationDeterminesthemessageisfromavalidsource. EncryptionScramblesthecontentsofaframetopreventitfrombeingseenbyan unauthorizedsource.

UnlikeSNMPv1andSNMPv2c,inSNMPv3,theconceptofSNMPagentsandSNMPmanagersno longerapply.TheseconceptshavebeencombinedintoanSNMPentity.AnSNMPentityconsists ofanSNMPengineandSNMPapplications.AnSNMPengineconsistsofthefollowingfour components: DispatcherThiscomponentsendsandreceivesmessages. MessageprocessingsubsystemThiscomponentacceptsoutgoingPDUsfromthe dispatcherandpreparesthemfortransmissionbywrappingtheminamessageheaderand returningthemtothedispatcher.Themessageprocessingsubsystemalsoacceptsincoming messagesfromthedispatcher,processeseachmessageheader,andreturnstheenclosedPDU tothedispatcher. SecuritysubsystemThiscomponentauthenticatesandencryptsmessages. AccesscontrolsubsystemThiscomponentdetermineswhichusersandwhichoperations areallowedaccesstomanagedobjects.

About SNMP Security Models and Levels

AnSNMPsecuritymodelisanauthenticationstrategythatissetupforauserandthegroupin whichtheuserresides.Asecuritylevelisthepermittedlevelofsecuritywithinasecuritymodel. ThethreelevelsofSNMPsecurityare:Noauthenticationrequired(NoAuthNoPriv); authenticationrequired(AuthNoPriv);andprivacy(authPriv).Acombinationofasecuritymodel andasecurityleveldetermineswhichsecuritymechanismisemployedwhenhandlinganSNMP frame.Table 617identifiesthelevelsofSNMPsecurityavailableonSecureStackB2devicesand authenticationrequiredwithineachmodel. Table 6-17
Model v1 v2c

SNMP Security Levels

Security Level NoAuthNoPriv NoAuthNoPriv Authentication Community string Community string Encryption None None How It Works Uses a community string match for authentication. Uses a community string match for authentication.

6-2

SNMP Configuration

Reviewing SNMP Statistics

Table 6-17
Model v3

SNMP Security Levels (Continued)

Security Level NoAuthNoPriv AuthNoPriv Authentication User name MD5 or SHA Encryption None None How It Works Uses a user name match for authentication. Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms. Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA algorithms. Provides DES 56-bit encryption in addition to authentication based on the CBCDES (DES-56) standard.

authPriv

MD5 or SHA

DES

Using SNMP Contexts to Access Specific MIBs

Bydefault,whenoperatingfromtheswitchCLI,SecureStackB2devicesallowaccesstoallSNMP MIBsorcontexts.AcontextisacollectionofMIBobjects,oftenassociatedwithaparticular physicalorlogicaldevice. Ifnooptionalcontextparametersareconfiguredforv1andv2communitynamesandv3user groups,thesegroupsareabletoaccessallSNMPMIBobjectswheninswitchmode. SpecifyingacontextparameterwhensettingupSNMPusergroupwouldpermitorrestrictthe groupsswitchmanagementaccesstotheMIB(s)specifiedbythecontext(MIBobjectID)value. AllSNMPcontextsknowntothedevicecanbedisplayedusingtheshowsnmpcontextcommand asdescribedinshowsnmpcontextonpage 620.

Example
ThisexamplepermitsthepowergrouptomanageallMIBsviaSNMPv3:
B2(su)->set snmp access powergroup security-model usm

Configuration Considerations
CommandsforconfiguringSNMPontheSecureStackB2deviceareindependentduringthe SNMPsetupprocess.Forinstance,targetparameterscanbespecifiedwhensettingupoptional notificationfilterseventhoughtheseparametershavenotyetbeencreatedwiththesetsnmp targetparamscommand.

Reviewing SNMP Statistics

Purpose
ToreviewSNMPstatistics.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-3

show snmp engineid

Commands
For information about... show snmp engineid show snmp counters Refer to page... 6-4 6-5

show snmp engineid

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheSNMPlocalengineID.ThisistheSNMPv3engines administrativelyuniqueidentifier.

Syntax
show snmp engineid

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPengineproperties:
B2(su)->show snmp engineid EngineId: 80:00:15:f8:03:00:e0:63:9d:b5:87 Engine Boots = 12 Engine Time = 162181 Max Msg Size = 2048

Table 618providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 6-18

Output EngineId Engine Boots Engine Time Max Msg Size

show snmp engineid Output Details

What It Displays... String identifying the SNMP agent on the device. Number of times the SNMP engine has been started or reinitialized. Time in seconds since last reboot. Maximum accepted length, in bytes, of SNMP frame.

6-4

SNMP Configuration

show snmp counters

show snmp counters

UsethiscommandtodisplaySNMPtrafficcountervalues.

Syntax
show snmp counters

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPcountervalues
B2(su)->show snmp counters --- mib2 SNMP group counters: snmpInPkts = 396601 snmpOutPkts = 396601 snmpInBadVersions = 0 snmpInBadCommunityNames = 0 snmpInBadCommunityUses = 0 snmpInASNParseErrs = 0 snmpInTooBigs = 0 snmpInNoSuchNames = 0 snmpInBadValues = 0 snmpInReadOnlys = 0 snmpInGenErrs = 0 snmpInTotalReqVars = 403661 snmpInTotalSetVars = 534 snmpInGetRequests = 290 snmpInGetNexts = 396279 snmpInSetRequests = 32 snmpInGetResponses = 0 snmpInTraps = 0 snmpOutTooBigs = 0 snmpOutNoSuchNames = 11 snmpOutBadValues = 0 snmpOutGenErrs = 0 snmpOutGetRequests = 0 snmpOutGetNexts = 0 snmpOutSetRequests = 0 snmpOutGetResponses = 396601 snmpOutTraps = 0 snmpSilentDrops = 0 snmpProxyDrops = 0 --- USM Stats counters: usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels = 0 usmStatsNotInTimeWindows = 0 usmStatsUnknownUserNames = 0

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-5

show snmp counters

usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs usmStatsWrongDigests usmStatsDecryptionErrors

= 0 = 0 = 0

Table 619providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 6-19 show snmp counters Output Details

Output snmpInPkts snmpOutPkts snmpInBadVersions snmpInBadCommunityNames snmpInBadCommunityUses What It Displays... Number of messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service. Number of SNMP messages passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. Number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity for an unsupported SNMP version. Number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity that used an SNMP community name not known to the entity. Number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity that represented an SNMP operation not allowed by the SNMP community named in the message. Number of ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation) or BER (Basic Encoding Rules) errors encountered by the SNMP entity when decoding received SNMP messages. Number of SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status field as tooBig. Number of SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status field as noSuchName. Number of SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status field as badValue. Number of valid SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status field as "readOnly." Number of SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status field as "genErr." Number of MIB objects retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and Get-Next PDUs. Number of MIB objects altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request PDUs. Number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Trap PDUs accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status field as "tooBig." Number of SNMP PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status as "noSuchName."

snmpInASNParseErrs

snmpInTooBigs snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys snmpInGenErrs snmpInTotalReqVars

snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames

6-6

SNMP Configuration

Configuring SNMP Users, Groups, and Communities

Table 6-19

show snmp counters Output Details (Continued)

Output snmpOutBadValues snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests snmpOutGetNexts snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGetResponses snmpOutTraps snmpSilentDrops What It Displays... Number of SNMP PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status field as "badValue." Number of SNMP PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity with the value of the error-status field as "genErr." Number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Trap PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity. Number of SNMP Get, Set, or Inform request error messages that were dropped because the reply was larger than the requestors maximum message size. Number of SNMP Get, Set, or Inform request error messages that were dropped because the reply was larger than the proxy targets maximum message size. Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped because they requested a security level that was unknown to the SNMP engine or otherwise unavailable. Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped because they appeared outside of the authoritative SNMP engine's window. Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped because they referenced a user that was not known to the SNMP engine. Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped because they referenced an snmpEngineID that was not known to the SNMP engine. Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped because they did not contain the expected digest value. Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped because they could not be decrypted.

snmpProxyDrops

usmStatsUnsupportedSec Levels usmStatsNotInTimeWindows

usmStatsUnknownUserNames

usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs

usmStatsWrongDigests usmStatsDecriptionErrors

Configuring SNMP Users, Groups, and Communities

Purpose
ToreviewandconfigureSNMPusers,groups,andv1andv2communities.Thesearedefinedas follows: UserApersonregisteredinSNMPv3toaccessSNMPmanagement. GroupAcollectionofuserswhosharethesameSNMPaccessprivileges. CommunityAnameusedtoauthenticateSNMPv1andv2users.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-7

show snmp user

Commands
For information about... show snmp user set snmp user clear snmp user show snmp group set snmp group clear snmp group show snmp community set snmp community clear snmp community Refer to page... 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-12 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-14

show snmp user

UsethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutSNMPusers.Thesearepeopleregisteredto accessSNMPmanagement.

Syntax
show snmp user [list] | [user] | [remote remote] [volatile | nonvolatile | readonly]

Parameters
list user remoteremote (Optional)DisplaysalistofregisteredSNMPusernames. (Optional)Displaysinformationaboutaspecificuser. (Optional)DisplaysinformationaboutusersonaspecificremoteSNMP engine.

volatile|nonvolatile (Optional)Displaysuserinformationforaspecifiedstoragetype. |readonly

Defaults
Iflistisnotspecified,detailedSNMPinformationwillbedisplayed. Ifuserisnotspecified,informationaboutallSNMPuserswillbedisplayed. Ifremoteisnotspecified,userinformationaboutthelocalSNMPenginewillbedisplayed. Ifnotspecified,userinformationforallstoragetypeswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

6-8

SNMP Configuration

set snmp user

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayanSNMPuserlist:
B2(su)->show snmp user list --- SNMP user information ----- List of registered users: Guest admin1 admin2 netops

ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayinformationfortheSNMPguestuser:
(su)->show snmp user guest --- SNMP user information --EngineId: 00:00:00:63:00:00:00:a1:00:00:00:00 Username = Guest Auth protocol = usmNoAuthProtocol Privacy protocol = usmNoPrivProtocol Storage type = nonVolatile Row status = active

Table 620providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 6-20 show snmp user Output Details

Output EngineId Username Auth protocol Privacy protocol Storage type Row status What It Displays... SNMP local engine identifier. SNMPv1 or v2 community name or SNMPv3 user name. Type of authentication protocol applied to this user. Whether a privacy protocol is applied when authentication protocol is in use. Whether entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory. Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

set snmp user

UsethiscommandtocreateanewSNMPv3user.

Syntax
set snmp user user [remote remoteid] [authentication {md5 | sha}] [authpassword] [privacy privpassword] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
user remoteremoteid SpecifiesanamefortheSNMPv3user. (Optional)RegisterstheuseronaspecificremoteSNMPengine.

authenticationmd5 (Optional)SpecifiestheauthenticationtyperequiredforthisuserasMD5 |sha orSHA. authpassword (Optional)Specifiesapasswordforthisuserwhenauthenticationis required.Minimumof8characters.

privacyprivpassword (Optional)Appliesencryptionandspecifiesanencryptionpassword. Minimumof8characters.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 6-9

clear snmp user

volatile| nonvolatile

(Optional)Specifiesastoragetypeforthisuserentry.

Defaults
Ifremoteisnotspecified,theuserwillberegisteredforthelocalSNMPengine. Ifauthenticationisnotspecified,noauthenticationwillbeapplied. Ifprivacyisnotspecified,noencryptionwillbeapplied. Ifstoragetypeisnotspecified,nonvolatilewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateanewSNMPusernamednetops.Bydefault,thisuserwillbe registeredonthelocalSNMPenginewithoutauthenticationandencryption.Entriesrelatedtothis userwillbestoredinpermanent(nonvolatile)memory:
B2(su)->set snmp user netops

clear snmp user

UsethiscommandtoremoveauserfromtheSNMPv3securitymodellist.

Syntax
clear snmp user user [remote remote]

Parameters
user remoteremote SpecifiesanSNMPv3usertoremove. (Optional)RemovestheuserfromaspecificremoteSNMPengine.

Defaults
Ifremoteisnotspecified,theuserwillberemovedfromthelocalSNMPengine.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoremovetheSNMPusernamedbill:
B2(su)->clear snmp user bill

show snmp group

UsethiscommandtodisplayanSNMPgroupconfiguration.AnSNMPgroupisacollectionof SNMPv3userswhosharethesameaccessprivileges.

6-10

SNMP Configuration

show snmp group

Syntax
show snmp group [groupname groupname] [user user] [security-model {v1 | v2c | usm}] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
groupname groupname useruser (Optional)DisplaysinformationforaspecificSNMPgroup. (Optional)Displaysinformationaboutuserswithinthespecifiedgroup.

securitymodelv1| (Optional)Displaysinformationaboutgroupsassignedtoaspecific v2c|usm securitySNMPmodel. volatile| nonvolatile|read only (Optional)DisplaysSNMPgroupinformationforaspecifiedstoragetype.

Defaults
Ifgroupnameisnotspecified,informationaboutallSNMPgroupswillbedisplayed. Ifuserisnotspecified,informationaboutallSNMPuserswillbedisplayed. Ifsecuritymodelisnotspecified,userinformationaboutallSNMPversionswillbedisplayed. Ifnotspecified,informationforallstoragetypeswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPgroupinformation:
B2(su)->show snmp group --- SNMP group information --Security model = SNMPv1 Security/user name = public Group name = Anyone Storage type = nonVolatile Row status = active Security model Security/user name Group name Storage type Row status = = = = = SNMPv1 public.router1 Anyone nonVolatile active

Table 621providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 6-21 show snmp group Output Details

Output Security model Security/user name Group name Storage type Row status What It Displays... SNMP version associated with this group. User belonging to the SNMP group. Name of SNMP group. Whether entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory. Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-11

set snmp group

set snmp group

UsethiscommandtocreateanSNMPgroup.ThisassociatesSNMPv3userstoagroupthatshares commonaccessprivileges.

Syntax
set snmp group groupname user user security-model {v1 | v2c | usm} [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
groupname useruser SpecifiesanSNMPgroupnametocreate. SpecifiesanSNMPv3usernametoassigntothegroup.

securitymodelv1| SpecifiesanSNMPsecuritymodeltoassigntothegroup. v2c|usm volatile| nonvolatile (Optional)SpecifiesastoragetypeforSNMPentriesassociatedwiththe group.

Defaults
Ifstoragetypeisnotspecified,nonvolatilestoragewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateanSNMPgroupcalledanyone,assignausernamedpublic andassignSNMPv3securitytothegroup:
B2(su)->set snmp group anyone user public security-model usm

clear snmp group

UsethiscommandtoclearSNMPgroupsettingsgloballyorforaspecificSNMPgroupanduser.

Syntax
clear snmp group groupname user [security-model {v1 | v2c | usm}]

Parameters
groupname user SpecifiestheSNMPgrouptobecleared. SpecifiestheSNMPusertobecleared.

securitymodelv1| (Optional)Clearsthesettingsassociatedwithaspecificsecuritymodel. v2c|usm

Defaults
If not specified, settings related to all security models will be cleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.
6-12 SNMP Configuration

show snmp community

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearallsettingsassignedtothepublicuserwithintheSNMPgroup anyone:
B2(su)->clear snmp group anyone public

show snmp community

UsethiscommandtodisplaySNMPcommunitynamesandstatus.InSNMPv1andv2, communitynamesactaspasswordstoremotemanagement.

Syntax
show snmp community [name]

Parameters
name (Optional)DisplaysSNMPinformationforaspecificcommunityname.

Defaults
Ifnameisnotspecified,informationwillbedisplayedforallSNMPcommunities.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayinformationabouttheSNMPpubliccommunityname.For adescriptionofthisoutput,refertosetsnmpcommunity(page613).
B2(su)->show snmp community public --- Configured community strings --Name Security name Context Transport tag Storage type Status = = = = = = ********* public

nonVolatile active

set snmp community

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanSNMPcommunitygroup.

Syntax
set snmp community community [securityname securityname] [context context] [transport transport] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
community securityname securityname Specifiesacommunitygroupname. (Optional)SpecifiesanSNMPsecuritynametoassociatewiththis community.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 6-13

clear snmp community

contextcontext

(Optional)Specifiesasubsetofmanagementinformationthiscommunity willbeallowedtoaccess.Validvaluesarefullorpartialcontextnames.To reviewallcontextsconfiguredforthedevice,usetheshowsnmpcontext commandasdescribedinshowsnmpcontextonpage 620. (Optional)SpecifiesthesetoftransportendpointsfromwhichSNMP requestwiththiscommunitynamewillbeaccepted.Makesalinktoa targetaddresstable. (Optional)Specifiesthestoragetypefortheseentries.

transporttransport

volatile| nonvolatile

Defaults
Ifsecuritynameisnotspecified,thecommunitynamewillbeused. Ifcontextisnotspecified,accesswillbegrantedforthedefaultcontext. Iftransporttagisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied. Ifstoragetypeisnotspecified,nonvolatilewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetanSNMPcommunitynamecalledvip
B2(su)->set snmp community vip

clear snmp community

UsethiscommandtodeleteanSNMPcommunityname.

Syntax
clear snmp community name

Parameters
name SpecifiestheSNMPcommunitynametoclear.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodeletethecommunitynamevip.
B2(su)->clear snmp community vip

6-14

SNMP Configuration

Configuring SNMP Access Rights

Configuring SNMP Access Rights

Purpose
ToreviewandconfigureSNMPaccessrights,assigningviewingprivilegesandsecuritylevelsto SNMPusergroups.

Commands
For information about... show snmp access set snmp access clear snmp access Refer to page... 6-15 6-17 6-18

show snmp access

UsethiscommandtodisplayaccessrightsandsecuritylevelsconfiguredforSNMPoneormore groups.

Syntax
show snmp access [groupname] [security-model {v1 | v2c | usm}] [noauthentication | authentication | privacy] [context context] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
groupname (Optional)DisplaysaccessinformationforaspecificSNMPv3group. securitymodelv1| (Optional)DisplaysaccessinformationforSNMPsecuritymodelversion v2c|usm 1,2cor3(usm). noauthentication| authentication| privacy contextcontext (Optional)Displaysaccessinformationforaspecificsecuritylevel.

(Optional)Displaysaccessinformationforaspecificcontext.Fora descriptionofhowtospecifySNMPcontexts,refertoUsingSNMP ContextstoAccessSpecificMIBsonpage 63. (Optional)Displaysaccessentriesforaspecificstoragetype.

volatile| nonvolatile|read only

Defaults
Ifgroupnameisnotspecified,accessinformationforallSNMPgroupswillbedisplayed. Ifsecuritymodelisnotspecified,accessinformationforallSNMPversionswillbedisplayed. Ifnoauthentication,authenticationorprivacyarenotspecified,accessinformationforall securitylevelswillbedisplayed. Ifcontextisnotspecified,allcontextswillbedisplayed.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-15

show snmp access

Ifvolatile,nonvolatileorreadonlyarenotspecified,allentriesofallstoragetypeswillbe displayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPaccessinformation:
B2(su)->show snmp Group = Security model = Security level = Read View = Write View = Notify View = Context match = Storage type = Row status = Group Security model Security level Read View Write View Notify View Context match Storage type Row status = = = = = = = = = access SystemAdmin USM noAuthNoPriv All All exact match nonVolatile active NightOperator USM noAuthNoPriv All All exact match nonVolatile active

Table 622providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 6-22 show snmp access Output Details

Output Group Security model Security level What It Displays... SNMP group name. Security model applied to this group. Valid types are: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3 (User based - USM). Security level applied to this group. Valid levels are: noAuthNoPrivacy (no authentication required) AuthNoPrivacy (authentication required) authPriv (privacy -- most secure level) Read View Write View Notify View Context match Storage type Row status Name of the view that allows this group to view SNMP MIB objects. Name of the view that allows this group to configure the contents of the SNMP agent. Name of the view that allows this group to send an SNMP trap message. Whether or not SNMP context match must be exact (full context name match) or a partial match with a given prefix. Whether access entries for this group are stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory. Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

6-16

SNMP Configuration

set snmp access

set snmp access

UsethiscommandtosetanSNMPaccessconfiguration.

Syntax
set snmp access groupname security-model {v1 | v2c | usm} [noauthentication | authentication | privacy] [context context] [exact | prefix] [read read] [write write] [notify notify] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
groupname SpecifiesanameforanSNMPv3group. securitymodelv1| SpecifiesSNMPversion1,2cor3(usm). v2c|usm noauthentication| authentication| privacy (Optional)AppliesSNMPsecuritylevelasnoauthentication, authentication(withoutprivacy)orprivacy.Privacyspecifiesthat messagessentonbehalfoftheuserareprotectedfromdisclosure.

contextcontextexact (Optional)Setsthecontextforthisaccessconfigurationandspecifiesthat |prefix thematchmustbeexact(matchingthewholecontextstring)oraprefix matchonly.ContextisasubsetofmanagementinformationthisSNMP groupwillbeallowedtoaccess.Validvaluesarefullorpartialcontext names.Toreviewallcontextsconfiguredforthedevice,usetheshow snmpcontextcommandasdescribedinshowsnmpcontexton page 620. readread writewrite notifynotify volatile| nonvolatile|read only (Optional)Specifiesareadaccessview. (Optional)Specifiesawriteaccessview. (Optional)Specifiesanotifyaccessview. (Optional)StoresassociatedSNMPentriesastemporaryorpermanent,or readonly.

Defaults
Ifsecuritylevelisnotspecified,noauthenticationwillbeapplied. Ifcontextisnotspecified,accesswillbeenabledforthedefaultcontext.Ifcontextisspecified withoutacontextmatch,exactmatchwillbeapplied. Ifreadviewisnotspecifiednonewillbeapplied. Ifwriteviewisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied. Ifnotifyviewisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied. Ifstoragetypeisnotspecified,entrieswillbestoredaspermanentandwillbeheldthroughdevice reboot.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexamplepermitsthepowergrouptomanageallMIBsviaSNMPv3:
B2(su)->set snmp access powergroup security-model usm

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-17

clear snmp access

clear snmp access

UsethiscommandtocleartheSNMPaccessentryofaspecificgroup,includingitssetSNMP securitymodel,andlevelofsecurity.

Syntax
clear snmp access groupname security-model {v1 | v2c | usm} [noauthentication | authentication | privacy] [context context]

Parameters
groupname SpecifiesthenameoftheSNMPgroupforwhichtoclearaccess. securitymodelv1| SpecifiesthesecuritymodeltobeclearedfortheSNMPaccessgroup. v2c|usm noauthentication| authentication| privacy contextcontext (Optional)ClearsaspecificsecuritylevelfortheSNMPaccessgroup.

(Optional)ClearsaspecificcontextfortheSNMPaccessgroup.Enter// toclearthedefaultcontext.

Defaults
Ifsecuritylevelisnotspecified,alllevelswillbecleared. Ifcontextisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearSNMPversion3accessforthemisgroupviathe authenticationprotocol:
B2(su)->clear snmp access mis-group security-model usm authentication

Configuring SNMP MIB Views

Purpose
ToreviewandconfigureSNMPMIBviews.SNMPviewsmapSNMPobjectstoaccessrights.

Commands
For information about... show snmp view show snmp context set snmp view clear snmp view Refer to page... 6-19 6-20 6-20 6-21

6-18

SNMP Configuration

show snmp view

show snmp view

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheMIBconfigurationforSNMPv3viewbasedaccess(VACM).

Syntax
show snmp view [viewname] [subtree oid-or-mibobject] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
viewname subtreeoidormibobject volatile|nonvolatile| readonly (Optional)DisplaysinformationforaspecificMIBview. (Optional)DisplaysinformationforaspecificMIBsubtreewhen viewnameisspecified. (Optional)Displaysentriesforaspecificstoragetype.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,allSNMPMIBviewconfigurationinformationwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPMIBviewconfigurationinformation:
B2(su)->show snmp view --- SNMP MIB View information --View Name = All Subtree OID = 1 Subtree mask = View Type = included Storage type = nonVolatile Row status = active View Name Subtree OID Subtree mask View Type Storage type Row status View Name Subtree OID Subtree mask View Type Storage type Row status = = = = = = = = = = = = All 0.0 included nonVolatile active Network 1.3.6.1.2.1 included nonVolatile active

Table 623providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.Fordetailsonusingthesetsnmp viewcommandtoassignvariables,refertosetsnmpviewonpage 620.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-19

show snmp context

Table 6-23

show snmp view Output Details

Output View Name Subtree OID Subtree mask View Type Storage type Row status What It Displays... Name assigned to a MIB view. Name identifying a MIB subtree. Bitmask applied to a MIB subtree. Whether or not subtree use must be included or excluded for this view. Whether storage is in nonVolatile or Volatile memory Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

show snmp context

UsethiscommandtodisplaythecontextlistconfigurationforSNMPsviewbasedaccesscontrol.

Syntax
show snmp context

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
AnSNMPcontextisacollectionofmanagementinformationthatcanbeaccessedbyanSNMP agentorentity.ThedefaultcontextallowsallSNMPagentstoaccessallmanagementinformation (MIBs).Whencreatedusingthesetsnmpaccesscommand(setsnmpaccessonpage 617),other contextscanbeappliedtolimitaccesstoasubsetofmanagementinformation.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayalistofallSNMPcontextsknowntothedevice:
B2(su)->show snmp context --- Configured contexts: default context (all mibs)

set snmp view

UsethiscommandtosetaMIBconfigurationforSNMPv3viewbasedaccess(VACM).

Syntax
set snmp view viewname viewname subtree subtree [mask mask] [included | excluded] [volatile | nonvolatile]

6-20

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp view

Parameters
viewnameviewname SpecifiesanameforaMIBview. subtreesubtree maskmask included| excluded volatile| nonvolatile SpecifiesaMIBsubtreename. (Optional)Specifiesabitmaskforasubtree. (Optional)Specifiessubtreeuse(default)ornosubtreeuse. (Optional)Specifiestheuseoftemporaryorpermanent(default)storage.

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,maskwillbesetto255.255.255.255 Ifnotspecified,subtreeusewillbeincluded. Ifstoragetypeisnotspecified,nonvolatile(permanent)willbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetanSNMPMIBviewtopublicwithasubtreenameof1.3.6.1 included:
B2(su)->set snmp view viewname public subtree 1.3.6.1 included

clear snmp view

UsethiscommandtodeleteanSNMPv3MIBview.

Syntax
clear snmp view viewname subtree

Parameters
viewname subtree SpecifiestheMIBviewnametobedeleted. SpecifiesthesubtreenameoftheMIBviewtobedeleted.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeleteSNMPMIBviewpublic:
B2(su)->clear snmp view public 1.3.6.1

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-21

Configuring SNMP Target Parameters

Configuring SNMP Target Parameters

Purpose
ToreviewandconfigureSNMPtargetparameters.Thiscontrolswhereandunderwhat circumstancesSNMPnotificationswillbesent.Atargetparameterentrycanbeboundtoatarget IPaddressallowedtoreceiveSNMPnotificationmessageswiththesetsnmptargetaddr command(setsnmptargetaddronpage 626).

Commands
For information about... show snmp targetparams set snmp targetparams clear snmp targetparams Refer to page... 6-22 6-23 6-24

show snmp targetparams

UsethiscommandtodisplaySNMPparametersusedtogenerateamessagetoatarget.

Syntax
show snmp targetparams [targetParams] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
targetParams volatile|nonvolatile| readonly (Optional)Displaysentriesforaspecifictargetparameter. (Optional)Displaystargetparameterentriesforaspecificstorage type.

Defaults
IftargetParamsisnotspecified,entriesassociatedwithalltargetparameterswillbedisplayed. Ifnotspecified,entriesofallstoragetypeswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPtargetparametersinformation:
B2(su)->show snmp targetparams --- SNMP TargetParams information --Target Parameter Name = v1ExampleParams Security Name = public Message Proc. Model = SNMPv1 Security Level = noAuthNoPriv Storage type = nonVolatile Row status = active

6-22

SNMP Configuration

set snmp targetparams

Target Parameter Name Security Name Message Proc. Model Security Level Storage type Row status Target Parameter Name Security Name Message Proc. Model Security Level Storage type Row status

= = = = = = = = = = = =

v2cExampleParams public SNMPv2c noAuthNoPriv nonVolatile active v3ExampleParams CharlieDChief USM authNoPriv nonVolatile active

Table 624providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 6-24 show snmp targetparams Output Details

Output Target Parameter Name Security Name Message Proc. Model Security Level What It Displays... Unique identifier for the parameter in the SNMP target parameters table. Maximum length is 32 bytes. Security string definition. SNMP version. Type of security level (auth: security level is set to use authentication protocol, noauth: security level is not set to use authentication protocol, or privacy). Whether entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory. Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

Storage type Row status

set snmp targetparams

UsethiscommandtosetSNMPtargetparameters,anamedsetofsecurity/authorizationcriteria usedtogenerateamessagetoatarget.

Syntax
set snmp targetparams paramsname user user security-model {v1 | v2c | usm} messageprocessing {v1 | v2c | v3} [noauthentication | authentication | privacy] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
paramsname useruser SpecifiesanameidentifyingparametersusedtogenerateSNMPmessages toaparticulartarget. SpecifiesanSNMPv1orv2communitynameoranSNMPv3username. Maximumlengthis32bytes.

securitymodelv1| SpecifiestheSNMPsecuritymodelappliedtothistargetparameteras v2c|usm version1,2cor3(usm). message SpecifiestheSNMPmessageprocessingmodelappliedtothistarget processingv1|v2c parameterasversion1,2cor3. |v3

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-23

clear snmp targetparams

noauthentication| authentication| privacy volatile| nonvolatile

(Optional)SpecifiestheSNMPsecuritylevelappliedtothistarget parameterasnoauthentication,authentication(withoutprivacy)or privacy.Privacyspecifiesthatmessagessentonbehalfoftheuserare protectedfromdisclosure. (Optional)Specifiesthestoragetypeappliedtothistargetparameter.

Defaults
None. Ifnotspecified,securitylevelwillbesettonoauthentication. Ifnotspecified,storagetypewillbesettononvolatile.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetSNMPtargetparametersnamedv1ExampleParamsforauser namedfredusingversion3securitymodelandmessageprocessing,andauthentication:
B2(su)->set snmp targetparams v1ExampleParams user fred security-model usm message-processing v3 authentication

clear snmp targetparams

UsethiscommandtocleartheSNMPtargetparameterconfiguration.

Syntax
clear snmp targetparams targetParams

Parameters
targetParams SpecifiesthenameoftheparameterintheSNMPtargetparameterstable tobecleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearSNMPtargetparametersnamedv1ExampleParams:
B2(su)->clear snmp targetparams v1ExampleParams

6-24

SNMP Configuration

Configuring SNMP Target Addresses

Configuring SNMP Target Addresses

Purpose
ToreviewandconfigureSNMPtargetaddresseswhichwillreceiveSNMPnotificationmessages. AnaddressconfigurationcanbelinkedtooptionalSNMPtransmit,ortarget,parameters(suchas timeout,retrycount,andUDPport)setwiththesetsnmptargetparamscommand((page623)).

Commands
For information about... show snmp targetaddr set snmp targetaddr clear snmp targetaddr Refer to page... 6-25 6-26 6-27

show snmp targetaddr

UsethiscommandtodisplaySNMPtargetaddressinformation.

Syntax
show snmp targetaddr [targetAddr] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
targetAddr (Optional)Displaysinformationforaspecifictargetaddressname. volatile|nonvolatile (Optional)Whentargetaddressisspecified,displaystargetaddress |readonly informationforaspecificstoragetype.

Defaults
IftargetAddrisnotspecified,entriesforalltargetaddressnameswillbedisplayed. Ifnotspecified,entriesofallstoragetypeswillbedisplayedforatargetaddress.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPtargetaddressinformation:
B2(su)->show snmp targetaddr Target Address Name = labmachine Tag List = v2cTrap IP Address = 10.2.3.116 UDP Port# = 162 Target Mask = 255.255.255.255 Timeout = 1500 Retry count = 4 Parameters = v2cParams Storage type = nonVolatile Row status = active
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 6-25

set snmp targetaddr

Table 625providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 6-25 show snmp targetaddr Output Details

Output Target Address Name Tag List IP Address UDP Port# Target Mask Timeout Retry count Parameters Storage type Row status What It Displays... Unique identifier in the snmpTargetAddressTable. Tags a location to the target address as a place to send notifications. Target IP address. Number of the UDP port of the target host to use. Target IP address mask. Timeout setting for the target address. Retry setting for the target address. Entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. Whether entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory. Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

set snmp targetaddr

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanSNMPtargetaddress.Thetargetaddressisauniqueidentifier andaspecificIPaddressthatwillreceiveSNMPnotificationmessagesanddeterminewhich communitystringswillbeaccepted.ThisaddressconfigurationcanbelinkedtooptionalSNMP transmitparameters(suchastimeout,retrycount,andUDPport).

Syntax
set snmp targetaddr targetaddr ipaddr param param [udpport udpport] [mask mask] [timeout timeout] [retries retries] [taglist taglist] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
targetaddr ipaddr paramparam udpportudpport maskmask timeouttimeout SpecifiesauniqueidentifiertoindexthesnmpTargetAddrTable. Maximumlengthis32bytes. SpecifiestheIPaddressofthetarget. SpecifiesanentryintheSNMPtargetparameterstable,whichisused whengeneratingamessagetothetarget.Maximumlengthis32bytes. (Optional)SpecifieswhichUDPportofthetargethosttouse. (Optional)SpecifiestheIPmaskofthetarget. (Optional)Specifiesthemaximumroundtriptimeallowedto communicatetothistargetaddress.Thisvalueisin.01secondsandthe defaultis1500(15seconds.) (Optional)Specifiesthenumberofmessageretriesallowedifaresponseis notreceived.Defaultis3. (Optional)SpecifiesalistofSNMPnotifytagvalues.Thistagsalocation tothetargetaddressasaplacetosendnotifications.Listmustbeenclosed inquotesandtagvaluesmustbeseparatedbyaspace(forexample, tag1tag2). (Optional)Specifiestemporary(default),orpermanentstorageforSNMP entries.

retriesretries taglisttaglist

volatile| nonvolatile

6-26

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp targetaddr

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,udpportwillbesetto162. Ifnotspecified,maskwillbesetto255.255.255.255 Ifnotspecified,timeoutwillbesetto1500. Ifnotspecified,numberofretrieswillbesetto3. Iftaglistisnotspecified,nonewillbeset. Ifnotspecified,storagetypewillbenonvolatile.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoconfigureatrapnotificationcalledTrapSink.Thistrapnotification willbesenttotheworkstation192.168.190.80(whichistargetaddresstr).Itwillusesecurityand authorizationcriteriacontainedinatargetparametersentrycalledv2cExampleParams.For moreinformationonconfiguringabasicSNMPtrap,refertoCreatingaBasicSNMPTrap Configurationonpage 636:
B2(su)->set snmp targetaddr tr 192.168.190.80 param v2cExampleParams taglist TrapSink

clear snmp targetaddr

UsethiscommandtodeleteanSNMPtargetaddressentry.

Syntax
clear snmp targetaddr targetAddr

Parameters
targetAddr Specifiesthetargetaddressentrytodelete.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearSNMPtargetaddressentrytr:
B2(su)->clear snmp targetaddr tr

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-27

Configuring SNMP Notification Parameters

Configuring SNMP Notification Parameters

About SNMP Notify Filters
ProfilesindicatingwhichtargetsshouldnotreceiveSNMPnotificationmessagesarekeptinthe NotifyFiltertable.Ifthistableisempty,meaningthatnofilteringisassociatedwithanySNMP target,thennofilteringwilltakeplace.Trapsorinformsnotificationswillbesenttoall destinationsintheSNMPtargetAddrTablethathavetagsmatchingthosefoundinthe NotifyTable. WhentheNotifyFiltertablecontainsprofileentries,theSNMPagentwillfindanyfilterprofile namethatcorrespondstothetargetparameternamecontainedinanoutgoingnotification message.Itwillthenapplytheappropriatesubtreespecificfilterwhengeneratingnotification messages.

Purpose
ToconfigureSNMPnotificationparametersandoptionalfilters.Notificationsareentitieswhich handlethegenerationofSNMPv1andv2trapsorSNMPv3informsmessagestoselect managementtargets.Optionalnotificationfiltersidentifywhichtargetsshouldnotreceive notifications.ForasampleSNMPtrapconfigurationshowinghowSNMPnotificationparameters areassociatedwithsecurityandauthorizationcriteria(targetparameters)andmappedtoa managementtargetaddress,refertoCreatingaBasicSNMPTrapConfigurationonpage 636.

Commands
For information about... show newaddrtrap set newaddrtrap show snmp notify set snmp notify clear snmp notify show snmp notifyfilter set snmp notifyfilter clear snmp notifyfilter show snmp notifyprofile set snmp notifyprofile clear snmp notifyprofile Refer to page... 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-35 6-35

show newaddrtrap
UsethiscommandtodisplaytheglobalandportspecificstatusoftheSNMPnewMACaddresses trapfunction.

Syntax
show newaddrtrap [port-string]

6-28

SNMP Configuration

set newaddrtrap

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysthestatusofthenewMACaddressestrapfunction onspecificports.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,thestatusofthenewMACaddressestrapfunctionwillbedisplayed forallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
Bydefault,thisfunctionisdisabledgloballyandperport.

Example
ThisexampledisplaysthestatusforGigabitEthernetports1through5inslot1.
B2(ro)->show newaddrtrap ge.1.1-5 New Address Traps Globally disabled Port --------ge.1.1 ge.1.2 ge.1.3 ge.1.4 ge.1.5 Enable State -----------disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled

set newaddrtrap
UsethiscommandtoenableordisableSNMPtrapmessaging,globallyorononeormoreports, whennewsourceMACaddressesaredetected.

Syntax
set newaddrtrap [port-string] {enable | disable}

Parameters
portstring enable|disable (Optional)EnableordisablethenewMACaddressestrapfunctionon specificports. EnableordisablethenewMACaddressestrapfunction.Ifentered withouttheportstringparameter,enablesordisablesthefunction globally.Whenenteredwiththeportstringparameter,enablesor disablesthefunctiononspecificports.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,thetrapfunctionissetglobally.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 6-29

show snmp notify

Usage
ThiscommandenablesanddisablessendingSNMPtrapmessageswhenanewsourceMAC addressisdetectedbyaport.IftheportisaCDPport,however,trapsfornewsourceMAC addresseswillnotbesent. Thedefaultmodeisdisabledgloballyandperport.

Example=
ThisexampleenablesthetrapfunctiongloballyandthenonGigabitEthernetports1through5in slot1.
B2(rw)->set newaddrtrap enable B2(rw)->set newaddrtrap ge.1.1-5 enable

show snmp notify

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheSNMPnotifyconfiguration,whichdeterminesthemanagement targetsthatwillreceiveSNMPnotifications.

Syntax
show snmp notify [notify] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
notify volatile| nonvolatile|read only (Optional)Displaysnotifyentriesforaspecificnotifyname. (Optional)Displaysnotifyentriesforaspecificstoragetype.

Defaults
Ifanotifynameisnotspecified,allentrieswillbedisplayed. Ifvolatile,nonvolatile,orreadonlyarenotspecified,allstoragetypeentrieswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheSNMPnotifyinformation:
B2(su)->show snmp notify --- SNMP notifyTable information --Notify name = 1 Notify Tag = Console Notify Type = trap Storage type = nonVolatile Row status = active Notify name Notify Tag Notify Type Storage type Row status = = = = = 2 TrapSink trap nonVolatile active

6-30

SNMP Configuration

set snmp notify

Table 626providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 6-26

Output Notify name Notify Tag Notify Type Storage type Row status

show snmp notify Output Details

What It Displays... A unique identifier used to index the SNMP notify table. Name of the entry in the SNMP notify table. Type of notification: SNMPv1 or v2 trap or SNMPv3 InformRequest message. Whether access entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile, or read-only memory. Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

set snmp notify

UsethiscommandtosettheSNMPnotifyconfiguration.ThiscreatesanentryintheSNMPnotify table,whichisusedtoselectmanagementtargetswhoshouldreceivenotificationmessages.This commandstagparametercanbeusedtobindeachentrytoatargetaddressusingthesetsnmp targetaddrcommand(setsnmptargetaddronpage 626).

Syntax
set snmp notify notify tag tag [trap | inform] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
notify tagtag trap|inform volatile| nonvolatile SpecifiesanSNMPnotifyname. SpecifiesanSNMPnotifytag.ThisbindsthenotifynametotheSNMP targetaddresstable. (Optional)SpecifiesSNMPv1orv2Trapmessages(default)orSNMPv3 InformRequestmessages. (Optional)Specifiestemporary(default),orpermanentstorageforSNMP entries.

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,messagetypewillbesettotrap. Ifnotspecified,storagetypewillbesettononvolatile.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetanSNMPnotifyconfigurationwithanotifynameofhelloanda notifytagofworld.Notificationswillbesentastrapmessagesandstoragetypewill automaticallydefaulttopermanent:
B2(su)->set snmp notify hello tag world trap

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-31

clear snmp notify

clear snmp notify

UsethiscommandtoclearanSNMPnotifyconfiguration.

Syntax
clear snmp notify notify

Parameters
notify SpecifiesanSNMPnotifynametoclear.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheSNMPnotifyconfigurationforhello:
B2(su)->clear snmp notify hello

show snmp notifyfilter

UsethiscommandtodisplaySNMPnotifyfilterinformation,identifyingwhichprofileswillnot receiveSNMPnotifications.

Syntax
show snmp notifyfilter [profile] [subtree oid-or-mibobject] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
profile subtreeoidor mibobject volatile| nonvolatile|read only (Optional)Displaysaspecificnotifyfilter. (Optional)Displaysanotifyfilterwithinaspecificsubtree. (Optional)Displaysnotifyfilterentriesofaspecificstoragetype.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,allnotifyfilterinformationwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
SeeAboutSNMPNotifyFiltersonpage 628formoreinformationaboutnotifyfilters.

6-32

SNMP Configuration

set snmp notifyfilter

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPnotifyfilterinformation.Inthiscase,thenotifyprofile pilot1insubtree1.3.6willnotreceiveSNMPnotificationmessages:
B2(su)->show snmp notifyfilter --- SNMP notifyFilter information --Profile = pilot1 Subtree = 1.3.6 Filter type = included Storage type = nonVolatile Row status = active

set snmp notifyfilter

UsethiscommandtocreateanSNMPnotifyfilterconfiguration.Thisidentifieswhich managementtargetsshouldNOTreceivenotificationmessages,whichisusefulforfinetuningthe amountofSNMPtrafficgenerated.

Syntax
set snmp notifyfilter profile subtree oid-or-mibobject [mask mask] [included | excluded] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
profile subtreeoidor mibobject maskmask included| excluded volatile| nonvolatile SpecifiesanSNMPfilternotifyname. SpecifiesaMIBsubtreeIDtargetforthefilter. (Optional)Appliesasubtreemask. (Optional)Specifiesthatsubtreeisincludedorexcluded. (Optional)Specifiesastoragetype.

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,maskisnotset. Ifnotspecified,subtreewillbeincluded. Ifstoragetypeisnotspecified,nonvolatile(permanent)willbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
SeeAboutSNMPNotifyFiltersonpage 628formoreinformationaboutnotifyfilters.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateanSNMPnotifyfiltercalledpilot1withaMIBsubtreeIDof 1.3.6:
B2(su)->set snmp notifyfilter pilot1 subtree 1.3.6

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-33

clear snmp notifyfilter

clear snmp notifyfilter

UsethiscommandtodeleteanSNMPnotifyfilterconfiguration.

Syntax
clear snmp notifyfilter profile subtree oid-or-mibobject

Parameters
profile subtreeoidor mibobject SpecifiesanSNMPfilternotifynametodelete. SpecifiesaMIBsubtreeIDcontainingthefiltertobedeleted.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeletetheSNMPnotifyfilterpilot1:
B2(su)->clear snmp notifyfilter pilot1 subtree 1.3.6

show snmp notifyprofile

UsethiscommandtodisplaySNMPnotifyprofileinformation.Thisassociatestargetparameters toanSNMPnotifyfiltertodeterminewhoshouldnotreceiveSNMPnotifications.

Syntax
show snmp notifyprofile [profile] [targetparam targetparam] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
profile targetparam targetparam volatile| nonvolatile|read only (Optional)Displaysaspecificnotifyprofile. (Optional)Displaysentriesforaspecifictargetparameter. (Optional)Displaysnotifyfilterentriesofaspecificstoragetype.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,allnotifyprofileinformationwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

6-34

SNMP Configuration

set snmp notifyprofile

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNMPnotifyinformationfortheprofilenamedarea51:
B2(su)->show snmp notifyprofile area51 --- SNMP notifyProfile information --Notify Profile = area51 TargetParam = v3ExampleParams Storage type = nonVolatile Row status = active

set snmp notifyprofile

UsethiscommandtocreateanSNMPnotifyfilterprofileconfiguration.Thisassociatesa notificationfilter,createdwiththesetsnmpnotifyfiltercommand(setsnmpnotifyfilteron page 633),toasetofSNMPtargetparameterstodeterminewhichmanagementtargetsshould notreceiveSNMPnotifications.

Syntax
set snmp notifyprofile profile targetparam targetparam [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
profile targetparam targetparam volatile| nonvolatile SpecifiesanSNMPfilternotifyname. SpecifiesanassociatedentryintheSNMPTargetParamsTable. (Optional)Specifiesastoragetype.

Defaults
Ifstoragetypeisnotspecified,nonvolatile(permanent)willbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateanSNMPnotifyprofilenamedarea51andassociateatarget parametersentry.
B2(su)->set snmp notifyprofile area51 targetparam v3ExampleParams

clear snmp notifyprofile

UsethiscommandtodeleteanSNMPnotifyprofileconfiguration.

Syntax
clear snmp notifyprofile profile targetparam targetparam

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-35

Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration

Parameters
profile targetparam targetparam SpecifiesanSNMPfilternotifynametodelete. SpecifiesanassociatedentryinthesnmpTargetParamsTable.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeleteSNMPnotifyprofilearea51:
B2(su)->clear snmp notifyprofile area51 targetparam v3ExampleParams

Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration

TrapsarenotificationmessagessentbyanSNMPv1orv2agenttoanetworkmanagementstation, aconsole,oraterminaltoindicatetheoccurrenceofasignificantevent,suchaswhenaportor devicegoesupordown,whenthereareauthenticationfailures,andwhenpowersupplyerrors occur.ThefollowingconfigurationexampleshowshowtouseCLIcommandstoassociateSNMP notificationparameterswithsecurityandauthorizationcriteria(targetparameters),andmapthe parameterstoamanagementtargetaddress.
Note: This example illustrates how to configure an SNMPv2 trap notification. Creating an SNMPv1 or v3 Trap, or an SNMPv3 Inform notification would require using the same commands with different parameters, where appropriate. Always ensure that v1/v2 communities or v3 users used for generating traps or informs are pre-configured with enough privileges to access corresponding MIBs.

CompleteanSNMPv2trapconfigurationonaSecureStackB2deviceasfollows: 1. 2. 3. CreateacommunitynamethatwillactasanSNMPuserpassword. CreateanSNMPtargetparametersentrytoassociatesecurityandauthorizationcriteriatothe usersinthecommunitycreatedinStep1. VerifyifanyapplicableSNMPnotificationentriesexist,orcreateanewone.Youwillusethis entrytosendSNMPnotificationmessagestotheappropriatemanagementtargetscreatedin Step 2. CreateatargetaddressentrytobindamanagementIPaddressto: ThenotificationentryandtagnamecreatedinStep3and ThetargetparametersentrycreatedinStep2.

4.

Table 627showsthecommandsusedtocompleteanSNMPv2trapconfigurationona SecureStackB2device. Table 6-27

To do this... Create a community name.

Basic SNMP Trap Configuration

Use these commands... set snmp community

6-36

SNMP Configuration

Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration

Table 6-27
To do this...

Basic SNMP Trap Configuration (Continued)

Use these commands... set snmp targetparams show snmp notify set snmp notify set snmp targetaddr

Create an SNMP target parameters entry. Verify if any applicable SNMP notification entries exist. Create a new notification entry. Create a target address entry.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowto: CreateanSNMPcommunitycalledmgmt. ConfigureatrapnotificationcalledTrapSink.

Thistrapnotificationwillbesentwiththecommunitynamemgmttotheworkstation 192.168.190.80(whichistargetaddresstr).Itwillusesecurityandauthorizationcriteriacontained inatargetparametersentrycalledv2cExampleParams.

B2(su)->set snmp community mgmt B2(su)->set snmp targetparams v2cExampleParams user mgmt security-model v2c message-processing v2c B2(su)->set snmp notify entry1 tag TrapSink B2(su)->set snmp targetaddr tr 192.168.190.80 param v2cExampleParams taglist TrapSink

How SNMP Will Use This Configuration

Inordertosendatrap/notificationrequestedbyaMIBcode,theSNMPagentrequiresthe equivalentofatrapdoor,akeytounlockthedoor,andaprocedureforcrossingthe doorstep.Todetermineifalltheseelementsareinplace,theSNMPagentproceedsasfollows: 1. Determinesifthekeysfortrapdoorsdoexist.Intheexampleconfigurationabove,the keythatSNMPislookingforisthenotificationentrycreatedwiththesetsnmpnotify commandwhich,inthiscase,isakeylabeledentry1. Searchesforthedoorsmatchingsuchakey.Forexample,theparameterssetfortheentry1key showsthatitopensonlythedoorTrapSink. VerifiesthatthespecifieddoorTrapSinkis,infact,available.Inthiscaseitwasbuiltusingthe setsnmptargetaddrcommand.Thiscommandalsospecifiesthatthisdoorleadstothe managementstation192.168.190.80,andtheprocedure(targetparams)tocrossthedoorstep iscalledv2ExampleParams. Verifiesthatthev2ExampleParamsdescriptionofhowtostepthroughthedooris,infact, there.Theagentcheckstargetparamsentriesanddeterminesthisdescriptionwasmadewith thesetsnmptargetparamscommand,whichtellsexactlywhichSNMPprotocoltouseand whatcommunitynametoprovide.Inthiscase,thecommunitynameismgmt. Verifiesthatthemgmtcommunitynameisavailable.Inthiscase,ithasbeenconfiguredusing thesetsnmpcommunitycommand. Sendsthetrapnotificationmessage.

2. 3.

4.

5. 6.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

6-37

Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration

6-38

SNMP Configuration

7
Spanning Tree Configuration
ThischapterdescribestheSpanningTreeConfigurationsetofcommandsandhowtousethem.
For information about... Spanning Tree Configuration Summary Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters Configuring Spanning Tree Port Parameters Configuring Spanning Tree Loop Protect Parameters Refer to page... 7-1 7-3 7-31 7-39

Caution: Spanning Tree configuration should be performed only by personnel who are very knowledgeable about Spanning Trees and the configuration of the Spanning Tree Algorithm. Otherwise, the proper operation of the network could be at risk.

Spanning Tree Configuration Summary

Overview: Single, Rapid, and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocols
TheIEEE802.1DSpanningTreeProtocol(STP)resolvestheproblemsofphysicalloopsina networkbyestablishingoneprimarypathbetweenanytwodevicesinanetwork.Anyduplicate pathsarebarredfromuseandbecomestandbyorblockedpathsuntiltheoriginalpathfails,at whichpointtheycanbebroughtintoservice.

RSTP
TheIEEE802.1wRapidSpanningProtocol(RSTP),anevolutionof802.1D,canachievemuch fasterconvergencethanlegacySTPinaproperlyconfigurednetwork.RSTPsignificantlyreduces thetimetoreconfigurethenetworksactivetopologywhenphysicaltopologyorconfiguration parameterchangesoccur.ItselectsoneswitchastherootofaSpanningTreeconnectedactive topologyandassignsportrolestoindividualportsontheswitch,dependingonwhetherthatport ispartoftheactivetopology. RSTPprovidesrapidconnectivityfollowingthefailureofaswitch,switchport,oraLAN.Anew rootportandthedesignatedportontheothersideofthebridgetransitiontoforwardingthrough anexplicithandshakebetweenthem.Bydefault,userportsareconfiguredtorapidlytransitionto forwardinginRSTP.

MSTP
TheIEEE802.1sMultipleSpanningTreeProtocol(MSTP)buildsupon802.1DandRSTPby optimizingutilizationofredundantlinksbetweenswitchesinanetwork.Whenredundantlinks existbetweenapairofswitchesrunningsingleSTP,onelinkisforwardingwhiletheothersare

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-1

Spanning Tree Configuration Summary

blockingforalltrafficflowingbetweenthetwoswitches.Theblockinglinksareeffectivelyused onlyiftheforwardinglinkgoesdown.MSTPassignseachVLANpresentonthenetworktoa particularSpanningTreeinstance,allowingeachswitchporttobeinadistinctstateforeachsuch instance:blockingforoneSpanningTreewhileforwardingforanother.Thus,trafficassociated withonesetofVLANscantraverseaparticularinterswitchlink,whiletrafficassociatedwith anothersetofVLANscanbeblockedonthatlink.IfVLANsareassignedtoSpanningTrees wisely,nointerswitchlinkwillbecompletelyidle,maximizingnetworkutilization. FordetailsoncreatingSpanningTreeinstances,refertosetspantreemstionpage 712. FordetailsonmappingSpanningTreeinstancestoVLANs,refertosetspantreemstmapon page 714.
Note: MSTP and RSTP are fully compatible and interoperable with each other and with legacy STP 802.1D.

Spanning Tree Features

TheSecureStackB2devicemeetstherequirementsoftheSpanningTreeProtocolsbyperforming thefollowingfunctions: CreatingasingleSpanningTreefromanyarrangementofswitchingorbridgingelements. Compensatingautomaticallyforthefailure,removal,oradditionofanydeviceinanactive datapath. Achievingportchangesinshorttimeintervals,whichestablishesastableactivetopology quicklywithminimalnetworkdisturbance. Usingaminimumamountofcommunicationsbandwidthtoaccomplishtheoperationofthe SpanningTreeProtocol. Reconfiguringtheactivetopologyinamannerthatistransparenttostationstransmittingand receivingdatapackets. ManagingthetopologyinaconsistentandreproduciblemannerthroughtheuseofSpanning TreeProtocolparameters.

Note: The term bridge is used as an equivalent to the term switch or device in this document.

Loop Protect
TheLoopProtectfeaturepreventsorshortcircuitsloopformationinanetworkwithredundant pathsbyrequiringportstoreceivetype2BPDUs(RSTP/MSTP)onpointtopointinterswitch links(ISLs)beforetheirstatesareallowedtobecomeforwarding.Further,ifaBPDUtimeout occursonaport,itsstatebecomeslisteninguntilaBPDUisreceived. Bothupstreamanddownstreamfacingportsareprotected.Whenarootoralternateportlosesits pathtotherootbridgeduetoamessageageexpirationittakesontheroleofdesignatedport.It willnotforwardtrafficuntilaBPDUisreceived.Whenaportisintendedtobethedesignatedport inanISLitconstantlyproposesandwillnotforwarduntilaBPDUisreceived,andwillrevertto listeningifitfailstogetaresponse.Thisprotectsagainstmisconfigurationandprotocolfailureby theconnectedbridge. TheDisputedBPDUmechanismprotectsagainstloopinginsituationswherethereisoneway communication.AdisputedBPDUisoneinwhichtheflagsfieldindicatesadesignatedroleand

7-2

Spanning Tree Configuration

Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters

learningandthepriorityvectorisworsethanthatalreadyheldbytheport.IfadisputedBPDUis received,theportisforcedtothelisteningstate.WhenaninferiordesignatedBPDUwiththe learningbitsetisreceivedonadesignatedport,itsstateissettodiscardingtopreventloop formation.NotethattheDisputemechanismisalwaysactiveregardlessoftheconfiguration settingofLoopProtection. LoopProtectoperatesasaperport,perMSTinstancefeature.Itshouldbesetoninterswitch links.Itiscomprisedofseveralrelatedfunctions: ControlofportforwardingstatebasedonreceptionofagreementBPDUs ControlofportforwardingstatebasedonreceptionofdisputedBPDUs Communicatingportnonforwardingstatusthroughtrapsandsyslogmessages Disablingaportbasedonfrequencyoffailureevents

PortforwardingstateinthedesignatedportisgatedbyatimerthatissetuponBPDUreception.It isanalogoustothercvdInfoWhiletimertheportuseswhenreceivingrootinformationintheroot/ alternate/backuprole. TherearetwooperationalmodesforLoopProtectonaport.Iftheportisconnectedtoadevice knowntoimplementLoopProtect,itusesfullfunctionalmode.Otherwisetheportoperatesin limitedfunctionalmode. ConnectiontoaLoopProtectswitchguaranteesthatthealternateagreementmechanismis implemented.Thismeansthedesignatedportcanrelyonreceivingaresponsetoitsproposal regardlessoftheroleoftheconnectedport,whichhastwoimportantimplications.First,the designatedportconnectedtoanonrootportmaytransitiontoforwarding.Second,thereisno ambiguitywhenatimeouthappens;aLoopProtecteventhasoccurred. Infullfunctionalmode,whenatype2BPDUisreceivedandtheportisdesignatedandpointto point,thetimerissetto3timeshelloTime.Inlimitedfunctionalmodethereistheadditional requirementthattheflagsfieldindicatearootrole.IftheportisaboundaryporttheMSTIsfor thatportfollowtheCIST,thatis,theMSTIporttimersaresetaccordingtotheCISTporttimer.If theportisinternaltotheregionthentheMSTIporttimersaresetindependentlyusingthe particularMSTImessage. MessageageexpirationandtheexpirationoftheLoopProtecttimerarebothLoopProtectevents. Anoticelevelsyslogmessageisproducedforeachsuchevent.Trapsmaybeconfiguredtoreport theseeventsaswell.AsyslogmessageandtrapmaybeconfiguredfordisputedBPDUs. ItisalsoconfigurabletoforcethelockingofaSID/portfortheoccurrenceofoneormoreevents. Whentheconfigurednumberofeventshappenwithinagivenwindowoftime,theportisforced intoblockingandheldthereuntilitismanuallyunlockedviamanagement.

Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters

Purpose
TodisplayandsetSpanningTreebridgeparameters,includingdevicepriorities,hellotime, maximumwaittime,forwarddelay,pathcost,andtopologychangetrapsuppression.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-3

Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters

Commands
For information about... show spantree stats set spantree show spantree version set spantree version clear spantree version show spantree bpdu-forwarding set spantree bpdu-forwarding show spantree bridgeprioritymode set spantree bridgeprioritymode clear spantree bridgeprioritymode show spantree mstilist set spantree msti clear spantree msti show spantree mstmap set spantree mstmap clear spantree mstmap show spantree vlanlist show spantree mstcfgid set spantree mstcfgid clear spantree mstcfgid set spantree priority clear spantree priority set spantree hello clear spantree hello set spantree maxage clear spantree maxage set spantree fwddelay clear spantree fwddelay show spantree backuproot set spantree backuproot clear spantree backuproot show spantree tctrapsuppress set spantree tctrapsuppress clear spantree tctrapsuppress Refer to page... 7-5 7-7 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-12 7-13 7-13 7-14 7-14 7-15 7-15 7-16 7-16 7-17 7-17 7-18 7-18 7-19 7-19 7-20 7-20 7-21 7-21 7-22 7-22 7-23 7-23

7-4

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree stats

For information about... set spantree protomigration show spantree spanguard set spantree spanguard clear spantree spanguard show spantree spanguardtimeout set spantree spanguardtimeout clear spantree spanguardtimeout show spantree spanguardlock clear/set spantree spanguardlock show spantree spanguardtrapenable set spanstree spanguardtrapenable clear spanstree spanguardtrapenable show spantree legacypathcost set spantree legacypathcost clear spantree legacypathcost

Refer to page... 7-24 7-24 7-25 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-27 7-27 7-28 7-28 7-29 7-29 7-30 7-30 7-31

show spantree stats

UsethiscommandtodisplaySpanningTreeinformationforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show spantree stats [port port-string] [sid sid] [active]

Parameters
portportstring (Optional)Displaysinformationforthespecifiedport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52. (Optional)DisplaysinformationforaspecificSpanningTreeidentifier.If notspecified,SID0isassumed. (Optional)DisplaysinformationforportsthathavereceivedSTPBPDUs sinceboot.

sidsid active

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,SpanningTreeinformationforallportswillbedisplayed. Ifsidisnotspecified,informationforSpanningTree0willbedisplayed. Ifactiveisnotspecifiedinformationforallportswillbedisplayedregardlessofwhetherornot theyhavereceivedBPDUs.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-5

show spantree stats

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythedevicesSpanningTreeconfiguration:
B2(su)->show spantree stats Spanning tree status Spanning tree instance Designated Root MacAddr Designated Root Priority Designated Root Cost Designated Root Port Root Max Age Root Hello Time Root Forward Delay Bridge ID MAC Address Bridge ID Priority Bridge Max Age Bridge Hello Time Bridge Forward Delay Topology Change Count Time Since Top Change Max Hops enabled 0 00-e0-63-9d-c1-c8 0 10000 lag.0.1 20 sec 2 sec 15 sec 00-01-f4-da-5e-3d 32768 20 sec 2 sec 15 sec 7 00 days 03:19:15 20

Table 728showsadetailedexplanationofcommandoutput. Table 7-28

Output Spanning tree instance Spanning tree status Designated Root MacAddr Designated Root Port Designated Root Priority Designated Root Cost Root Max Age Root Hello Time Root Forward Delay Bridge ID MAC Address Bridge ID Priority

show spantree Output Details

What It Displays... Spanning Tree ID. Whether Spanning Tree is enabled or disabled. MAC address of the designated Spanning Tree root bridge. Port through which the root bridge can be reached. Priority of the designated root bridge. Total path cost to reach the root. Amount of time (in seconds) a BPDU packet should be considered valid. Interval (in seconds) at which the root device sends BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packets. Amount of time (in seconds) the root device spends in listening or learning mode. Unique bridge MAC address, recognized by all bridges in the network. Bridge priority, which is a default value, or is assigned using the set spantree priority command. For details, refer to set spantree priority on page 7-17. Maximum time (in seconds) the bridge can wait without receiving a configuration message (bridge hello) before attempting to reconfigure. This is a default value, or is assigned using the set spantree maxage command. For details, refer to set spantree maxage on page 7-19. Amount of time (in seconds) the bridge sends BPDUs. This is a default value, or is assigned using the set spantree hello command. For details, refer to set spantree hello on page 7-18.

Bridge Max Age

Bridge Hello Time

7-6

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree

Table 7-28
Output

show spantree Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Amount of time (in seconds) the bridge spends in listening or learning mode. This is a default value, or is assigned using the set spantree fwddelay command. For details, refer to set spantree fwddelay on page 7-20. Number of times topology has changed on the bridge. Amount of time (in days, hours, minutes and seconds) since the last topology change. Maximum number of hops information for a particular Spanning Tree instance may traverse (via relay of BPDUs within the applicable MST region) before being discarded.

Bridge Forward Delay

Topology Change Count Time Since Top Change Max Hops

set spantree
UsethiscommandtogloballyenableordisabletheSpanningTreeprotocolontheswitch.

Syntax
set spantree {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable|enable GloballydisablesorenablesSpanningTree.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisableSpanningTreeonthedevice:
B2(su)->set spantree disable

show spantree version

UsethiscommandtodisplaythecurrentversionoftheSpanningTreeprotocolrunningonthe device.

Syntax
show spantree version

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 7-7

set spantree version

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySpanningTreeversioninformationforthedevice:
B2(su)->show spantree version Force Version is mstp

set spantree version

UsethiscommandtosettheversionoftheSpanningTreeprotocoltoMSTP(MultipleSpanning TreeProtocol),RSTP(RapidSpanningTreeProtocol)ortoSTP802.1Dcompatible.

Syntax
set spantree version {mstp | stpcompatible | rstp}

Parameters
mstp stpcompatible rstp SetstheversiontoSTP802.1scompatible. SetstheversiontoSTP802.1Dcompatible. Setstheversionto802.1wcompatible.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Inmostnetworks,SpanningTreeversionshouldnotbechangedfromitsdefaultsettingofmstp (MultipleSpanningTreeProtocol)mode.MSTPmodeisfullycompatibleandinteroperablewith legacySTP802.1DandRapidSpanningTree(RSTP)bridges.Settingtheversiontostpcompatible modewillcausethebridgetotransmitonly802.1DBPDUs,andwillpreventnonedgeportsfrom rapidlytransitioningtoforwardingstate.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtogloballychangetheSpanningTreeversionfromthedefaultofMSTP toRSTP:
B2(su)->set spantree version rstp

clear spantree version

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreeversiontoMSTPmode.

Syntax
clear spantree version

7-8

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree bpdu-forwarding

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheSpanningTreeversion:
B2(su)->clear spantree version

show spantree bpdu-forwarding

Use this command to display the Spanning Tree BPDU forwarding mode.

Syntax
show spantree bpdu-forwarding

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheSpanningTreeBPDUforwardingmode:
B2(su)->show spantree bpdu-forwarding BPDU forwarding is disabled.

set spantree bpdu-forwarding

UsethiscommandtoenableordisableSpanningTreeBPDUforwarding.BydefaultBPDU forwardingisdisabled.

Syntax
set spantree bpdu-forwarding {disable | enable}

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-9

show spantree bridgeprioritymode

Parameters
disable|enable DisablesorenablesBPDUforwarding;.

Defaults
BydefaultBPDUforwardingisdisabled.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheSpanningTreeprotocolmustbedisabled(setspantreedisable)forthisfeaturetotakeeffect.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableBPDUforwarding:
B2(rw)-> set spantree bpdu-forwarding enable

show spantree bridgeprioritymode

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheSpanningTreebridgeprioritymodesetting.

Syntax
show spantree bridgeprioritymode

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheSpanningTreebridgeprioritymodesetting:
B2(rw)->show spantree bridgeprioritymode Bridge Priority Mode is set to IEEE802.1t mode.

set spantree bridgeprioritymode

UsethiscommandtosettheSpanningTreebridgeprioritymodeto802.1D(legacy)or802.1t.

Syntax
set spantree bridgeprioritymode {8021d | 8021t}

7-10

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree bridgeprioritymode

Parameters
8021d 8021t Setsthebridgeprioritymodetouse802.1D(legacy)values,whichare0 65535. Setsthebridgeprioritymodetouse802.1tvalues,whichare0to61440,in incrementsof4096.Valueswillautomaticallyberoundedupordown, dependingonthe802.1tvaluetowhichtheenteredvalueisclosest. Thisisthedefaultbridgeprioritymode.

Defaults
None

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Themodeaffectstherangeofpriorityvaluesusedtodeterminewhichdeviceisselectedasthe SpanningTreerootasdescribedinsetspantreepriority(setspantreepriorityonpage 717). Thedefaultfortheswitchistouse802.1tbridgeprioritymode.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthebridgeprioritymodeto802.1D:
B2(rw)->set spantree bridgeprioritymode 8021d

clear spantree bridgeprioritymode

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreebridgeprioritymodetothedefaultsettingof802.1t.

Syntax
clear spantree bridgeprioritymode

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresetthebridgeprioritymodeto802.1t:
B2(rw)->clear spantree bridgeprioritymode

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-11

show spantree mstilist

show spantree mstilist

UsethiscommandtodisplayalistofMultipleSpanningTree(MST)instancesconfiguredonthe device.

Syntax
show spantree mstilist

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayalistofMSTinstances.Inthiscase,SID2hasbeenconfigured:
B2(su)->show spantree mstilist Configured Multiple Spanning Tree instances: 2

set spantree msti

UsethiscommandtocreateordeleteaMultipleSpanningTreeinstance.

Syntax
set spantree msti sid sid {create | delete}

Parameters
sidsid create|delete SetstheMultipleSpanningTreeID.Validvaluesare14094. SecureStackB2deviceswillsupportupto4MSTinstances. CreatesordeletesanMSTinstance.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateanMSTinstance2:
B2(su)->set spantree msti sid 2 create

7-12

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree msti

clear spantree msti

UsethiscommandtodeleteoneormoreMultipleSpanningTreeinstances.

Syntax
clear spantree msti [sid sid]

Parameters
sidsid (Optional)DeletesaspecificmultipleSpanningTreeID.

Defaults
Ifsidisnotspecified,allMSTinstanceswillbecleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeleteallMSTinstances:
B2(su)->clear spantree msti

show spantree mstmap

UsethiscommandtodisplaythemappingofafilteringdatabaseID(FID)toaSpanningTrees. SinceVLANsaremappedtoFIDs,thisshowstowhichSIDaVLANismapped.

Syntax
show spantree mstmap [fid fid]

Parameters
fidfid (Optional)DisplaysinformationforspecificFIDs.

Defaults
Iffidisnotspecified,informationforallassignedFIDswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySIDtoFIDmappinginformationforFID1.Inthiscase,no newmappingshavebeenconfigured:
B2(su)->show spantree mstmap fid 1 FID: SID: 1 0

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-13

set spantree mstmap

set spantree mstmap

UsethiscommandtomaponeormorefilteringdatabaseIDs(FIDs)toaSID.SinceVLANsare mappedtoFIDs,thisessentiallymapsoneormoreVLANIDstoaSpanningTree(SID).

Syntax
set spantree mstmap fid [sid sid]

Parameters
fid sidsid SpecifiesoneormoreFIDstoassigntotheMST.Validvaluesare14093, andmustcorrespondtoaVLANIDcreatedusingthesetvlancommand. (Optional)SpecifiesaMultipleSpanningTreeID.Validvaluesare14094, andmustcorrespondtoaSIDcreatedusingthesetmsticommand.

Defaults
Ifsidisnotspecified,FID(s)willbemappedtoSpanningTree0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtomapFID3toSID2:
B2(su)->set spantree mstmap 3 sid 2

clear spantree mstmap

UsethiscommandtomapaFIDbacktoSID0.

Syntax
clear spantree mstmap fid

Parameters
fid SpecifiesoneormoreFIDstoresetto0.

Defaults
Iffidisnotspecified,allSIDtoFIDmappingswillbereset.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtomapFID2backtoSID0:
B2(su)->clear spantree mstmap 2

7-14

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree vlanlist

show spantree vlanlist

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheSpanningTreeID(s)assignedtooneormoreVLANs.

Syntax
show spantree vlanlist [vlan-list]

Parameters
vlanlist (Optional)DisplaysSIDsassignedtospecificVLAN(s).

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,SIDassignmentwillbedisplayedforallVLANs.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheSIDsmappedtoVLAN1.Inthiscase,SIDs2,16and42 aremappedtoVLAN1.Forthisinformationtodisplay,theSIDinstancemustbecreatedusing thesetspantreemsticommandasdescribedinsetspantreemstionpage 712,andtheFIDs mustbemappedtoSID 1usingthesetspantreemstmapcommandasdescribedinsetspantree mstmaponpage 714:
B2(su)->show spantree vlanlist 1 The following SIDS are assigned to VLAN 1: 2 16 42

show spantree mstcfgid

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheMSTconfigurationidentifierelements,includingformatselector, configurationname,revisionlevel,andconfigurationdigest.

Syntax
show spantree mstcfgid

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheMSTconfigurationidentifierelements.Inthiscase,the defaultrevisionlevelof0,andthedefaultconfigurationname(astringrepresentingthebridge MACaddress)havenotbeenchanged.Forinformationonusingthesetspantreemstcfgid commandtochangethesesettings,refertosetspantreemstcfgidonpage 716:

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-15

set spantree mstcfgid

B2(su)->show spantree mstcfgid MST Configuration Identifier: Format Selector: 0 Configuration Name: 00:01:f4:89:51:94 Revision Level: 0 Configuration Digest: ac:36:17:7f:50:28:3c:d4:b8:38:21:d8:ab:26:de:62

set spantree mstcfgid

UsethiscommandtosettheMSTconfigurationnameand/orrevisionlevel.

Syntax
set spantree mstcfgid {cfgname name | rev level}

Parameters
cfgnamename revlevel SpecifiesanMSTconfigurationname. SpecifiesanMSTrevisionlevel.Validvaluesare065535.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheMSTconfigurationnametomstconfig:
B2(su)->set spantree mstconfigid cfgname mstconfig

clear spantree mstcfgid

UsethiscommandtoresettheMSTrevisionleveltoadefaultvalueof0,andtheconfiguration nametoadefaultstringrepresentingthebridgeMACaddress.

Syntax
clear spantree mstcfgid

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheMSTconfigurationidentifierelementstodefaultvalues:
B2(su)->clear spantree mstcfgid
7-16 Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree priority

set spantree priority

UsethiscommandtosetthedevicesSpanningTreepriority.

Syntax
set spantree priority priority [sid]

Parameters
priority Specifiesthepriorityofthebridge.Validvaluesarefrom0to61440(in incrementsof4096),with0indicatinghighestpriorityand61440 lowestpriority. (Optional)SetsthepriorityonaspecificSpanningTree.Validvalues are04094.Ifnotspecified,SID 0isassumed.

sid

Defaults
Ifsidisnotspecified,prioritywillbesetonSpanningTree0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Thedevicewiththehighestpriority(lowestnumericalvalue)becomestheSpanningTreeroot device.Ifalldeviceshavethesamepriority,thedevicewiththelowestMACaddresswillthen becometherootdevice.Dependingonthebridgeprioritymode(setwiththesetspantree bridgeprioritymodecommanddescribedinsetspantreebridgeprioritymodeonpage 710, somepriorityvaluesmayberoundedupordown.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthebridgepriorityto4096onSID1:
B2(su)->set spantree priority 4096 1

clear spantree priority

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreeprioritytothedefaultvalueof32768.

Syntax
clear spantree priority [sid]

Parameters
sid (Optional)ResetsthepriorityonaspecificSpanningTree.Valid valuesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID 0isassumed.

Defaults
Ifsidisnotspecified,prioritywillberesetonSpanningTree0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 7-17

set spantree hello

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetthebridgepriorityonSID1:
B2(su)->clear spantree priority 1

set spantree hello

UsethiscommandtosetthedevicesSpanningTreehellotime,Thisisthetimeinterval(in seconds)thedevicewilltransmitBPDUsindicatingitisactive.

Syntax
set spantree hello interval

Parameters
interval Specifiesthenumberofsecondsthesystemwaitsbeforebroadcastinga bridgehellomessage(amulticastmessageindicatingthatthesystemis active).Validvaluesare110.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtogloballysettheSpanningTreehellotimeto10seconds:
B2(su)->set spantree hello 10

clear spantree hello

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreehellotimetothedefaultvalueof2seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree hello

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtogloballyresettheSpanningTreehellotime:
B2(su)->clear spantree hello
7-18 Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree maxage

set spantree maxage

Usethiscommandtosetthebridgemaximumagingtime.

Syntax
set spantree maxage agingtime

Parameters
agingtime Specifiesthemaximumnumberofsecondsthatthesystemretainsthe informationreceivedfromotherbridgesthroughSTP.Validvaluesare6 40.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Thebridgemaximumagingtimeisthemaximumtime(inseconds)adevicecanwaitwithout receivingaconfigurationmessage(bridgehello)beforeattemptingtoreconfigure.Alldevice ports(exceptfordesignatedports)shouldreceiveconfigurationmessagesatregularintervals. AnyportthatagesoutSTPinformationprovidedinthelastconfigurationmessagebecomesthe designatedportfortheattachedLAN.Ifitisarootport,anewrootportisselectedfromamong thedeviceportsattachedtothenetwork.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthemaximumagingtimeto25seconds:
B2(su)->set spantree maxage 25

clear spantree maxage

UsethiscommandtoresetthemaximumagingtimeforaSpanningTreetothedefaultvalueof20 seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree maxage

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-19

set spantree fwddelay

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtogloballyresetthemaximumagingtime:
B2(su)->clear spantree maxage

set spantree fwddelay

UsethiscommandtosettheSpanningTreeforwarddelay.

Syntax
set spantree fwddelay delay

Parameters
delay Specifiesthenumberofsecondsforthebridgeforwarddelay.Validvalues are430.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Theforwarddelayisthemaximumtime(inseconds)therootdevicewillwaitbeforechanging states(i.e.,listeningtolearningtoforwarding).Thisdelayisrequiredbecauseeverydevicemust receiveinformationabouttopologychangesbeforeitstartstoforwardframes.Inaddition,each portneedstimetolistenforconflictinginformationthatwouldmakeitreturntoablockingstate; otherwise,temporarydataloopsmightresult.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtogloballysetthebridgeforwarddelayto16seconds:
B2(su)->set spantree fwddelay 16

clear spantree fwddelay

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreeforwarddelaytothedefaultsettingof15seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree fwddelay

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

7-20

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree backuproot

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtogloballyresetthebridgeforwarddelay:
B2(su)->clear spantree fwddelay

show spantree backuproot

UsethiscommandtodisplaythebackuprootstatusforanMSTinstance.

Syntax
show spantree backuproot [sid]

Parameters
sid (Optional)DisplaybackuprootstatusforaspecificSpanningTree identifier.Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0isassumed.

Defaults
IfaSIDisnotspecified,thenstatuswillbeshownforSpanningTreeinstance0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythestatusofthebackuprootfunctiononSID0:
B2(rw)->show spantree backuproot Backup root is set to disable on sid 0

set spantree backuproot

UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheSpanningTreebackuprootfunctionontheswitch.

Syntax
set spantree backuproot sid {disable | enable}

Parameters
sid disable|enable SpecifiestheSpanningTreeinstanceonwhichtoenableordisablethe backuprootfunction.Validvaluesare04094. Enablesordisablesthebackuprootfunction.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 7-21

clear spantree backuproot

Usage
TheSpanningTreebackuprootfunctionisdisabledbydefaultontheSecureStackB2.Whenthis featureisenabledandtheswitchisdirectlyconnectedtotherootbridge,staleSpanningTree informationispreventedfromcirculatingiftherootbridgeislost.Iftherootbridgeislost,the backuprootwilldynamicallyloweritsbridgeprioritysothatitwillbeselectedasthenewroot overthelostrootbridge.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenablethebackuprootfunctiononSID2:
B2(rw)->set spantree backuproot 2 enable

clear spantree backuproot

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreebackuprootfunctiontothedefaultstateofdisabled.

Syntax
clear spantree backuproot sid

Parameters
sid SpecifiestheSpanningTreeonwhichtoclearthebackuproot function.Validvaluesare04094.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetthebackuprootfunctiontodisabledonSID2:
B2(rw)->clear spantree backuproot 2

show spantree tctrapsuppress

UsethiscommandtodisplaythestatusoftopologychangetrapsuppressiononRapidSpanning Treeedgeports.

Syntax
show spantree tctrapsuppress

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

7-22

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree tctrapsuppress

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythestatusoftopologychangetrapsuppression:
B2(rw)->show spantree tctrapsuppress Topology change Trap Suppression is set to enabled

set spantree tctrapsuppress

UsethiscommandtodisableorenabletopologychangetrapsuppressiononRapidSpanningTree edgeports.

Syntax
set spantree tctrapsuppress {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable|enable Disablesorenablestopologychangetrapsuppression.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Bydefault,RSTPnonedge(bridge)portsthattransitiontoforwardingorblockingcausethe switchtoissueatopologychangetrap.Whentopologychangetrapsuppressionisenabled,which isthedevicedefault,edgeports(suchasendstationPCs)arepreventedfromsendingtopology changetraps.Thisisbecausethereisusuallynoneedfornetworkmanagementtomonitoredge portSTPtransitionstates,suchaswhenPCsarepoweredon.Whentopologychangetrap suppressionisdisabled,allports,includingedgeandbridgeports,willtransmittopologychange traps.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoallowRapidSpanningTreeedgeportstotransmittopologychange traps:
B2(rw)->set spantree tctrapsuppress disable

clear spantree tctrapsuppress

UsethiscommandtoclearthestatusoftopologychangetrapsuppressiononRapidSpanning Treeedgeportstothedefaultstateofenabled(edgeporttopologychangesdonotgeneratetraps).

Syntax
clear spantree tctrapsuppress

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-23

set spantree protomigration

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtocleartopologychangetrapsuppressionsetting:
B2(rw)->clear spantree tctrapsuppress

set spantree protomigration

UsethiscommandtoresettheprotocolstatemigrationmachineforoneormoreSpanningTree ports.WhenoperatinginRSTPmode,thisforcesaporttotransmitMSTPBPDUs.

Syntax
set spantree protomigration <port-string>

Parameters
portstring Resettheprotocolstatemigrationmachineforspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresettheprotocolstatemigrationmachineonport20:
B2(su)->set spantree protomigration ge.1.20

show spantree spanguard

UsethiscommandtodisplaythestatusoftheSpanningTreeSpanGuardfunction.

Syntax
show spantree spanguard

Parameters
None.

7-24

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree spanguard

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheSpanGuardfunctionstatus:
B2(su)->show spantree spanguard Spanguard is disabled

set spantree spanguard

UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheSpanningTreeSpanGuardfunction.

Syntax
set spantree spanguard {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnablesordisablestheSpanGuardfunction.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
SpanGuardisdesignedtodisable,orlockoutanedgeportwhenanunexpectedBPDUis received.Theportcanbeconfiguredtobereenabledafterasettimeperiod,oronlyaftermanual intervention. Aportcanbedefinedasanedge(user)portusingthesetspantreeadminedgecommand, describedinsetspantreeadminedgeonpage 737.Aportdesignatedasanedgeportis expectedtobeconnectedtoaworkstationorotherendusertypeofdevice,andnottoanother switchinthenetwork.WhenSpanguardisenabled,ifanonloopbackBPDUisreceivedonan edgeport,theSpanningTreestateofthatportwillbechangedtoblockingandwillnolonger forwardtraffic.Theportwillremaindisableduntiltheamountoftimedefinedbysetspantree spanguardtimeout(setspantreespanguardtimeoutonpage 726)haspassedsincethelastseen BPDU,theportismanuallyunlocked(setorclearspantreespanguardlock,clear/setspantree spanguardlockonpage 728),theconfigurationoftheportischangedsoitisnotlongeranedge port,ortheSpanGuardfunctionisdisabled. SpanGuardisenabledanddisabledonlyonaglobalbasis(acrossthestack,ifapplicable).By default,SpanGuardisdisabledandSpanGuardtrapsareenabled.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenabletheSpanGuardfunction:
B2(rw)->set spantree spanguard enable

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-25

clear spantree spanguard

clear spantree spanguard

UsethiscommandtoresetthestatusoftheSpanningTreeSpanGuardfunctiontodisabled.

Syntax
clear spantree spanguard

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetthestatusoftheSpanGuardfunctiontodisabled:
B2(rw)->clear spantree spanguard

show spantree spanguardtimeout

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheSpanningTreeSpanGuardtimeoutsetting.

Syntax
show spantree spanguardtimeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheSpanGuardtimeoutsetting:
B2(su)->show spantree spanguardtimeout Spanguard timeout: 300

set spantree spanguardtimeout

Usethiscommandtosettheamountoftime(inseconds)anedgeportwillremainlockedbythe SpanGuardfunction.

7-26

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree spanguardtimeout

Syntax
set spantree spanguardtimeout timeout

Parameters
timeout Specifiesatimeoutvalueinseconds.Validvaluesare0to65535. Avalueof0willkeeptheportlockeduntilmanuallyunlocked.Thedefault valueis300seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheSpanGuardtimeoutto600seconds:
B2(su)->set spantree spanguardtimeout 600

clear spantree spanguardtimeout

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreeSpanGuardtimeouttothedefaultvalueof300 seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree spanguardtimeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheSpanGuardtimeoutto300seconds:
B2(rw)->clear spantree spanguardtimeout

show spantree spanguardlock

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheSpanGuardlockstatusofoneormoreports.

Syntax
show spantree spanguardlock [port-string]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-27

clear / set spantree spanguardlock

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtoshowSpanGuardlockstatus. Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifnoportstringisspecified,theSpanGuardlockstatusforallportsisdisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheSpanGuardlockstatusforge.1.1:
B2(su)->show spantree spanguardlock ge.1.1 Port ge.1.1 is Unlocked

clear / set spantree spanguardlock

UseeitherofthesecommandstounlockoneormoreportslockedbytheSpanningTree SpanGuardfunction.WhenSpanGuardisenabled,itlocksportsthatreceiveBPDUswhenthose portshavebeendefinedasedge(user)ports(asdescribedinsetspantreeadminedgeon page 737).

Syntax
clear spantree spanguardlock port-string set spantree spanguardlock port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiesport(s)tounlock.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstring values,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtounlockportge.1.16:
B2(rw)->clear spantree spanguardlock ge.1.16

show spantree spanguardtrapenable

UsethiscommandtodisplaythestateoftheSpanningTreeSpanGuardtrapfunction.

7-28

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree spanguardtrapenable

Syntax
show spantree spanguardtrapenable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythestateoftheSpanGuardtrapfunction:
B2(ro)->show spantree spanguardtrapenable Spanguard SNMP traps are enabled

set spantree spanguardtrapenable

UsethiscommandtoenableordisablethesendingofanSNMPtrapmessagewhenSpanGuard haslockedaport.

Syntax
set spantree spanguardtrapenable {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable|enable DisablesorenablessendingSpanGuardtraps.Bydefault,sendingtraps isenabled.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisabletheSpanGuardtrapfunction:
B2(su)->set spantree spanguardtrapenable disable

clear spantree spanguardtrapenable

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreeSpanGuardtrapfunctionbacktothedefaultstateof enabled.

Syntax
clear spantree spanguardtrapenable

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-29

show spantree legacypathcost

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheSpanGuardtrapfunctiontoenabled:
B2(rw)->clear spantree spanguardtrapenable

show spantree legacypathcost

UsethiscommandtodisplaythedefaultSpanningTreepathcostsetting.

Syntax
show spantree legacypathcost

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythedefaultSpanningTreepathcostsetting.
B2(su)->show spantree legacypathcost Legacy Path Cost is disabled.

set spantree legacypathcost

Usethiscommandtoenableordisablelegacy(802.1D)pathcostvalues.

Syntax
set spantree legacypathcost {disable | enable}

7-30

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree legacypathcost

Parameters
disable enable Use802.1t2001valuestocalculatepathcost. Use802.1d1998valuestocalculatepathcost.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Bydefault,legacypathcostisdisabled.Enablingthedevicetocalculatelegacypathcostsaffects therangeofvalidvaluesthatcanbeenteredinthesetspantreeadminpathcostcommand.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthedefaultpathcostvaluesto802.1D.
B2(rw)->set spantree legacypathcost enable

clear spantree legacypathcost

UsethiscommandtosettheSpanningTreedefaultvalueforlegacypathcostto802.1tvalues.

Syntax
clear spantree legacypathcost

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleclearsthelegacypathcostto802.1tvalues.
B2(rw)->clear spantree legacypathcost

Configuring Spanning Tree Port Parameters

Purpose
TodisplayandsetSpanningTreeportparameters.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-31

set spantree portadmin

Commands
For information about... set spantree portadmin clear spantree portadmin show spantree portadmin show spantree portpri set spantree portpri clear spantree portpri show spantree adminpathcost set spantree adminpathcost clear spantree adminpathcost show spantree adminedge set spantree adminedge clear spantree adminedge Refer to page... 7-32 7-32 7-33 7-33 7-34 7-35 7-35 7-36 7-36 7-37 7-37 7-38

set spantree portadmin

UsethiscommandtodisableorenabletheSpanningTreealgorithmononeormoreports.

Syntax
set spantree portadmin port-string {disable | enable}

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtoenableordisableSpanningTree.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. DisablesorenablesSpanningTree.

disable|enable

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisableSpanningTreeonge.1.5:
B2(rw)->set spantree portadmin ge.1.5 disable

clear spantree portadmin

UsethiscommandtoresetthedefaultSpanningTreeadminstatustoenableononeormoreports.

7-32

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree portadmin

Syntax
clear spantree portadmin port-string

Parameters
portstring Resetsthedefaultadminstatusonspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetthedefaultSpanningTreeadminstatetoenableonge.1.12:
B2(rw)->clear spantree portadmin ge.1.12

show spantree portadmin

UsethiscommandtodisplaythestatusoftheSpanningTreealgorithmononeormoreports.

Syntax
show spantree portadmin [port port-string]

Parameters
portportstring (Optional)Displaysstatusforspecificport(s).Foradetaileddescriptionof possibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLI onpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,statuswillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayportadminstatusforge.1.1:
B2(ro)->show spantree portadmin port ge.1.1 Port ge.1.1 has portadmin set to enabled

show spantree portpri

UsethiscommandtoshowtheSpanningTreepriorityforoneormoreports.Portpriorityisa componentoftheportID,whichisoneelementusedindeterminingSpanningTreeportroles.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-33

set spantree portpri

Syntax
show spantree portpri [port port-string] [sid sid]

Parameters
portportstring (Optional)Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtodisplaySpanningTreepriority. Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. (Optional)DisplaysportpriorityforaspecificSpanningTreeidentifier. Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0isassumed.

sidsid

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,portprioritywillbedisplayedforallSpanningTreeports. Ifsidisnotspecified,portprioritywillbedisplayedforSpanningTree0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheportpriorityforge.2.7:
B2(su)->show spantree portpri port ge.2.7 Port ge.2.7 has a Port Priority of 128 on SID 0

set spantree portpri

UsethiscommandtosetaportsSpanningTreepriority.

Syntax
set spantree portpri port-string priority [sid sid]

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtosetSpanningTreeportpriority.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. SpecifiesanumberthatrepresentsthepriorityofalinkinaSpanningTree bridge.Validvaluesarefrom0to240(inincrementsof16)with0 indicatinghighpriority. (Optional)SetsportpriorityforaspecificSpanningTreeidentifier.Valid valuesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0isassumed.

priority

sidsid

Defaults
Ifsidisnotspecified,portprioritywillbesetforSpanningTree0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

7-34

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree portpri

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthepriorityofge.1.3to240onSID1
B2(su)->set spantree portpri ge.1.3 240 sid 1

clear spantree portpri

UsethiscommandtoresetthebridgepriorityofaSpanningTreeporttoadefaultvalueof128.

Syntax
clear spantree portpri port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtosetSpanningTreeportpriority.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. (Optional)ResetstheportpriorityforaspecificSpanningTreeidentifier. Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0willbeassumed.

sidsid

Defaults
Ifsidisnotspecified,portprioritywillbesetforSpanningTree0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresetthepriorityofge.1.3to128onSID1
B2(su)->clear spantree portpri ge.1.3 sid 1

show spantree adminpathcost

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheadminpathcostforaportononeormoreSpanningTrees.

Syntax
show spantree adminpathcost [port port-string] [sid sid]

Parameters
portportstring (Optional)Displaystheadminpathcostvalueforspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. (Optional)DisplaystheadminpathcostforaspecificSpanningTree identifier.Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0willbeassumed.

sidsid

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,adminpathcostforallSpanningTreeportswillbedisplayed. Ifsidisnotspecified,adminpathcostforSpanningTree0willbedisplayed.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-35

set spantree adminpathcost

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheadminpathcostforge.3.4onSID1:
B2(su)->show spantree adminpathcost port ge.3.4 sid 1 Port ge.3.4 has a Port Admin Path Cost of 0 on SID 1

set spantree adminpathcost

UsethiscommandtosettheadministrativepathcostonaportandoneormoreSpanningTrees.

Syntax
set spantree adminpathcost port-string cost [sid sid]

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtosetanadminpathcost.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52. Specifiestheportpathcost.Va1idvaluesare0200000000. (Optional)SetstheadminpathcostforaspecificSpanningTreeidentifier. Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0willbeassumed.

cost sidsid

Defaults
Ifsidisnotspecified,adminpathcostwillbesetforSpanningTree0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosettheadminpathcostto200forge.3.2onSID1:
B2(su)->set spantree adminpathcost ge.3.2 200 sid 1

clear spantree adminpathcost

UsethiscommandtoresettheSpanningTreedefaultvalueforportadminpathcostto0.

Syntax
clear spantree adminpathcost port-string [sid sid]

7-36

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree adminedge

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtoresetadminpathcost.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntax UsedintheCLIonpage 52. (Optional)ResetstheadminpathcostforspecificSpanningTree(s). Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0isassumed.

sidsid

Defaults
Ifsidisnotspecified,adminpathcostwillberesetforSpanningTree0.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresettheadminpathcostto0forge.3.2onSID1:
B2(su)->clear spantree adminpathcost ge.3.2 sid 1

show spantree adminedge

Usethiscommandtodisplaytheedgeportadministrativestatusforaport.

Syntax
show spantree adminedge [port port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysedgeportadministrativestatusforspecific port(s).Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues, refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
IfportstringisnotspecifiededgeportadministrativestatuswillbedisplayedforallSpanning Treeports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheedgeportstatusforge.3.2:
B2(su)->show spantree adminedge port ge.3.2 Port ge.3.2 has a Port Admin Edge of Edge-Port

set spantree adminedge

UsethiscommandtosettheedgeportadministrativestatusonaSpanningTreeport.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-37

clear spantree adminedge

Syntax
set spantree adminedge port-string {true | false}

Parameters
portstring true|false Specifiestheedgeport.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstring values,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. Enables(true)ordisables(false)thespecifiedportasaSpanningTreeedge port.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Thedefaultbehavioroftheedgeportadministrativestatusbeginswiththevaluesettofalse initiallyafterthedeviceispoweredup.IfaSpanningTreeBDPUisnotreceivedontheportwithin afewseconds,thestatussettingchangestotrue.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetge.1.11asanedgeport:
B2(su)->set spantree adminedge ge.1.11 true

clear spantree adminedge

UsethiscommandtoresetaSpanningTreeporttononedgestatus.

Syntax
clear spantree adminedge port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiesport(s)onwhichtoresetedgeportstatus.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresetge.1.11asanonedgeport:
B2(su)->clear spantree adminedge ge.1.11

7-38

Spanning Tree Configuration

Configuring Spanning Tree Loop Protect Parameters

Configuring Spanning Tree Loop Protect Parameters

Purpose
TodisplayandsetSpanningTreeLoopProtectparameters,includingtheglobalparametersof LoopProtectthreshold,window,enablingtraps,anddisputedBPDUthreshold,aswellasper portandport/SIDparameters.SeeLoopProtectonpage 72formoreinformationaboutthe LoopProtectfeature.

Commands
For information about... set spantree lp show spantree lp clear spantree lp show spantree lplock clear spantree lplock set spantree lpcapablepartner show spantree lpcapablepartner clear spantree lpcapablepartner set spantree lpthreshold show spantree lpthreshold clear spantree lpthreshold set spantree lpwindow show spantree lpwindow clear spantree lpwindow set spantree lptrapenable show spantree lptrapenable clear spantree lptrapenable set spantree disputedbpduthreshold show spantree disputedbpduthreshold clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold show spantree nonforwardingreason Refer to page... 7-40 7-40 7-41 7-42 7-42 7-43 7-44 7-44 7-45 7-45 7-46 7-46 7-47 7-47 7-48 7-48 7-49 7-49 7-50 7-50 7-51

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-39

set spantree lp

set spantree lp
UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheLoopProtectfeatureperportandoptionally,perSID. TheLoopProtectfeatureisdisabledbydefault.SeeLoopProtectonpage 2.formore information.

Syntax
set spantree lp port-string {enable | disable} [sid sid]

Parameters
portstring enable|disable sidsid Specifiesport(s)onwhichtoenableordisabletheLoopProtectfeature. Enablesordisablesthefeatureonthespecifiedport. (Optional)EnablesordisablesthefeatureforspecificSpanningTree(s). Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0isassumed.

Defaults
IfnoSIDisspecified,SID0isassumed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
LoopProtecttakesprecedenceoverperportSTPenable/disable(portAdmin).Normally portAdmindisabledwouldcauseaporttogoimmediatelytoforwarding.IfLoopProtectis enabled,thatportshouldgotolisteningandremainthere.
Note: The Loop Protect enable/disable settings for an MSTI port should match those for the CIST port.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableLoopProtectonge.2.3:
B2(su)->set spantree lp ge.1.11 enable

show spantree lp
UsethiscommandtodisplaytheLoopProtectstatusperportand/orperSID.

Syntax
show spantree lp [port port-string] [sid sid]

7-40

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree lp

Parameters
portstring sidsid (Optional)Specifiesport(s)forwhichtodisplaytheLoopProtect featurestatus. (Optional)SpecifiesthespecificSpanningTree(s)forwhichtodisplay theLoopProtectfeaturestatus.Validvaluesare04094.Ifnot specified,SID0isassumed.

Defaults
Ifnoportstringisspecified,statusisdisplayedforallports. IfnoSIDisspecified,SID0isassumed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayLoopProtectstatusonge.2.3:
B2(su)->show spantree lp port ge.2.3 LoopProtect is disabled on port ge.2.3 , SI

clear spantree lp
UsethiscommandtoreturntheLoopProtectstatusperportandoptionally,perSID,toitsdefault stateofdisabled.

Syntax
clear spantree lp port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
portstring sidsid Specifiesport(s)forwhichtocleartheLoopProtectfeaturestatus. (Optional)SpecifiesthespecificSpanningTree(s)forwhichtoclearthe LoopProtectfeaturestatus.Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified, SID0isassumed.

Defaults
IfnoSIDisspecified,SID0isassumed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoreturntheLoopProtectstateonge.2.3todisabled:
B2(rw)->clear spantree lp port ge.2.3

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-41

show spantree lplock

show spantree lplock

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheLoopProtectlockstatusperportand/orperSID.Aportcan becomelockedifaconfigurednumberofLoopProtecteventsoccurduringtheconfigured windowoftime.Seethesetspantreelpthresholdandsetspantreelpwindowcommands.Oncea portisforcedintoblocking(locked),itremainslockeduntilmanuallyunlockedwiththeclear spantreelplockcommand.

Syntax
show spantree lplock [port port-string] [sid sid]

Parameters
portstring sidsid (Optional)Specifiesport(s)forwhichtodisplaytheLoopProtectlock status. (Optional)SpecifiesthespecificSpanningTree(s)forwhichtodisplay theLoopProtectlockstatus.Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified, SID0isassumed.

Defaults
Ifnoportstringisspecified,statusisdisplayedforallports. IfnoSIDisspecified,SID0isassumed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayLoopProtectlockstatusonge.1.1:
B2(rw)->show spantree lplock port ge.1.1 The LoopProtect lock status for port ge.1.1 , SID 0 is UNLOCKED

clear spantree lplock

Usethiscommandtomanuallyunlockablockedportandoptionally,perSID.Thedefaultstateis unlocked.

Syntax
clear spantree lplock port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
portstring sidsid Specifiesport(s)forwhichtocleartheLoopProtectlock. (Optional)SpecifiesthespecificSpanningTree(s)forwhichtoclearthe LoopProtectlock.Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified,SID0is assumed.

Defaults
IfnoSIDisspecified,SID0isassumed.

7-42

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree lpcapablepartner

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearLoopProtectlockfromge.1.1:
B2(rw)->show spantree lplock port ge.1.1 The LoopProtect lock status for port ge.1.1 B2(rw)->clear spantree lplock ge.1.1 B2(rw)->show spantree lplock port ge.1.1 The LoopProtect lock status for port ge.1.1 , SID 0 is LOCKED

, SID 0 is UNLOCKED

set spantree lpcapablepartner

UsethiscommandtospecifyperportwhetherthelinkpartnerisLoopProtectcapable.SeeLoop Protectonpage 2.formoreinformation.

Syntax
set spantree lpcapablepartner port-string {true | false}

Parameters
portstring true|false Specifiesport(s)forwhichtoconfigureaLoopProtectcapablelink partner. Specifieswhetherthelinkpartneriscapable(true)ornot(false).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ThedefaultvalueforLoopProtectcapablepartnerisfalse.IftheportisconfiguredwithaLoop Protectcapablepartner(true),thenthefullfunctionalityoftheLoopProtectfeatureisused.Ifthe valueisfalse,thenthereissomeambiguityastowhetheranActivePartnertimeoutisduetoa loopprotectioneventorisanormalsituationduetothefactthatthepartnerportdoesnot transmitAlternateAgreementBPDUs.Therefore,aconservativeapproachistakeninthat designatedportswillnotbeallowedtoforwardunlessreceivingagreementsfromaportwithroot role. Thistypeoftimeoutwillnotbeconsideredaloopprotectionevent.Loopprotectionismaintained bykeepingtheportfromforwardingbutsincethisisnotconsideredaloopeventitwillnotbe factoredintolockingtheport.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheLoopProtectcapablepartnertotrueforge.1.1:
B2(rw)->set spantree lpcapablepartner ge.1.1 true

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-43

show spantree lpcapablepartner

show spantree lpcapablepartner

UsethiscommandtotheLoopProtectcapabilityofalinkpartnerforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show spantree lpcapablepartner [port port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Specifiesport(s)forwhichtodisplayLoopProtectcapability foritslinkpartner.

Defaults
Ifnoportstringisspecified,LoopProtectcapabilityforlinkpartnersisdisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheLoopProtectpartnercapabilityforge.1.1:
B2(rw)->show spantree lpcapablepartner port ge.1.1 Link partner of port ge.1.1 is not LoopProtect-capable

clear spantree lpcapablepartner

UsethiscommandtoresettheLoopProtectcapabilityofportlinkpartnerstothedefaultstateof false.

Syntax
clear spantree lpcapablepartner port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiesport(s)forwhichtocleartheirlinkpartnersLoopProtect capability(resettofalse).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheLoopProtectpartnercapabilityforge.1.1:
B2(rw)->clear spantree lpcapablepartner ge.1.1

7-44

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree lpthreshold

set spantree lpthreshold

UsethiscommandtosettheLoopProtecteventthreshold.

Syntax
set spantree lpthreshold value

Parameters
value Specifiesthenumberofeventsthatmustoccurduringtheevent windowinordertolockaport/SID.Thedefaultvalueis3events.A thresholdof0specifiesthatportswillneverbelocked.

Defaults
None.Thedefaulteventthresholdis3.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheLoopProtecteventthresholdisaglobalintegervariablethatprovidesprotectioninthecaseof intermittentfailures.Thedefaultvalueis3.Iftheeventcounterreachesthethresholdwithina givenperiod(theeventwindow),thentheport,forthegivenSID,becomeslocked(thatis,held indefinitelyintheblockingstate).Ifthethresholdis0,theportsareneverlocked.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheLoopProtectthresholdvalueto4:
B2(rw)->set spantree lpthreshold 4

show spantree lpthreshold

UsethiscommandtodisplaythecurrentvalueoftheLoopProtecteventthreshold.

Syntax
show spantree lpthreshold

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-45

clear spantree lpthreshold

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecurrentLoopProtectthresholdvalue:
B2(rw)->show spantree lpthreshold The Loop Protect event threshold value is 4

clear spantree lpthreshold

UsethiscommandtoreturntheLoopProtecteventthresholdtoitsdefaultvalueof3.

Syntax
clear spantree lpthreshold

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheLoopProtecteventthresholdtothedefaultof3:
B2(rw)->clear spantree lpthreshold

set spantree lpwindow

UsethiscommandtosettheLoopProtecteventwindowvalueinseconds.

Syntax
set spantree lpwindow value

Parameters
value Specifiesthenumberofsecondsthatcomprisetheperiodduringwhich LoopProtecteventsarecounted.Thedefaulteventwindowis180 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheLoopProtectWindowisatimervalue,inseconds,thatdefinesaperiodduringwhichLoop Protecteventsarecounted.Thedefaultvalueis180seconds.Ifthetimerissetto0,theevent
7-46 Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree lpwindow

counterisnotresetuntiltheLoopProtecteventthresholdisreached.Ifthethresholdisreached, thatconstitutesaloopprotectionevent.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheLoopProtecteventwindowto120seconds:
B2(rw)->set spantree lpwindow 120

show spantree lpwindow

UsethiscommandtodisplaythecurrentLoopProtecteventwindowvalue.

Syntax
show spantree lpwindow

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecurrentLoopProtectwindowvalue:
B2(rw)->show spantree lpwindow The Loop Protect event window is set to 120 seconds

clear spantree lpwindow

UsethiscommandtoresettheLoopProtecteventwindowtothedefaultvalueof180seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree lpwindow

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-47

set spantree lptrapenable

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheLoopProtecteventwindowtothedefaultof180seconds:
B2(rw)->clear spantree lpwindow

set spantree lptrapenable

UsethiscommandtoenableordisableLoopProtecteventnotification.

Syntax
set spantree lptrapenable {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnablesordisablesthesendingofLoopProtecttraps.Defaultis disabled.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
LoopProtecttrapsaresentwhenaLoopProtecteventoccurs,thatis,whenaportgoestolistening duetonotreceivingBPDUs.Thetrapindicatesport,SIDandloopprotectionstatus.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenablesendingofLoopProtecttraps:
B2(rw)->set spantree lptrapenable enable

show spantree lptrapenable

UsethiscommandtodisplaythecurrentstatusofLoopProtecteventnotification.

Syntax
show spantree lptrapenable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

7-48

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree lptrapenable

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecurrentLoopProtecteventnotificationstatus:
B2(rw)->show spantree lptrapenable The Loop Protect event notification status is enable

clear spantree lptrapenable

UsethiscommandtoreturntheLoopProtecteventnotificationstatetoitsdefaultstateof disabled.

Syntax
clear spantree lptrapenable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheLoopProtecteventnotificationstatetothedefaultof disabled.
B2(rw)->clear spantree lptrapenable

set spantree disputedbpduthreshold

UsethiscommandtosetthedisputedBPDUthreshold,whichisthenumberofdisputedBPDUs thatmustbereceivedonagivenport/SIDuntiladisputedBPDUtrapissent.

Syntax
set spantree disputedbpduthreshold value

Parameters
value SpecifiesthenumberofdisputedBPDUsthatmustbereceivedona givenport/SIDtocauseadisputedBPDUtraptobesent. Athresholdof0indicatesthattrapsshouldnotbesent.Thedefault valueis0.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-49

show spantree disputedbpduthreshold

Usage
AdisputedBPDUisoneinwhichtheflagsfieldindicatesadesignatedroleandlearning,andthe priorityvectorisworsethanthatalreadyheldbytheport.IfadisputedBPDUisreceivedtheport isforcedtothelisteningstate.Refertothe802.1Q2005standard,IEEEStandardforLocaland MetropolitanAreaNetworksVirtualBridgedLocalAreaNetworks,forafulldescriptionofthe disputemechanism,whichpreventsloopingincasesofonewaycommunication. ThedisputedBPDUthresholdisanintegervariablethatrepresentsthenumberofdisputed BPDUsthatmustbereceivedonagivenport/SIDuntiladisputedBPDUtrapissentandasyslog messageisissued.Forexample,ifthethresholdis10,thenatrapisissuedwhen10,20,30,andso on,disputedBPDUshavebeenreceived. Ifthevalueis0,trapsarenotsent.Thetrapindicatesport,SIDandtotalDisputedBPDUcount. Thedefaultis0.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthedisputedBPDUthresholdvalueto5:
B2(rw)->set spantree disputedbpduthreshold 5

show spantree disputedbpduthreshold

UsethiscommandtodisplaythecurrentvalueofthedisputedBPDUthreshold.

Syntax
show spantree disputedbpduthreshold

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecurrentdisputedBPDUthreshold:
B2(rw)->show spantree disputedbpduthreshold The disputed BPDU threshold value is 0

clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold

UsethiscommandtoreturnthedisputedBPDUthresholdtoitsdefaultvalueof0,meaningthat disputedBPDUtrapsshouldnotbesent.

Syntax
clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold

7-50

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree nonforwardingreason

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetthedisputedBPDUthresholdtothedefaultof0:
B2(rw)->clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold

show spantree nonforwardingreason

Usethiscommandtodisplaythereasonforplacingaportinanonforwardingstateduetoan exceptionalcondition.

Syntax
show spantree nonforwardingreason port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
portstring sidsid Specifiesport(s)forwhichtodisplaythenonforwardingreason. (Optional)SpecifiesthespecificSpanningTree(s)forwhichtodisplay thenonforwardingreason.Validvaluesare04094.Ifnotspecified, SID0isassumed.

Defaults
Ifnoportstringisspecified,nonforwardingreasonisdisplayedforallports. IfnoSIDisspecified,SID0isassumed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
ExceptionalconditionscausingaporttobeplacedinlisteningorblockingstateincludeaLoop Protectevent,receiptofdisputedBPDUs,andloopbackdetection.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythenonforwardingreasononge.1.1:
B2(rw)->show spantree nonforwardingreason port ge.1.1 The non-forwarding reason for port ge.1.1 on SID 0 is None

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

7-51

show spantree nonforwardingreason

7-52

Spanning Tree Configuration

8
802.1Q VLAN Configuration
ThischapterdescribestheSecureStackB2systemscapabilitiestoimplement802.1QvirtualLANs (VLANs).
For information about... VLAN Configuration Summary Viewing VLANs Creating and Naming Static VLANs Assigning Port VLAN IDs (PVIDs) and Ingress Filtering Configuring the VLAN Egress List Setting the Host VLAN Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) Refer to page... 8-1 8-2 8-4 8-6 8-12 8-16 8-18

VLAN Configuration Summary

VirtualLANsallowthenetworkadministratortopartitionnetworktrafficintologicalgroupsand controltheflowofthattrafficthroughthenetwork.Oncethetrafficand,ineffect,theusers creatingthetraffic,areassignedtoaVLAN,thenbroadcastandmulticasttrafficiscontained withintheVLANanduserscanbeallowedordeniedaccesstoanyofthenetworksresources. Also,someoralloftheportsonthedevicecanbeconfiguredasGVRPports,whichenableframes receivedwithaparticularVLANIDandprotocoltobetransmittedonalimitednumberofports. ThiskeepsthetrafficassociatedwithaparticularVLANandprotocolisolatedfromtheotherparts ofthenetwork.
Note: The device can support up to 1024 802.1Q VLANs. The allowable range for VLAN IDs is 1 to 4093. As a default, all ports on the device are assigned to VLAN ID 1, untagged.

Port String Syntax Used in the CLI

ForinformationonhowtodesignateVLANsandportnumbersintheCLIsyntax,refertoPort StringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Creating a Secure Management VLAN

Bydefaultatstartup,thereisoneVLANconfiguredontheSecureStackB2device.ItisVLANID1, theDEFAULTVLAN.Thedefaultcommunityname,whichdeterminesremoteaccessforSNMP management,issettopublicwithreadwriteaccess.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-1

Viewing VLANs

IftheSecureStackB2deviceistobeconfiguredformultipleVLANs,itmaybedesirableto configureamanagementonlyVLAN.ThisallowsastationconnectedtothemanagementVLAN tomanagethedevice.Italsomakesmanagementsecurebypreventingconfigurationviaports assignedtootherVLANs. TocreateasecuremanagementVLAN,youmust:

Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Task Create a new VLAN. Set the PVID for the desired switch port to the VLAN created in Step 1. Add the desired switch port to the egress list for the VLAN created in Step 1. Assign host status to the VLAN. Set a private community name and access policy. Refer to page... 8-4 8-7 8-13 8-17 6-13

ThecommandsusedtocreateasecuremanagementVLANarelistedinTable 829.Thisexample assumesthemanagementstationisattachedtoge.1.1andwantsuntaggedframes. Theprocessdescribedherewouldberepeatedoneverydevicethatisconnectedinthenetworkto ensurethateachdevicehasasecuremanagementVLAN. Table 8-29

To do this... Create a new VLAN and confirm settings.

Command Set for Creating a Secure Management VLAN

Use these commands... set vlan create 2 (set vlan on page 8-4) (Optional) show vlan 2 (show vlan on page 8-3)

Set the PVID to the new VLAN. Add the port to the new VLANs egress list. Remove the port from the default VLANs egress list. Assign host status to the VLAN. Set a private community name and access policy and confirm settings.

set port vlan ge.1.1 2 (set port vlan on page 8-7) set vlan egress 2 ge.1.1 untagged (set vlan egress on page 8-13) clear vlan egress 1 ge.1.1 (clear vlan egress on page 8-14) set host vlan 2 (set host vlan on page 8-17) set snmp community private (set snmp community on page 6-13) (Optional) show snmp community (show snmp community on page 6-13)

Viewing VLANs
Purpose
TodisplayalistofVLANscurrentlyconfiguredonthedevice,todeterminehowoneormore VLANswerecreated,theportsallowedanddisallowedtotransmittrafficbelongingtoVLAN(s), andifthoseportswilltransmitthetrafficwithaVLANtagincluded.

8-2

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

show vlan

Command
For information about... show vlan Refer to page... 8-3

show vlan
UsethiscommandtodisplayallinformationrelatedtooneormoreVLANs.

Syntax
show vlan [static] [vlan-list] [portinfo [vlan vlan-list | vlan-name] [port portstring]]

Parameters
static (Optional)DisplaysinformationrelatedtostaticVLANs.StaticVLANsare manuallycreatedusingthesetvlancommand(setvlanonpage 84), SNMPMIBs,ortheWebViewmanagementapplication.ThedefaultVLAN, VLAN1,isalwaysstaticallyconfiguredandcantbedeleted.Onlyports thatuseaspecifiedVLANastheirdefaultVLAN(PVID)willbedisplayed. (Optional)DisplaysinformationforaspecificVLANorrangeofVLANs. (Optional)DisplaysVLANattributesrelatedtooneormoreports. (Optional)DisplaysportinformationforoneormoreVLANs. (Optional)Displaysportinformationforoneormoreports.

vlanlist portinfo vlanvlanlist| vlanname portportstring

Defaults
Ifnooptionsarespecified,allinformationrelatedtostaticanddynamicVLANswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayinformationforVLAN1.Inthiscase,VLAN1isnamed DEFAULTVLAN.PortsallowedtotransmitframesbelongingtoVLAN1arelistedasegress ports.PortsthatwontincludeaVLANtagintheirtransmittedframesarelistedasuntagged ports.Therearenoforbiddenports(preventedfromtransmittedframes)onVLAN1:
B2(su)->show vlan 1 VLAN: 1 NAME: DEFAULT VLAN VLAN Type: Default Egress Ports ge.1.1-10, ge.2.1-4, ge.3.1-7, Forbidden Egress Ports None. Untagged Ports ge.1.1-10, ge.2.1-4, ge.3.1-7,

Table 830providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-3

Creating and Naming Static VLANs

Table 8-30
Output VLAN NAME Status VLAN Type Egress Ports

show vlan Output Details

What It Displays... VLAN ID. Name assigned to the VLAN. Whether it is enabled or disabled. Whether it is permanent (static) or dynamic. Ports configured to transmit frames for this VLAN. Ports prevented from transmitted frames for this VLAN. Ports configured to transmit untagged frames for this VLAN.

Forbidden Egress Ports Untagged Ports

Creating and Naming Static VLANs

Purpose
TocreateanewstaticVLAN,ortoenableordisableexistingVLAN(s).

Commands
For information about... set vlan set vlan name clear vlan clear vlan name Refer to page... 8-4 8-5 8-5 8-6

set vlan
UsethiscommandtocreateanewstaticIEEE802.1QVLAN,ortoenableordisableanexisting VLAN.

Syntax
set vlan {create | enable | disable} vlan-list

Parameters
create|enable| disable vlanlist Creates,enablesordisablesVLAN(s). SpecifiesoneormoreVLANIDstobecreated,enabledordisabled.

Defaults
None.

8-4

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set vlan name

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
OnceaVLANiscreated,youcanassignitanameusingthesetvlannamecommanddescribedin setvlannameonpage 85. EachVLANIDmustbeunique.IfaduplicateVLANIDisentered,thedeviceassumesthatthe AdministratorintendstomodifytheexistingVLAN. EntertheVLANIDusingauniquenumberbetween1and4093.TheVLANIDsof0and4094and highermaynotbeusedforuserdefinedVLANs.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateVLAN3:
B2(su)->set vlan create 3

ThisexampleshowshowtodisableVLAN3:
B2(su)->set vlan disable 3

set vlan name

UsethiscommandtosetorchangetheASCIInameforaneworexistingVLAN.

Syntax
set vlan name vlan-list vlan-name

Parameters
vlanlist vlanname SpecifiestheVLANIDoftheVLAN(s)tobenamed. SpecifiesthestringusedasthenameoftheVLAN(1to32characters).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthenameforVLAN7togreen:
B2(su)->set vlan name 7 green

clear vlan
UsethiscommandtoremoveastaticVLANfromthelistofVLANsrecognizedbythedevice.

Syntax
clear vlan vlan-list

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-5

clear vlan name

Parameters
vlanlist SpecifiestheVLANIDoftheVLAN(s)toberemoved.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoremoveastaticVLAN9fromthedevicesVLANlist:
B2(su)->clear vlan 9

clear vlan name

UsethiscommandtoremovethenameofaVLANfromtheVLANlist.

Syntax
clear vlan name vlan-list

Parameters
vlanlist SpecifiestheVLANIDoftheVLAN(s)forwhichthenamewillbecleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearthenameforVLAN9:
B2(su)->clear vlan name 9

Assigning Port VLAN IDs (PVIDs) and Ingress Filtering

Purpose
ToassigndefaultVLANIDstountaggedframesononeormoreports,toconfigureVLANingress filteringandconstraints,andtosettheframediscardmode.

8-6

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

show port vlan

Commands
For information about... show port vlan set port vlan clear port vlan show port ingress filter set port ingress filter show port discard set port discard Refer to page... 8-7 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-11

show port vlan

UsethiscommandtodisplayportVLANidentifier(PVID)information.PVIDdeterminesthe VLANtowhichalluntaggedframesreceivedononeormoreportswillbeclassified.

Syntax
show port vlan [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysPVIDinformationforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,portVLANinformationforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayPVIDsassignedtoge.2.1through6.Inthiscase,untagged framesreceivedontheseportswillbeclassifiedtoVLAN1:
B2(su)->show port vlan ge.2.1-6 ge.2.1 is set to 1 ge.2.2 is set to 1 ge.2.3 is set to 1 ge.2.4 is set to 1 ge.2.5 is set to 1 ge.2.6 is set to 1

set port vlan

UsethiscommandtoconfigurethePVID(portVLANidentifier)foroneormoreports.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-7

clear port vlan

Syntax
set port vlan port-string pvid [modify-egress | no-modify-egress]

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtoconfigureaVLANidentifier.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52. SpecifiestheVLANIDoftheVLANtowhichport(s)willbeadded. (Optional)Addsport(s)toVLANsuntaggedegresslistandremovesthem fromotheruntaggedegresslists. (Optional)Doesnotpromptforormakeegresslistchanges.

pvid modifyegress nomodifyegress

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ThePVIDisusedtoclassifyuntaggedframesastheyingressintoagivenport.Ifthespecified VLANhasnotalreadybeencreated,thiscommandwillcreateit.Itwillprompttheusertoaddthe VLANtotheportsegresslistasuntagged,andtoremovethedefaultVLANfromtheports egresslist.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoaddge.1.10totheportVLANlistofVLAN4(PVID4).SinceVLAN4 isanewVLAN,itiscreated.Thenportge.1.10isaddedtoVLAN4suntaggedegresslist.The portmustthenbeclearedfromtheegresslistofVLAN1(thedefaultVLAN)asshown:
B2(su)->set port vlan ge.1.10 4 B2(su)->set vlan 4 create B2(su)->set vlan egress 4 ge.1.10 untagged B2(su)->clear vlan egress 1 ge.1.10

clear port vlan

Usethiscommandtoresetaports802.1QportVLANID(PVID)tothehostVLANID1.

Syntax
clear port vlan port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)toberesettothehostVLANID1.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.
8-8 802.1Q VLAN Configuration

show port ingress filter

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresetportsge.1.3through11toaVLAN IDof1(HostVLAN):
B2(su)->clear port vlan ge.1.3-11

show port ingress filter

Usethiscommandtoshowallportsthatareenabledforportingressfiltering,whichlimits incomingVLANIDframesaccordingtoaportVLANegresslist.IftheVLANIDspecifiedinthe receivedframeisnotontheportsVLANegresslist,thenthatframeisdroppedandnot forwarded.

Syntax
show port ingress-filter [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtodisplayingressfilteringstatus. Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,ingressfilteringstatusforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheportingressfilterstatusforports10through15inslot1. Inthiscase,theportsaredisabledforingressfiltering:
B2(su)->show port ingress-filter ge.1.10-15 Port State -------- --------ge.1.10 disabled ge.1.11 disabled ge.1.12 disabled ge.1.13 disabled ge.1.14 disabled ge.1.15 disabled

set port ingress filter

UsethiscommandtodiscardallframesreceivedwithaVLANIDthatdontmatchtheports VLANegresslist.

Syntax
set port ingress-filter port-string {disable | enable}

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-9

show port discard

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoenableofdisableingressfiltering.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. Disablesorenablesingressfiltering.

disable|enable

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Wheningressfilteringisenabledonaport,theVLANIDsofincomingframesarecomparedtothe portsegresslist.IfthereceivedVLANIDdoesnotmatchaVLANIDontheportsegresslist, thentheframeisdropped. IngressfilteringisimplementedaccordingtotheIEEE802.1Qstandard.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenableportingressfilteringonge.1.3:
B2(su)->set port ingress-filter ge.1.3 enable

show port discard

Usethiscommandtodisplaytheframediscardmodeforoneormoreports.Portscanbesetto discardframesbasedonwhetherornottheframecontainsaVLANtag.Theycanalsobesetto discardbothtaggedanduntaggedframes,orneither.

Syntax
show port discard [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaystheframediscardmodeforspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
If port-string is not specified, frame discard mode will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

8-10

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set port discard

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheframediscardmodeforge.2.7.Inthiscase,theporthas beensettodiscardalltaggedframes:
B2(su)->show port discard ge.2.7 Port Discard Mode ------------ ------------ge.2.7 tagged

set port discard

Usethiscommandtosettheframediscardmodeononeormoreports.

Syntax
set port discard port-string {tagged | untagged | both | none}

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtosetframediscardmode.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52. TaggedDiscardallincoming(received)taggedpacketsonthedefined port(s). UntaggedDiscardallincominguntaggedpackets. BothAlltrafficwillbediscarded(taggedanduntagged). NoneNopacketswillbediscarded.

tagged| untagged|both| none

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Theoptionsaretodiscardallincomingtaggedframes,allincominguntaggedframes,neither (essentiallyallowalltraffic),orboth(essentiallydiscardingalltraffic). Acommonpracticeistodiscardalltaggedpacketonuserports.TypicallyanAdministratordoes notwanttheendusersdefiningwhatVLANtheyuseforcommunication.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodiscardalltaggedframesreceivedonportge.3.3:
B2(su)->set port discard ge.3.3 tagged

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-11

Configuring the VLAN Egress List

Configuring the VLAN Egress List

Purpose
ToassignorremoveportsontheegresslistofaparticularVLAN.Thisdetermineswhichportson theswitchwillbeeligibletotransmitframesforaparticularVLAN.Forexample,ports1,5,7,8 couldbeallowedtotransmitframesbelongingtoVLAN20andports7,8,9,10couldbeallowedto transmitframestaggedwithVLAN30(aportcanbelongtomultipleVLANEgresslists).Note thatthePortEgresslistforports7and8wouldcontainbothVLAN20and30. Theportegresstypeforallportscanbesettotagged,forbidden,oruntagged.Ingeneral,VLANs havenoegress(exceptforVLAN1)untiltheyareconfiguredbystaticadministration,orthrough dynamicmechanismssuchasGVRP. SettingaporttoforbiddenpreventsitfromparticipatinginthespecifiedVLANandensuresthat anydynamicrequests(eitherthroughGVRPordynamicegress)fortheporttojointheVLANwill beignored.Settingaporttountaggedallowsittotransmitframeswithoutatagheader.This settingisusuallyusedtoconfigureaportconnectedtoanenduserdevice.Framessentbetween VLANawareswitchesaretypicallytagged. ThedefaultVLANdefaultsitsegresstountaggedforallports.

Commands
For information about... show port egress set vlan forbidden set vlan egress clear vlan egress show vlan dynamicegress set vlan dynamicegress Refer to page... 8-12 8-13 8-13 8-14 8-15 8-16

show port egress

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheVLANmembershipforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show port egress [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysVLANmembershipforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,VLANmembershipwillbedisplayedforallports.

8-12

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set vlan forbidden

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowsyouhowtoshowVLANegressinformationforge.1.1through3.Inthiscase, allthreeportsareallowedtotransmitVLAN1framesastaggedandVLAN10framesas untagged.BotharestaticVLANs:
B2(su)->show port egress ge.1.1-3 Port Vlan Egress Registration Number Id Status Status ------------------------------------------------------ge.1.1 1 tagged static ge.1.1 10 untagged static ge.1.2 1 tagged static ge.1.2 10 untagged static ge.1.3 1 tagged static ge.1.3 10 untagged static

set vlan forbidden

UsethiscommandtopreventoneormoreportsfromparticipatinginaVLAN.Thissetting instructsthedevicetoignoredynamicrequests(eitherthroughGVRPordynamicegress)forthe porttojointheVLAN.

Syntax
set vlan forbidden vlan-id port-string

Parameters
vlanid portstring SpecifiestheVLANforwhichtosetforbiddenport(s). Specifiestheport(s)tosetasforbiddenforthespecifiedvlanid.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowsyouhowtosetge.1.3toforbiddenforVLAN6:
B2(su)->set vlan forbidden 6 ge.1.3

set vlan egress

UsethiscommandtoaddportstotheVLANegresslistforthedevice,ortopreventoneormore portsfromparticipatinginaVLAN.Thisdetermineswhichportswilltransmitframesfora particularVLAN.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-13

clear vlan egress

Syntax
set vlan egress vlan-list port-string [untagged | forbidden | tagged]

Parameters
vlanlist portstring
Specifies the VLAN where a port(s) will be added to the egress list.

SpecifiesoneormoreportstoaddtotheVLANegresslistofthespecified vlanlist.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. (Optional)Addsthespecifiedportsas: untaggedCausestheport(s)totransmitframeswithoutanIEEE 802.1Qheadertag. forbiddenInstructsthedevicetoignoredynamicrequests(either throughGVRPordynamicegress)fromtheport(s)tojointheVLAN anddisallowsegressonthatport. taggedCausestheport(s)totransmit802.1Qtaggedframes.

untagged| forbidden| tagged

Defaults
Ifuntagged,forbiddenortaggedisnotspecified,theportwillbeaddedtotheVLANegresslist astagged.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtoaddge.1.5through10totheegresslistofVLAN7.Thismeansthat theseportswilltransmitVLAN7framesastagged:
B2(su)->set vlan egress 7 ge.1.5-10

Thisexampleshowshowtoforbidports13through15inslot1fromjoiningVLAN7anddisallow egressonthoseports:
B2(su)->set vlan egress 7 ge.1.13-15 forbidden

Thisexampleshowshowtoallowport2inslot1totransmitVLAN7framesasuntagged:
B2(su)->set vlan egress 7 ge.1.2 untagged

clear vlan egress

UsethiscommandtoremoveportsfromaVLANsegresslist.

Syntax
clear vlan egress vlan-list port-string [forbidden]

8-14

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

show vlan dynamicegress

Parameters
vlanlist portstring SpecifiesthenumberoftheVLANfromwhichaport(s)willberemoved fromtheegresslist. SpecifiesoneormoreportstoberemovedfromtheVLANegresslistofthe specifiedvlanlist.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues, refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. (Optional)Clearstheforbiddensettingfromthespecifiedport(s)andresets theport(s)asabletoegressframesifsoconfiguredbyeitherstaticor dynamicmeans.

forbidden

Defaults
Ifforbiddenisnotspecified,taggedanduntaggedsettingswillbecleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtoremovege.3.14fromtheegresslistofVLAN 9:
B2(su)->clear vlan egress 9 ge.3.14

ThisexampleshowshowtoremoveallGigabitEthernetportsinslot2fromtheegresslistof VLAN4:
B2(su)->clear vlan egress 4 ge.2.*

show vlan dynamicegress

Usethiscommandtodisplaythestatusofdynamicegress(enabledordisabled)foroneormore VLANs.

Syntax
show vlan dynamicegress [vlan-list]

Parameters
vlanlist (Optional)DisplaysdynamicegressstatusforspecificVLAN(s).

Defaults
Ifvlanlistisnotspecified,thedynamicegressstatusforallVLANswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythedynamicegressstatusforVLANs5055:
B2(rw)->show vlan dynamicegress 50-55 VLAN 50 is disabled

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-15

set vlan dynamicegress

VLAN VLAN VLAN VLAN VLAN

51 52 53 54 55

is is is is is

disabled disabled enabled enabled enabled

set vlan dynamicegress

UsethiscommandtoadministrativelysetthedynamicegressstatusforoneormoreVLANs.

Syntax
set vlan dynamicegress vlan-list {enable | disable}

Parameters
vlanlist enable|disable SpecifiestheVLANsbyIDtoenableordisabledynamicegress. Enablesordisablesdynamicegress.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
IfdynamicegressisenabledforaparticularVLAN,whenaportreceivesaframetaggedwiththat VLANsID,theswitchwilladdthereceivingporttothatVLANsegresslist.Dynamicegressis disabledontheSecureStackB2bydefault. Forexample,assumeyouhave20AppleTalkusersonyournetworkwhoaremobileusers(thatis, usedifferentportseveryday),butyouwanttokeeptheAppleTalktrafficisolatedinitsown VLAN.YoucancreateanAppleTalkVLANwithaVLANIDof55withaclassificationrulethatall AppleTalktrafficgetstaggedwithVLANID55.Then,youenabledynamicegressforVLAN55. Now,whenanAppleTalkuserplugsintoportge.3.5andsendsanAppleTalkpacket,theswitch willtagthepackettoVLAN55andalsoaddportge.3.5toVLAN55segresslist,whichallowsthe AppleTalkusertoreceiveAppleTalktraffic.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenabledynamicegressonVLAN55:
B2(rw)->set vlan dynamicegress 55 enable

Setting the Host VLAN

Purpose
ToconfigureahostVLANthatonlyselectdevicesareallowedtoaccess.Thissecuresthehostport formanagementonlytasks.

8-16

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

show host vlan

Note: The host port is the management entity of the device. Refer to Creating a Secure Management VLAN on page 8-1 for more information.

Commands.
For information about... show host vlan set host vlan clear host vlan Refer to page... 8-17 8-17 8-18

show host vlan

UsethiscommandtodisplaythecurrenthostVLAN.

Syntax
show host vlan

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythehostVLAN:
B2(su)->show host vlan Host vlan is 7.

set host vlan

UsethiscommandtoassignhoststatustoaVLAN.

Syntax
set host vlan vlan-id

Parameters
vlanid SpecifiesthenumberoftheVLANtosetasthehostVLAN.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-17

clear host vlan

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ThehostVLANshouldbeasecureVLANwhereonlydesignatedusersareallowedaccess.For example,ahostVLANcouldbespecificallycreatedfordevicemanagement.Thiswouldallowa managementstationconnectedtothemanagementVLANtomanageallportsonthedeviceand makemanagementsecurebypreventingmanagementviaportsassignedtootherVLANs.
Note: Before you can designate a VLAN as the host VLAN, you must create a VLAN using the set of commands described in Creating and Naming Static VLANs on page 8-4.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetVLAN7asthehostVLAN:
B2(su)->set host vlan 7

clear host vlan

UsethiscommandtoresetthehostVLANtothedefaultsettingof1.

Syntax
clear host vlan

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthehostVLANtothedefaultsetting:
B2(su)->clear host vlan

Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)

About GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)
Thefollowingsectionsdescribethedeviceoperationwhenitsportsareoperatingunderthe GenericAttributeRegistrationProtocol(GARP)applicationGARPVLANRegistrationProtocol (GVRP).

8-18

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)

Overview
ThepurposeofGVRPistodynamicallycreateVLANsacrossaswitchednetwork.WhenaVLAN isdeclared,theinformationistransmittedoutGVRPconfiguredportsonthedeviceinaGARP formattedframeusingtheGVRPmulticastMACaddress.Aswitchthatreceivesthisframe, examinestheframe,andextractstheVLANIDs.GVRPthencreatestheVLANsandaddsthe receivingporttoitstaggedmemberlistfortheextractedVLANID(s).Theinformationisthen transmittedouttheotherGVRPconfiguredportsofthedevice.Figure 87showsanexampleof howVLANbluefromendstationAwouldbepropagatedacrossaswitchnetwork.

How It Works
InFigure 87onpage 819,Switch4,port1isregisteredasbeingamemberofVLANBlueand thendeclaresthisfactoutallitsports(2and3)toSwitch1andSwitch 2.Thesetwodevices registerthisintheportegresslistsoftheports(Switch1,port1andSwitch2,port1)thatreceived theframeswiththeinformation.Switch2,whichisconnectedtoSwitch3andSwitch5declares thesameinformationtothosetwodevicesandtheportegresslistofeachportisupdatedwiththe newinformation,accordingly. ConfiguringaVLANonan802.1QswitchcreatesastaticVLANentry.Theentrywillalways remainregisteredandwillnottimeout.However,dynamicentrieswilltimeoutandtheir registrationswillberemovedfromthememberlistiftheendstationAisremoved.Thisensures that,ifswitchesaredisconnectedorifendstationsareremoved,theregisteredinformation remainsaccurate. TheendresultisthattheportegresslistofaportisupdatedwithinformationaboutVLANsthat resideonthatport,eveniftheactualstationontheVLANisseveralhopsaway. Figure 8-7 Example of VLAN Propagation via GVRP
Switch 2 Switch 3

1 Switch 1

R 2D

2 End Station A

D 3 D

Switch 4

R Switch 5

R D

= Port registered as a member of VLAN Blue = Port declaring VLAN Blue

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-19

show gvrp

Purpose
TodynamicallycreateVLANsacrossaswitchednetwork.TheGVRPcommandsetisusedto displayGVRPconfigurationinformation,thecurrentglobalGVRPstatesetting,individualport settings(enableordisable)andtimersettings.Bydefault,GVRPisenabledgloballyonthedevice, butdisabledonallports.

Commands
For information about... show gvrp show garp timer set gvrp clear gvrp set garp timer Refer to page... 8-20 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-23

show gvrp
UsethiscommandtodisplayGVRPconfigurationinformation.

Syntax
show gvrp [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysGVRPconfigurationinformationforspecificport(s).For adetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,GVRPconfigurationinformationwillbedisplayedforallportsand thedevice.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayGVRPstatusforthedeviceandforfw.2.1:
B2(su)->show gvrp ge.2.1 Global GVRP status is enabled. Port Number ----------ge.2.1 GVRP status ----------disabled

8-20

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

show garp timer

show garp timer

UsethiscommandtodisplayGARPtimervaluesforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show garp timer [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysGARPtimerinformationforspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,GARPtimerinformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayGARPtimerinformationonports1through10inslot1:
Note: For a functional description of the terms join, leave, and leaveall timers, refer to the standard IEEE 802.1Q documentation, which is not supplied with this device. B2(su)->show garp timer ge.1.1-10 Port based GARP Configuration: (Timer units are centiseconds) Port Number Join Leave Leaveall ----------- ---------- ---------- ---------ge.1.1 20 60 1000 ge.1.2 20 60 1000 ge.1.3 20 60 1000 ge.1.4 20 60 1000 ge.1.5 20 60 1000 ge.1.6 20 60 1000 ge.1.7 20 60 1000 ge.1.8 20 60 1000 ge.1.9 20 60 1000 ge.1.10 20 60 1000

Table 831providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.Fordetailsonusingthesetgvrp commandtoenableordisableGVRP,refertosetgvrponpage 822.Fordetailsonusingtheset garptimercommandtochangedefaulttimervalues,refertosetgarptimeronpage 823. Table 8-31

Output Port Number Join Leave Leaveall

show gvrp configuration Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. Join timer setting. Leave timer setting. Leavall timer setting.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-21

set gvrp

set gvrp
UsethiscommandtoenableordisableGVRPgloballyonthedeviceorononeormoreports.

Syntax
set gvrp {enable | disable} [port-string]

Parameters
disable| enable portstring DisablesorenablesGVRPonthedevice. (Optional)DisablesorenablesGVRPonspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedin theCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,GVRPwillbedisabledorenabledforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableGVRPgloballyonthedevice:
B2(su)->set gvrp enable

ThisexampleshowshowtodisableGVRPgloballyonthedevice:
B2(su)->set gvrp disable

ThisexampleshowshowtoenableGVRPonge.1.3:
B2(su)->set gvrp enable ge.1.3

clear gvrp
UsethiscommandtoclearGVRPstatusorononeormoreports.

Syntax
clear gvrp [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)ClearsGVRPstatusonspecificport(s).Foradetaileddescriptionof possibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIon page 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,GVRPstatuswillbeclearedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

8-22

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set garp timer

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearGVRPstatusgloballyonthedevice:
B2(su)->clear gvrp

set garp timer

Usethiscommandtoadjustthevaluesofthejoin,leave,andleavealltimers.

Syntax
set garp timer {[join timer-value] [leave timer-value] [leaveall timer-value]} port-string

Parameters
jointimervalue leavetimervalue leavealltimer value portstring SetstheGARPjointimerincentiseconds(Referto802.1Qstandard.) SetstheGARPleavetimerincentiseconds(Referto802.1Qstandard.) SetstheGARPleavealltimerincentiseconds(Referto802.1Qstandard.) Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoconfigureGARPtimersettings.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Thesettingofthesetimersiscriticalandshouldonlybechangedbypersonnelfamiliarwiththe 802.1Qstandardsdocumentation,whichisnotsuppliedwiththisdevice.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheGARPjointimervalueto100centisecondsforallports:
B2(su)->set garp timer join 100 *.*.*

Thisexampleshowshowtosettheleavetimervalueto300centisecondsforallports:
B2(su)->set garp timer leave 300 *.*.*

Thisexampleshowshowtosettheleavealltimervalueto20000centisecondsforallports:
B2(su)->set garp timer leaveall 20000 *.*.*

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

8-23

set garp timer

8-24

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

9
Differentiated Services Configuration
ThischapterdescribestheDifferentiatedServices(Diffserv)setofcommandsandhowtouse them.
Note: Diffserv will not be available if a Policy License is activated on the SecureStack B2. When a Policy License is activated, it enables Policy that takes the place of Diffserv. Refer to Activating Licensed Features on page 3-26 for more information on Licensing.

SecureStackB2devicessupportDiffservpolicybasedprovisioningofnetworkresourcesby allowingITadministratorsto: Create,changeorremoveDiffservpoliciesbasedonbusinessspecificuseofnetworkservices. Prioritizeandpolicetrafficaccordingtoassignedpoliciesandconditions. AssignorunassignportstoDiffservpoliciessothatonlyportsactivatedforapolicywillbe allowedtotransmitframesaccordingly.

Refer to page ... 9-1 9-2 9-9 9-15 9-17

For information about ... Globally Enabling or Disabling Diffserv Creating Diffserv Classes and Matching Conditions Configuring Diffserv Policies and Assigning Classes Assigning Policies to Service Ports DiffServ Configuration Examples

Globally Enabling or Disabling Diffserv

Purpose
TogloballyenableordisableDiffservonthedevice.

Command
ThecommandusedtogloballyenableordisableDiffservonthedeviceislistedbelowand describedintheassociatedsectionasshown.
For information about... set diffserv adminmode Refer to page...

91

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-1

set diffserv adminmode

set diffserv adminmode

UsethiscommandtogloballyenableordisableDiffservonthedevice.Bydefault,thisfunctionis disabledatdevicestartup.

Syntax
set diffserv adminmode {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnablesordisablesDiffserv.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableDiffserv:
B2(rw)->set diffserv adminmode enable

Creating Diffserv Classes and Matching Conditions

Purpose
Toreview,create,andconfigureDiffservclassesandmatchingconditions.

Commands
Thecommandsusedtoreview,create,andconfigureDiffservclassesandmatchingconditionsare listedbelowanddescribedintheassociatedsectionasshown.
For information about... show diffserv info show diffserv class set diffserv class create set diffserv class delete set diffserv class match set diffserv class rename Refer to page... 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-5 9-8

show diffserv info

UsethiscommandtodisplaygeneralDiffservstatusinformation.

9-2

Differentiated Services Configuration

show diffserv class

Syntax
show diffserv info

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaygeneralDiffservstatusinformation:
B2(rw)->show diffserv info DiffServ Admin Mode............................ Class Table Size Current/Max................... Class Rule Table Size Current/Max.............. Policy Table Size Current/Max.................. Policy Instance Table Size Current/Max......... Policy Attribute Table Size Current/Max........ Service Table Size Current/Max................. Enable 0 / 25 0 / 150 0 / 12 0 / 120 0 / 120 0 / 48

show diffserv class

UsethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutDiffservclasses.

Syntax
show diffserv class {summary | detailed classname}

Parameters
summary DisplaysasummaryofDiffservclassinformation. detailedclassname DisplaysdetailedDiffservinformationforaspecificclass.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-3

set class create

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayasummaryofDiffservclassinformation.Inthiscase,there aretwoclassesconfigured,namedguestandadmin:
B2(rw)->show diffserv class summary Class Name Class Type Ref Class Name ----------------- ------------ ------------------------------guest All admin All

set class create

UsethiscommandtocreateanewDiffservclass.

Syntax
set diffserv class create {all classname}

Parameters
all classname Specifiesthatallmatchconditionsmustbemetbeforetheassociatedpolicy isexecuted. SpecifiesaclassnameforthisnewDiffservclass.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateaDiffservclasscalledadmin:
B2(rw)->set diffserv class create all admin

set diffserv class delete

UsethiscommandtodeleteaDiffservclassandremoveanymatchassignedtotheclass.

Syntax
set diffserv class delete classname

Parameters
classname Specifiestheclassnametobedeleted.

Defaults
None.

9-4

Differentiated Services Configuration

set diffserv class match

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Youcannotusethiscommandtodeleteaclassthathasbeenassignedtoapolicy.Beforedeletinga classwithanassignedpolicyandserviceport(s),youmustfirst: Removetheserviceport(s)assignedtothepolicyusingthesetdiffservserviceremove command(page 916),then Removethespecifiedclassusingthesetdiffservpolicyclassremovecommand(page 911).

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeletetheDiffservadminclass:
B2(rw)->set diffserv class delete admin

set diffserv class match

UsethiscommandtomatchaDiffservclasstoaserviceconditionbasedonlayer2,3,and4packet parameters.
set diffserv class match {[every classname] [dstmac | scrmac classname macaddr macmask] [dstip | srcip classname ipaddr ipmask] [dstl4port | srcl4port{keyword classname keyword | number classname portnumber}] [ipdscp classname dscpval] [ipprecedence classname precedencenumber] [iptos classname tosbits tosmask] [protocol {keyword classname protocol-name | number classname protocol-number}] [refclass {add | remove}{classname refclassname}] [vlan classname vlanid]}

Parameters
everyclassname Matchesallpacketstoaspecificclass. dstmac|scrmacclassname MatchestoaspecificclassbasedondestinationorsourceMAC macaddrmacmask address. dstip|srcipclassname ipaddripmask MatchestoaspecificclassbasedondestinationorsourceIP address.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-5

set diffserv class match

dstl4port|srcl4port keywordclassname keyword|number classnameportnumber

Matchestoaspecificclassbasedondestinationorsourcelayer4 portnumberorkeyword.Validkeywordvaluesare: domain echo ftp ftpdata http smtp snmp telnet tftp www

Validportnumbervaluesare065535. ipdscpclassnamedscpval MatchestoaspecificclassbasedonthevalueoftheIPDiffserv CodePoint.Validnumericorkeywordvaluescanbeenteredas listedinTable 932below. MatchestoaspecificclassbasedonthevalueoftheIPprecedence field.Validprecedencenumbervaluesare:07. MatchestoaspecificclassbasedonthevalueoftheIPtypeof service(TOS)field.Validtosbitsvaluesare0255.Validtosmask valuesare18.

ipprecedenceclassname precedencenumber iptosclassnametosbits tosmask

protocolkeyword MatchestoaspecificclassbasedonnumberorkeywordintheIP classnameprotocolname| protocolfield.Validprotocolnamekeywordare: numberclassnameprotocol icmp number igmp refclassadd|remove classnamerefclassname vlanclassnamevlanid ip tcp udp

Validprotocolnumbervaluesare0255. Addsorremovesasetofalreadydefinedmatchconditionstoa specificclass. MatchestoaspecificclassbasedonVLANID.Validvaluesare1 4094.

Table 9-32

Valid IP DSCP Numeric and Keyword Values

Numeric Value 0 0,8,16,24,32,40,48,56 10,12,14 Keyword (Usage) be (best effort) cs0 - cs7 (Class Selector PHB) af11, af12, af13 (Assured Forwarding)

Code Point Map b'000000 b'xxx000 b'001xx0

9-6

Differentiated Services Configuration

set diffserv class match

Table 9-32

Valid IP DSCP Numeric and Keyword Values (Continued)

Numeric Value 18,20,22 26,28,30 34,36,38 46 Keyword (Usage) af21, af22, af23 (Assured Forwarding) af31, af32, af33 (Assured Forwarding) af41, af42, af43 (Assured Forwarding) ef (Expedited Forwarding)

Code Point Map b'010xx0 b'011xx0 b'100xx0 b'101110

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Anypolicythatisappliedmustbecomposedofrulesthatcomefromonlyoneofthefollowing fourgroups. Layer3: DestinationIPaddress(dstip) DestinationLayer4port(dstl4port) IPDiffservCodePoint(ipdscp) IPprecedencefield(ipprecedence) IPtypeofservice(TOS)field(iptos) IPprotocolfield(protocol) SourceIPaddress(srcip) SourceLayer4port(srcl4port)

Layer2: DestinationMACaddress(dstmac) SourceMACaddress(scrmac) VLANID(vlan)

Layer2Layer3source: SourceMACaddress(scrmac) SourceIPaddress(srcip) VLANID(vlan)

Layer2Layer3destination: DestinationMACaddress(dstmac) DestinationIPaddress(dstip) VLANID(vlan)

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-7

set diffserv class rename

Note: The match type every will work with any group.

Youcannotcreateandaddaclasstoapolicybeforeaddinganyrules(matchconditions)tothe class.Onceaclassisaddedtoapolicy,youcannotaddanymorerules(matchconditions)tothe class.Youcannotcreateoutboundpolicies. Youcanonlyaddrulesthatfitintothesamecategory(showninthegroupingsabove)toaclass. Forexample,ifyoucreateaclassandaddthematchconditionsdstipanddstl4port,youwillonly beabletoaddotherrulesfromtheL3group. Classmatchesoflayer4destinationorsourcemustbesequencedbeforethecorresponding protocolmatch,asillustratedinthethirdexamplebelow. Youcanonlyaddclassesofthesamecategorytoapolicy.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtomatchtheadminclasstosourceIPaddress130.10.0.32andonly thatIPaddresstype:
B2(rw)->set diffserv class match srcip admin 130.10.0.32 255.255.255.255

ThisexampleshowshowtomatchtheadminclasstoVLAN10:
B2(rw)->set diffserv class match vlan admin 10

ThisexampleshowshowtomatchthehttpclasstoTCPpacketswithadestinationportof80 (HTTP).Thelayer4portmatchmustprecedetheprotocoltype.
B2(rw)->set diffserv class match dstl4port keyword http http B2(rw)->set diffserv class match protocol keyword http tcp

set diffserv class rename

UsethiscommandtochangethenameofaDiffservclass.

Syntax
set diffserv class rename classname newclassname

Parameters
classname newclassname SpecifiestheclassnamepreviouslysetforthisnewDiffservclass. Specifiesanewclassname.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,ReadWrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtorenametheDiffservadminclasstosystem:
B2(rw)->set diffserv class rename admin system

9-8

Differentiated Services Configuration

Configuring Diffserv Policies and Assigning Classes

Configuring Diffserv Policies and Assigning Classes

Purpose
Toreview,create,andconfigureDiffservpoliciesandassignclasses.

Commands
Thecommandsusedtoreview,create,andconfigureDiffservpoliciesandassignclassesarelisted belowanddescribedintheassociatedsectionasshown.
For information about... show diffserv policy set diffserv policy create set diffserv policy delete set diffserv policy class set diffserv policy mark set diffserv policy police style simple set diffserv policy police action conform set diffserv policy police action nonconform set diffserv policy rename Refer to page... 9-9 9-10 9-10 9-11 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-13 9-14

show diffserv policy

UsethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutDiffservpolicies.

Syntax
show diffserv policy {summary | detailed policyname}

Parameters
summary detailed policyname DisplaysDiffservpolicysummaryinformation. DisplaysdetailedDiffservinformationforaspecificpolicy.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand.ReadOnly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-9

set diffserv policy create

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayasummaryofDiffservpolicyinformation.Inthiscase,there isonepolicynamedadmin,towhichmembersoftheadminclasshavebeenassigned.This policyisappliedtoincomingtrafficonitsassignedserviceports:
B2(rw)->show diffserv policy summary Policy Name Policy Type Class Members -------------------- ----------- ------------------------------admin In admin

set diffserv policy create

UsethiscommandtocreateanewDiffservpolicy.

Syntax
set diffserv policy create policyname {in}

Parameters
policyname in Specifiesapolicyname. Appliesthispolicytoincomingpackets.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateaDiffservpolicycalledadminandapplyittoincoming packets:
B2(rw)->set diffserv policy create admin in

set diffserv policy delete

UsethiscommandtodeleteaDiffservpolicy.

Syntax
set diffserv policy delete policyname

Parameters
policyname Specifiesapolicynametobedeleted.

Defaults
None.

9-10

Differentiated Services Configuration

set diffserv policy class

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Inordertodeleteapolicyyoumustfirstremovetheserviceport(s)assignedtothepolicyusing thesetdiffservserviceremovecommandasdescribedinsetdiffservserviceonpage916.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeletetheDiffservadminpolicy:
B2(rw)->set diffserv policy delete admin

set diffserv policy class

UsethiscommandtoaddorremoveaDiffservclasstoaspecifiedpolicy.Onceadded,policies willbeactiveforthespecifiedclass.

Syntax
set diffserv policy class {add | remove} policyname classname

Parameters
add|remove policyname classname Addsorremovesthespecifiedclass. Specifiesthepolicynametobeassociatedwiththeclass. Specifiesaclassnametoaddorremove.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Classmustbeaddedtoapolicyusingthiscommandbeforepolicyparameters,suchas bandwidth,marking,andpolicing,canbeconfigured.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoaddthesystemclasstotheadminpolicy:
B2(rw)->set diffserv policy class add admin system

set diffserv policy mark

UsethiscommandtomarkallpacketsfortheassociatedDiffservtrafficstreamwithaspecificIP DSCPorIPprecedencevalue.

Syntax
set diffserv policy mark {ipdscp | ipprecedence policyname classname value}

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-11

set diffserv policy police style simple

Parameters
ipdscp| ipprecedence policyname classname value SpecifiesthatpacketswillbemarkedwitheitheranIPDSCPorprecedence value. Specifiesthepolicynamebeingconfigured. SpecifiesaDiffservclasstoassociatetothispolicy. SpecifiesanIPDSCPorprecedencevalue.ValidnumericorkeywordDCSP valuescanbeenteredaslistedinSection 932.Validprecedencevaluesare: 07.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtomarkpacketsmatchingtheadminpolicyinthesystemclassfor DSCPexpeditedforwardingprecedence:
B2(rw)->set diffserv policy mark ipdscp admin system ef

set diffserv policy police style simple

UsethiscommandtoestablishthepolicingstyleforaDiffservpolicybasedonlyonbandwidthfor thespecifiedclass.

Syntax
set diffserv policy police style simple policyname classname bandwidth burstsize

Parameters
policyname classname bandwidth burstsize Specifiesthepolicynamebeingconfigured. SpecifiesaDiffservclasstoassociatetothispolicy. SpecifiesabandwidthvalueinKbps.Validvaluesare14294967295. SpecifiesaburstsizevalueimKbytes.Validvaluesare1128.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoconfigureabandwidthbasedpolicingstylefortheadminDiffserv policy:
B2(rw)->set diffserv policy police style simple admin system 1000 128

9-12

Differentiated Services Configuration

set diffserv policy police action conform

set diffserv policy police action conform

Usethiscommandtoconfiguretrafficpolicingactionsforpacketsthatconformtoassociated Diffservclassifications.

Syntax
set diffserv policy police action conform {drop | send policyname classname} | {markdscp | markprec policyname classname value}

Parameters
drop|send policyname classname value Specifieswhetherthepolicingactionforpacketsconformingtothe classificationparameterswillbetodroporsendpackets. Specifiesthepolicynamebeingconfigured. SpecifiesaDiffservclasstoassociatetothispolicingaction. SpecifiesanIPDHCPorprecedencevaluesetwiththesetdiffserv policymarkcommand(page911).

markdscp|markprec SpecifiesapolicingactionbasedonIPDHCPorprecedence.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthepolicingactiontosendforpacketsconformingtoDiffserv policyadmin,classsystem.
B2(rw)->set diffserv policy police action conform send admin system

set diffserv policy police action nonconform

Usethiscommandtoconfiguretrafficpolicingactionsforpacketsthatdonotconformto associatedDiffservclassifications.

Syntax
set diffserv policy police action nonconform {drop | send policyname classname} | {markdscp | markprec policyname classname value}

Parameters
drop|send policyname classname value Specifieswhetherthepolicingactionforpacketsnotconformingtothe classificationparameterswillbetodroporsendpackets. Specifiesthepolicynamebeingconfigured. SpecifiesaDiffservclasstoassociatetothispolicingaction. SpecifiesanIPDHCPorprecedencevaluesetwiththesetdiffserv policymarkcommand(page911).

markdscp|markprec SpecifiesapolicingactionbasedonIPDHCPorprecedence.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-13

set diffserv policy rename

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthepolicyingactiontodropforpacketsnotconformingtothe Diffservpolicyadmin,classsystem.
B2(rw)->set diffserv policy police action nonconform drop admin system

set diffserv policy rename

UsethiscommandtochangethenameofaDiffservpolicy.

Syntax
set diffserv policy rename policyname newpolicyname

Parameters
policyname newpolicyname SpecifiesthepolicynamepreviouslysetforthisnewDiffservclass. Specifiesanewpolicyname.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtorenametheadminDiffservpolicytosystem:
B2(rw)->set diffserv policy rename admin system

9-14

Differentiated Services Configuration

Assigning Policies to Service Ports

Assigning Policies to Service Ports

Purpose
ToreviewandassignDiffservpoliciesandtheirassociatedclassestoserviceports.

Commands
ThecommandsusedtoreviewandassignDiffservpoliciestoserviceportsarelistedbelowand describedintheassociatedsectionasshown.
For information about... show diffserv service info show diffserv service stats set diffserv service Refer to page... 9-15 9-16 9-16

show diffserv service info

UsethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutDiffservserviceports.

Syntax
show diffserv service info {summary | detailed port-string} {in}

Parameters
summary detailedportstring in DisplaysDiffservserviceportsummaryinformation. Displaysdetailedinformationforaspecificport(s). Displaysinformationaboutincomingtraffic.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayasummaryofincomingDiffservserviceporttraffic:
B2(rw)->show diffserv service info summary in DiffServ Admin Mode............................ Enable Interface Direction ----------- ----------ge.1.1 In ge.1.2 In ge.1.3 In OperStatus ---------Up Up Up Policy Name ---------------------admin admin admin

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-15

show diffserv service stats

show diffserv service stats

UsethiscommandtodisplayDiffservpolicyservicestatistics.

Syntax
show diffserv service stats {summary | detailed port-string} {in}

Parameters
summary detailedportstring in DisplaysDiffservasummaryofservicestatistics. Displaysdetailedstatisticsforaspecificport. Displaysinformationaboutincomingtraffic.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayadetailedincomingtrafficstatisticsaboutserviceportge.1.1:
B2(rw)->show diffserv service stats detailed ge.1.1 in Interface...................................... ge.1.1 Direction...................................... In Operational Status............................. Up Policy Name.................................... admin Class Name..................................... system In Discarded Packets........................... 0

set diffserv service

UsethiscommandtoaddorremoveaDiffservpolicytoincomingtrafficononeormoreports.

Syntax
set diffserv service {add | remove} {in} port-string policyname

Parameters
add|remove in portstring policyname Addsorremovesthespecifiedpolicy. Addsorremovesthespecifiedpolicytoincomingtraffic. Specifiestheport(s)towhichthispolicyconfigurationwillbeapplied. Specifiesthepolicynametobeaddedtoorremovedfromporttraffic.

Defaults
None.

9-16

Differentiated Services Configuration

DiffServ Configuration Examples

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoapplytheDiffservpolicynamedadmintoincomingtrafficonports ge1.110:
B2(rw)->set diffserv service add in ge.1.5 admin

DiffServ Configuration Examples

Typically,youwouldusetheDiffservcommandsettocompleteconfigurationtasksinthe followingorder: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. EnableDiffServ. CreateaClass. CreateoneormoreclassificationruleswithintheClass. CreateaPolicy. AddoneormoreClassestothePolicy. AddPolicing(Conforming/Nonconforming,Drop/Forward,RateLimit,Precedence/DSCP Rewrite)actionsorjustMarking(Precedence/DSCPRewrite)actionstothePolicy. AssignthePolicytooneormoreports.

ThefollowingexamplesshowhowtoproceedthroughthesetaskstocreateDiffServpolicies. Thisexamplecreatestwoseparatepolicies: a. policyefratelimitsingressedtrafficonportfe.1.1toamaximumof100Mb/s,andon thesametraffi,calsorewritesthesixDSCPbitstoadecimalvalueof46forExpress Forwardingonlayer3. policyaf31ratelimitsingressedtrafficonportfe.1.2toamaximumof100Mb/s,andon thesametraffic,alsorewritesthesixDSCPbitstoadecimalvalueof26forFlash forwardingonlayer3.

diffserv diffserv diffserv diffserv diffserv diffserv diffserv diffserv diffserv diffserv diffserv adminmode enable class create all classevery class match every classevery policy create policyef in policy class add policyef classevery policy police style simple policyef classevery 100000 128 policy police action conform markdscp policyef classevery ef policy create policyaf31 in policy class add policyaf31 classevery policy police style simple policyaf31 classevery 100000 128 policy police action conform markdscp policyaf31 classevery

b.

B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set af31 B2(rw)->set B2(rw)->set

diffserv service add in fe.1.1 policyef diffserv service add in fe.1.2 policyaf31

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

9-17

DiffServ Configuration Examples

ThisexamplecreatesonepolicywhichidentifiesVOIPtraffic(DSCPvalue46or32)onportsge.1.1 throughge.1.10,anddropsallothertraffic.
B2(rw)->set diffserv adminmode enable B2(rw)->set diffserv class create all classVOIP B2(rw)->set diffserv class match ipdscp classVOIP ef B2(rw)->set diffserv class match ipdscp classVOIP cs4 B2(rw)-> set diffserv policy create policyQOS in B2(rw)-> set diffserv policy class add policyQOS classVOIP B2(rw)->set diffserv policy police style simple policyQOS classVOIP 1000000 128 B2(rw)->set diffserv policy police action nonconform drop policyQOS classVOIP B2(rw)-> set diffserv service add in ge.1.1-10 policyQOS

9-18

Differentiated Services Configuration

10
Policy Classification Configuration
ThischapterdescribesthePolicyClassificationsetofcommandsandhowtousethem.
Note: A license is required to enable Policy on the SecureStack B2 and B3. Refer to Activating Licensed Features on page 3-26 for more information. For information about... Policy Classification Configuration Summary Configuring Policy Profiles Configuring Classification Rules Assigning Ports to Policy Profiles Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS) Refer to page... 10-1 10-1 10-5 10-14 10-15

Policy Classification Configuration Summary

SecureStackB2devicessupportpolicyprofilebasedprovisioningofnetworkresourcesby allowingITadministratorsto: Create,changeorremovepolicyprofilesbasedonbusinessspecificuseofnetworkservices. Permitordenyaccesstospecificservicesbycreatingandassigningclassificationruleswhich mapuserprofilestoprotocolbasedframefilteringpoliciesconfiguredforaparticularVLAN orClassofService(CoS). Assignorunassignportstopolicyprofilessothatonlyportsactivatedforaprofilewillbe allowedtotransmitframesaccordingly.
Note: It is recommended that you use Enterasys Networks NetSight Policy Manager as an alternative to CLI for configuring policy classification on the SecureStack B2 devices.

Configuring Policy Profiles

Purpose
Toreview,create,changeandremoveuserprofilesthatrelatetobusinessdrivenpoliciesfor managingnetworkresources.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-1

show policy profile

Note: B3, C3, and G3 devices support profile-based CoS traffic rate limiting only. Policy rules specifying CoS will only rate limit on C2 and B2 devices, including when they are configured on mixed stacks containing B3 and C3 devices.

Commands
For information about... show policy profile set policy profile clear policy profile Refer to page... 10-2 10-3 10-5

show policy profile

Usethiscommandtodisplaypolicyprofileinformation.

Syntax
show policy profile {all | profile-index [consecutive-pids] [-verbose]}

Parameters
all|profileindex consecutivepids verbose Displayspolicyinformationforallprofileindexesoraspecificprofileindex. (Optional)Displaysinformationforspecifiedconsecutiveprofileindexes. (Optional)Displaysdetailedinformation.

Defaults
Ifoptionalparametersarenotspecified,summaryinformationwillbedisplayedforthespecified indexorallindices.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaypolicyinformationforprofile11:
B2(su)->show policy profile 11 Profile Index : 11 Profile Name : MacAuth1 Row Status : active Port VID Status : Enable Port VID Override : 11 CoS : 0 CoS Status : Disable Egress Vlans : none Forbidden Vlans : none Untagged Vlans : none Rule Precedence : 1-31 :MACSource(1),MACDest(2),Unknown(3), :Unknown(4),Unknown(5),Unknown(6), :Unknown(7),Unknown(8),Unknown(9), :Unknown(10),Unknown(11),IPSource(12),
10-2 Policy Classification Configuration

set policy profile

Admin Profile Usage Oper Profile Usage Dynamic Profile Usage

:IPDest(13),IPFrag(14),UDPSrcPort(15), :UDPDestPort(16),TCPSrcPort(17),TCPDestPort(18), :ICMPType(19),Unknown(20),IPTOS(21), :IPProto(22),Unknown(23),Unknown(24), :Ether(25),Unknown(26),VLANTag(27), :Unknown(28),Unknown(29),Unknown(30), :port(31) : none : none : none

Table 1033providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 10-33

Output Profile Index Profile Name Row Status Port VID Status

show policy profile Output Details

What It Displays... Number of the profile. User-supplied name assigned to this policy profile. Whether or not the policy profile is enabled (active) or disabled. Whether or not PVID override is enabled or disabled for this profile. If all classification rules associated with this profile are missed, then this parameter, if specified, determines default behavior. The PVID assigned to packets, if PVID override is enabled. CoS priority value to assign to packets, if CoS override is enabled. Whether or not Class of Service override is enabled or disabled for this profile. If all classification rules associated with this profile are missed, then this parameter, if specified, determines default behavior. VLAN(s) that ports to which the policy profile is assigned can use for tagged egress. VLAN(s) forbidden to ports to which the policy profile is assigned. VLAN(s) that ports to which the policy profile is assigned can use for untagged egress. Displays the precedence of types of rules.

Port VID Override CoS CoS Status

Egress VLANs Forbidden VLANs Untagged VLANs Rule Precedence

Admin Profile Usage Ports administratively assigned to use this policy profile. Oper Profile Usage Dynamic Profile Usage Ports currently assigned to use this policy profile. Port dynamically assigned to use this policy profile.

set policy profile

Usethiscommandtocreateapolicyprofileentry.

Syntax
set policy profile profile-index [name name] [pvid-status {enable | disable}] [pvid pvid] [cos-status {enable | disable}] [cos cos] [egress-vlans egress-vlans] [forbidden-vlans forbidden-vlans] [untagged-vlans untagged-vlans] [precedence precedence-list] [append] [clear]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-3

set policy profile

Parameters
profileindex namename pvidstatus enable|disable pvidpvid cosstatusenable |disable coscos egressvlans egressvlans forbiddenvlans forbiddenvlans Specifiesanindexnumberforthepolicyprofile.Validvaluesare1255. (Optional)Specifiesanameforthepolicyprofile.Thisisastringfrom1to 64characters. (Optional)EnablesordisablesPVIDoverrideforthisprofile.Ifall classificationrulesassociatedwiththisprofilearemissed,thenthis parameter,ifspecified,determinesdefaultbehavior. (Optional)SpecifiesthePVIDtopackets,ifPVIDoverrideisenabledand invokedasdefaultbehavior. (Optional)EnablesordisablesClassofServiceoverrideforthisprofile.Ifall classificationrulesassociatedwiththisprofilearemissed,thenthis parameter,ifspecified,determinesdefaultbehavior. (Optional)SpecifiesaCoSvaluetoassigntopackets,ifCoSoverrideis enabledandinvokedasdefaultbehavior.Validvaluesare0to7. (Optional)Specifiesthattheporttowhichthispolicyprofileisapplied shouldbeaddedtotheegresslistoftheVLANsdefinedbyegressvlans. Packetswillbeformattedastagged. (Optional)Specifiesthattheporttowhichthispolicyprofileisapplied shouldbeaddedasforbiddentotheegresslistoftheVLANsdefinedby forbiddenvlans.Packetsfromthisportwillnotbeallowedtoparticipatein thelistedVLANs. (Optional)Specifiesthattheporttowhichthispolicyprofileisapplied shouldbeaddedtotheegresslistoftheVLANsdefinedbyuntaggedvlans. Packetswillbeformattedasuntagged. (Optional)Appendsthispolicyprofilesettingtosettingspreviously specifiedforthispolicyprofilebytheegressvlans,forbiddenvlans,or untaggedvlansparameters. Ifappendisnotused,previousVLANsettingsarereplaced. clear (Optional)Appendsthispolicyprofilesettingfromsettingspreviously specifiedforthispolicyprofilebytheegressvlans,forbiddenvlans,or untaggedvlansparameters. (Optional)Assignsaruleprecedencetothisprofile.Lowervalueswillbe givenhigherprecedence.Foralistofvalues,refertotheshowpolicy profilecommandoutput.

untaggedvlans untaggedvlans append

precedence precedencelist

Ifoptionalparametersarenotspecified,nonewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

10-4

Policy Classification Configuration

clear policy profile

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtocreateapolicyprofile1namednetadminwithPVIDoverride enabledforPVID10,andClassofServiceoverrideenabledforCoS5.ThisprofilecanuseVLAN 10foruntaggedegress:
B2(su)->set policy profile 1 name netadmin pvid-status enable pvid 10 cos-status enable cos 5 untagged-vlans 10

clear policy profile

Usethiscommandtodeleteapolicyprofileentry.

Syntax
clear policy profile profile-index

Parameters
profileindex Specifiestheindexnumberoftheprofileentrytobedeleted.Validvalues are1to255.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodeletepolicyprofile8:
B2(su)->clear policy profile 8

Configuring Classification Rules

Purpose
Toreview,create,assign,andunassignclassificationrulestopolicyprofiles.Thismapsuser profilestoprotocolbasedframefilteringpolicies.
Note: B3, C3, and G3 devices support profile-based CoS traffic rate limiting only. Policy rules specifying CoS will not rate limit on these devices, or on mixed stacks including B3 or C3 devices.

Commands
For information about... show policy rule show policy capability set policy rule Refer to page... 10-6 10-8 10-9

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-5

show policy rule

For information about... clear policy rule clear policy all-rules

Refer to page... 10-12 10-13

show policy rule

Usethiscommandtodisplaypolicyclassificationruleinformation.

Syntax
show policy rule [all | admin-profile | profile-index] [ether | icmptype | ipproto | ipdestsocket | ipsourcesocket | iptos | macdest | macsource | tcpdestport | tcpsourceport | udpdestport | udpsourceport] [data] [mask mask] [port-string portstring] [rule-status {active | not-in-service | not-ready}] [storage-type {nonvolatile | volatile}] [vlan vlan] | [drop | forward] [dynamic-pid dynamic-pid] [cos cos] [admin-pid admin-pid] [-verbose] [usage-list] [display-if-used]

Parameters
all|admin profile|profile index ether icmptype ipproto ipdestsocket ipsourcesocket iptos macdest macsource tcpdestport tcpsourceport udpdestport udpsourceport data Displayspolicyclassificationrulesforallprofiles,profileID0(admin profile),orforaspecificprofileindexnumber.Validvaluesare11023. DisplaysEthernettypeIIrules. DisplaysICMPtyperules. DisplaysIPprotocolfieldinIPpacketrules. DisplaysIPdestinationaddressrules. DisplaysIPsourceaddressrules. DisplaysTypeofServicerules. DisplaysMACdestinationaddressrules. DisplaysMACsourceaddressrules. DisplaysTCPdestinationportrules. DisplaysTCPsourceportrules. DisplaysUDPdestinationportrules. DisplaysUDPsourceportrules. Displaysrulesforapredefinedclassifier.Thisvalueisdependentonthe classificationtypeentered.RefertoTable 1035forvalidvaluesforeach classificationtype. (Optional)Displaysrulesforaspecificdatamask.RefertoTable 1035for validvaluesforeachclassificationtypeanddatavalue. (Optional)Displaysrulesrelatedtoaspecificingressport.

maskmask portstringport string

rulestatusactive (Optional)Displaysrulesrelatedtoaspecificrulesstatus. |notinservice| notready storagetypenon volatile|volatile (Optional)Displaysrulesconfiguredforeithernonvolatileorvolatile storage.

10-6

Policy Classification Configuration

show policy rule

vlanvlan drop|forward dynamicpid dynamicpid coscos adminpid adminpid verbose usagelist displayifused

(Optional)DisplaysrulesforaspecificVLANID. Displaysrulesbasedonwhethermatchingpacketswillbedroppedor forwarded. DisplaysrulesassociatedwithaspecificdynamicpolicyID. (Optional)DisplaysrulesforaClassofServicevalue.(Notsupportedon B3,C3devices.) DisplaysrulesassociatedwithaspecificadministrativepolicyID[1..1023]. (Optional)Displaysdetailedinformation. (Optional)Ifselected,eachrulesusagelistshallbecheckedandshall displayonlythoseportswhichhaveappliedthisrule. (Optional)Displaysrule(s)onlyiftheyareappliedtoatleastoneport.

Defaults
Ifverboseisnotspecified,summaryinformationwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaypolicyclassificationinformationforEthernettype2rules
B2(su)->show policy rule ether |PID |Rule Type |Rule Data |02 |Ether |2048 (0x0800) |02 |Ether |2049 (0x0801) |02 |Ether |2989 (0x0bad) |02 |Ether |33079 (0x8137) |Mk|PortStr |16|All |16|All |16|All |16|All |RS|ST|VLAN|CoS | A|NV|fwrd| | A|NV|drop| | A|NV|drop| | A|NV|drop| |U| |?| |?| |?| |?|

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaypolicyclassificationinformationforadministrativerule1
B2(su)->show policy rule admin-pid 1 |Admin|Rule Type |Rule Data |admin|Port |ge.1.1 |admin|Port |ge.1.2 |admin|Port |ge.1.3 |admin|Port |ge.1.4 |admin|Port |ge.1.5 |admin|Port |ge.1.6 |admin|Port |ge.1.7 |admin|Port |ge.1.8 |admin|Port |ge.1.9 |admin|Port |ge.1.10 |admin|Port |ge.1.11 |admin|Port |ge.1.12 |Mk|PortStr |16|ge.1.1 |16|ge.1.2 |16|ge.1.3 |16|ge.1.4 |16|ge.1.5 |16|ge.1.6 |16|ge.1.7 |16|ge.1.8 |16|ge.1.9 |16|ge.1.10 |16|ge.1.11 |16|ge.1.12 |RS|ST|dPID|aPID|U| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?| | A|NV| | 1|?|

Table 1034providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 10-34

Output PID

show policy rule Output Details

What It Displays... Profile index number. Assigned to this classification rule with the set policy profile command (set policy profile on page 10-3).

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-7

show policy capability

Table 10-34
Output Rule Type Rule Data Mk PortStr RS ST VLAN CoS U dPID aPID

show policy rule Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Type of classification rule. Refer to Table 10-35 for valid types. Rule data value. Refer to Table 10-35 for valid values for each classification type. Rule data mask. Refer to Table 10-35 for valid values for each classification data value. Ingress port(s) to which this rule applies. Whether or not the status of this rule is active (A), not in service or not ready. Whether or not this rules storage type is non-volatile (NV) or volatile (V). VLAN ID to which this rule applies and whether or not matching packets will be dropped or forwarded. If applicable, Class of Service value to which this rule applies. (Not supported on B3, C3, and G3 devices.) Whether or not this rule has been used. Whether or not this is a dynamic profile ID. Whether or not this is an administrative profile ID.

show policy capability

Usethiscommandtodisplaydetailedpolicyclassificationcapabilitiessupportedbyyour SecureStackB2device.

Syntax
show policy capability

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
Usethiscommandtodisplaydetailedpolicyclassificationcapabilitiessupportedbyyour SecureStackB2device.Theoutputofthiscommandshowsatablelistingclassifiabletraffic attributesandthetypeofactions,byruletype,thatcanbeexecutedrelativetoeachattribute. Abovethetableisalistofalltheactionspossibleonthisdevice. Theleftmostcolumnofthetablelistsallpossibleclassifiabletrafficattributes.Thenexttwo columnsfromtheleftindicatehowpolicyprofilesmaybeassigned,eitheradministrativelyor dynamically.Thenextfourcolumnsfromtheleftindicatetheactionsthatmaybeperformed.The lastthreecolumnsindicateauditingoptions. Anxinanactioncolumnforatrafficattributerowindicatesthatyoursystemhasthecapabilityto performthatactionfortrafficclassifiedbythatattribute.
10-8 Policy Classification Configuration

set policy rule

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythedevicespolicyclassificationcapabilities.Refertoset policyruleonpage 109foradescriptionoftheparametersdisplayed:
B2(su)->show policy capability

The following supports related to policy are supported in this device: VLAN Forwarding Priority Permit Deny Precedence Reordering Rules Table Rule-Use Notification Longest Prefix Rules ============================================================= | | D | | | | | F | | | D | | | Y | | | | | O | S | | I | | | N | A | | | | R | Y | | S | | | A | D | V | | D | W | S | T | A | | | M | M | L | C | R | A | L | R | B | | | I | I | A | O | O | R | O | A | L | | SUPPORTED RULE TYPES | C | N | N | S | P | D | G | P | E | ============================================================= |MAC source address | | | | X | X | X | | | | |MAC destination address | | | | X | X | X | | | | |IPX source address | | | | | | | | | | |IPX destination address | | | | | | | | | | |IPX source socket | | | | | | | | | | |IPX destination socket | | | | | | | | | | |IPX transmission control | | | | | | | | | | |IPX type field | | | | | | | | | | |IPv6 source address | | | | | | | | | | |IPv6 destination address | | | | | | | | | | |IPv6 flow label | | | | | | | | | | |IP source address | | | | X | X | X | | | | |IP destination address | | | | X | X | X | | | | |IP fragmentation | | | | | | | | | | |UDP port source | | | | X | X | X | | | | |UDP port destination | | | | X | X | X | | | | |TCP port source | | | | X | X | X | | | | |TCP port destination | | | | X | X | X | | | | |ICMP packet type | | | | X | X | X | | | | |TTL | | | | | | | | | | |IP type of service | | | | X | X | X | | | | |IP proto | | | | X | X | X | | | | |Ether II packet type | | | X | X | X | X | | | | |LLC DSAP/SSAP/CTRL | | | | | | | | | | |VLAN tag | | | | | | | | | | |Replace tci | | | | | | | | | | |Port string | X | X | X | X | X | X | | | | =============================================================

set policy rule

UsethiscommandtoassignincominguntaggedframestoaspecificpolicyprofileandtoVLANor ClassofServiceclassificationrules.

Syntax
Thiscommandhastwoformsofsyntaxonetocreateanadminrule(forpolicyID0),andthe othertocreateaclassificationruleandattachittoapolicyprofile.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 10-9

set policy rule

set policy rule admin-profile {vlantag data [mask mask] admin-pid profile-index} [port-string port-string] set policy rule profile-index {ether |icmptype | ipproto | ipdestsocket | ipsourcesocket | iptos | macdest | macsource |tcpdestport | tcpsourceport | udpdestport | udpsourceport} data [mask mask] [vlan vlan] [cos cos] | [drop | forward]

Note: Classification rules are automatically enabled when created.

Parameters
Thefollowingparametersapplytocreatinganadminrule. adminprofile vlantagdata maskmask SpecifiesthatthisisanadminruleforpolicyID0. ClassifiesbasedonVLANtagspecifiedbydata.Valueofdatacanrange from1to4094or0xFFF. (Optional)Specifiesthenumberofsignificantbitstomatch,dependent onthedatavalueentered.Valueofmaskcanrangefrom1to12. RefertoTable 1035forvalidvaluesforeachclassificationtypeanddata value. adminpid profileindex Associatesthisadminrulewithapolicyprofile,identifiedbyitsindex number.Policyprofilesareconfiguredwiththesetpolicyprofile commandasdescribedinsetpolicyprofileonpage 103. Validprofileindexvaluesare1255. portstringportstring (Optional)Assignsthisruletothespecifiedpolicyprofileonspecific ingressport(s).Rulewouldnotbeuseduntilpolicyisassignedtothe specifiedport(s)usingthesetpolicyportcommandasdescribedinset policyportonpage 1014.

Thefollowingparametersapplytocreatingaclassificationrule. profileindex Specifiesapolicyprofilenumbertowhichthisrulewillbeassigned. Policyprofilesareconfiguredwiththesetpolicyprofilecommandas describedinsetpolicyprofileonpage 103.Validprofileindexvalues are1255. ClassifiesbasedontypefieldinEthernetIIpacket. ClassifiesbasedonICMPtype. ClassifiesbasedonProtocolfieldinIPpacket. ClassifiesbasedondestinationIPaddresswithoptionalpostfixedport. ClassifiesbasedonsourceIPaddress,withoptionalpostfixedport. ClassifiesbasedonTypeofServicefieldinIPpacket. ClassifiesbasedonMACdestinationaddress. ClassifiesbasedonMACsourceaddress. ClassifiesbasedonTCPdestinationport. ClassifiesbasedonTCPsourceport.

ether icmptype ipproto ipdestsocket ipsourcesocket iptos macdest macsource tcpdestport tcpsourceport

10-10

Policy Classification Configuration

set policy rule

udpdestport udpsourceport data

ClassifiesbasedonUDPdestinationport. ClassifiesbasedonUDPsourceport. Specifiesthecodeforapredefinedclassifier.Thisvalueisdependenton theclassificationtypeentered.RefertoTable 1035forvalidvaluesfor eachclassificationtype. (Optional)Specifiesthenumberofsignificantbitstomatch,dependenton thedatavalueentered.RefertoTable 1035forvalidvaluesforeach classificationtypeanddatavalue. ClassifiestoaVLANID. SpecifiesthatthisrulewillclassifytoaClassofServiceID.Validvalues are04095.Avalueof1indicatesthatnoCoSforwardingbehavior modificationisdesired.(NotsupportedonB3,C3,andG3.) Specifiesthatpacketswithinthisclassificationwillbedroppedor forwarded.

maskmask

vlanvlan coscos

drop|forward

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Table 1035providesthesetpolicyruledatavaluesthatcanbeenteredforaparticular classificationtype,andthemaskbitsthatcanbeenteredforeachclassifierassociatedwiththat parameter. Table 10-35 Valid Values for Policy Classification Rules
data value Type field in Ethernet II packet: 1536 - 65535 or 0x600 - 0xFFFF ICMP Type: a.b Protocol field in IP packet: 0 - 255 or 0 - 0xFF IP Address in dotted decimal format: 000.000.000.000 and (Optional) post-fixed port: 0 65535 Type of Service field in IP packet: 0 - 255 or 0 - 0xFF MAC Address: 00-00-00-00-0000 TCP Port Number: 0 - 65535 or 0 - 0xFFFF mask bits 1- 16 1- 16 1- 8 1 - 48

Classification Rule Parameter ether icmptype ipproto Destination or Source IP Address: ipdestsocket ipsourcesocket iptos Destination or Source MAC: macdest macsource Destination or Source TCP port: tcpdestport tcpsourceport

1- 8 1 - 48

1 - 16

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-11

clear policy rule

Table 10-35

Valid Values for Policy Classification Rules (Continued)

data value UDP Port Number: 0 - 65535 or 0 - 0xFFFF VLAN tag: 1- 4094 mask bits 1 - 16

Classification Rule Parameter Destination or Source UDP port: udpsourceport udpdestport vlantag

1 -12

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtouseTable 1035toassignaruletopolicyprofile3thatwillfilter EthernetIIType1526framestoVLAN7:
B2(su)->set policy rule 3 ether 1526 vlan 7

ThisexampleshowshowtouseTable 1035toassignaruletopolicyprofile5thatwillforward UDPframesfromsourceport45:

B2(su)->set policy rule 5 udpportsource 45 forward

ThisexampleshowshowtouseTable 1035toassignaruletopolicyprofile1thatwilldropIP sourcetrafficfromIPaddress1.2.3.4.Ifmask32isnotspecifiedasshown,adefaultmaskof48bits (IPaddress+port)wouldbeapplied:

B2(su)->set policy rule 1 ipsourcesocket 1.2.3.4 mask 32 drop

clear policy rule

Usethiscommandtodeletepolicyclassificationruleentries.

Syntax
Thiscommandhastwoformsofsyntaxonetoclearanadminrule(forpolicyID0),andthe othertoclearaclassificationrule.
clear policy rule admin-profile {vlantag data [mask mask] clear policy rule profile-index {all-pid-entries | {ether | icmptype | ipproto| ipdestsocket| ipsourcesocket | iptos | macdest | macsource | tcpdestport | tcpsourceport | udpdestport | udpsourceport}}

Parameters
Thefollowingparametersapplytodeletinganadminrule. adminprofile vlantagdata maskmask SpecifiesthattheruletobedeletedisanadminruleforpolicyID0. DeletestherulebasedonVLANtagspecifiedbydata.Valueofdatacan rangefrom1to4094or0xFFF. (Optional)Specifiesthenumberofsignificantbitstomatch,dependent onthedatavalueentered.Valueofmaskcanrangefrom1to12. RefertoTable 1035forvalidvaluesforeachclassificationtypeanddata value. Thefollowingparametersapplytodeletingaclassificationrule.

10-12

Policy Classification Configuration

clear policy all-rules

profileindex allpidentries ether icmptype ipproto ipdestsocket ipsourcesocket iptos macdest macsource tcpdestport tcpsourceport udpdestport udpsourceport

Specifiesapolicyprofileforwhichtodeleteclassificationrules.Valid profileindexvaluesare1255. Deletesallentriesassociatedwiththespecifiedpolicyprofile. DeletesassociatedEthernetIIclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedICMPclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedIPprotocolclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedIPdestinationclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedIPsourceclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedIPTypeofServiceclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedMACdestinationaddressclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedMACsourceaddressclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedTCPdestinationportclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedTCPsourceportclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedUDPdestinationportclassificationrule. DeletesassociatedUDPsourceportclassificationrule.

Defaults
Whenapplicable,dataandmaskmustbespecifiedforindividualrulestobecleared.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtodeleteEthernetIIType1526classificationruleentriesassociatedwith policyprofile1fromallports
B2(su)->clear policy rule 1 ether 1526

Thisexampleshowshowtoremovearulefrompolicyprofile5thatwillforwardUDPframes fromsourceport45:
B2(su)->clear policy rule 5 udpportsource 45 forward

clear policy all-rules

Usethiscommandtoremoveallpolicyclassificationrules.

Syntax
clear policy all-rules

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-13

Assigning Ports to Policy Profiles

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoremovealladministrativeandpolicyindexrules:
B2(su)->clear policy all-rules

Assigning Ports to Policy Profiles

Note: The B2 switch supports up to eight user policies per port.

Purpose
Toassignandunassignportstopolicyprofiles.

Commands
For information about... set policy port clear policy port Refer to page... 10-14 10-15

set policy port

Usethiscommandtoassignportstoapolicyprofile.

Syntax
set policy port port-string profile-index

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)toaddtothepolicyprofile.Foradetaileddescription ofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLI onpage 52. SpecifiestheIDofthepolicyprofile(role)towhichtheport(s)willbe added.Thisvaluemustmatchtheprofileindexvalueassignedusingthe setpolicyprofilecommand(setpolicyprofileonpage 103)inorder forapolicyprofiletobeactiveonthespecifiedport.

profileindex

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

10-14

Policy Classification Configuration

clear policy port

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoallowGigabitEthernetports5through15inslot1totransmitframes accordingtopolicyprofile1:
B2(su)->set policy port ge.1.5-15 1

clear policy port

Usethiscommandtoremoveapolicyprofilefromoneormoreports.

Syntax
clear policy port port-string profile-index

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)fromwhichtoremovethepolicyprofile.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. SpecifiestheIDofthepolicyprofile(role)towhichtheport(s)willbe added.Thisvaluemustmatchtheprofileindexvalueassignedusingthe setpolicyprofilecommand(setpolicyprofileonpage 103)inorder forapolicyprofiletobeactiveonthespecifiedport.

profileindex

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoremovepolicyprofile10fromport21inslot1:
B2(rw)->clear policy port ge.1.21 10

Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS)

Using Port-Based or Policy-Based CoS Settings
Note: It is recommended that you use Enterasys Networks NetSight Policy Manager as an alternative to CLI for configuring policy-based CoS on the switches.

TheSecureStackB2supportsClassofService(CoS),whichallowsyoutoassignmissioncritical datatoahigherprioritythroughthedevicebydelayinglesscriticaltrafficduringperiodsof congestion.Thehigherprioritytrafficgoingthroughthedeviceisservicedfirst(beforelower prioritytraffic).TheClassofServicecapabilityofthedeviceisimplementedbyapriority queueingmechanism.ClassofServiceisbasedontheIEEE802.1D(802.1p)standardspecification, andallowsyoutodefineeightpriorities(07,with7grantedhighestpriority)andupto8transmit queues(07)foreachport.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-15

Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS)

EnterasysNetworksenhancedCoSimplementationallowsyoutousethefollowingmethodsto configureClassofServiceontheSecureStackB2: Allowingtheswitchtoautomaticallyassignpolicybasedinboundratelimitersasdescribed inthissection. Configuringtransmitqueueingandratelimitingonaperportbasisasdescribedin Chapter 11.

Bydefault,policybasedCoSisdisabledonthedevice,anddefaultoruserassignedportbased 802.1D(802.1p)settingsareusedtodeterminetrafficratelimiting.WhenpolicybasedCoSis enabled,thedefaultanduserassignedpolicybasedsettingswilloverrideportbasedsettings describedinChapter 11.

About Policy-Based CoS Configurations

Onceenabledusingthesetcosstatecommandasdescribedinsetcosstateonpage 1018,you canaddtothepolicybasedCoSfunctionbydefiningnewportgroupings,andassigninginbound ratelimiters.TheprocessforuserdefinedCoSconfigurationinvolvesthefollowingstepsand associatedcommandslistedinProcedure 101.Anexamplefollowstheprocedure. Procedure 10-1
Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Task Enable CoS Create CoS port groups Define physical rate limiters for groups Create virtual reference for the IRL resource (physical reference) for each port group Add IRL reference to CoS settings table

User-Defined CoS Configuration

Command(s) set cos state set cos port-config set cos port-resource set cos reference set cos settings

Example
Thisexamplecreatesdifferentinboundratelimitersfortwoportgroupsandthenassignsthemto trafficwithaCoSsettingof0. 1. Configuretwoportgroups,oneforuserportsandoneforuplinkportsandassignportstothe groups.Portgroup1.0willrepresentuserports,group2.0willrepresentuplinkports.
B2(su)->set cos port-config irl 1.0 name Users ports ge.1.1-46 B2(su)->set cos port-config irl 2.0 name Uplink ports ge.1.47-48 B2(su)->show cos port-config Inbound Rate Limiting Port Configuration Entries ---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Default Port Group :0 Port Type :0 Assigned Ports :none ---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Users Port Group :1 Port Type :0 Assigned Ports :ge.1.1-46 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Uplink Port Group :2

10-16

Policy Classification Configuration

Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS)

Port Type :0 Assigned Ports :ge.1.47-48 ----------------------------------------------------------------------

2.

Configurephysicalinboundratelimitersforeachportgroup.Fortheuserportgroup(1.0), createanIRL(irlindexof1)for512kbps.Fortheuplinkportgroup(2.0),createanIRL(irl indexof1)for10megabitspersecond(10,000kbps).

B2(su)->set cos port-resource irl 1.0 1 unit kbps rate 512 B2(su)->set cos port-resource irl 2.0 1 unit kbps rate 10000 B2(su)->show cos port-resource irl 1.0 1 Group Index Resource Type Unit Rate ----------- -------- ---- ---- ---------1.0 1 irl kbps 512 B2(su)->show cos port-resource irl 2.0 1 Group Index Resource Type Unit Rate ----------- -------- ---- ---- ---------2.0 1 irl kbps 10000

Rate Limit Type Action --------------- -----drop none

Rate Limit Type Action --------------- -----drop none

3.

IntheCoSIRLreferencemappingtableforeachportgroup,createareferenceforeachIRL resourcecreatedinthepreviousstep.Wewillusereferencenumber1.
B2(su)->set cos reference irl 1.0 1 rate-limit 1 B2(su)->set cos reference irl 2.0 1 rate-limit 1 B2(su)->show cos reference irl 1.0 Group Index ----------1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... 1.0 1.0 1.0 Reference --------0 1 2 3 97 98 99 Type ---irl irl irl irl irl irl irl Rate Limiter -----------none 1 none none none none none

B2(su)->show cos reference irl 2.0 Group Index ----------2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 ... 2.0 2.0 2.0 Reference --------0 1 2 3 97 98 99 Type ---irl irl irl irl irl irl irl Rate Limiter -----------none 1 none none none none none

4.

IntheCoSsettingstable,configureaCoSsettingforCoSindex1,whichhasapriorityof0.We entertheIRLreference,createdinthepreviousstep.
B2(su)->set cos settings 0 irl-reference 1 B2(su)->show cos settings CoS Index Priority ToS IRL --------- ---------- ------- ----0 0 * 1 1 1 * * 2 2 * *

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-17

set cos state

3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6 7

* * * * *

* * * * *

Commands
For information about... set cos state show cos state clear cos state set cos settings clear cos settings show cos settings set cos port-config show cos port-config clear cos port-config set cos port-resource show cos port-resource clear cos port-resource set cos reference show cos reference clear cos reference show cos unit clear cos all-entries show cos port-type Refer to page... 10-18 10-19 10-19 10-20 10-21 10-21 10-22 10-23 10-24 10-25 10-26 10-26 10-27 10-28 10-29 10-30 10-30 10-31

set cos state

UsethiscommandtoenableordisableClassofService.

Syntax
set cos state {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnablesordisablesClassofServiceontheswitch.Defaultstateis disabled.

Defaults
None.

10-18

Policy Classification Configuration

show cos state

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableClassofService:
B2(rw)->set cos state enable

show cos state

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheClassofServiceenablestate.

Syntax
show cos state

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoshowtheClassofServiceenablestate:
B2(rw)->show cos state Class-of-Service application is enabled

clear cos state

UsethiscommandtosetCoSstatebacktoitsdefaultsettingofdisabled.

Syntax
clear cos state

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheCoSstatebacktoitsdefaultsettingofdisabled:
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 10-19

set cos settings

B2(su)->clear cos state

set cos settings

UsethiscommandtoconfigureaClassofServiceentryintheCoSsettingstable.

Syntax
set cos settings cos-index priority priority [tos-value tos-value] [irl-reference irl-reference]

Parameters
cosindex prioritypriority tosvaluetosvalue irlreference irlreference SpecifiesaClassofServiceentry.Validvaluesare0to255. Specifiesan802.1dpriorityvalue.Validvaluesare0to7,with0beingthe lowestpriority.SeeUsagesectionbelowformoreinformation. (Optional)SpecifiesaTypeofServicevalue.Validvaluesare0to255.See Usagesectionbelowformoreinformation. (Optional)Settheinboundratelimiterassociatedwiththisentry.Valid valuesare0to99.SeeUsagesectionbelowformoreinformation.

Defaults
Ifnooptionalparametersarespecified,nonewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheCoSsettingstabletakesindividualclassofservicefeaturesanddisplaysthemasbelongingto aCoSentry.Essentially,itisusedforCoSfeatureassignment.Eachclassofserviceentryconsists ofanindex,802.1ppriority,anoptionalToSvalue,andanIRLreference. CoSIndex IndexesareuniqueidentifiersforeachCoSsetting.CoSindexes0through7arecreatedby defaultandmappeddirectlyto802.1ppriorityforbackwardscompatibility.Theseentries cannotberemoved,and802.1ppriorityvaluescannotbechanged.WhenCoSisenabled, indexesareassigned.Upto256CoSindexesorentriescanbeconfigured. Priority 802.1pprioritycanbeappliedperCoSindex.ForeachnewCoSindexcreated,theuserhasthe optiontoassignan802.1ppriorityvalue0to7fortheclassofservice.CoSindexes0through7 mapdirectlyto802.1pprioritiesandcannotbechangedastheyexistforbackward compatibility. ToS Thisvaluecanbesetperclassofservice,butisnotrequired.Whenaframeisassignedtoa classofserviceforwhichthisvalueisconfigured,theToSfieldoftheincomingIPpacketwill beoverwrittentotheuserdefinedvalue.ToSbits0255canbeset,makingtheentireToS fieldrewritable.ToScanbesetforCoSindexes0through7. IRLReference

10-20

Policy Classification Configuration

clear cos settings

TheCoSIRLreferencefieldisoptional,asratelimitsarenotrequired.TheIRLreferencedoes notassignaninboundratelimitbutpointstotheCoSIRLReferenceMappingTable.This referencemaybethoughtofasthevirtualratelimiterthatwillassignthephysicalratelimiter definedbytheIRLReferenceMappingTable,describedinsetcosreferenceonpage 1027.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateCoSentry8withapriorityvalueof3:
B2(rw)->set cos settings 8 priority 3

clear cos settings

UsethiscommandtoclearClassofServiceentrysettings.

Syntax
clear cos settings cos-list {[all] | [priority] [tos-value] [irl-reference]}

Parameters
coslist all priority tosvalue irlreference SpecifiesaClassofServiceentrytoclear. Clearsallsettingsassociatedwiththisentry. Clearsthepriorityvalueassociatedwiththisentry. ClearstheTypeofServicevalueassociatedwiththisentry. CleartheIRLreferenceassociatedwiththisentry.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearthepriorityforCoSentry8:
B2(rw)->clear cos settings 8 priority

show cos settings

UsethiscommandtodisplayClassofServiceparameters.

Syntax
show cos settings [cos-list]

Parameters
coslist (Optional)SpecifiesaClassofServiceentrytodisplay.

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,allCoSentrieswillbedisplayed.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 10-21

set cos port-config

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoshowallCoSsettings:
B2(su)->show cos settings CoS Index Priority ToS IRL --------- ---------- ------- ----0 0 * * 1 1 * * 2 2 * * 3 3 * * 4 4 * * 5 5 * * 6 6 * * 7 7 * *

set cos port-config

Usethiscommandtocreateaportgroupforinboundratelimitingandaddorremoveportsfrom thegroup.

Syntax
set cos port-config irl group-type-index [name name] [ports port-list] [append] | [clear]

Parameters
irl grouptypeindex Specifiesthatthisisaninboundratelimiting(IRL)portgroup. Specifiesaninboundratelimitingportgroup/typeindex.Validentries areintheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0. namename portsportlist append clear (Optional)Userdefinednameforthegroup. (Optional)Portsassignedtothegroup.Allportsmustbeofthesameport type(FastEthernet,GigabitEthernet). (Optional)Append(add)theportstotheportsthatarealreadyinthe group. (Optional)Clearthegivenportsfromthoseassignedtothegroup.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

10-22

Policy Classification Configuration

show cos port-config

Usage
CoSIRLportgroupsareidentifiedbygroupnumberandthetypeofportsinthegroup,inthe formofgroup#.porttype.TheIRLportgroup0.0existsbydefault.Thisdefaultportgroupcannot beremovedandallphysicalportsinthesystemareassignedtoit.Uptosevenadditionalport groups(1through7)canbeconfigured.Currently,onlyoneporttype(type0)issupported.This porttypesupports100limiters. Additionalportgroupsmaybecreatedforflexibility.Portsassignedtoanewportgroupmustbe mutuallyexclusivefromtheotherportgroupentriesportsareautomaticallyremovedfromthe defaultportgroupandmustbecomprisedofthesameporttypeasdefinedbytheportgroup. Thecreationofadditionalportgroupscouldbeusedtocombinesimilarportsbytheirfunctionfor flexibility.Forinstance,portsassociatedtouserscanbeaddedtoaportgroupcalledUsersand portsassociatedtouplinkportscanbeaddedtoaportgroupcalledUplink.Usingtheseport groups,asingleclassofservicecanassigndifferentratelimitstoeachportgroup.Userports canbeassignedoneratelimit,whileUplinkportscanbeassignedanother.DFEsupportsa maximumof8portgroupsperCoSfunction(IRL). ThecommandshowcosportconfigdisplayseachIRLportgroupconfiguredbygroupandtype, withthegroupnameandassociated(assigned)ports.Thecommandshowcosporttypedisplays theavailableinboundratelimitingresourcesfortheporttype.

Example
Thisexampleconfigurestwoportgroups,oneforuserportsandoneforuplinkportsandassign portstothegroups.Portgroup1.0willrepresentuserports,group2.0willrepresentuplinkports.
B2(su)->set cos port-config irl 1.0 name Users ports ge.1.1-46 B2(su)->set cos port-config irl 2.0 name Uplink ports ge.1.47-48

show cos port-config

Usethiscommandtoshowinboundratelimitinggroupsandtheassignedports.

Syntax
show cos port-config [irl group-type-index]

Parameters
irl grouptypeindex (Optional)Specifiesthatinboundratelimitingconfigurationinformation shouldbedisplayed. (Optional)Showassignedportsforaspecificportgroup.Validentriesare intheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0.

Defaults
TheshowcosportconfigcommandbyitselfwillshowallPortGroups.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-23

clear cos port-config

Example
Thisexampleshowsallinboundratelimitingportgroups.Notethatportsge.1.1throughge.1.48 wereremovedfromthedefaultportgroup0.0whentheywereaddedtoportgroups1.0and2.0.
B2(su)->show cos port-config Inbound Rate Limiting Port Configuration Entries ---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Default Port Group :0 Port Type :0 Assigned Ports :none ---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Users Port Group :1 Port Type :0 Assigned Ports :ge.1.1-46 ---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Uplink Port Group :2 Port Type :0 Assigned Ports :ge.1.47-48 ----------------------------------------------------------------------

clear cos port-config

Usethiscommandtoclearinboundratelimitinggroupsorassignedports.

Syntax
clear cos port-config irl {all | group-type-index {[entry] | [name] [ports]}}

Parameters
irl all grouptypeindex ClearanIRLportgroupconfiguration. Clearallinboundratelimitingportconfignondefaultentries. Deleteaspecificportgrouporgroupname,orcleartheportsfromthat group.Validentriesareintheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0. entry name ports Deletethisnondefaultinboundratelimiterentry. Cleartheadministrativelyassignedtextualdescriptionofthisportgroup entrytoitsdefault. Cleartheportsassignedtothisgrouptoitsdefault.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

10-24

Policy Classification Configuration

set cos port-resource

Usage
Thedefaultportgroup0.0cannotbedeleted.

Example
ThisexampledeletesallPortGroupsexceptfortheDefaultgroup0.0:
B2(su)->clear cos port-config irl all

set cos port-resource

UsethiscommandtosettheinboundratelimitparametersforaspecificIRLresourceforaspecific portgroup.

Syntax
set cos port-resource irl group-type-index irl-index {[unit {kbps}] [rate rate] [type {drop}]}

Parameters
irl grouptypeindex SetanIRLportresource. Specifiesaninboundratelimitingportgroup/typeindex.Validentriesare intheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0. irlindex unit kbps raterate typedrop Indexnumberoftheinboundratelimiterresourceassociatedwiththis entry.Validvaluesrangefrom0to99. Unitofmeasurefortheinboundratelimiter(onlyoptionisKbps). Kilobitspersecond. Datarateforthisinboundratelimiter.Thisistheactualratelimit.Valid valuesrangefrom512to1,000,000KbpsforaGigabitport. Actionfortheratelimiter.Theonlyactionoptionisdroptheframeifall limitersareexceeded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
CoSportresourcesarewhereactualphysicalratelimitersareconfigured.Resourcesmapdirectly tothenumberofratelimiterssupportedbytheporttype.(Porttype0supports100IRLresources.) Resourcesexistforeachportgroupandareindexedasgroup#.porttype.irlindex.Portresources arenotinitiallyconfiguredasratelimiting. Inboundratelimiting,orratepolicing,simplydropsorclipstrafficinboundifaconfiguredrateis exceeded.CoSinboundratelimitingallowstheusertoconfigureratelimitsbasedonkilobitsper second.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-25

show cos port-resource

Theshowcosportresourcecommanddisplaystheresourcesavailableforeachportgroup.By default,noIRLresourcesareconfigured.ThedefaultRateLimitingalgorithmisdropandcannot beconfiguredotherwise.

Example
Thisexamplesetstheinboundratelimitresourceindexnumber1forportgroup2.0to10000Kbps or1MB:
B2(su)->set cos port-resource irl 2.0 1 unit kbps rate 10000 type drop

show cos port-resource

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheIRLportresources.

Syntax
show cos port-resource [irl [group-type-index [irl-index]]]

Parameters
irl grouptypeindex (Optional)Specifiesthatinboundratelimitingportresourcesshouldbe displayed. (Optional)Specifiesaninboundratelimitingportgroup/typeindex.Valid entriesareintheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0. irlindex (Optional)Inboundratelimiterresourceindexconfiguredforthe specifiedportgroup.Validvaluesrangefrom0to99.

Defaults
IfaportgroupandIRLindexarenotspecified,theIRLconfigurationforallresources(099)forall configuredportgroupswillbeshown.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampledisplaystheIRLresourceindexnumber1configurationforgroup2.0.
B2(su)->show cos port-resource irl 2.0 1 '?' after the rate value indicates an invalid rate value Group Index Resource Type Unit Rate ----------- -------- ---- ---- ---------2.0 1 irl kbps 10000 Rate Limit Type Action --------------- -----drop none

clear cos port-resource

UsethiscommandtosettheinboundratelimitinKbps.

10-26

Policy Classification Configuration

set cos reference

Syntax
clear cos port-resource irl {all | group-type-index [irl-index [unit] [rate] [type]]}

Parameters
irl all grouptypeindex SpecifiesthatanIRLresourceistobecleared. ClearallIRLresourcesforallportgroups. Specifiesaninboundratelimitingportgroup/typeindex.Validentriesare intheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0. irlindex unit rate type (Optional)Inboundratelimiterresourceindexassociatedwiththe specifiedportgroup.Validvaluesrangefrom0to99. Cleartheunitofmeasurefortheinboundratelimiter. Clearthedatarateforthisinboundratelimiter. Cleartheactionfortheratelimiter.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleclearsthedatarateto0forIRLresourceindex1forgroup2.0.
B2(su)->clear cos port-resource irl 2.0 1 rate

set cos reference

UsethiscommandtosettheClassofServiceinboundratelimitingreferenceconfiguration.

Syntax
set cos reference irl group-type-index reference rate-limit irl-index

Parameters
irl grouptypeindex SpecifiesthatanIRLreferenceisbeingconfigured. Specifiesaninboundratelimitingportgroup/typeindex.Validentriesare intheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0. reference IRLreferencenumberassociatedwiththisentry.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-27

show cos reference

ratelimitirlindex

Ratelimiter(IRLresourceindex)tobindthisreferenceto.Validvalues rangefrom0to99.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheCoSreferencetablemapstheuserdefinedIRLreferencesfoundintheCoSsettingstable(see setcossettingsonpage 1020)toratelimiterscreatedintheportresourcetable(seesetcos portresourceonpage 1025).TheCoSreferencetableindexescanbethoughtofasvirtualrate limiters.Thetableaccountsforthemaximumnumberofratelimiterssupportedbythedevice. Thevirtuallimitersthenmaptothephysicalratelimiters.TheCoSIRLReferenceTableisnot configuredbydefault. TheCoSIRLreferencetableuses100indexesorvirtualratelimiters,andmapseachvirtuallimiter toaphysicallimiterorresource.AnIRLreferencetableexistsforeachportgroupconfigured,and isindexedsimilarlytoportresources,asportgroup#,porttype,reference.IRLreferencesarenot populatedwithlimiters(resources),butcanbeconfiguredbytheuser.TheIRLreferencetablecan bedisplayedusingtheshowcosreferencecommand.

Example
IntheCoSIRLreferencemappingtableforportgroups1.0and2.0,createareferencefortheIRL resourcenumber1createdforeachgroup.Thereferencenumber1isused.
B2(su)->set cos reference irl 1.0 1 rate-limit 1 B2(su)->set cos reference irl 2.0 1 rate-limit 1

show cos reference

UsethiscommandtoshowtheClassofServiceinboundratelimitingreferenceconfiguration.

Syntax
show cos reference [irl [group-type-index]]

Parameters
irl grouptypeindex (Optional)Specifiesthatinboundratelimitingreferenceinformation shouldbedisplayed. (Optional)Specifiesaninboundratelimitingportgroup/typeindex. Validentriesareintheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0.

Defaults
Ifirlisnotspecified,allCoSreferenceinformationisdisplayed. Ifaspecificportgroupisnotspecified,informationforallportgroupsisdisplayed.

10-28

Policy Classification Configuration

clear cos reference

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowstheClassofServiceIRLreferencesforportgroup1.0.Notethatnotallofthe 100possiblereferencesaredisplayedinthisoutputexample.
B2(su)->show cos reference irl 1.0 Group Index ----------1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... 1.0 1.0 1.0 Reference --------0 1 2 3 97 98 99 Type ---irl irl irl irl irl irl irl Rate Limiter -----------none 1 none none none none none

clear cos reference

UsethiscommandtocleartheClassofServiceinboundratelimitingreferenceconfiguration.

Syntax
clear cos reference irl {all | group-type-index reference}

Parameters
irl all grouptypeindex SpecifiesthatIRLreferencesarebeingcleared. Clearallgroupsindexesandreferences. Specifiesaninboundratelimitingportgroup/typeindex.Validentries areintheformofgroup#.porttype. Validvaluesforgroup#canrangefrom0to7.Validvaluesforporttype canrangefrom0to1,althoughonlyporttype0iscurrentlysupported. Forexample,portgroup3wouldbespecifiedas3.0. reference Clearaspecificreferenceforthespecifiedportgroup.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheCoSinboundratelimitingreferenceconfigurationforall groups:
B2(su)->clear cos reference irl all

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-29

show cos unit

show cos unit

UsethiscommandtoshowpossibleCoSunitentries.

Syntax
show cos unit

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowspossibleunitentriesforinboundratelimiting:
B2(su)->show cos unit Type: irl = inbound rate limiting Port Type --------0 Type ---irl Unit ---Kbps Unit: Kbps = Kilobits per second Minimum Rate -----------512 Granularity ----------1

Maximum Rate -----------1000000

clear cos all-entries

UsethiscommandtoclearallClassofServiceentriesexceptentries07.

Syntax
clear cos all-entries

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheCoSconfigurationforallentriesexceptentries07:
B2(su)->clear cos all-entries

10-30

Policy Classification Configuration

show cos port-type

show cos port-type

UsethiscommandtodisplayClassofServiceporttypeconfigurations.

Syntax
show cos port-type [irl [port-type]]

Parameters
irl porttype (Optional)Displaysinboundratelimitinginformation. (Optional)Displaysinformationforaspecificporttype.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,inboundratelimitinginformationforallporttypesisdisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
TheB2implementationprovidesonedefaultporttype(0)fordesignatingavailableinboundrate limitingresources.Porttype0includesallports. Theporttype0descriptionisB2100IRL,whichindicatesthatthisporttypeprovidesa maximumof100inboundratelimitingresourcesperportgroup.

Example
Thisexampleshowsinboundratelimitinginformationforporttype0.
B2(su)->show cos port-type irl 0 Number of resources: irl = inbound rate limiter(s) Port type description -----------B2 100 IRL Number of limiters --------100 Supported rate types: Kbps = kilobits per second Supported rate type --------kbps Eligible ports ----------------ge.1.1-48 Unselected ports ----------------ge.1.1-48

Index ----0

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

10-31

show cos port-type

10-32

Policy Classification Configuration

11
Port Priority and Rate Limiting Configuration
ThischapterdescribesthePortPriorityandRateLimitingsetofcommandsandhowtousethem.
For information about... Port Priority Configuration Summary Configuring Port Priority Configuring Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) Configuring Port Traffic Rate Limiting Refer to page... 11-1 11-1 11-4 11-6 11-9

Port Priority Configuration Summary

TheSecureStackB2devicesupportsClassofService(CoS),whichallowsyoutoassignmission criticaldatatohigherprioritythroughthedevicebydelayinglesscriticaltrafficduringperiodsof congestion.Thehigherprioritytrafficthroughthedeviceisservicedfirstbeforelowerpriority traffic.TheClassofServicecapabilityofthedeviceisimplementedbyapriorityqueueing mechanism.ClassofServiceisbasedontheIEEE802.1D(802.1p)standardspecification,and allowsyoutodefineeightpriorities(0 through 7)andassignthemtotransmitqueuesforeach port. Apriority0 through 7canbesetoneachport,with0beingthelowestpriority.Aportreceivinga framewithoutpriorityinformationinitstagheaderisassignedapriorityaccordingtothedefault prioritysettingontheport.Forexample,ifthepriorityofaportissetto4,theframesreceived throughthatportwithoutapriorityindicatedintheirtagheaderareclassifiedasapriority4and transmittedaccordingtothatpriority. Inaddition,thedevicesratelimitingcapabilitiesallowyoutofurtherprioritizetrafficbylimiting therateofinboundtrafficonaperport/prioritybasis.
Note: When CoS override is enabled using the set policy profile command as described in set policy profile on page 10-3, CoS-based classification rules will take precedence over priority settings configured with the set port priority command described in this section.

Configuring Port Priority

Purpose
Tovieworconfigureportprioritycharacteristicsasfollows:

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

11-1

show port priority

DisplayorchangetheportdefaultClassofService(CoS)transmitpriority(0through7)of eachportforframesthatarereceived(ingress)withoutpriorityinformationintheirtag header. Displaythecurrenttrafficclassmappingtopriorityofeachport. Seteachporttotransmitframesaccordingto802.1D(802.1p)prioritysetintheframeheader.

Commands
For information about... show port priority set port priority clear port priority Refer to page... 11-4 11-2 11-3

show port priority

Usethiscommandtodisplaythe802.1Dpriorityforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show port priority [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displayspriorityinformationforaspecificport.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
If port-string is not specified, priority for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheportpriorityforthege.2.1through5.
B2(su)->show port priority ge.2.1-5 ge.2.1 is set to 0 ge.2.2 is set to 0 ge.2.3 is set to 0 ge.2.4 is set to 0 ge.2.5 is set to 0

set port priority

Usethiscommandtosetthe802.1D(802.1p)ClassofServicetransmitpriority(0 through 7)on eachport.Aportreceivingaframewithoutpriorityinformationinitstagheaderisassigneda priorityaccordingtotheprioritysettingontheport.Forexample,ifthepriorityofaportissetto

11-2

Port Priority and Rate Limiting Configuration

clear port priority

5,theframesreceivedthroughthatportwithoutapriorityindicatedintheirtagheaderare classifiedasapriority5. Aframewithpriorityinformationinitstagheaderistransmittedaccordingtothatpriority.

Syntax
set port priority port-string priority

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheportforwhichtosetpriority.Foradetaileddescriptionof possibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIon page 52. Specifiesavalueof0to7tosettheCoSpriorityfortheportenteredinthe portstring.Priorityvalueof0isthelowestpriority.

priority

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetadefaultpriorityof6onge.1.3.Framesreceivedbythisport withoutpriorityinformationintheirframeheaderaresettothedefaultsettingof6:
B2(su)->set port priority ge.1.3 6

clear port priority

UsethiscommandtoresetthecurrentCoSportprioritysettingto0.Thiswillcauseallframes receivedwithoutapriorityvalueinitsheadertobesettopriority0.

Syntax
clear port priority port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheportforwhichtoclearpriority.Foradetaileddescriptionof possibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIon page 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresetge.1.11tothedefaultpriority:

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

11-3

Configuring Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping

B2(rw)->clear port priority ge.1.11

Configuring Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping

Purpose
Toperformthefollowing: Viewthecurrentprioritytotransmitqueuemappingofeachphysicalport. Configureeachporttoeithertransmitframesaccordingtotheportpriority,setusingtheset portprioritycommanddescribedinsetportpriorityonpage 112,oraccordingtoapriority basedonapercentageofporttransmissioncapacity,assignedtotransmitqueuesusingtheset porttxqcommanddescribedinsetporttxqonpage 117. Clearcurrentportpriorityqueuesettingsforoneormoreports.

Commands
For information about... show port priority-queue set port priority-queue clear port priority-queue Refer to page... 11-4 11-5 11-6

show port priority-queue

Usethiscommandtodisplaytheportprioritylevels(0through7,with0asthelowestlevel) associatedwiththecurrenttransmitqueues(0beingthelowestpriority)foreachselectedport.A framewithacertainportpriorityistransmittedaccordingtothesettingsenteredusingtheset portpriorityqueuecommanddescribedinsetportpriorityqueueonpage 115.

Syntax
show port priority-queue [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysthemappingofprioritiestotransmitqueuesforone ormoreports.

Defaults
If port-string is not specified, priority queue information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

11-4

Port Priority and Rate Limiting Configuration

set port priority-queue

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaypriorityqueueinformationforge.1.1.Inthiscase,frameswith apriorityof0areassociatedwithtransmitqueue1;frameswith1or2priority,areassociatedwith transmitqueue0;andsoforth:
B2(su)->show Port P0 --------- -ge.1.1 1 port priority-queue ge.1.1 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -0 0 2 3 4 5 5

set port priority-queue

Usethiscommandtomap802.1D(802.1p)prioritiestotransmitqueues.Thisenablesyouto changethetransmitqueue(0to5,with0beingthelowestpriorityqueue)foreachportpriorityof theselectedport.Youcanapplythenewsettingstooneormoreports.

Syntax
set port priority-queue port-string priority queue

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)forwhichtosetprioritytoqueuemappings.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. Specifiesavalueof0through7(0isthelowestlevel)thatdetermines whatpriorityframeswillbetransmittedonthetransmitqueueenteredin thiscommand. Specifiesavalueof0through5(0isthelowestlevel)thatdeterminesthe queueonwhichtotransmittheframeswiththeportpriorityenteredin thiscommand.

priority

queue

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Althoughthereareeightqueuesimplementedintheswitchhardware,onlysixareavailablefor useinprioritizingvariousdataandcontroltraffic.The7thand8thqueuesarereservedfor stacking(ifapplicable)andnetworkcontrolrelatedcommunications.RefertoConfiguring QualityofService(QoS)onpage 116formoreinformationaboutconfiguringtheprioritymode andweightforthesequeues. PrioritytotransmitqueuemappingonanindividualportbasiscanonlybeconfiguredonGigabit Ethernetports(ge.x.x).WhenyouusethesetportpriorityqueuecommandtoconfigureaFast Ethernetport(fe.x.x),themappingvaluesareappliedgloballytoallFastEthernetportsonthe system.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

11-5

clear port priority-queue

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetpriority5framesreceivedonge.2.12totransmitonqueue0.
B2(su)->set port priority-queue ge.2.12 5 0

clear port priority-queue

Usethiscommandtoresetportpriorityqueuesettingsbacktodefaultsforoneormoreports.

Syntax
clear port priority-queue port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheportforwhichtoclearprioritytoqueuemappings.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthepriorityqueuesettingsonge.2.12:
B2(su)->clear port priority-queue ge.2.12

Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)

Purpose
Eighttransmitqueuesareimplementedintheswitchhardwareforeachport,butonlysixare availableforuseinprioritizingvariousdataandcontroltraffic.Theseventhandeighthqueuesare reservedforstacking(ifapplicable)andnetworkcontrolrelatedcommunications. Thecommandsinthissectionallowyoutosettheprioritymodeandweightforeachofthe availablesixqueues(queues0through5)foreachphysicalportontheswitch.Prioritymodeand weightcannotbeconfiguredonLAGs,onlyonthephysicalportsthatmakeuptheLAG.

Commands
For information about... show port txq set port txq clear port txq Refer to page... 11-7 11-7 11-8

11-6

Port Priority and Rate Limiting Configuration

show port txq

show port txq

UsethiscommandtodisplayQoStransmitqueueinformationforoneormorephysicalports.

Syntax
show port txq [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Specifiesport(s)forwhichtodisplayQoSsettings.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. Onlyphysicalportswillbedisplayed.LAGportshavenotransmitqueue information.

Defaults
Iftheportstringisnotspecified,theQoSsettingofallphysicalportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecurrentalgorithmandtransmitqueueweightsconfigured onportsge.1.10through24:
B2(su)->show port txq ge.1.10-24 Port Alg Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 ------- --- --- --- --- --- --ge.1.10 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.11 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.12 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.13 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.14 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.15 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.16 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.17 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.18 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.19 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.20 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.21 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.22 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.23 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 ge.1.24 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 Q6 --SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP Q7 --SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

set port txq

UsethiscommandtosetQoStransmitqueuearbitrationvaluesforphysicalports.

Syntax
set port txq port-string value0 value1 value2 value3 value4 value5

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

11-7

clear port txq

Parameters
portstring Specifiesport(s)onwhichtosetqueuearbitrationvalues.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52. Onlyphysicalportscanbeconfiguredwiththiscommand.LAGports cannotbeconfigured. value0value5 Specifiespercentagetoallocatetoaspecifictransmitqueue.Thevalues musttotal100percent.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Eighttransmitqueuesareimplementedintheswitchhardwareforeachphysicalport,butonlysix areavailableforuseinprioritizingvariousdataandcontroltraffic.Theseventhandeighthqueues arereservedforstacking(ifapplicable)andnetworkcontrolrelatedcommunicationsandcannot beconfigured. Queuescanbesetforstrictpriority(SP)orweightedroundrobin(WRR).IfsetforWRRmode, weightsmaybeassignedtothosequeueswiththiscommand.Weightsarespecifiedintherange of0to100percent.Weightsspecifiedforqueues0through5onanyportmusttotal100percent. Queues0through5canbechangedtostrictprioritybyconfiguringqueues0through4at0 percentandqueue5at100percent.QueuescanbechangedbacktoWRRbychangingtheweight ofqueues0through5,orbyissuingtheclearporttxqcommand.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtochangethearbitrationvaluesforthesixtransmitqueuesbelongingto ge.1.1:
B2(su)->set port txq ge.1.1 17 17 17 17 16 16

Thisexampleshowshowtochangethealgorithmtostrictpriorityforthesixtransmitqueues belongingtoge.1.1:
B2(su)->set port txq ge.1.1 0 0 0 0 0 100 B2(su)->show port txq ge.1.1 Port Alg Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 ------- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --ge.1.1 STR SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

clear port txq

Usethiscommandtoclearporttransmitqueuevaluesbacktotheirdefaultvalues.

Syntax
clear port txq port-string

11-8

Port Priority and Rate Limiting Configuration

Configuring Port Traffic Rate Limiting

Parameters
portstring Clearstransmitqueuevaluesonspecificport(s)backtotheirdefault values.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. Onlyphysicalportscanbeconfiguredwiththiscommand.LAGports cannotbeconfigured.

Defaults
Bydefault,transmitqueuesaredefinedasfollows:
Queue 0 1 2 3 Mode WRR WRR WRR WRR Weight 1 2 3 4 Queue 4 5 6 7 Mode WRR WRR Strict (not configurable) Strict (not configurable) Weight 5 6

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtocleartransmitqueuevaluesonge.1.1:
B2(su)->clear port txq ge.1.1 B2(su)->show port txq ge.1.1 Port Alg Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 ------- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --ge.1.1 WRR 2 10 15 20 24 29 SP SP

Configuring Port Traffic Rate Limiting

Purpose
TolimittherateofinboundtrafficontheSecureStackB2deviceonaperport/prioritybasis.The allowablerangefortheratelimitingis64kilobytespersecondminimumuptothemaximum transmissionrateallowableontheinterfacetype. Ratelimitisconfiguredforagivenportandlistofpriorities.Thelistofprioritiescanincludeone, some,oralloftheeight802.1pprioritylevels.Onceconfigured,therateofalltrafficenteringthe portwiththeprioritiesconfiguredtothatportisnotallowedtoexceedtheprogrammedlimit.If therateexceedstheprogrammedlimit,framesaredroppeduntiltheratefallsbelowthelimit.

Note: Port traffic rate limiting is not supported on mixed stacks containing B3 or C3 devices.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

11-9

show port ratelimit

Commands
.

For information about... show port ratelimit set port ratelimit clear port ratelimit

Refer to page... 11-10 11-11 11-12

show port ratelimit

Usethiscommandtoshowthetrafficratelimitingconfigurationononeormoreports.

Syntax
show port ratelimit [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysratelimitinginformationforspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,ratelimitinginformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecurrentratelimitinginformationforge.2.1:
B2(su)->show port ratelimit ge.2.1 Global Ratelimiting status is disabled. Port Number ----------ge.2.1 ge.2.1 ge.2.1 ge.2.1 ge.2.1 ge.2.1 ge.2.1 ge.2.1 Threshold (kB/s) --------64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 Priority List ----------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Index ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Action -----------discard discard discard discard discard discard discard discard

Direction --------inbound inbound inbound inbound inbound inbound inbound inbound

Status -------disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled

Table 1136providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 11-36

Output Port Number

show port ratelimit Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2.

11-10

Port Priority and Rate Limiting Configuration

set port ratelimit

Table 11-36
Output Index

show port ratelimit Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Resource index for this port. Port rate limiting threshold in kilobytes per second. Whether or not frames not conforming to rate limiting will be discarded. Currently rules can only be applied to inbound traffic. 802.1D (802.1p) port priority level. Whether or not this rule is active or disabled.

Threshold (kB/s) Action Direction Priority List Status

set port ratelimit

Usethiscommandtoconfigurethetrafficratelimitingstatusandthreshold(inkilobytesper second)foroneormoreports.

Syntax
set port ratelimit {disable | enable} | port-string priority threshold {disable | enable} [inbound] [index]

Parameters
disable|enable Whenenteredwithoutaportstring,globallydisablesorenablestheport ratelimitingfunction.Whenenteredwithaportstring,disablesor enablesratelimitingonspecificport(s)whentheglobalfunctionis enabled. Specifiesaportonwhichtosettheratelimitingthresholdandother parameters.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues, refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. Specifiesthe802.1D(802.1p)portprioritylevelassociatedwiththeport string.Thevaluecanbe0to7,with0specifyingthelowestpriority. Specifiesaportratelimitingthresholdinkilobytespersecond.Rangeis 64uptoamaximumof2,147,483,647kilobytespersecond. (Optional)Appliesthisratepolicingruletoinboundtraffic. (Optional)Assignsaresourceindexforthisport.

portstring

priority threshold inbound index

Defaults
Thresholdwillbeappliedtoinboundtrafficontheport/priority. Ifindexisnotspecified,settingswillbeappliedtoindex1,andwilloverwriteindex1forany subsequentratelimitsconfigured.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

11-11

clear port ratelimit

Example
Thisexampleshowshowto: globallyenableratelimiting configureratelimitingforinboundtrafficonportge.2.1,index1,priority5,toathresholdof 125 KBps:

B2(rw)->set port ratelimit enable B2(rw)->set port ratelimit ge.2.1 5 125 enable inbound

clear port ratelimit

Usethiscommandtoclearratelimitingparametersforoneormoreports.

Syntax
clear port ratelimit port-string [index]

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoclearratelimiting.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntax UsedintheCLIonpage 52. (Optional)Specifiestheassociatedresourceindextobereset.

index

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,allindexentrieswillbereset.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearallratelimitingparametersonportge.2.1.
B2(su)->clear port ratelimit ge.2.1

11-12

Port Priority and Rate Limiting Configuration

12
IGMP Configuration
ThischapterdescribestheIGMPConfigurationsetofcommandsandhowtousethem.
For information about... IGMP Overview Configuring IGMP at Layer 2 Refer to page... 12-1 12-2

IGMP Overview
About IP Multicast Group Management
TheInternetGroupManagementProtocol(IGMP)runsbetweenhostsandtheirimmediately neighboringmulticastdevice.Theprotocolsmechanismsallowahosttoinformitslocaldevice thatitwantstoreceivetransmissionsaddressedtoaspecificmulticastgroup. Amulticastenableddevicecanperiodicallyaskitshostsiftheywanttoreceivemulticasttraffic.If thereismorethanonedeviceontheLANperformingIPmulticasting,oneofthesedevicesis electedquerierandassumestheresponsibilityofqueryingtheLANforgroupmembers. BasedonthegroupmembershipinformationlearnedfromIGMP,adevicecandeterminewhich (ifany)multicasttrafficneedstobeforwardedtoeachofitsports.AtLayer3,multicastdevices usethisinformation,alongwithamulticastroutingprotocol,tosupportIPmulticastingacrossthe Internet. IGMPprovidesthefinalstepinanIPmulticastpacketdeliveryservice,sinceitisonlyconcerned withforwardingmulticasttrafficfromthelocaldevicetogroupmembersonadirectlyattached subnetworkorLANsegment. ThisdevicesupportsIPmulticastgroupmanagementbypassivelysnoopingontheIGMPquery andIGMPreportpacketstransferredbetweenIPmulticastdevicesandIPmulticasthostgroupsto learnIPmulticastgroupmembers. ThepurposeofIPmulticastgroupmanagementistooptimizeaswitchednetworksperformance somulticastpacketswillonlybeforwardedtothoseportscontainingmulticastgrouphostsor multicastdevicesinsteadoffloodingtoallportsinthesubnet(VLAN).

About Multicasting
Multicastingisusedtosupportrealtimeapplicationssuchasvideoconferencesorstreaming audio.Amulticastserverdoesnothavetoestablishaseparateconnectionwitheachclient.It merelybroadcastsitsservicetothenetwork,andanyhoststhatwanttoreceivethemulticast registerwiththeirlocalmulticastswitch/router.Althoughthisapproachreducesthenetwork overheadrequiredbyamulticastserver,thebroadcasttrafficmustbecarefullyprunedatevery
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 12-1

Configuring IGMP at Layer 2

multicastswitch/routeritpassesthroughtoensurethattrafficisonlypassedtothehoststhat subscribedtothisservice.

Configuring IGMP at Layer 2

Purpose
ToconfigureIGMPsnoopingfromtheswitchCLI.

Commands
For information about... show igmpsnooping set igmpsnooping adminmode set igmpsnooping interfacemode set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval set igmpsnooping maxresponse set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime set igmpsnooping add-static set igmpsnooping remove-static show igmpsnooping static show igmpsnooping mfdb clear igmpsnooping Refer to page... 12-2 12-3 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-7 12-8 12-8

show igmpsnooping
UsethiscommandtodisplayIGMPsnoopinginformation.

Syntax
show igmpsnooping

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
ConfiguredinformationisdisplayedwhetherornotIGMPsnoopingisenabled.Status informationisdisplayedonlywhenthefunctionisenabled.ForinformationonenablingIGMPon
12-2 IGMP Configuration

set igmpsnooping adminmode

thesystem,refertosetigmpsnoopingadminmodeonpage 123.Forinformationonenabling IGMPononeormoreports,refertosetigmpsnoopinginterfacemodeonpage 123.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayIGMPsnoopinginformation:
B2(su)->show igmpsnooping Admin Mode..................................... Enable Group Membership Interval...................... 260 Max Response Time.............................. 100 Multicast Router Present Expiration Time....... 0 Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping........... ge.1.1,ge.1.2,ge.1.3 Multicast Control Frame Count..................0 Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU...............0

set igmpsnooping adminmode

UsethiscommandtoenableordisableIGMPonthesystem.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping adminmode {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnablesordisablesIGMPsnoopingonthesystem.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
InorderforIGMPsnoopingtobeenabledononeorallports,itmustbegloballyenabledonthe devicewiththiscommand,andthenenabledonaport(s)usingthesetigmpsnoopinginterface modecommandasdescribedinsetigmpsnoopinginterfacemodeonpage 123.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableIGMPonthesystem:
B2(su)->set igmpsnooping adminmode enable

set igmpsnooping interfacemode

UsethiscommandtoenableordisableIGMPononeorallports.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping interfacemode port-string {enable | disable}

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

12-3

set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval

Parameters
portstring enable|disable SpecifiesoneormoreportsonwhichtoenableordisableIGMP. EnablesordisablesIGMP.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
InorderforIGMPsnoopingtobeenabledononeorallports,itmustbegloballyenabledonthe deviceusingthesetigmpsnoopingadminmodecommandasdescribedinsetigmpsnooping adminmodeonpage 123,andthenenabledonaport(s)usingthiscommand.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableIGMPonportsge.110:
B2(su)->set igmpsnooping interfacemode ge.1-10 enable

set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval

UsethiscommandtoconfiguretheIGMPgroupmembershipintervaltimeforthesystem.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval time

Parameters
time SpecifiestheIGMPgroupmembershipinterval.Validvaluesare23600 seconds. Thisvalueworkstogetherwiththesetigmpsnoopingmaxresponsetime commandtoremoveportsfromanIGMPgroupandmustbegreaterthan themaxresponsetimevalue.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheIGMPgroupmembershipintervaltimesetsthefrequencyofhostqueryframetransmissions andmustbegreaterthantheIGMPmaximumresponsetimeasdescribedinsetigmpsnooping maxresponseonpage 125.

12-4

IGMP Configuration

set igmpsnooping maxresponse

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheIGMPgroupmembershipintervalto250seconds:
B2(su)->set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval 250

set igmpsnooping maxresponse

UsethiscommandtoconfiguretheIGMPquerymaximumresponsetimeforthesystem.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping maxresponse time

Parameters
time SpecifiestheIGMPmaximumqueryresponsetime.Validvaluesare100 255seconds.Thedefaultvalueis100seconds. Thisvalueworkstogetherwiththesetigmpsnooping groupmembershipintervalcommandtoremoveportsfromanIGMPgroup andmustbelesserthanthegroupmembershipintervalvalue.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ThisvaluemustbelessthantheIGMPmaximumresponsetimedescribedinsetigmpsnooping groupmembershipintervalonpage 124.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheIGMPmaximumresponsetimeto100seconds:
B2(su)->set igmpsnooping maxresponse 100

set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime

UsethiscommandtoconfiguretheIGMPmulticastrouterexpirationtimeforthesystem.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpire time

Parameters
time SpecifiestheIGMPmulticastrouterexpirationtime.Validvaluesare0 3600seconds.Avalueof0willconfigurethesystemwithaninfinite expirationtime.Thedefaultvalueis0.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

12-5

set igmpsnooping add-static

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Thistimerisforexpiringtheswitchfromthemulticastdatabase.Ifthetimerexpires,andtheonly addressleftisthemulticastswitch,thentheentrywillberemoved.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheIGMPmulticastrouterexpirationtimetoinfinity:
B2(su)->set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime 0

set igmpsnooping add-static

ThiscommandcreatesanewstaticIGMPentryoraddsoneormorenewportstoanexisting entry.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping add-static group vlan-list [modify] [port-string]

Parameters
group vlanlist modify portstring SpecifiesthemulticastgroupIPaddressfortheentry. SpecifiestheVLANsonwhichtoconfiguretheentry. (Optional)Addsthespecifiedportorportstoanexistingentry. (Optional)Specifiestheportorportstoaddtotheentry.

Defaults
Ifnoportsarespecified,allportsareaddedtotheentry. Ifmodifyisnotspecified,anewentryiscreated.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
UsethiscommandtocreateandconfigureLayer2IGMPentries.

Example
ThisexamplecreatesanIGMPentryforthemulticastgroupwithIPaddressof233.11.22.33 configuredonVLAN20configuredwiththeportge.1.1.
B2(su)->set igmpsnooping add-static 233.11.22.33 20 ge.1.1

12-6

IGMP Configuration

set igmpsnooping remove-static

set igmpsnooping remove-static

ThiscommanddeletesastaticIGMPentryorremovesoneormorenewportsfromanexisting entry.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping remove-static group vlan-list [modify] [port-string]

Parameters
group vlanlist modify portstring SpecifiesthemulticastgroupIPaddressoftheentry. SpecifiestheVLANsonwhichtheentryisconfigured. (Optional)Removesthespecifiedportorportsfromanexistingentry. (Optional)Specifiestheportorportstoremovefromtheentry.

Defaults
Ifnoportsarespecified,allportsareremovedfromtheentry.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleremovesportge.1.1fromtheentryforthemulticastgroupwithIPaddressof 233.11.22.33configuredonVLAN20.
B2(su)->set igmpsnooping remove-static 233.11.22.33 20 ge.1.1

show igmpsnooping static

ThiscommanddisplaysstaticIGMPportsforoneormoreVLANsorIGMPgroups.

Syntax
show igmpsnooping static vlan-list [group group]

Parameters
vlanlist groupgroup SpecifiestheVLANforwhichtodisplaystaticIGMPports. (Optional)SpecifiestheIGMPgroupforwhichtodisplaystaticIGMP ports.

Defaults
Ifnogroupisspecified,informationforallgroupsisdisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

12-7

show igmpsnooping mfdb

Example
ThisexampledisplaysthestaticIGMPportsforVLAN20.
B2(su)->show igmpsnooping static 20 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Vlan Id = 20 Static Multicast Group Address = 233.11.22.33 Type = IGMP IGMP Port List = ge.1.1

show igmpsnooping mfdb

Usethiscommandtodisplaymulticastforwardingdatabase(MFDB)information.

Syntax
show igmpsnooping mfdb [stats]

Parameters
stats (Optional)DisplaysMFDBstatistics.

Defaults
Ifstatsisnotspecified,allMFDBtableentrieswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaymulticastforwardingdatabaseentries:
B2(su)->show igmpsnooping mfdb MAC Address Type Description ----------------------- ------- ---------------00:14:01:00:5E:02:CD:B0 Dynamic Network Assist 00:32:01:00:5E:37:96:D0 Dynamic Network Assist 00:32:01:00:5E:7F:FF:FA Dynamic Network Assist Interfaces ------------------------Fwd: ge.1.1,ge.3.1,ge.4.1 Fwd: ge.4.7 Fwd: ge.4.7

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaymulticastforwardingdatabasestatistics:
B2(su)->show igmpsnooping mfdb stats Max MFDB Table Entries......................... 256 Most MFDB Entries Since Last Reset............. 1 Current Entries................................ 0

clear igmpsnooping
UsethiscommandtoclearallIGMPsnoopingentries.

Syntax
clear igmpsnooping

Parameters
None.

12-8

IGMP Configuration

clear igmpsnooping

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearallIGMPsnoopingentries:
B2(su)->clear igmpsnooping Are you sure you want to clear all IGMP snooping entries? (y/n) y IGMP Snooping Entries Cleared.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

12-9

clear igmpsnooping

12-10

IGMP Configuration

13
Logging and Network Management
Thischapterdescribesswitchrelatedloggingandnetworkmanagementcommandsandhowto usethem.
Note: The commands in this chapter pertain to network management of the SecureStack B2 device from the switch CLI only. For information on router-related network management tasks, including reviewing router ARP tables and IP traffic, refer to Chapter 17. For information about... Configuring System Logging Monitoring Network Events and Status Managing Switch Network Addresses and Routes Configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Configuring Node Aliases Refer to page... 13-1 13-11 13-15 13-25 13-32

Configuring System Logging

Purpose
Todisplayandconfiguresystemlogging,includingSyslogserversettings,Syslogdefaultsettings, andtheloggingbuffer.

Commands
For information about... show logging server set logging server clear logging server show logging default set logging default clear logging default show logging application set logging application Refer to page... 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-4 13-5 13-5 13-6 13-7

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-1

show logging server

For information about... clear logging application show logging local set logging local clear logging local show logging buffer

Refer to page... 13-8 13-9 13-9 13-10 13-10

show logging server

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheSyslogconfigurationforaparticularserver.

Syntax
show logging server [index]

Parameters
index (Optional)DisplaysSysloginformationpertainingtoaspecificserver tableentry.Validvaluesare18.

Defaults
Ifindexisnotspecified,allSyslogserverinformationwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySyslogserverconfigurationinformation:
B2(ro)->show logging server IP Address Facility Severity Description Port Status ------------------------------------------------------------------------1 132.140.82.111 local4 warning(5) default 514 enabled 2 132.140.90.84 local4 warning(5) default 514 enabled

Table 1337providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 13-37

Output IP Address Facility Severity Description Port Status

show logging server Output Details

What It Displays... Syslog servers IP address. For details on setting this using the set logging server command, refer to set logging server on page 13-3. Syslog facility that will be encoded in messages sent to this server. Valid values are: local0 to local7. Severity level at which the server is logging messages. Text string description of this facility/server. UDP port the client uses to send to the server. Whether or not this Syslog configuration is currently enabled or disabled.

13-2

Logging and Network Management

set logging server

set logging server

UsethiscommandtoconfigureaSyslogserver.

Syntax
set logging server index [ip-addr ip-addr] [facility facility] [severity severity] [descr descr] [port port] [state {enable | disable}]

Parameters
index ipaddripaddr facilityfacility severityseverity Specifiestheservertableindexnumberforthisserver.Validvaluesare1 8. (Optional)SpecifiestheSyslogmessageserversIPaddress. (Optional)Specifiestheserversfacilityname.Validvaluesare:local0to local7. (Optional)Specifiestheseveritylevelatwhichtheserverwilllog messages.Validvaluesandcorrespondinglevelsare: 1emergencies(systemisunusable) 2alerts(immediateactionrequired) 3criticalconditions 4errorconditions 5warningconditions 6notifications(significantconditions) 7informationalmessages 8debuggingmessages descrdescr portport stateenable| disable (Optional)Specifiesatextualstringdescriptionofthisfacility/server. (Optional)SpecifiesthedefaultUDPporttheclientusestosendtothe server. (Optional)Enablesordisablesthisfacility/serverconfiguration.

Defaults
Ifipaddrisnotspecified,anentryintheSyslogservertablewillbecreatedwiththespecified indexnumberandamessagewilldisplayindicatingthatnoIPaddresshasbeenassigned. Ifnotspecified,facility,severityandportwillbesettodefaultsconfiguredwiththesetlogging defaultcommand(setloggingdefaultonpage 135). Ifstateisnotspecified,theserverwillnotbeenabledordisabled.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThiscommandshowshowtoenableaSyslogserverconfigurationforindex1,IPaddress 134.141.89.113,facilitylocal4,severitylevel3onport514:
B2(su)->set logging server 1 ip-addr 134.141.89.113 facility local4 severity 3 port 514 state enable
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 13-3

clear logging server

clear logging server

UsethiscommandtoremoveaserverfromtheSyslogservertable.

Syntax
clear logging server index

Parameters
index Specifiestheservertableindexnumberfortheservertoberemoved. Validvaluesare18.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThiscommandshowshowtoremovetheSyslogserverwithindex1fromtheservertable:
B2(su)->clear logging server 1

show logging default

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheSyslogserverdefaultvalues.

Syntax
show logging default

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThiscommandshowshowtodisplaytheSyslogserverdefaultvalues.Foranexplanationofthe commandoutput,referbacktoTable 1337onpage 132.
B2(su)->show logging default Facility Severity Port ----------------------------------------local4 warning(5) 514

Defaults:

13-4

Logging and Network Management

set logging default

set logging default

Usethiscommandtosetloggingdefaultvalues.

Syntax
set logging default {[facility facility] [severity severity] port port]}

Parameters
facilityfacility severityseverity Specifiesthedefaultfacilityname.Validvaluesare:local0tolocal7. Specifiesthedefaultloggingseveritylevel.Validvaluesand correspondinglevelsare: 1emergencies(systemisunusable) 2alerts(immediateactionrequired) 3criticalconditions 4errorconditions 5warningconditions 6notifications(significantconditions) 7informationalmessages 8debuggingmessages portport SpecifiesthedefaultUDPporttheclientusestosendtotheserver.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheSyslogdefaultfacilitynametolocal2andtheseveritylevelto4 (errorlogging):
B2(su)->set logging default facility local2 severity 4

clear logging default

Usethiscommandtoresetloggingdefaultvalues.

Syntax
clear logging default {[facility] [severity] [port]}

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-5

show logging application

Parameters
facility severity port (Optional)Resetsthedefaultfacilitynametolocal4. (Optional)Resetsthedefaultloggingseveritylevelto6(notificationsof significantconditions). (Optional)ResetsthedefaultUDPporttheclientusestosendtotheserver to514.

Defaults
Atleastoneoptionalparametermustbeentered. Allthreeoptionalkeywordsmustbeenteredtoresetallloggingvaluestodefaults.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheSyslogdefaultseveritylevelto6:
B2(su)->clear logging default severity

show logging application

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheseveritylevelofSyslogmessagesforoneorallapplications configuredforloggingonyoursystem.

Syntax
show logging application [mnemonic | all]

Parameters
mnemonic (Optional)Displaysseveritylevelforoneapplicationconfiguredfor logging.Mnemonicswillvarydependingonthenumberandtypesof applicationsrunningonyoursystem.Samplemnemonicsandtheir correspondingapplicationsarelistedinTable 1339onpage 138.
Note: Mnemonic values are case sensitive and must be typed as they appear in Table 13-39.

all

(Optional)Displaysseveritylevelforallapplicationsconfiguredfor logging.

Defaults
Ifnoparameterisspecified,informationforallapplicationswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

13-6

Logging and Network Management

set logging application

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaysystemlogginginformationpertainingtotheSNMP application.
B2(ro)->show logging application SNMP Application Current Severity Level --------------------------------------------90 SNMP 6 1(emergencies) 4(errors) 7(information) 2(alerts) 5(warnings) 8(debugging) 3(critical) 6(notifications)

Table 1338providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 13-38

Output... Application Current Severity Level

show logging application Output Details

What it displays... A mnemonic abbreviation of the textual description for applications being logged. Severity level at which the server is logging messages for the listed application. This range (from 1 to 8) and its associated severity list is shown in the CLI output. For a description of these entries, which are set using the set logging application command, refer to set logging application on page 13-7.

set logging application

Usethiscommandtosettheseverityleveloflogmessagesforoneorallapplications.

Syntax
set logging application {[mnemonic | all]} [level level]

Parameters
mnemonic Specifiesacasesensitivemnemonicabbreviationofanapplicationtobe logged.Thisparameterwillvarydependingonthenumberandtypesof applicationsrunningonyoursystem.Todisplayacompletelist,usethe showloggingapplicationcommandasdescribedinshowlogging applicationonpage 136.Samplemnemonicsandtheircorresponding applicationsarelistedinTable 1339onpage 138.
Note: Mnemonic values are case sensitive and must be typed as they appear in Table 13-39.

all

Setstheloggingseveritylevelforallapplications.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-7

clear logging application

levellevel

(Optional)Specifiestheseveritylevelatwhichtheserverwilllog messagesforapplications.Validvaluesandcorrespondinglevelsare: 1emergencies(systemisunusable) 2alerts(immediateactionrequired) 3criticalconditions 4errorconditions 5warningconditions 6notifications(significantconditions) 7informationalmessages 8debuggingmessages

Table 13-39
Mnemonic CLIWEB SNMP STP Driver System Stacking UPN Router

Mnemonic Values for Logging Applications

Application Command Line Interface and Webview management Simple Network Management Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Hardware drivers Non-application items such as general chassis management Stacking management (if applicable) User Personalized Networking Router

Defaults
Iflevelisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheseveritylevelforSNMPto4sothaterrorconditionswillbe loggedforthatapplication.
B2(rw)->set logging application SNMP level 4

clear logging application

Usethiscommandtoresettheloggingseveritylevelforoneorallapplicationstothedefaultvalue of6(notificationsofsignificantconditions).

Syntax
clear logging application {mnemonic | all}

13-8

Logging and Network Management

show logging local

Parameters
mnemonic Resetstheseveritylevelforaspecificapplicationto6.Validmnemonic valuesandtheircorrespondingapplicationsarelistedinTable 1339on page 138. Resetstheseveritylevelforallapplicationsto6.

all

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresettheloggingseveritylevelto6forSNMP.
B2(rw)->clear logging application SNMP

show logging local

Usethiscommandtodisplaythestateofmessageloggingtotheconsoleandapersistentfile.

Syntax
show logging local

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythestateofmessagelogging.Inthiscase,loggingtothe consoleisenabledandloggingtoapersistentfileisdisabled.
B2(su)->show logging local Syslog Console Logging enabled Syslog File Logging disabled

set logging local

Usethiscommandtoconfigurelogmessagestotheconsoleandapersistentfile.

Syntax
set logging local console {enable | disable} file {enable | disable}

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-9

clear logging local

Parameters
consoleenable|disable fileenable|disable Enablesordisablesloggingtotheconsole. Enablesordisablesloggingtoapersistentfile.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thiscommandshowshowtoenableloggingtotheconsoleanddisableloggingtoapersistentfile:
B2(su)->set logging local console enable file disable

clear logging local

Usethiscommandtocleartheconsoleandpersistentstoreloggingforthelocalsession.

Syntax
clear logging local

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearlocallogging:
B2(su)->clear logging local

show logging buffer

Usethiscommandtodisplaythelast256messageslogged.

Syntax
show logging buffer

Parameters
None.

13-10

Logging and Network Management

Monitoring Network Events and Status

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowsaportionoftheinformationdisplayedwiththeshowloggingbuffer command:
B2(su)->show logging buffer <165>Sep 4 07:43:09 10.42.71.13 CLI[5]User:rw logged in from 10.2.1.122 (telnet) <165>Sep 4 07:43:24 10.42.71.13 CLI[5]User: debug failed login from 10.4.1.100 (telnet)

Monitoring Network Events and Status

Purpose
Todisplayswitcheventsandcommandhistory,tosetthesizeofthehistorybuffer,andtodisplay anddisconnectcurrentusersessions.

Commands
For information about... history show history set history ping show users disconnect Refer to page... 13-11 13-12 13-12 13-13 13-13 13-14

history
Usethiscommandtodisplaythecontentsofthecommandhistorybuffer.Thecommandhistory bufferincludesalltheswitchcommandsentereduptoamaximumof100,asspecifiedintheset historycommand(sethistoryonpage 1312).

Syntax
history

Parameters
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-11

show history

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecontentsofthecommandhistorybuffer.Itshowsthereare fivecommandsinthebuffer:
B2(su)->history 1 hist 2 show gvrp 3 show vlan 4 show igmp 5 show ip address

show history
Usethiscommandtodisplaythesize(inlines)ofthehistorybuffer.

Syntax
show history

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythesizeofthehistorybuffer:
B2(su)->show history History buffer size: 20

set history
Usethiscommandtosetthesizeofthehistorybuffer.

Syntax
set history size [default]

13-12

Logging and Network Management

ping

Parameters
size default Specifiesthesizeofthehistorybufferinlines.Validvaluesare1to100. (Optional)Makesthissettingpersistentforallfuturesessions.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthesizeofthecommandhistorybufferto30lines:
B2(su)->set history 30

ping
UsethiscommandtosendICMPechorequestpacketstoanothernodeonthenetworkfromthe switchCLI.

Syntax
ping host

Parameters
host SpecifiestheIPaddressofthedevicetowhichthepingwillbesent.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtopingIPaddress134.141.89.29.Inthiscase,thishostisalive:
B2(su)->ping 134.141.89.29 134.141.89.29 is alive

Inthisexample,thehostatIPaddressisnotresponding:
B2(su)->ping 134.141.89.255 no answer from 134.141.89.255

show users
UsethiscommandtodisplayinformationabouttheactiveconsoleportorTelnetsession(s)logged intotheswitch.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-13

disconnect

Syntax
show users

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtousetheshowuserscommand.Inthisoutput,therearetwoTelnet usersloggedinwithReadWriteaccessprivilegesfromIPaddresses134.141.192.119and 134.141.192.18:
B2(su)->show users Session User Location -------- ----- -------------------------* telnet rw 134.141.192.119 telnet rw 134.141.192.18

disconnect
UsethiscommandtocloseanactiveconsoleportorTelnetsessionfromtheswitchCLI.

Syntax
disconnect {ip-addr | console}

Parameters
ipaddr console SpecifiestheIPaddressoftheTelnetsessiontobedisconnected.This addressisdisplayedintheoutputshowninshowusersonpage 1215. Closesanactiveconsoleport.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtocloseaTelnetsessiontohost134.141.192.119:
B2(su)->disconnect 134.141.192.119

Thisexampleshowshowtoclosethecurrentconsolesession:
B2(su)->disconnect console

13-14

Logging and Network Management

Managing Switch Network Addresses and Routes

Managing Switch Network Addresses and Routes

Purpose
TodisplayordeleteswitchARPtableentries,andtodisplayMACaddressinformation.

Commands
For information about... show arp set arp clear arp traceroute show mac show mac agetime set mac agetime clear mac agetime set mac algorithm show mac algorithm clear mac algorithm set mac multicast clear mac address show mac unreserved-flood set mac unreserved-flood Refer to page... 13-15 13-16 13-17 13-17 13-18 13-19 13-20 13-20 13-21 13-21 13-22 13-22 13-23 13-24 13-24

show arp
UsethiscommandtodisplaytheswitchsARPtable.

Syntax
show arp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-15

set arp

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheARPtable:
B2(su)->show arp LINK LEVEL ARP TABLE IP Address Phys Address Flags Interface ----------------------------------------------------10.20.1.1 00-00-5e-00-01-1 S host 134.142.21.194 00-00-5e-00-01-1 S host 134.142.191.192 00-00-5e-00-01-1 S host 134.142.192.18 00-00-5e-00-01-1 S host 134.142.192.119 00-00-5e-00-01-1 S host -----------------------------------------------------

Table 1340providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 13-40

Output IP Address Phys Address Flags

show arp Output Details

What It Displays... IP address mapped to MAC address. MAC address mapped to IP address. Route status. Possible values and their definitions include: S - manually configured entry (static) P - respond to ARP requests for this entry

set arp
UsethiscommandtoaddmappingentriestotheswitchsARPtable.

Syntax
set arp ip-address mac-address

Parameters
ipaddress macaddress SpecifiestheIPaddresstomaptotheMACaddressandaddtotheARP table. SpecifiestheMACaddresstomaptotheIPaddressandaddtotheARP table.TheMACaddresscanbeformattedasxx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xxorxxxx xxxxxxxx.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtomapIPaddress192.168.219.232toMACaddress00000c400fbc:
B2(su)->set arp 192.168.219.232 00-00-0c-40-0f-bc

13-16

Logging and Network Management

clear arp

clear arp
UsethiscommandtodeleteaspecificentryorallentriesfromtheswitchsARPtable.

Syntax
clear arp {ip-address | all}

Parameters
ipaddress|all SpecifiestheIPaddressintheARPtabletobecleared,orclearsallARP entries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodeleteentry10.1.10.10fromtheARPtable:
B2(su)->clear arp 10.1.10.10

traceroute
UsethiscommandtodisplayahopbyhoppaththroughanIPnetworkfromthedevicetoa specificdestinationhost.ThreeUDPorICMPprobeswillbetransmittedforeachhopbetweenthe sourceandthetraceroutedestination.

Syntax
traceroute [-w waittime] [-f first-ttl] [-m max-ttl] [-p port] [-q nqueries] [-r] [-d] [-n] [-v] host

Parameters
wwaittime ffirstttl mmaxttl pport qnqueries r d n v (Optional)Specifiestimeinsecondstowaitforaresponsetoaprobe. (Optional)Specifiesthetimetolive(TTL)ofthefirstoutgoingprobe packet. (Optional)Specifiesthemaximumtimetolive(TTL)usedinoutgoing probepackets. (Optional)SpecifiesthebaseUDPportnumberusedinprobes. (Optional)Specifiesthenumberofprobeinquiries. (Optional)Bypassesthenormalhostroutingtables. (Optional)Setsthedebugsocketoption. (Optional)Displayshopaddressesnumerically.(Supportedinafuture release.) (Optional)Displaysverboseoutput,includingthesizeanddestinationof eachresponse.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-17

show mac

host

SpecifiesthehosttowhichtherouteofanIPpacketwillbetraced.

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,waittimewillbesetto5seconds. Ifnotspecified,firstttlwillbesetto1second. Ifnotspecified,maxttlwillbesetto30seconds. Ifnotspecified,portwillbesetto33434. Ifnotspecified,nquerieswillbesetto3. Ifrisnotspecified,normalhostroutingtableswillbeused. Ifdisnotspecified,thedebugsocketoptionwillnotbeused. Ifvisnotspecified,summaryoutputwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtousetraceroutetodisplayaroundtrippathtohost192.167.252.17.In thiscase,hop1istheSecureStackB2switch,hop2is14.1.0.45,andhop3isbacktothehostIP address.RoundtriptimesforeachofthethreeUDPprobesaredisplayednexttoeachhop:
B2(su)->traceroute 192.167.252.17 traceroute to 192.167.252.17 (192.167.252.17), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets 1 matrix.enterasys.com (192.167.201.40) 20.000 ms 20.000 ms 20.000 ms 2 14.1.0.45 (14.1.0.45) 40.000 ms 10.000 ms 20.000 ms 3 192.167.252.17 (192.167.252.17) 50.000 ms 0.000 ms 20.000 ms

show mac
UsethiscommandtodisplayMACaddressesintheswitchsfilteringdatabase.Theseare addresseslearnedonaportthroughtheswitchingprocess.

Syntax
show mac [address mac-address] [fid fid] [port port-string] [type {other | learned | self | mgmt}]

Parameters
addressmacaddress fidfid portportstring typeother|learned| self|mgmt (Optional)DisplaysaspecificMACaddress(ifitisknownbythe device). (Optional)DisplaysMACaddressesforaspecificfilterdatabase identifier. (Optional)DisplaysMACaddressesforspecificport(s). (Optional)Displaysinformationrelatedtoother,learned,selfor mgmt(management)addresstype.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,allMACaddressesforthedevicewillbedisplayed.

13-18

Logging and Network Management

show mac agetime

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayMACaddressinformationforge.3.1:
B2(su)->show mac port ge.3.1 MAC Address FID Port Type ----------------- ---- ------------- -------00-09-6B-0F-13-E6 15 ge.3.1 Learned MAC Address VLAN Port Type Status Egress Ports ----------------- ---- ------------- ------- ------- --------------------------01-01-23-34-45-56 20 any mcast perm ge.3.1

Table 1341providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 13-41

Output MAC Address FID Port Type

show mac Output Details

What It Displays... MAC addresses mapped to the port(s) shown. Filter database identifier. Port designation. Address type. Valid types are: Learned Self Management Other mcast (multicast)

VLAN Status Egress Ports

The VLAN ID configured for the multicast MAC address. The status of the multicast address. The ports which have been added to the egress ports list.

show mac agetime

UsethiscommandtodisplaythetimeoutperiodforaginglearnedMACentries.

Syntax
show mac agetime

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-19

set mac agetime

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheMACtimeoutperiod:
B2(su)->show mac agetime Aging time: 300 seconds

set mac agetime

UseThiscommandtosetthetimeoutperiodforaginglearnedMACentries.

Syntax
set mac agetime time

Parameters
time SpecifiesthetimeoutperiodinsecondsforaginglearnedMAC addresses.Validvaluesare10to1,000,000seconds.Defaultvalueis300 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheMACtimeoutperiod:
B2(su)->set mac agetime 250

clear mac agetime

UsethiscommandtoresetthetimeoutperiodforaginglearnedMACentriestothedefaultvalue of300seconds.

Syntax
clear mac agetime

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.
13-20 Logging and Network Management

set mac algorithm

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheMACtimeoutperiodtothedefaultvalueof300seconds.
B2(su)->clear mac agetime

set mac algorithm

UsethiscommandtosettheMACalgorithmmode,whichdeterminesthehasmechanismusedby thedevicewhenperformingLayer2lookupsonreceivedframes.

Syntax
set mac algorithm {mac-crc16-lowerbits | mac-crc16-upperbits | mac-crc32-lowerbits | mac-crc32-upperbits}

Parameters
maccrc16lowerbits maccrc16upperbits maccrc32lowerbits maccrc32upperbits SelecttheMACCRC16lowerbitsalgorithmforhashing. SelecttheMACCRC16upperbitsalgorithmforhashing. SelecttheMACCRC32lowerbitsalgorithmforhashing. SelecttheMACCRC32upperbitsalgorithmforhashing.

Defaults
ThedefaultMACalgorithmismaccrc16upperbits.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
EachalgorithmisoptimizedforadifferentspreadofMACaddresses.Whenchangingthismode, theswitchwilldisplayawarningmessageandpromptyoutorestartthedevice. ThedefaultMACalgorithmismaccrc16upperbits.

Example
Thisexamplesetsthehashingalgorithmtomaccrc32upperbits.
B2(rw)->set mac algorithm mac-crc32-upperbits

show mac algorithm

ThiscommanddisplaysthecurrentlyselectedMACalgorithmmode.

Syntax
show mac algorithm

Parameters
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-21

clear mac algorithm

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowstheoutputofthiscommand.
B2(su)->show mac algorithm Mac hashing algorithm is mac-crc16-upperbits.

clear mac algorithm

UsethiscommandtoreturntheMAChashingalgorithmtothedefaultvalueofmaccrc16 upperbits.

Syntax
clear mac algorithm

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleresetstheMAChashingalgorithmtothedefaultvalue.
B2(su)->clear mac algorithm

set mac multicast

UsethiscommandtodefineonwhatportswithinaVLANamulticastaddresscanbedynamically learnedon,oronwhatportsaframewiththespecifiedMACaddresscanbeflooded.Also,use thiscommandtoappendportstoorclearportsfromtheegressportslist.

Syntax
set mac multicast mac-address vlan-id [port-string] [{append | clear} port-string]

13-22

Logging and Network Management

clear mac address

Parameters
macaddress vlanid portstring append|clear SpecifiesthemulticastMACaddress.TheMACaddresscanbe formattedasxx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xxorxxxxxxxxxxxx. SpecifiestheVLANIDcontainingtheports. SpecifiestheportorrangeofportsthemulticastMACaddresscanbe learnedonorfloodedto. Appendsorclearstheportorrangeofportsfromtheegressportlist.

Defaults
Ifnoportstringisdefined,thecommandwillapplytoallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleconfiguresmulticastMACaddress010122334455forVLAN24.
B2(su)->set mac multicast 01-01-22-33-44-55 24

clear mac address

UsethiscommandtoremoveamulticastMACaddress.

Syntax
clear mac address mac-address [vlan-id]

Parameters
macaddress vlanid SpecifiesthemulticastMACaddresstobecleared.TheMACaddress canbeformattedasxx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xxorxxxxxxxxxxxx. (Optional)SpecifiestheVLANIDfromwhichtoclearthestatic multicastMACaddress.

Defaults
Ifnovlanidisspecified,themulticastMACaddressisclearedfromallVLANs.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleclearsmulticastMACaddress010122334455fromVLAN24.
B2(su)->clear mac multicast 01-01-22-33-44-55 24

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-23

show mac unreserved-flood

show mac unreserved-flood

Usethiscommandtodisplaythestateofmulticastfloodprotection.

Syntax
show mac unreserved-flood

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampledisplaysthestatusofmulticastfloodprotection.
B2(su)->show mac unreserved-flood mac unreserved flood is disabled.

set mac unreserved-flood

Usethiscommandtoenableordisablemulticastfloodprotection.Whenenabled,thisprevents policyprofilesrequiringafull10masksfrombeingloaded.

Syntax
set mac unreserved-flood {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable|enable Disablesorenablesmulticastfloodprotection.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Thefollowingaddresseswillbeforwardedwhenthisfunctionisenabled: 01:80:C2:00:00:11 01:80:C2:00:00:14 01:80:C2:00:00:15 Thedefaultstateisdisabled,andtheseaddresseswillnotbeforwarded.

13-24

Logging and Network Management

Configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

Example
Thisexampleenablesmulticastfloodprotection.
B2(su)->set mac unreserved-flood enable

Configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

Purpose
ToconfiguretheSimpleNetworkTimeProtocol(SNTP),whichsynchronizesdeviceclocksina network.

Commands
For information about... show sntp set sntp client clear sntp client set sntp server clear sntp server set sntp poll-interval clear sntp poll-interval set sntp poll-retry clear sntp poll-retry set sntp poll-timeout clear sntp poll-timeout Refer to page... 13-25 13-27 13-27 13-28 13-28 13-29 13-29 13-30 13-30 13-31 13-31

show sntp
UsethiscommandtodisplaySNTPclientsettings.

Syntax
show sntp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-25

show sntp

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySNTPclientsettings:
B2(su)->show sntp SNTP Version: 3 Current Time: TUE SEP 09 16:13:33 2003 Timezone: 'EST', offset from UTC is -4 hours and 0 minutes Client Mode: unicast Broadcast Count: 0 Poll Interval: 512 seconds Poll Retry: 1 Poll Timeout: 5 seconds SNTP Poll Requests: 1175 Last SNTP Update: TUE SEP 09 16:05:24 2003 Last SNTP Request: TUE SEP 09 16:05:24 2003 Last SNTP Status: Success SNTP-Server Precedence Status ------------------------------------------10.2.8.6 2 Active 144.111.29.19 1 Active

Table 1342providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 13-42

Output SNTP Version Current Time Timezone Client Mode Broadcast Count Poll Interval Poll Retry Poll Timeout

show sntp Output Details

What It Displays... SNTP version number. Current time on the system clock. Time zone name and amount it is offset from UTC (Universal Time). Whether SNTP client is operating in unicast or broadcast mode. Set using set sntp client command (set sntp client on page 13-27). Number of SNTP broadcast frames received. Interval between SNTP unicast requests. Default of 512 seconds can be reset using the set sntp poll-interval command (set sntp poll-interval on page 13-29). Number of poll retries to a unicast SNTP server. Default of 1 can be reset using the set sntp poll-retry command (set sntp poll-retry on page 13-30). Timeout for a response to a unicast SNTP request. Default of 5 seconds can be reset using set sntp poll-timeout command (set sntp poll-timeout on page 13-31).

SNTP Poll Requests Total number of SNTP poll requests. Last SNTP Update Last SNTP Request Last SNTP Status SNTP-Server Precedence Date and time of most recent SNTP update. Date and time of most recent SNTP request. Whether or not broadcast reception or unicast transmission and reception was successful. IP address(es) of SNTP server(s). Precedence level of SNTP server in relation to its peers. Highest precedence is 1 and lowest is 10. Default of 1 can be reset using the set sntp server command (set sntp server on page 13-28). Whether or not the SNTP server is active.

Status

13-26

Logging and Network Management

set sntp client

set sntp client

UsethiscommandtosettheSNTPoperationmode.

Syntax
set sntp client {broadcast | unicast | disable}

Parameters
broadcast unicast disable EnablesSNTPinbroadcastclientmode. EnablesSNTPinunicast(pointtopoint)clientmode.Inthismode,the clientmustsupplytheIPaddressfromwhichtoretrievethecurrenttime. DisablesSNTP.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableSNTPinbroadcastmode:
B2(su)->set sntp client broadcast

clear sntp client

UsethiscommandtocleartheSNTPclientsoperationalmode.

Syntax
clear sntp client

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheSNTPclientsoperationalmode:
B2(su)->clear sntp client

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-27

set sntp server

set sntp server

UsethiscommandtoaddaserverfromwhichtheSNTPclientwillretrievethecurrenttimewhen operatinginunicastmode.Upto10serverscanbesetasSNTPservers.

Syntax
set sntp server ip-address [precedence]

Parameters
ipaddress precedence SpecifiestheSNTPserversIPaddress. (Optional)SpecifiesthisSNTPserversprecedenceinrelationtoitspeers. Validvaluesare1(highest)to10(lowest).

Defaults
Ifprecedenceisnotspecified,1willbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheserveratIPaddress10.21.1.100 asan SNTPserver:
B2(su)->set sntp server 10.21.1.100

clear sntp server

UsethiscommandtoremoveoneorallserversfromtheSNTPserverlist.

Syntax
clear sntp server {ip-address | all}

Parameters
ipaddress all SpecifiestheIPaddressofaservertoremovefromtheSNTPserverlist. RemovesallserversfromtheSNTPserverlist.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoremovetheserveratIPaddress10.21.1.100 fromtheSNTPserverlist:
B2(su)->clear sntp server 10.21.1.100

13-28

Logging and Network Management

set sntp poll-interval

set sntp poll-interval

UsethiscommandtosetthepollintervalbetweenSNTPunicastrequests.

Syntax
set sntp poll-interval interval

Parameters
interval Specifiesthepollintervalinseconds.Validvaluesare16to16284.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheSNTPpollintervalto30seconds:
B2(su)->set sntp poll-interval 30

clear sntp poll-interval

UsethiscommandtoclearthepollintervalbetweenunicastSNTPrequests.

Syntax
clear sntp poll-interval

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheSNTPpollinterval:
B2(su)->clear sntp poll-interval

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-29

set sntp poll-retry

set sntp poll-retry

UsethiscommandtosetthenumberofpollretriestoaunicastSNTPserver.

Syntax
set sntp poll-retry retry

Parameters
retry Specifiesthenumberofretries.Validvaluesare0to10.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthenumberofSNTPpollretriesto5:
B2(su)->set sntp poll-retry 5

clear sntp poll-retry

UsethiscommandtoclearthenumberofpollretriestoaunicastSNTPserver.

Syntax
clear sntp poll-retry

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearthenumberofSNTPpollretries:
B2(su)->clear sntp poll-retry

13-30

Logging and Network Management

set sntp poll-timeout

set sntp poll-timeout

Usethiscommandtosetthepolltimeout(inseconds)foraresponsetoaunicastSNTPrequest.

Syntax
set sntp poll-timeout timeout

Parameters
timeout Specifiesthepolltimeoutinseconds.Validvaluesare1to30.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheSNTPpolltimeoutto10seconds:
B2(su)->set sntp poll-timeout 10

clear sntp poll-timeout

UsethiscommandtocleartheSNTPpolltimeout.

Syntax
clear sntp poll-timeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheSNTPpolltimeout:
B2(su)->clear sntp poll-timeout

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-31

Configuring Node Aliases

Configuring Node Aliases

Purpose
Toreview,disable,andreenablenode(port)aliasfunctionality,which determineswhatnetwork protocolsarerunningononeormoreports.

Commands
For information about... show nodealias config set nodealias clear nodealias config Refer to page... 13-32 13-33 13-34

show nodealias config

Usethiscommandtodisplaynodealiasconfigurationsettingsononeormoreports.

Syntax
show nodealias config [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysnodealiasconfigurationsettingsforspecificport(s).

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,nodealiasconfigurationswillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaynodealiasconfigurationsettingsforportsge.2.1through9:
B2(rw)->show nodealias config ge.2.1-9 Port Number Max Entries --------------------ge.2.1 16 ge.2.2 47 ge.2.3 47 ge.2.4 47 ge.2.5 47 ge.2.6 47 ge.2.7 47 ge.2.8 47 ge.2.9 4000 Used Entries -----------0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 Status -----Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable

Table 1343providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.

13-32

Logging and Network Management

set nodealias

Table 13-43
Output Port Number Max Entries Used Entries Status

show nodealias config Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. Maximum number of alias entries configured for this port. Number of alias entries (out of the maximum amount configured) already used by this port. Whether or not a node alias agent is enabled (default) or disabled on this port.

set nodealias
Usethiscommandtoenableordisableanodealiasagentononeormoreports,orsetthe maximumnumberofaliasentriesperport.

Syntax
set nodealias {enable | disable | maxentries maxentries} port-string

Parameters
enable|disable maxentriesmaxentries portstring Enablesordisablesanodealiasagent. Setthemaximumnumberofaliasentriesperports.Validrangeis0to 4096.Thedefaultvalueis32. Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoenable/disablenodealiasagentorset amaximumnumberofentries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Uponpacketreception,nodealiasesaredynamicallyassignedtoportsenabledwithanalias agent,whichisthedefaultsettingonSecureStackB2devices.Nodealiasescannotbestatically created,butcanbedeletedusingtheclearnodealiascommandasdescribedinclearnodealias configonpage 1334.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisablethenodealiasagentonge.1.3:
B2(su)->set nodealias disable ge.1.3

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

13-33

clear nodealias config

clear nodealias config

Usethiscommandtoresetnodealiasstatetoenabledandclearthemaximumentriesvalue.

Syntax
clear nodealias config port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoresetthenodealiasconfiguration.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoresetthenodealiasconfigurationonge.1.3:
B2(su)->clear nodealias config ge.1.3

13-34

Logging and Network Management

14
RMON Configuration
ThischapterdescribesthecommandsusedtoconfigureRMONonaSecureStackB2switch.
For information about... RMON Monitoring Group Functions Statistics Group Commands History Group Commands Alarm Group Commands Event Group Commands Filter Group Commands Packet Capture Commands Refer to page... 14-1 14-3 14-6 14-9 14-13 14-16 14-20

RMON Monitoring Group Functions

RMON(RemoteNetworkMonitoring)providescomprehensivenetworkfaultdiagnosis, planning,andperformancetuninginformationandallowsforinteroperabilitybetweenSNMP managementstationsandmonitoringagents.RMONextendstheSNMPMIBcapabilityby definingadditionalMIBsthatgenerateamuchrichersetofdataaboutnetworkusage.TheseMIB groupseachgatherspecificsetsofdatatomeetcommonnetworkmonitoringrequirements. Table 1444liststheRMONmonitoringgroupssupportedonSecureStackB2devices,each groupsfunctionandtheelementsitmonitors,andtheassociatedconfigurationcommands needed.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-1

RMON Monitoring Group Functions

Table 14-44
RMON Group Statistics

RMON Monitoring Group Functions and Commands

What It Does... Records statistics measured by the RMON probe for each monitored interface on the device. What It Monitors... Packets dropped, packets sent, bytes sent (octets), broadcast and multicast packets, CRC errors, oversized and undersized packets, fragments, jabbers, and counters for packets. Sample period, number of samples and item(s) sampled. CLI Command(s) show rmon stats on page 14-3 set rmon stats on page 14-5 clear rmon stats on page 14-6 show rmon history on page 14-7 set rmon history on page 14-7 clear rmon history on page 14-8

History

Records periodic statistical samples from a network.

Alarm

Periodically gathers statistical samples from variables in the probe and compares them with previously configured thresholds. If the monitored variable crosses a threshold, an event is generated. Controls the generation and notification of events from the device.

Alarm type, interval, starting threshold, stop threshold.

show rmon alarm on page 14-9 set rmon alarm properties on page 14-10 set rmon alarm status on page 14-11 clear rmon alarm on page 14-12

Event

Event type, description, last time event was sent.

show rmon event on page 14-13 set rmon event properties on page 14-14 set rmon event status on page 14-15 clear rmon event on page 14-15

14-2

RMON Configuration

Statistics Group Commands

Table 14-44
RMON Group Filter

RMON Monitoring Group Functions and Commands (Continued)

What It Does... Allows packets to be matched by a filter equation. These matched packets form a data stream or channel that may be captured. What It Monitors... Packets matching the filter configuration. CLI Command(s) show rmon channel on page 14-16 set rmon channel on page 14-17 clear rmon channel on page 14-18 show rmon filter on page 14-18 set rmon filter on page 14-19 clear rmon filter on page 14-20

Packet Capture

Allows packets to be captured upon a filter match.

Packets matching the filter configuration.

show rmon capture on page 14-21 set rmon capture on page 14-22 clear rmon capture on page 14-22

Statistics Group Commands

Purpose
Todisplay,configure,andclearRMONstatistics.

Note: Due to hardware limitations, the only frame error counted is oversized frames.

Commands
For information about... show rmon stats set rmon stats clear rmon stats Refer to page... 14-3 14-5 14-6

show rmon stats

UsethiscommandtodisplayRMONstatisticsmeasuredforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show rmon stats [port-string]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-3

show rmon stats

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysRMONstatisticsforspecificport(s).

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,RMONstatswillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayRMONstatisticsforGigabitEthernetport1inswitch1.
:

B2(su)->show rmon stats ge.1.1 Port: ge.1.1 ------------------------------------Index = 1 Owner = monitor Data Source = ifIndex.1 Drop Events Collisions Jabbers Broadcast Pkts Multicast Pkts CRC Errors Undersize Pkts Oversize Pkts Fragments = = = = = = = = = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Packets Octets 0 64 65 - 127 128 - 255 256 - 511 512 - 1023 1024 - 1518 = = = = = = = = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Octets Octets Octets Octets Octets Octets

Table 1445providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 14-45

Output Port Owner Data Source Drop Events

show rmon stats Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. Name of the entity that configured this entry. Monitor is default. Data source of the statistics being displayed. Total number of times that the switch was forced to discard frames due to lack of available switch device resources. This does not display the number of frames dropped, only the number of times the switch was forced to discard frames. Total number of collisions that have occurred on this interface. Total number of frames that were greater than 1518 bytes and had either a bad FCS or a bad CRC. Total number of frames (including bad frames, broadcast frames, and multicast frames) received on this interface. Total number of good frames that were directed to the broadcast address. This value does not include multicast frames. Total number of good frames that were directed to the multicast address. This value does not include broadcast frames.

Collisions Jabbers Packets Broadcast Pkts Multicast Pkts

14-4

RMON Configuration

set rmon stats

Table 14-45
Output CRC Errors

show rmon stats Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Number of frames with bad Cyclic Redundancy Checks (CRC) received from the network. The CRC is a 4-byte field in the data frame that ensures that the data received is the same as the data that was originally sent. Number of frames received containing less than the minimum Ethernet frame size of 64 bytes (not including the preamble) but having a valid CRC. Number of frames received that exceeded 1518 data bytes (not including the preamble) but had a valid CRC. Number of received frames that are not the minimum number of bytes in length, or received frames that had a bad or missing Frame Check Sequence (FCS), were less than 64 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS bytes) and had an invalid CRC. It is normal for this value to increment since fragments are a normal result of collisions in a half-duplex network. Total number of packets, including bad, broadcast and multicast. Total number of octets (bytes) of data, including those in bad frames, received on this interface. Total number of frames, including bad frames, received that were 64 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS bytes). Total number of frames, including bad frames, received that were between 65 and 127 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS bytes). Total number of frames, including bad frames, received that were between 128 and 255 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS bytes). Total number of frames, including bad frames, received that were between 256 and 511 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS bytes). Total number of frames, including bad frames, received that were between 512 and 1023 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS bytes). Total number of frames, including bad frames, received that were between 1024 and 1518 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS bytes).

Undersize Pkts Oversize Pkts Fragments

Packets Octets 0 64 Octets 65 127 Octets 128 255 Octets 256 511 Octets 512 1023 Octets 1024 1518 Octets

set rmon stats

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanRMONstatisticsentry.

Syntax
set rmon stats index port-string [owner]

Parameters
index portstring owner Specifiesanindexforthisstatisticsentry. Specifiesport(s)towhichthisentrywillbeassigned. (Optional)Assignsanownerforthisentry.

Defaults
Ifownerisnotspecified,monitorwillbeapplied.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-5

clear rmon stats

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoconfigureRMONstatisticsentry2forge.1.20:
B2(rw)->set rmon stats 2 ge.1.20

clear rmon stats

UsethiscommandtodeleteoneormoreRMONstatisticsentries.

Syntax
clear rmon stats {index-list | to-defaults}

Parameters
indexlist todefaults Specifiesoneormorestatsentriestobedeleted,causingthemtodisappear fromanyfutureRMONqueries. Resetsallhistoryentriestodefaultvalues.Thiswillcauseentriesto reappearinRMONqueries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeleteRMONstatisticsentry2:
B2(rw)->clear rmon stats 2

History Group Commands

Purpose
Todisplay,configure,andclearRMONhistorypropertiesandstatistics.

Commands
For information about... show rmon history set rmon history clear rmon history Refer to page... 14-7 14-7 14-8

14-6

RMON Configuration

show rmon history

show rmon history

UsethiscommandtodisplayRMONhistorypropertiesandstatistics.TheRMONhistorygroup recordsperiodicstatisticalsamplesfromanetwork.

Syntax
show rmon history [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysRMONhistoryentriesforspecificport(s).

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,informationaboutallRMONhistoryentrieswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayRMONhistoryentriesforGigabitEthernetport1inswitch1. Acontrolentrydisplaysfirst,followedbyactualentriescorrespondingtothecontrolentry.Inthis case,thedefaultsettingsforentryowner,samplinginterval,andmaximumnumberofentries. (buckets)havenotbeenchangedfromtheirdefaultvalues.Foradescriptionofthetypesof statisticsshown,refertoTable 1445.
:

B2(su)->show rmon history ge.1.1 Port: ge.1.1 ------------------------------------Index 1 Owner = monitor Status = valid Data Source = ifIndex.1 Interval = 30 Buckets Requested = 50 Buckets Granted = 10 Sample 2779 Interval Start: 1 days 0 hours 2 minutes 22 seconds Drop Events = 0 Undersize Pkts = 0 Octets = 0 Oversize Pkts = 0 Packets = 0 Fragments = 0 Broadcast Pkts = 0 Jabbers = 0 Multicast Pkts = 0 Collisions = 0 CRC Align Errors = 0 Utilization(%) = 0

set rmon history

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanRMONhistoryentry.

Syntax
set rmon history index [port-string] [buckets buckets] [interval interval] [owner owner]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-7

clear rmon history

Parameters
indexlist portstring bucketsbuckets intervalinterval ownerowner Specifiesanindexnumberforthisentry. (Optional)Assignsthisentrytoaspecificport. (Optional)Specifiesthemaximumnumberofentriestomaintain. (Optional)Specifiesthesamplingintervalinseconds. (Optional)Specifiesanownerforthisentry.

Defaults
Ifbucketsisnotspecified,themaximumnumberofentriesmaintainedwillbe50. Ifnotspecified,intervalwillbesetto30seconds. Ifownerisnotspecified,monitorwillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowconfigureRMONhistoryentry1onportge.2.1tosampleevery20 seconds:
B2(rw)->set rmon history 1 ge.2.1 interval 20

clear rmon history

UsethiscommandtodeleteoneormoreRMONhistoryentriesorresetoneormoreentriesto defaultvalues.Forspecificvalues,refertosetrmonhistoryonpage 147.

Syntax
clear rmon history {index-list | to-defaults}

Parameters
indexlist todefaults Specifiesoneormorehistoryentriestobedeleted,causingthemto disappearfromanyfutureRMONqueries. Resetsallhistoryentriestodefaultvalues.Thiswillcauseentriesto reappearinRMONqueries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodeleteRMONhistoryentry1:
B2(rw)->clear rmon history 1

14-8

RMON Configuration

Alarm Group Commands

Alarm Group Commands

Purpose
Todisplay,configure,andclearRMONalarmentriesandproperties.

Commands
For information about... show rmon alarm set rmon alarm properties set rmon alarm status clear rmon alarm Refer to page... 14-9 14-10 14-11 14-12

show rmon alarm

UsethiscommandtodisplayRMONalarmentries.TheRMONalarmgroupperiodicallytakes statisticalsamplesfromRMONvariablesandcomparesthemwithpreviouslyconfigured thresholds.IfthemonitoredvariablecrossesathresholdanRMONeventisgenerated.

Syntax
show rmon alarm [index]

Parameters
index (Optional)DisplaysRMONalarmentriesforaspecificentryindexID.

Defaults
Ifindexisnotspecified,informationaboutallRMONalarmentrieswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayRMONalarmentry3:
B2(rw)->show rmon alarm 3 Index 3 --------------------Owner = Status = Variable = Sample Type = Interval = Rising Threshold = Rising Event Index =

Manager valid 1.3.6.1.4.1.5624.1.2.29.1.2.1.0 delta Startup Alarm 30 Value 1 Falling Threshold 2 Falling Event Index

= = = =

rising 0 0 0

Table 1446providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 14-9

set rmon alarm properties

Table 14-46
Output Index Owner Status Variable Sample Type Startup Alarm Interval

show rmon alarm Output Details

What It Displays... Index number for this alarm entry. Text string identifying who configured this entry. Whether this event entry is enabled (valid) or disabled. MIB object to be monitored. Whether the monitoring method is an absolute or a delta sampling. Whether alarm generated when this entry is first enabled is rising, falling, or either. Interval in seconds at which RMON will conduct sample monitoring. Minimum threshold for causing a rising alarm. Maximum threshold for causing a falling alarm. Index number of the RMON event to be triggered when the rising threshold is crossed. Index number of the RMON event to be triggered when the falling threshold is crossed.

Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Index Falling Event Index

set rmon alarm properties

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanRMONalarmentry,ortocreateanewalarmentrywithan unusedalarmindexnumber.

Syntax
set rmon alarm properties index [interval interval] [object object] [type {absolute | delta}] [startup {rising | falling | either}] [rthresh rthresh] [fthresh fthresh] [revent revent] [fevent fevent] [owner owner]

Parameters
index intervalinterval objectobject Specifiesanindexnumberforthisentry.Maximumnumberorentriesis 50.Maximumvalueis65535. (Optional)Specifiesaninterval(inseconds)forRMONtoconductsample monitoring. (Optional)SpecifiesaMIBobjecttobemonitored.
Note: This parameter is not mandatory for executing the command, but must be specified in order to enable the alarm entry configuration.

typeabsolute| delta

(Optional)Specifiesthemonitoringmethodas:samplingtheabsolute valueoftheobject,orthedifference(delta)betweenobjectsamples.

14-10

RMON Configuration

set rmon alarm status

startuprising| falling|either

(Optional)Specifiesthetypeofalarmgeneratedwhenthiseventisfirst enabledas: RisingSendsalarmwhenanRMONeventreachesamaximum thresholdconditionisreached,forexample,morethan30collisions persecond. FallingSendsalarmwhenRMONeventfallsbelowaminimum thresholdcondition,forexamplewhenthenetworkisbehaving normallyagain. EitherSendsalarmwheneitherarisingorfallingthresholdis reached.

rthreshrthresh fthreshfthresh reventrevent feventfevent ownerowner

(Optional)Specifiesaminimumthresholdforcausingarisingalarm. Specifiesamaximumthresholdforcausingafallingalarm. SpecifiestheindexnumberoftheRMONeventtobetriggeredwhenthe risingthresholdiscrossed. SpecifiestheindexnumberoftheRMONeventtobetriggeredwhenthe fallingthresholdiscrossed. (Optional)Specifiesthenameoftheentitythatconfiguredthisalarm entry.

Defaults
interval3600seconds typeabsolute startuprising rthresh0 fthresh0 revent0 fevent0 ownermonitor

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoconfigurearisingRMONalarm.Thisentrywillconductmonitoring ofthedeltabetweensamplesevery30seconds:
B2(rw)->set rmon alarm properties 3 interval 30 object 1.3.6.1.4.1.5624.1.2.29.1.2.1.0 type delta rthresh 1 revent 2 owner Manager

set rmon alarm status

UsethiscommandtoenableanRMONalarmentry.Analarmisanotificationthatastatistical sampleofamonitoredvariablehascrossedaconfiguredthreshold.

Syntax
set rmon alarm status index enable
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 14-11

clear rmon alarm

Parameters
index enable Specifiesanindexnumberforthisentry.Maximumnumberorentriesis 50.Maximumvalueis65535. Enablesthisalarmentry.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
AnRMONalarmentrycanbecreatedusingthiscommand,configuredusingthesetrmonalarm propertiescommand(setrmonalarmpropertiesonpage 1410),thenenabledusingthis command.AnRMONalarmentrycanbecreatedandconfiguredatthesametimebyspecifying anunusedindexwiththesetrmonalarmpropertiescommand.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableRMONalarmentry3:
B2(rw)->set rmon alarm status 3 enable

clear rmon alarm

UsethiscommandtodeleteanRMONalarmentry.

Syntax
clear rmon alarm index

Parameters
index Specifiestheindexnumberofentrytobecleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearRMONalarmentry1:
B2(rw)->clear rmon alarm 1

14-12

RMON Configuration

Event Group Commands

Event Group Commands

Purpose
TodisplayandclearRMONevents,andtoconfigureRMONeventproperties.

Commands
For information about... show rmon event set rmon event properties set rmon event status clear rmon event Refer to page... 14-13 14-14 14-15 14-15

show rmon event

UsethiscommandtodisplayRMONevententryproperties.

Syntax
show rmon event [index]

Parameters
index (Optional)DisplaysRMONpropertiesandlogentriesforaspecificentry indexID.

Defaults
Ifindexisnotspecified,informationaboutallRMONentrieswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayRMONevententry3:
B2(rw)->show rmon event 3 Index 3 ---------------Owner = Status = Description = Type = Community = Last Time Sent =

Manager valid STP Topology change log-and-trap public 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 37 seconds

Table 1447providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-13

set rmon event properties

Table 14-47
Output Index Owner Status Description Type Community Last Time Sent

show rmon event Output Details

What It Displays... Index number for this event entry. Text string identifying who configured this entry. Whether this event entry is enabled (valid) or disabled. Text string description of this event. Whether the event notification will be a log entry, and SNMP trap, both, or none. SNMP community name if message type is set to trap. When an event notification matching this entry was sent.

set rmon event properties

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanRMONevententry,ortocreateanewevententrywithan unusedeventindexnumber.

Syntax
set rmon event properties index [description description] [type {none | log | trap | both}] [community community] [owner owner]

Parameters
index description description typenone|log| trap|both community community Specifiesanindexnumberforthisentry.Maximumnumberofentriesis 100.Maximumvalueis65535. (Optional)Specifiesatextstringdescriptionofthisevent. (Optional)SpecifiesthetypeofRMONeventnotificationas:none,alog tableentry,anSNMPtrap,orbothalogentryandatrapmessage. (Optional)SpecifiesanSNMPcommunitynametouseifthemessage typeissettotrap.FordetailsonsettingSNMPtrapsandcommunity names,refertoCreatingaBasicSNMPTrapConfigurationon page 636. (Optional)Specifiesthenameoftheentitythatconfiguredthisentry.

ownerowner

Defaults
Ifdescriptionisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied. Ifnotspecified,typenonewillbeapplied. Ifownerisnotspecified,monitorwillbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateandenableanRMONevententrycalledSTPtopology changethatwillsendbothalogentryandanSNMPtrapmessagetothepubliccommunity:

14-14

RMON Configuration

set rmon event status

B2(rw)->set rmon event properties 2 description "STP topology change" type both community public owner Manager

set rmon event status

UsethiscommandtoenableanRMONevententry.Anevententrydescribestheparametersofan RMONeventthatcanbetriggered.EventscanbefiredbyRMONalarmsandcanbeconfiguredto createalogentry,generateatrap,orboth.

Syntax
set rmon event status index enable

Parameters
index enable Specifiesanindexnumberforthisentry.Maximumnumberofentriesis 100.Maximumvalueis65535. Enablesthisevententry.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
AnRMONevententrycanbecreatedusingthiscommand,configuredusingthesetrmonevent propertiescommand(setrmoneventpropertiesonpage 1414),thenenabledusingthis command.AnRMONevententrycanbecreatedandconfiguredatthesametimebyspecifyingan unusedindexwiththesetrmoneventpropertiescommand.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableRMONevententry1:
B2(rw)->set rmon event status 1 enable

clear rmon event

UsethiscommandtodeleteanRMONevententryandanyassociatedlogentries.

Syntax
clear rmon event index

Parameters
index Specifiestheindexnumberoftheentrytobecleared.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-15

Filter Group Commands

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearRMONevent1:
B2(rw)->clear rmon event 1

Filter Group Commands

Thepacketcaptureandfilterfunctionisdisabledbydefault.Onlyoneinterfacecanbeconfigured forcapturingandfilteringatatime. Whenpacketcaptureisenabledonaninterface,theSecureStackB2switchwillcapture100frames asclosetosequentiallyaspossible.These100frameswillbeplacedintoabufferforinspection.If thereisdatainthebufferwhenthefunctionisstarted,thebufferwillbeoverwritten.Once100 frameshavebeencaptured,thecapturewillstop.Filteringwillbeperformedontheframes capturedinthebuffer.Therefore,onlyasubsetoftheframescapturedwillbeavailablefor display.

Note: Packet capture is sampling only and does not guarantee receipt of back to back packets.

Onechannelatatimecanbesupported,withuptothreefilters.Configuredchannel,filter,and buffercontrolinformationwillbesavedacrossresets,butcapturedframeswithinthebufferwill notbesaved. Thisfunctioncannotbeusedconcurrentlywithportmirroring.Thesystemwillchecktoprevent concurrentlyenablingbothfunctions,andawarningwillbegeneratedintheCLIifattempted.

Commands
For information about... show rmon channel set rmon channel clear rmon channel show rmon filter set rmon filter clear rmon filter Refer to page... 14-16 14-17 14-18 14-18 14-19 14-20

show rmon channel

UsethiscommandtodisplayRMONchannelentriesforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show rmon channel [port-string]

14-16

RMON Configuration

set rmon channel

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysRMONchannelentriesforaspecificport(s).

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,informationaboutallchannelswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayRMONchannelinformationforge.2.12:
B2(rw)->show rmon channel ge.2.12 Port ge.2.12 Channel index= 628 EntryStatus= valid ---------------------------------------------------------Control off AcceptType matched OnEventIndex 0 OffEventIndex 0 EventIndex 0 Status ready Matches 4498 Description Thu Dec 16 12:57:32 EST 2004 Owner NetSight smith

set rmon channel

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanRMONchannelentry.

Syntax
set rmon channel index port-string [accept {matched | failed}] [control {on | off}] [description description] [owner owner]

Parameters
index Specifiesanindexnumberforthisentry.Anentrywillautomaticallybe createdifanunusedindexnumberischosen.Maximumnumberof entriesis2.Maximumvalueis65535. Specifiestheportonwhichtrafficwillbemonitored. (Optional)Specifiestheactionofthefiltersonthischannelas: controlon|off description description ownerowner matchedPacketswillbeacceptedonfiltermatches failedPacketswillbeacceptediftheyfailamatch

portstring acceptmatched| failed

(Optional)Enablesordisablescontroloftheflowofdatathroughthe channel. (Optional)Specifiesadescriptionforthischannel. (Optional)Specifiesthenameoftheentitythatconfiguredthisentry.

Defaults
Ifanactionisnotspecified,packetswillbeacceptedonfiltermatches. Ifnotspecified,controlwillbesettooff.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-17

clear rmon channel

Ifadescriptionisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied. Ifownerisnotspecified,itwillbesettomonitor.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateanRMONchannelentry:
B2(rw)->set rmon channel 54313 ge.2.12 accept failed control on description "capture all"

clear rmon channel

UsethiscommandtoclearanRMONchannelentry.

Syntax
clear rmon channel index

Parameters
index Specifiesthechannelentrytobecleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearRMONchannelentry2:
B2(rw)->clear rmon channel 2

show rmon filter

UsethiscommandtodisplayoneormoreRMONfilterentries.

Syntax
show rmon filter [index index | channel channel]

Parameters
indexindex| channelchannel (Optional)Displaysinformationaboutaspecificfilterentry,oraboutall filterswhichbelongtoaspecificchannel.

Defaults
Ifnooptionsarespecified,informationforallfilterentrieswillbedisplayed.

14-18

RMON Configuration

set rmon filter

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayallRMONfilterentriesandchannelinformation:
B2(rw)->show rmon filter Index= 55508 Channel Index= 628 EntryStatus= valid ---------------------------------------------------------Data Offset 0 PktStatus 0 PktStatusMask 0 PktStatusNotMask 0 Owner ETS,NAC-D ----------------------------Data ff ff ff ff ff ff ----------------------------DataMask ff ff ff ff ff ff ----------------------------DataNotMask 00 00 00 00 00 00

set rmon filter

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanRMONfilterentry.

Syntax
set rmon filter index channel-index [offset offset] [status status] [smask smask] [snotmask snotmask] [data data] [dmask dmask] [dnotmask dnotmask] [owner owner]

Parameters
index Specifiesanindexnumberforthisentry.Anentrywillautomaticallybe createdifanunusedindexnumberischosen.Maximumnumberof entriesis10.Maximumvalueis65535. Specifiesthechanneltowhichthisfilterwillbeapplied. (Optional)Specifiesanoffsetfromthebeginningofthepackettolookfor matches. (Optional)Specifiespacketstatusbitsthataretobematched. (Optional)Specifiesthemaskappliedtostatustoindicatewhichbitsare significant. (Optional)Specifiestheinversionmaskthatindicateswhichbitsshould besetornotset (Optional)Specifiesthedatatobematched. (Optional)Specifiesthemaskappliedtodatatoindicatewhichbitsare significant. (Optional)Specifiestheinversionmaskthatindicateswhichbitsshould besetornotset. (Optional)Specifiesthenameoftheentitythatconfiguredthisentry.

channelindex offsetoffset statusstatus smasksmask snotmasksnotmask datadata dmaskdmask dnotmaskdnotmask owner

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-19

clear rmon filter

Defaults
Ifownerisnotspecified,itwillbesettomonitor. Ifnootheroptionsarespecified,none(0)willbeapplied.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateRMONfilter1andapplyittochannel9:
B2(rw)->set rmon filter 1 9 offset 30 data 0a154305 dmask ffffffff

clear rmon filter

UsethiscommandtoclearanRMONfilterentry.

Syntax
clear rmon filter {index index | channel channel}

Parameters
indexindex| channelchannel Clearsaspecificfilterentry,orallentriesbelongingtoaspecificchannel.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearRMONfilterentry1:
B2(rw)->clear rmon filter index 1

Packet Capture Commands

Notethatpacketcapturefilterissamplingonlyanddoesnotguaranteereceiptofbacktoback packets.

Purpose
TodisplayRMONcaptureentries,configure,enable,ordisablecaptureentries,andclearcapture entries.

14-20

RMON Configuration

show rmon capture

Commands
For information about... show rmon capture set rmon capture clear rmon capture Refer to page... 14-21 14-22 14-22

show rmon capture

UsethiscommandtodisplayRMONcaptureentriesandassociatedbuffercontrolentries.

Syntax
show rmon capture [index [nodata]]

Parameters
index nodata (Optional)Displaysthespecifiedbuffercontrolentryandallcaptured packetsassociatedwiththatentry. (Optional)Displaysonlythebuffercontrolentryspecifiedbyindex.

Defaults
Ifnooptionsarespecified,allbuffercontrolentriesandassociatedcapturedpacketswillbe displayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayRMONcaptureentriesandassociatedbufferentries:
B2(rw)->show rmon capture Buf.control= 28062 Channel= 38283 EntryStatus= valid ---------------------------------------------------------FullStatus avail FullAction lock Captured packets 251 Capture slice 1518 Download size 100 Download offset 0 Max Octet Requested 50000 Max Octet Granted 50000 Start time 1 days 0 hours 51 minutes 15 seconds Owner monitor

captureEntry= 1 Buff.control= 28062 -------------------------------------------Pkt ID 9 Pkt time 1 days 0 hours 51 minutes 15 seconds Pkt Length 93 Pkt status 0 Data: 00 00 5e 00 01 01 00 01 f4 00 7d ce 08 00 45 00 00 4b b4 b9 00 00 40 11 32 5c 0a 15 43 05 86 8d bf e5 00 a1 0e 2b 00 37 cf ca 30 2d 02 01 00 04 06 70 75 62 6c 69 63 a2 20 02 02 0c 92 02 01 00 02 01 00 30 14 30 12 06 0d 2b 06 01 02 01 10 07

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-21

set rmon capture

01 01 0b 81 fd 1c 02 01 01 00 11 0b 00

set rmon capture

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanRMONcaptureentry.

Syntax
set rmon capture index {channel [action {lock}] [slice slice] [loadsize loadsize] [offset offset] [asksize asksize] [owner owner]}

Parameters
index channel actionlock Specifiesabuffercontrolentry. Specifiesthechanneltowhichthiscaptureentrywillbeapplied. (Optional)Specifiestheactionofthebufferwhenitisfullas: sliceslice loadsizeloadsize offsetoffset asksizeasksize lockPacketswillceasetobeaccepted

(Optional)Specifiesthemaximumoctetsfromeachpackettobesavedin abuffer.Currently,theonlyvalueallowedis1518. (Optional)Specifiesthemaximumoctetsfromeachpackettobe downloadedfromthebuffer.Thedefaultis100. (Optional)Specifiesthefirstoctetfromeachpacketthatwillberetrieved. (Optional)Specifiestherequestedmaximumoctetstobesavedinthis buffer.Currently,theonlyvalueacceptedis1,whichrequestsasmany octetsaspossible. (Optional)Specifiesthenameoftheentitythatconfiguredthisentry.

owner

Defaults
Ifnotspecified,actiondefaultstolock. Ifnotspecified,offsetdefaultsto0. Ifnotspecified,asksizedefaultsto1(whichwillrequestasmanyoctetsaspossible). Ifsliceisnotspecified,1518willbeapplied. Ifloadsizeisnotspecified,100willbeapplied. Ifownerisnotspecified,itwillbesettomonitor.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateRMONcaptureentry1tolistenonchannel628:
B2(rw)->set rmon capture 1 628

clear rmon capture

UsethiscommandtoclearsanRMONcaptureentry.

14-22

RMON Configuration

clear rmon capture

Syntax
clear rmon capture index

Parameters
index Specifiesthecaptureentrytobecleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearRMONcaptureentry1:
B2(rw)->clear rmon capture 1

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

14-23

clear rmon capture

14-24

RMON Configuration

15
DHCP Server Configuration
ThischapterdescribesthecommandstoconfiguretheIPv4DHCPserverfunctionalityona SecureStackB2switch.
For information about... DHCP Overview Configuring General DHCP Server Parameters Configuring IP Address Pools Refer to page... 15-1 15-3 15-10

DHCP Overview
DynamicHostConfigurationProtocol(DHCP)forIPv4isanetworklayerprotocolthat implementsautomaticormanualassignmentofIPaddressesandotherconfigurationinformation toclientdevicesbyservers.ADHCPservermanagesauserconfiguredpoolofIPaddressesfrom whichitcanmakeassignmentsuponclientrequests.ArelayagentpassesDHCPmessages betweenclientsandserverswhichareondifferentphysicalsubnets.

DHCP Server
DHCPserverfunctionalityallowstheSecureStackB2switchtoprovidebasicIPconfiguration informationtoaclientonthenetworkwhorequestssuchinformationusingtheDHCPprotocol. DHCPprovidesthefollowingmechanismsforIPaddressallocationbyaDHCPserver: AutomaticDHCPserverassignsanIPaddresstoaclientforalimitedperiodoftime(or untiltheclientexplicitlyrelinquishestheaddress)fromadefinedpoolofIPaddresses configuredontheserver. ManualAclientsIPaddressisassignedbythenetworkadministrator,andDHCPisused simplytoconveytheassignedaddresstotheclient.Thisismanagedbymeansofstatic addresspoolsconfiguredontheserver.

TheamountoftimethataparticularIPaddressisvalidforasystemiscalledalease.The SecureStackB2maintainsaleasedatabasewhichcontainsinformationabouteachassignedIP address,theMACaddresstowhichitisassigned,theleaseexpiration,andwhethertheaddress assignmentisdynamic(automatic)orstatic(,manual).TheDHCPleasedatabaseisstoredinflash memory. InadditiontoassigningIPaddresses,theDHCPservercanalsobeconfiguredtoassignthe followingtorequestingclients: Defaultrouter(s) DNSserver(s)anddomainname

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-1

DHCP Overview

NetBIOSWINSserver(s)andnodename Bootfile DHCPoptionsasdefinedbyRFC2132

Note: A total of 16 address pools, dynamic and/or static, can be configured on the SecureStack B2.

Configuring a DHCP Server

ForDHCPtofunctiononSecureStackB2systems,thesystemhastoknowabouttheIPnetwork forwhichtheDHCPpoolistobecreated.ThisisdonebyassociatingtheDHCPaddresspoolwith theswitchshostportIPaddress. ThefollowingtasksprovidebasicDHCPserverfunctionalitywhentheDHCPpoolisassociated withthesystemshostIPaddress. 1. Configurethesystem(stack)hostportIPaddresswiththesetipaddresscommand.Oncethe systemsIPaddressisconfigured,thesystemthenknowsabouttheconfiguredsubnet.For example:
set ip address 192.0.0.50 mask 255.255.255.0

2. 3.

EnableDHCPserverfunctionalityonthesystemwiththesetdhcpenablecommand. ConfigureanIPaddresspoolfordynamicIPaddressassignment.Theonlyrequiredstepsare tonamethepoolanddefinethenetworknumberandmaskforthepool.Notethatthepool hastobeinthesamesubnetandusethesamemaskasthesystemhostportIPaddress.For example:

set dhcp pool auto-pool network 192.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

AllDHCPclientsservedbythisswitchmustbeinthesameVLANasthesystemshostport. OptionalDHCPservertasksinclude: Youcanlimitthescopeofaddressesassignedtoapoolfordynamicaddressassignmentwith thesetdhcpexcludecommand.Upto128nonoverlappingaddressrangescanbeexcluded ontheSecureStackB2.Forexample:

set dhcp exclude 192.0.0.1 192.0.0.10

Note: The IP address of the systems host port is automatically excluded.

Configurestaticaddresspoolsformanualaddressassignment.Theonlyrequiredstepsareto namethepool,configureeitherthehardwareaddressoftheclientortheclientidentifier,and configuretheIPaddressandmaskforthemanualbinding.Forexample:

set dhcp pool static-pool hardware-address 0011.2233.4455 set dhcp pool static-pool host 192.0.0.200 255.255.255.0

SetotherDHCPserverparameterssuchasthenumberofpingpacketstobesentbefore assigninganIPaddress,orenablingconflictlogging.

15-2

DHCP Server Configuration

Configuring General DHCP Server Parameters

Configuring General DHCP Server Parameters

Purpose
ToconfigureDHCPserverparameters,andtodisplayandclearaddressbindinginformation, serverstatistics,andconflictinformation.

Commands
For information about... set dhcp set dhcp bootp set dhcp conflict logging show dhcp conflict clear dhcp conflict set dhcp exclude clear dhcp exclude set dhcp ping clear dhcp ping show dhcp binding clear dhcp binding show dhcp server statistics clear dhcp server statistics Refer to page... 15-3 15-4 15-4 15-5 15-5 15-6 15-6 15-7 15-7 15-8 15-9 15-9 15-10

set dhcp
UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheDHCPserverfunctionalityontheSecureStackB2.

Syntax
set dhcp {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnablesordisablesDHCPserverfunctionality.Bydefault,DHCPserver isdisabled.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-3

set dhcp bootp

Example
ThisexampleenablesDHCPserverfunctionality.
B2(rw)->set dhcp enable

set dhcp bootp

UsethiscommandtoenableordisableautomaticaddressallocationforBOOTPclients.By default,addressallocationforBOOTPclientsisdisabled.RefertoRFC1534,Interoperation BetweenDHCPandBOOTP,formoreinformation.

Syntax
set dhcp bootp {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnablesordisablesaddressallocationforBOOTPclients.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleenablesaddressallocationforBOOTPclients.
B2(rw)->set dhcp bootp enable

set dhcp conflict logging

Usethiscommandtoenableconflictlogging.Bydefault,conflictloggingisenabled.Usetheclear dhcpconflictloggingcommandtodisableconflictlogging.

Syntax
set dhcp conflict logging

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleenablesDHCPconflictlogging.
B2(rw)->set dhcp conflict logging
15-4 DHCP Server Configuration

show dhcp conflict

show dhcp conflict

Usethiscommandtodisplayconflictinformation,foroneaddressoralladdresses.

Syntax
show dhcp conflict [address]

Parameters
address [Optional]Specifiestheaddressforwhichtodisplayconflictinformation.

Defaults
Ifnoaddressisspecified,conflictinformationforalladdressesisdisplayed.

Mode
Readonly.

Example
Thisexampledisplaysconflictinformationforalladdresses.Notethatpingistheonlydetection methodused.
B2(ro)->show dhcp conflict IP address ----------192.0.0.2 192.0.0.3 192.0.0.4 192.0.0.12 Detection Method ----------------Ping Ping Ping Ping Detection Time --------------0 days 19h:01m:23s 0 days 19h:00m:46s 0 days 19h:01m:25s 0 days 19h:01m:26s

clear dhcp conflict

Usethiscommandtoclearconflictinformationforoneoralladdresses,ortodisableconflict logging.

Syntax
clear dhcp conflict {logging | ip-address| *}

Parameters
logging ipaddress * Disablesconflictlogging. ClearstheconflictinformationforthespecifiedIPaddress. ClearstheconflictinformationforallIPaddresses.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-5

set dhcp exclude

Examples
ThisexampledisablesDHCPconflictlogging.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp conflict logging

ThisexampleclearstheconflictinformationfortheIPaddress192.0.0.2.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp conflict 192.0.0.2

set dhcp exclude

UsethiscommandtoconfiguretheIPaddressesthattheDHCPservershouldnotassigntoDHCP clients.Multipleaddressrangescanbeconfiguredbuttherangescannotoverlap.Upto128non overlappingaddressrangescanbeexcluded.

Syntax
set dhcp exclude low-ipaddr [high-ipaddr]

Parameters
lowipaddr highipaddr SpecifiesthefirstIPaddressintheaddressrangetobeexcludedfrom assignment. (Optional)SpecifiesthelastIPaddressintheaddressrangetobe excluded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplefirstconfigurestheaddresspoolnamedauto1with255addressesfortheClassC network172,20.28.0,withthesetdhcppoolnetworkcommand.Then,theexamplelimitsthe scopeoftheaddressesthatcanbeassignedbyaDHCPserverbyexcludingaddresses172.20.28.80 100,withthesetdhcpexcludecommand.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 network 172.20.28.0 24 B2(rw)->set dhcp exclude 172.20.28.80 172.20.28.100

clear dhcp exclude

UsethiscommandtocleartheconfiguredIPaddressesthattheDHCPservershouldnotassignto DHCPclients.

Syntax
clear dhcp exclude low-ipaddr [high-ipaddr]

15-6

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp ping

Parameters
lowipaddr highipaddr SpecifiesthefirstIPaddressintheaddressrangetobecleared. (Optional)SpecifiesthelastIPaddressintheaddressrangetobecleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleclearsthepreviouslyexcludedrangeofIPaddressesbetween192.168.1.88through 192.168.1.100.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp exclude 192.168.1.88 192.168.1.100

set dhcp ping

UsethiscommandtoconfigurethenumberofpingpacketstheDHCPserversendstoanIP addressbeforeassigningtheaddresstoarequestingclient.

Syntax
set dhcp ping packets number

Parameters
packetsnumber Specifiesthenumberofpingpacketstobesent.Thevalueofnumbercan be0,orrangefrom2to10.Entering0disablesthisfunction.Thedefault valueis2packets.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplesetsthenumberofpingpacketssentto3.
B2(rw)->set dhcp ping packets 3

clear dhcp ping

UsethiscommandtoresetthenumberofpingpacketssentbytheDHCPserverbacktothe defaultvalueof2.

Syntax
clear dhcp ping packets

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-7

show dhcp binding

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleresetsthenumberofpingpacketssentbacktothedefaultvalue.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp ping packets

show dhcp binding

UsethiscommandtodisplaybindinginformationforoneorallIPaddresses.

Syntax
show dhcp binding [ip-address]

Parameters
ipaddress (Optional)SpecifiestheIPaddressforwhichtodisplaybinding information.

Defaults
IfnoIPaddressisspecified,bindinginformationforalladdressesisdisplayed.

Mode
Readonly.

Example
Thisexampledisplaysbindinginformationaboutalladdresses.
B2(rw)->show dhcp binding IP address Hardware Address --------------------------192.0.0.6 00:33:44:56:22:39 192.0.0.8 00:33:44:56:22:33 192.0.0.10 00:33:44:56:22:34 192.0.0.11 00:33:44:56:22:35 192.0.0.12 00:33:44:56:22:36 192.0.0.13 00:33:44:56:22:37 192.0.0.1400:33:44:56:22:38 Lease Expiration ----------------00:11:02 00:10:22 00:09:11 00:10:05 00:10:30 infinite infinite Type ----Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Manual

15-8

DHCP Server Configuration

clear dhcp binding

clear dhcp binding

Usethiscommandtoclear(delete)oneorallDHCPaddressbindings.

Syntax
clear dhcp binding {ip-addr | *}

Parameters
ipaddr * SpecifiestheIPaddressforwhichtoclear/deletetheDHCPbinding. Deletesalladdressbindings.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampledeletestheDHCPaddressbindingforIPaddress192.168.1.1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp binding 192.168.1.1

show dhcp server statistics

UsethiscommandtodisplayDHCPserverstatistics.

Syntax
show dhcp server statistics

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-9

clear dhcp server statistics

Example
Thisexampledisplaysserverstatistics.
B2(ro)->show dhcp server statistics Automatic Bindings Expired Bindings Malformed Bindings Messages ---------DHCP DISCOVER DHCP REQUEST DHCP DECLINE DHCP RELEASE DHCP INFORM Messages ---------DHCP OFFER DHCP ACK DHCP NACK 36 6 0 Received ---------382 3855 0 67 1 Sent -----381 727 2

clear dhcp server statistics

UsethiscommandtoclearallDHCPservercounters.

Syntax
clear dhcp server statistics

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleclearsallDHCPservercounters.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp server statistics

Configuring IP Address Pools

Manual Pool Configuration Considerations
ThesubnetoftheIPaddressbeingissuedshouldbeonthesamesubnetastheingress interface(thatis,thesubnetofthehostIPaddressoftheswitch,orifroutinginterfacesare configured,thesubnetoftheroutinginterface).

15-10

DHCP Server Configuration

Configuring IP Address Pools

Amanualpoolcanbeconfiguredusingeithertheclientshardwareaddress(setdhcppool hardwareaddress)ortheclientsclientidentifier(setdhcppoolclientidentifier),butusing bothisnotrecommended. IftheincomingDHCPrequestpacketcontainsaclientidentifier,thenamanualpool configuredwiththatclientidentifiermustexistontheswitchinorderfortherequesttobe processed.Thehardwareaddressisnotchecked. Ifamanualpoolisconfiguredwithaclientidentifier,thentheincomingDHCPrequest packetfromthatclientmustincludethatclientidentifierinorderfortherequesttobe processed.Thehardwareaddressisnotchecked. Ahardwareaddressandtype(EthernetorIEEE802)configuredinamanualpoolischecked onlywhenaclientidentifierisnotalsoconfiguredforthepoolandtheincomingDHCP requestpacketdoesnotincludeaclientidentifieroption.

Purpose
ToconfigureandclearDHCPaddresspoolparameters,andtodisplayaddresspoolconfiguration information.

Note: A total of 16 address pools, dynamic and/or static, can be configured on the SecureStack B2.

Commands
For information about... set dhcp pool clear dhcp pool set dhcp pool network clear dhcp pool network set dhcp pool hardware-address clear dhcp pool hardware-address set dhcp pool host clear dhcp pool host set dhcp pool client-identifier clear dhcp pool client-identifier set dhcp pool client-name clear dhcp pool client-name set dhcp pool bootfile clear dhcp pool bootfile set dhcp pool next-server clear dhcp pool next-server set dhcp pool lease clear dhcp pool lease Refer to page... 15-12 15-12 15-13 15-14 15-14 15-15 15-15 15-16 15-16 15-17 15-18 15-18 15-19 15-19 15-20 15-20 15-21 15-21

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-11

set dhcp pool

For information about... set dhcp pool default-router clear dhcp pool default-router set dhcp pool dns-server clear dhcp pool dns-server set dhcp pool domain-name clear dhcp pool domain-name set dhcp pool netbios-name-server clear dhcp pool netbios-name-server set dhcp pool netbios-node-type clear dhcp pool netbios-node-type set dhcp pool option clear dhcp pool option show dhcp pool configuration

Refer to page... 15-22 15-22 15-23 15-23 15-24 15-24 15-25 15-25 15-26 15-26 15-27 15-28 15-28

set dhcp pool

UsethiscommandtocreateandassignanametoaDHCPserverpoolofaddresses.Upto16 addresspoolsmaybeconfiguredonaSecureStackB2.Notethatenteringthiscommandisnot requiredtocreateanaddresspoolbeforeconfiguringotheraddresspoolparameters.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplecreatesanaddresspoolnamedauto1.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1

clear dhcp pool

UsethiscommandtodeleteaDHCPserverpoolofaddresses.

15-12

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool network

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampledeletestheaddresspoolnamedauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1

set dhcp pool network

UsethiscommandtoconfigurethesubnetnumberandmaskforanautomaticDHCPaddress pool.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname network number {mask | prefix-length}

Parameters
poolname number mask prefixlength Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiesanIPsubnetfortheaddresspool. Specifiesthesubnetmaskindottedquadnotation. Specifiesthesubnetmaskasaninteger.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
UsethiscommandtoconfigureasetofIPaddressestobeassignedbytheDHCPserverusingthe specifiedaddresspool.Inordertolimitthescopeoftheaddressesconfiguredwiththiscommand, usethesetdhcpexcludecommandonpage156.

Examples
ThisexampleconfigurestheIPsubnet172.20.28.0withaprefixlengthof24fortheautomatic DHCPpoolnamedauto1.Alternatively,themaskcouldhavebeenspecifiedas255.255.255.0.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 15-13

clear dhcp pool network

B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 network 172.20.28.0 24

Thisexamplelimitsthescopeof255addressescreatedfortheClassCnetwork172,20.28.0bythe previousexample,byexcludingaddresses172.20.28.80100.
B2(rw)->set dhcp exclude 172.20.28.80 172.20.28.100

clear dhcp pool network

UsethiscommandtoremovethenetworknumberandmaskofaDHCPserverpoolofaddresses.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname network

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampledeletesthenetworkandmaskfromtheaddresspoolnamedauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 network

set dhcp pool hardware-address

UsethiscommandtoconfiguretheMACaddressoftheDHCPclientandcreateanaddresspool formanualbinding.Youcanuseeitherthiscommandorthesetdhcppoolclientidentifier commandtocreateamanualbindingpool,butusingbothisnotrecommended.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname hardware-address hw-addr [type]

Parameters
poolname hwaddr type Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheMACaddressoftheclientshardwareplatform.Thisvalue canbeenteredusingdottedhexadecimalnotationorcolons. (Optional)Specifiestheprotocolofthehardwareplatform.Validvalues are1forEthernetor6forIEEE802.Defaultvalueis1,Ethernet.

Defaults
Ifnotypeisspecified,Ethernetisassumed.

15-14

DHCP Server Configuration

clear dhcp pool hardware-address

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplespecifies0001.f401.2710astheEthernetMACaddressforthemanualaddresspool namedmanual1.Alternatively,theMACaddresscouldhavebeenteredas00:01:f4:01:27:10.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool manual1 hardware-address 0001.f401.2710

clear dhcp pool hardware-address

UsethiscommandtoremovethehardwareaddressofaDHCPclientfromamanualbinding addresspool.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname hardware-address

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampledeletestheclienthardwareaddressfromtheaddresspoolnamedmanual1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool manual1 hardware-address

set dhcp pool host

UsethiscommandtoconfigureanIPaddressandnetworkmaskforamanualDHCPbinding.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname host ip-address [mask | prefix-length]

Parameters
poolname ipaddress mask prefixlength Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheIPaddressformanualbinding. (Optional)Specifiesthesubnetmaskindottedquadnotation. (Optional)Specifiesthesubnetmaskasaninteger.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-15

clear dhcp pool host

Defaults
Ifamaskorprefixisnotspecified,theclassA,B,orCnaturalmaskwillbeused.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoconfiguretheminimumrequirementsforamanualbindingaddress pool.First,thehardwareaddressoftheclientshardwareplatformisconfigured,followedby configurationoftheaddresstobeassignedtothatclientmanually.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool manual1 hardware-address 0001.f401.2710 B2(rw)->set dhcp pool manual1 host 15.12.1.99 255.255.248.0

clear dhcp pool host

UsethiscommandtoremovethehostIPaddressfromamanualbindingaddresspool.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname host

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampledeletesthehostIPaddressfromtheaddresspoolnamedmanual1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool manual1 host

set dhcp pool client-identifier

UsethiscommandtoconfiguretheclientidentifieroftheDHCPclientandcreateanaddresspool formanualbinding.Youcanuseeitherthiscommandorthesetdhcppoolhardwareaddress commandtocreateamanualbindingpool,butusingbothisnotrecommended.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname client-identifier id

15-16

DHCP Server Configuration

clear dhcp pool client-identifier

Parameters
poolname id Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. Specifiestheuniqueclientidentifierforthisclient.Thevaluemustbe enteredinxx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xxformat.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheclientidentifierisformedbyconcatenatingthemediatypeandtheMACaddress.For example,iftheclienthardwaretypeisEthernetandtheclientMACaddressis00:01:22:33:44:55, thentheclientidentifierconfiguredwiththiscommandmustbe01:00:01:22:33:44:55.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoconfiguretheminimumrequirementsforamanualbindingaddress pool,usingaclientidentifierratherthanthehardwareaddressoftheclientshardwareplatform.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 client-identifier 01:00:01:22:33:44:55 B2(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 host 10.12.1.10 255.255.255.0

clear dhcp pool client-identifier

UsethiscommandtoremovetheuniqueidentifierofaDHCPclientfromamanualbinding addresspool.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname client-identifier

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampledeletestheclientidentifierfromtheaddresspoolnamedmanual1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool manual1 client-identifier

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-17

set dhcp pool client-name

set dhcp pool client-name

UsethiscommandtoassignanametoaDHCPclientwhencreatinganaddresspoolformanual binding.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname client-name name

Parameters
poolname name Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. Specifiesthenametobeassignedtothisclient.Clientnamesmaybeupto 31charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleconfigurestheclientnameappsvr1tothemanualbindingpoolmanual2.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 client-identifier 01:22:33:44:55:66 B2(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 host 10.12.1.10 255.255.255.0 B2(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 client-name appsvr1

clear dhcp pool client-name

UsethiscommandtodeleteaDHCPclientnamefromanaddresspoolformanualbinding.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname client-name

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampledeletestheclientnamefromthemanualbindingpoolmanual2.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool manual2 client-name

15-18

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool bootfile

set dhcp pool bootfile

UsethiscommandtospecifyadefaultbootimagefortheDHCPclientswhowillbeservedbythe addresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname bootfile filename

Parameters
poolname filename Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. Specifiesthebootimagefilename.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplesetsthebootimagefilenameforaddresspoolnamedauto1.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 bootfile image1.img

clear dhcp pool bootfile

Usethiscommandtoremoveadefaultbootimagefromtheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname bootfile

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleremovesthebootimagefilenamefromaddresspoolnamedauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 bootfile

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-19

set dhcp pool next-server

set dhcp pool next-server

Usethiscommandtospecifythefileserverfromwhichthedefaultbootimageistobeloadedby theclient.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname next-server ip-address

Parameters
poolname ipaddress Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheIPaddressofthefileservertheDHCPclientshouldcontact toloadthedefaultbootimage.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplespecifiesthefileserverfromwhichclientsbeingservedbyaddresspoolauto1 shoulddownloadthebootimagefileimage1.img.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 bootfile image1.img B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 next-server 10.1.1.10

clear dhcp pool next-server

Usethiscommandtoremovethebootimagefileserverfromtheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname next-server

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleremovesthefileserverfromaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 next-server

15-20

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool lease

set dhcp pool lease

UsethiscommandtospecifythedurationoftheleaseforanIPaddressassignedbytheDHCP serverfromtheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname lease {days [hours [minutes]] | infinite}

Parameters
poolname days hours minutes Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. Specifiesthenumberofdaysanaddressleasewillremainvalid.Value canrangefrom0to59. (Optional)Whenadaysvaluehasbeenassigned,specifiesthenumberof hoursanaddressleasewillremainvalid.Valuecanrangefrom0to1439. (Optional)Whenadaysvalueandanhoursvaluehavebeenassigned, specifiesthenumberofminuteanaddressleasewillremainvalid.Value canrangefrom0to86399. Specifiesthatthedurationoftheleasewillbeunlimited.

infinite

Defaults
Ifnoleasetimeisspecified,aleasedurationof1dayisconfigured.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleconfiguresaleasedurationof12hoursfortheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.Note thattoconfigurealeasetimelessthanoneday,enter0fordays,thenthenumberofhoursand minutes.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 lease 0 12

clear dhcp pool lease

Usethiscommandtorestorethedefaultleasetimevalueofonedayfortheaddresspoolbeing configured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname lease

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
Clearstheleasetimeforthisaddresspooltothedefaultvalueofoneday.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-21

set dhcp pool default-router

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplerestoresthedefaultleasedurationofonedayforaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 lease

set dhcp pool default-router

UsethiscommandtospecifyadefaultrouterlistfortheDHCPclientsservedbytheaddresspool beingconfigured.Upto8defaultrouterscanbeconfigured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname default-router address [address2 ... address8]

Parameters
poolname address address2...address8 Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheIPaddressofadefaultrouter. (Optional)Specifies,inorderofpreference,upto7additionaldefault routeraddresses.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleassignsadefaultrouterat10.10.10.1totheaddresspoolnamedauto1.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 default-router 10.10.10.1

clear dhcp pool default-router

Usethiscommandtodeletethedefaultroutersconfiguredforthisaddresspool.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname default-router

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

15-22

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool dns-server

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleremovesthedefaultrouterfromtheaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 default-router

set dhcp pool dns-server

UsethiscommandtospecifyoneormoreDNSserversfortheDHCPclientsservedbytheaddress poolbeingconfigured.Upto8DNSserverscanbeconfigured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname dns-server address [address2 ... address8]

Parameters
poolname address address2...address8 Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheIPaddressofaDNSserver. (Optional)Specifies,inorderofpreference,upto7additionalDNS serveraddresses.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleassignsaDNSserverat10.14.10.1totheaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 dns-server 10.14.10.1

clear dhcp pool dns-server

UsethiscommandtoremovetheDNSserverlistfromtheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname dns-server

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-23

set dhcp pool domain-name

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleremovestheDNSserverlistfromtheaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 dns-server

set dhcp pool domain-name

UsethiscommandtospecifyadomainnametobeassignedtoDHCPclientsservedbythe addresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname domain-name domain

Parameters
poolname domain Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. Specifiesthedomainnamestring.Thedomainnamecanbeupto255 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleassignsthemycompany.comdomainnametotheaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 domain-name mycompany.com

clear dhcp pool domain-name

Usethiscommandtoremovethedomainnamefromtheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname domain-name

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

15-24

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool netbios-name-server

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleremovesthedomainnamefromtheaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 domain-name

set dhcp pool netbios-name-server

UsethiscommandtoassignoneormoreNetBIOSnameserversfortheDHCPclientsservedby theaddresspoolbeingconfigured.Upto8NetBIOSnameserverscanbeconfigured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname netbios-name-server address [address2 ... address8]

Parameters
poolname address address2...address8 Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheIPaddressofaNetBIOSnameserver. (Optional)Specifies,inorderofpreference,upto7additionalNetBIOS nameserveraddresses.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleassignsaNetBIOSnameserverat10.15.10.1totheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 netbios-name-server 10.15.10.1

clear dhcp pool netbios-name-server

UsethiscommandtoremovetheNetBIOSnamerserverlistfromtheaddresspoolbeing configured.
clear dhcp pool poolname netbios-name-server

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-25

set dhcp pool netbios-node-type

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleremovestheNetBIOSnameserverlistfromtheaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 netbios-name-server

set dhcp pool netbios-node-type

UsethiscommandtospecifyaNetBIOSnode(server)typefortheDHCPclientsservedbythe addresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname netbios-node-type {b-node | h-node | p-node | m-node}

Parameters
poolname bnode hnode pnode mnode Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheNetBIOsnodetypetobebroadcast(noWINS). SpecifiestheNetBIOsnodetypetobehybrid(WINS,thenbroadcast). SpecifiestheNetBIOsnodetypetobepeer(WINSonly). SpecifiestheNetBIOsnodetypetobemixed(broadcast,thenWINS).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexamplespecifieshybridastheNetBIOSnodetypefortheaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 netbios-node-type h-node

clear dhcp pool netbios-node-type

UsethiscommandtoremovetheNetBIOSnodetypefromtheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname netbios-node-type

15-26

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool option

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleremovestheNetBIOSnodetypefromtheaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 netbios-node-type

set dhcp pool option

UsethiscommandtoconfigureDHCPoptions,describedinRFC2132.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname option code {ascii string | hex string-list | ip addresslist}

Parameters
poolname code asciistring hexstringlist ipaddresslist Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheDHCPoptioncode,asdefinedinRFC2132.Valuecanrange from1to254. SpecifiesthedatainASCIIformat.AnASCIIcharacterstringcontaininga spacemustbeenclosedinquotations. SpecifiesthedatainHEXformat.Upto8HEXstringscanbeentered. SpecifiesthedatainIPaddressformat.Upto8IPaddressescanbeentered.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleconfiguresDHCPoption19,whichspecifieswhethertheclientshouldconfigureits IPlayerforpacketforwarding.Inthiscase,IPforwardingisenabledwiththe01value.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 option 19 hex 01

ThisexampleconfiguresDHCPoption72,whichassignsoneormoreWebserversforDHCP clients.Inthiscase,twoWebserveraddressesareconfigured.
B2(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 option 72 ip 168.24.3.252 168.24.3.253
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 15-27

clear dhcp pool option

clear dhcp pool option

UsethiscommandtoremoveaDHCPoptionfromtheaddresspoolbeingconfigured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname option code

Parameters
poolname code Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength. SpecifiestheDHCPoptioncode,asdefinedinRFC2132.Valuecanrange from1to254.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleremovesoption19fromaddresspoolauto1.
B2(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 option 19

show dhcp pool configuration

Usethiscommandtodisplayconfigurationinformationforoneoralladdresspools.

Syntax
show dhcp pool configuration {poolname | all}

Parameters
poolname Specifiesthenameoftheaddresspool.Poolnamesmaybeupto31 charactersinlength.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Readonly.

Example
Thisexampledisplaysconfigurationinformationforalladdresspools.
B2(rw)->show dhcp pool configuration all Pool: Atg_Pool Pool Type

Dynamic

15-28

DHCP Server Configuration

show dhcp pool configuration

Network Lease Time Default Routers Pool: static1 Pool Type Client Name Client Identifier Host Lease Time Option Pool: static2 Pool Type Hardware Address Hardware Address Type Host Lease Time

192.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 1 days 0 hrs 0 mins 192.0.0.1

Manual appsvr1 01:00:01:f4:01:27:10 10.1.1.1 255.0.0.0 infinite 19 hex 01

Manual 00:01:f4:01:27:10 ieee802 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0 infinite

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

15-29

show dhcp pool configuration

15-30

DHCP Server Configuration

16
Security Configuration
ThischapterdescribestheSecurityConfigurationsetofcommandsandhowtousethem.
For information about... Overview of Security Methods Configuring RADIUS Configuring 802.1X Authentication Configuring MAC Authentication Configuring Multiple Authentication Methods Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580) Configuring MAC Locking Configuring Port Web Authentication (PWA) Configuring Secure Shell (SSH) Refer to page... 16-1 16-3 16-9 16-19 16-30 16-41 16-46 16-57 16-69

Overview of Security Methods

Thefollowingsecuritymethodsareavailableforcontrollingwhichusersareallowedtoaccess, monitor,andmanagetheswitch. LoginuseraccountsandpasswordsusedtologintotheCLIviaaTelnetconnectionorlocal COMportconnection.Fordetails,refertoSettingUserAccountsandPasswordson page 31. HostAccessControlAuthentication(HACA)authenticatesuseraccessofTelnet management,consolelocalmanagementandWebViewviaacentralRADIUSClient/Server application.WhenRADIUSisenabled,thisessentiallyoverridesloginuseraccounts.When HACAisactiveperavalidRADIUSconfiguration,theusernamesandpasswordsusedto accesstheswitchviaTelnet,SSH,WebView,andCOMportswillbevalidatedagainstthe configuredRADIUSserver.OnlyinthecaseofaRADIUStimeoutwillthosecredentialsbe comparedagainstcredentialslocallyconfiguredontheswitch.Fordetails,referto ConfiguringRADIUSonpage 163. SNMPuserorcommunitynamesallowsaccesstotheSecureStackB2switchviaanetwork SNMPmanagementapplication.Toaccesstheswitch,youmustenteranSNMPuseror communitynamesting. Thelevelofmanagementaccessisdependentontheassociated accesspolicy.Fordetails,refertoChapter 6. 802.1XPortBasedNetworkAccessControlusingEAPOL(ExtensibleAuthentication Protocol)providesamechanismviaaRADIUSserverforadministratorstosecurely authenticateandgrantappropriateaccesstoenduserdevicescommunicatingwith

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-1

Overview of Security Methods

SecureStackB2ports.FordetailsonusingCLIcommandstoconfigure802.1X,referto Configuring802.1XAuthenticationonpage 169.

Note: To configure EAP pass-through, which allows client authentication packets to be forwarded through the switch to an upstream device, 802.1X authentication must be globally disabled with the set dot1x command.

MACAuthenticationprovidesamechanismforadministratorstosecurelyauthenticate sourceMACaddressesandgrantappropriateaccesstoenduserdevicescommunicatingwith SecureStackB2ports.Fordetails,refertoConfiguringMACAuthenticationonpage 1619. MultipleAuthenticationMethodsallowsuserstoauthenticateusingmultiplemethodsof authenticationonthesameport.Fordetails,refertoConfiguringMultipleAuthentication Methodsonpage 1630. MultiUserAuthenticationOntheSecureStackB2,theonlytypeofmultipleuser authenticationsupportedisUser+IPPhone.TheUser+IPPhoneauthenticationfeature supportsauthenticationandauthorizationoftwodevices,specificallyaPCcascadedwithan IPphone,onasingleportontheB2.TheIPphonemustauthenticateusingMACor802.1X authentication,buttheusermayauthenticatebyanymethod.Thisfeatureallowsboththe usersPCandIPphonetosimultaneouslyauthenticateonasingleportandeachreceivea uniquelevelofnetworkaccess.Fordetails,refertoConfiguringMultiUserAuthentication (User+IPphone)onpage 1630.
Note: B2 devices support up to eight authenticated users per port.

RFC3580TunnelAttributesprovideamechanismtocontainan802.1Xauthenticatedusertoa VLANregardlessofthePVID.Uptothreeuserscan beconfiguredperGigabitport.Refer toConfiguringVLANAuthorization(RFC3580)onpage 1641. MACLockinglocksaporttooneormoreMACaddresses,preventingtheuseof unauthorizeddevicesandMACspoofingontheportFordetails,refertoConfiguringMAC Lockingonpage 1646. PortWebAuthentication(PWA)locksdownaportauserisattachedtountilaftertheuser logsinusingawebbrowsertoaccesstheswitch.Theswitchwillpassalllogininformation fromtheendstationtoaRADIUSserverforauthenticationbeforeturningtheporton.PWAis analternativeto802.1XandMACauthentication.Fordetails,refertoConfiguringPortWeb Authentication(PWA)onpage 1657. SecureShell(SSH)providessecureTelnet.Fordetails,refertoConfiguringSecureShell (SSH)onpage 1669.

RADIUS Filter-ID Attribute and Dynamic Policy Profile Assignment

IfyouconfigureanauthenticationmethodthatrequirescommunicationwithaRADIUSserver, youcanusetheRADIUSFilterIDattributetodynamicallyassignapolicyprofileand/or managementleveltoauthenticatingusersand/ordevices. TheRADIUSFilterIDattributeissimplyastringthatisformattedintheRADIUSAccessAccept packetsentbackfromtheRADIUSservertotheswitchduringtheauthenticationprocess. EachusercanbeconfiguredintheRADIUSserverdatabasewithaRADIUSFilterIDattribute thatspecifiesthenameofthepolicyprofileand/ormanagementleveltheusershouldbeassigned uponsuccessfulauthentication.Duringtheauthenticationprocess,whentheRADIUSserver returnsaRADIUSAccessAcceptmessagethatincludesaFilterIDmatchingapolicyprofilename

16-2

Security Configuration

Configuring RADIUS

configuredontheswitch,theswitchthendynamicallyappliesthepolicyprofiletothephysical porttheuser/deviceisauthenticatingon.

Filter-ID Attribute Formats

EnterasysNetworkssupportstwoFilterIDformatsdecoratedandundecorated.The decoratedformathasthreeforms: Tospecifythepolicyprofiletoassigntotheauthenticatinguser(networkaccess authentication): Enterasys:version=1:policy=string wherestringspecifiesthepolicyprofilename.Policyprofilenamesarecasesensitive. Tospecifyamanagementlevel(managementaccessauthentication): Enterasys:version=1:mgmt=level wherelevelindicatesthemanagementlevel,eitherro,rw,orsu. Tospecifybothmanagementlevelandpolicyprofile: Enterasys:version=1:mgmt=level:policy=string Theundecoratedformatissimplyastringthatspecifiesapolicyprofilename.Theundecorated formatcannotbeusedformanagementaccessauthentication. DecoratedFilterIDsareprocessedfirstbytheswitch.IfnodecoratedFilterIDsarefound,then undecoratedFilterIDsareprocessed.IfmultipleFilterIDsarefoundthatcontainconflicting values,aSyslogmessageisgenerated.

Configuring RADIUS
Purpose
Toperformthefollowing: ReviewtheRADIUSclient/serverconfigurationontheswitch. EnableordisabletheRADIUSclient. Setlocalandremoteloginoptions. Setprimaryandsecondaryserverparameters,includingIPaddress,timeoutperiod, authenticationrealm,andnumberofuserloginattemptsallowed. ResetRADIUSserversettingstodefaultvalues. ConfigureaRADIUSaccountingserver.

Commands
For information about... show radius set radius clear radius show radius accounting Refer to page... 16-4 16-5 16-7 16-7

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-3

show radius

For information about... set radius accounting clear radius accounting

Refer to page... 16-8 16-9

show radius
UsethiscommandtodisplaythecurrentRADIUSclient/serverconfiguration.

Syntax
show radius [status | retries | timeout | server [index | all]]

Parameters
status retries timeout server index|all (Optional)DisplaystheRADIUSserversenablestatus. (Optional)DisplaysthenumberofretryattemptsbeforetheRADIUSserver timesout. (Optional)Displaysthemaximumamountoftime(inseconds)toestablish contactwiththeRADIUSserverbeforeretryattemptsbegin. (Optional)DisplaysRADIUSserverconfigurationinformation. Forusewiththeserverparametertoshowserverconfigurationforall serversoraspecificRADIUSserverasdefinedbyanindex.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,allRADIUSconfigurationinformationwillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayRADIUSconfigurationinformation:
B2(rw)->show radius RADIUS status: Enabled RADIUS retries: 3 RADIUS timeout: 20 seconds RADIUS Server IP Address ----------------------10 172.16.20.10

Auth-Port --------1812

Realm-Type ----------------management-access

Table 1648providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 16-48

Output RADIUS status RADIUS retries

show radius Output Details

What It Displays... Whether RADIUS is enabled or disabled. Number of retry attempts before the RADIUS server times out. The default value of 3 can be reset using the set radius command as described in set radius on page 16-5.

16-4

Security Configuration

set radius

Table 16-48
Output

show radius Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Maximum amount of time (in seconds) to establish contact with the RADIUS server before retry attempts begin. The default value of 20 can be reset using the set radius command as described in set radius on page 16-5. RADIUS servers index number, IP address, and UDP authentication port. Realm defines who has to go through the RADIUS server for authentication. Management-access: This means that anyone trying to access the switch (Telnet, SSH, Local Management) has to authenticate through the RADIUS server. Network-access: This means that all the users have to authenticate to a RADIUS server before they are allowed access to the network. Any-access: Means that both Management-access and Network-access have been enabled.

RADIUS timeout

RADIUS Server Realm-Type

set radius
Usethiscommandtoenable,disable,orconfigureRADIUSauthentication.

Syntax
set radius {enable | disable} | {retries number-of-retries} | {timeout timeout} | {server index ip-address port [secret-value] [realm {management-access | any | network-access}} | {realm {management-access | any | network-access} {index| all}}

Parameters
enable|disable retriesnumberof retries timeouttimeout EnablesordisablestheRADIUSclient. SpecifiesthenumberofretryattemptsbeforetheRADIUSservertimesout. Validvaluesarefrom0to10.Defaultis3. Specifiesthemaximumamountoftime(inseconds)toestablishcontact withtheRADIUSserverbeforeretryattemptsbegin.Validvaluesarefrom 1to30.Defaultis20seconds. Specifiestheindexnumber,IPaddressandtheUDPauthenticationportfor theRADIUSserver. (Optional)Specifiesanencryptionkeytobeusedforauthentication betweentheRADIUSclientandserver.

serverindex ip_addressport secretvalue

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-5

set radius

realm management access|any| networkaccess

RealmallowsyoutodefinewhohastogothroughtheRADIUSserverfor authentication. managementaccess:Thismeansthatanyonetryingtoaccesstheswitch (Telnet,SSH,LocalManagement)hastoauthenticatethroughthe RADIUSserver. networkaccess:Thismeansthatalltheusershavetoauthenticatetoa RADIUSserverbeforetheyareallowedaccesstothenetwork. any:Meansthatbothmanagementaccessandnetworkaccesshave beenenabled.

Note: If the management-access or any access realm has been configured, the local admin account is disabled for access to the switch using the console, Telnet, or Local Management. Only the network-access realm allows access to the local admin account.

index|all

Appliestherealmsettingtoaspecificserverortoallservers.

Defaults
Ifsecretvalueisnotspecified,nonewillbeapplied. Ifrealmisnotspecified,theanyaccessrealmwillbeused.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
TheSecureStackB2deviceallowsupto10RADIUSaccountingserverstobeconfigured,withup totwoserversactiveatanygiventime. TheRADIUSclientcanonlybeenabledontheswitchonceaRADIUSserverisonline,anditsIP address(es)hasbeenconfiguredwiththesamepasswordtheRADIUSclientwilluse.
Note: If RADIUS is configured with no host IP address on the device, it will use the loopback interface 0 IP address (if it has been configured) as its source for the NAS-IP attribute. For information about configuring loopback interfaces, refer to interface on page 17-2.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtoenabletheRADIUSclientforauthenticatingwithRADIUSserver1at IPaddress192.168.6.203,UDPauthenticationport1812,andanauthenticationpasswordof pwsecret.Aspreviouslynoted,theserversecretpasswordenteredheremustmatchthat alreadyconfiguredastheReadWrite(rw)passwordontheRADIUSserver:
B2(su)->set radius server 1 192.168.6.203 1812 pwsecret

ThisexampleshowshowtosettheRADIUStimeoutto5seconds:
B2(su)->set radius timeout 5

ThisexampleshowshowtosetRADIUSretriesto10:
B2(su)->set radius retries 10

Thisexampleshowshowtoforceanymanagementaccesstotheswitch(Telnet,web,SSH)to authenticatethroughaRADIUSserver.Theallparameterattheendofthecommandmeansthat anyofthedefinedRADIUSserverscanbeusedforthisAuthentication.

B2(rw)->set radius realm management-access all

16-6

Security Configuration

clear radius

clear radius
UsethiscommandtoclearRADIUSserversettings.

Syntax
clear radius [retries] | [timeout] | [server {index | all | realm {index | all}}]

Parameters
retries timeout server index|all realm ResetsthemaximumnumberofattemptsausercancontacttheRADIUS serverbeforetimingoutto3. ResetsthemaximumamountoftimetoestablishcontactwiththeRADIUS serverbeforetimingoutto20seconds. Deletesserversettings. Forusewiththeserverparametertocleartheserverconfigurationforall serversoraspecificRADIUSserverasdefinedbyanindex. ResetstherealmsettingforallserversoraspecificRADIUSserveras definedbyanindex.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Defaults
None.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearallsettingsonallRADIUSservers:
B2(su)->clear radius server all

ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheRADIUStimeouttothedefaultvalueof20seconds:
B2(su)->clear radius timeout

show radius accounting

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheRADIUSaccountingconfiguration.Thistransmitsaccounting informationbetweenanetworkaccessserverandasharedaccountingserver.

Syntax
show radius accounting [server] | [counter ip-address] | [retries] | [timeout]

Parameters
server counteripaddress retries timeout (Optional)DisplaysoneorallRADIUSaccountingserverconfigurations. (Optional)DisplayscountersforaRADIUSaccountingserver. (Optional)Displaysthemaximumnumberofattemptstocontactthe RADIUSaccountingserverbeforetimingout. (Optional)Displaysthemaximumamountoftimebeforetimingout.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-7

set radius accounting

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,allRADIUSaccountingconfigurationinformationwillbe displayed.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayRADIUSaccountingconfigurationinformation.Inthiscase, RADIUSaccountingisnotcurrentlyenabledandglobaldefaultsettingshavenotbeenchanged. Oneserverhasbeenconfigured. FordetailsonenablingandconfiguringRADIUSaccounting,refertosetradiusaccountingon page 168:
B2(ro)->show radius accounting RADIUS accounting status: Disabled RADIUS Acct Server IP Address Acct-Port Retries Timeout Status ------------------ ---------- --------- ------- ------- -----1 172.16.2.10 1856 3 20 Disabled

set radius accounting

UsethiscommandtoconfigureRADIUSaccounting.

Syntax
set radius accounting {[enable | disable] [retries retries] [timeout timeout] [server ip_address port [server-secret]

Parameters
enable|disable retriesretries timeouttimeout EnablesordisablestheRADIUSaccountingclient. SetsthemaximumnumberofattemptstocontactaspecifiedRADIUS accountingserverbeforetimingout.Validretryvaluesare010. Setsthemaximumamountoftime(inseconds)toestablishcontactwitha specifiedRADIUSaccountingserverbeforetimingout.Validtimeout valuesare130. Specifiestheaccountingservers: IPaddress UDPauthenticationport(065535) serversecret(ReadWritepasswordtoaccessthisaccountingserver. Devicewillpromptforthisentryuponcreatingaserverinstance,as shownintheexamplebelow.)

serverip_address portserversecret

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Defaults
None.
16-8 Security Configuration

clear radius accounting

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtoenabletheRADIUSaccountingclientforauthenticatingwiththe accountingserveratIPaddress10.2.4.12,UDPauthenticationport1800.Aspreviouslynoted,the serversecretpasswordenteredheremustmatchthatalreadyconfiguredastheReadWrite(rw) passwordontheRADIUSaccountingserver:
B2(su)->set radius accounting server 10.2.4.12 1800 Enter secret: Re-enter secret:

ThisexampleshowshowtosettheRADIUSaccountingtimeoutto30seconds:
B2(su)->set radius accounting timeout 30

ThisexampleshowshowtosetRADIUSaccountingretriesto10:
B2(su)->set radius accounting retries 10

clear radius accounting

UsethiscommandtoclearRADIUSaccountingconfigurationsettings.

Syntax
clear radius accounting {server ip-address | retries | timeout | counter}

Parameters
serveripaddress retries timeout counter Clearstheconfigurationononeormoreaccountingservers. Resetstheretriestothedefaultvalueof3. Resetsthetimeoutto5seconds. Clearscounters.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Defaults
None.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresettheRADIUSaccountingtimeoutto5seconds.
B2(su)->clear radius accounting timeout

Configuring 802.1X Authentication

Purpose
Toreviewandconfigure802.1XauthenticationforoneormoreportsusingEAPOL(Extensible AuthenticationProtocol).802.1Xcontrolsnetworkaccessbyenforcinguserauthorizationon selectedports,whichresultsinallowingordenyingnetworkaccessaccordingtoRADIUSserver configuration.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-9

show dot1x

Note: To configure EAP pass-through, which allows client authentication packets to be forwarded through the switch to an upstream device, 802.1X authentication must be globally disabled with the set dot1x command (set dot1x on page 16-13).

Commands
For information about... show dot1x show dot1x auth-config set dot1x set dot1x auth-config clear dot1x auth-config show eapol set eapol clear eapol Refer to page... 16-10 16-11 16-13 16-13 16-15 16-15 16-17 16-18

show dot1x
Usethiscommandtodisplay802.1Xstatus,diagnostics,statistics,andreauthenticationor initializationcontrolinformationforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show dot1x [auth-diag] [auth-stats] [port [init | reauth]] [port-string]

Parameters
authdiag authstats portinit|reauth portstring (Optional)Displaysauthenticationdiagnosticsinformation. (Optional)Displaysauthenticationstatistics. (Optional)Displaysthestatusofportinitializationandreauthentication controlfortheport. (Optional)Displaysinformationforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,802.1Xstatuswillbedisplayed. Ifportstringisnotspecified,informationforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

16-10

Security Configuration

show dot1x auth-config

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplay802.1Xstatus:
B2(su)->show dot1x DOT1X is disabled.

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayauthenticationdiagnosticsinformationforge.1.1:
B2(su)->show dot1x auth-diag ge.1.1 Port : 1 Auth-Diag Enter Connecting: EAP Logoffs While Connecting: Enter Authenticating: Success While Authenticating Timeouts While Authenticating: Fails While Authenticating: ReAuths While Authenticating: EAP Starts While Authenticating: EAP logoff While Authenticating: Backend Responses: Backend Access Challenges: Backend Others Requests To Supp: Backend NonNak Responses From: Backend Auth Successes: Backend Auth Fails:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayauthenticationstatisticsforge.1.1:
B2(su)->show dot1x auth-stats Port: 1 Auth-Stats EAPOL Frames Rx: EAPOL Frames Tx: EAPOL Start Frames Rx: EAPOL Logoff Frames Rx: EAPOL RespId Frames Rx: EAPOL Resp Frames Rx: EAPOL Req Frames Tx: EAP Length Error Frames Rx: Last EAPOL Frame Version: Last EAPOL Frame Source: ge.1.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythestatusofportreauthenticationcontrolforge.1.1through ge.1.6:
B2(su)->show dot1x port reauth ge.1.1-6 Port 1: Port reauthenticate: FALSE Port 2: Port reauthenticate: FALSE Port 3: Port reauthenticate: FALSE Port 4: Port reauthenticate: FALSE Port 5: Port reauthenticate: FALSE Port 6: Port reauthenticate: FALSE

show dot1x auth-config

Usethiscommandtodisplay802.1Xauthenticationconfigurationsettingsforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show dot1x auth-config [authcontrolled-portcontrol] [maxreq] [quietperiod] [reauthenabled] [reauthperiod] [servertimeout] [supptimeout] [txperiod] [port-string]
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 16-11

show dot1x auth-config

Parameters
authcontrolled portcontrol maxreq quietperiod reauthenabled reauthperiod servertimeout supptimeout txperiod portstring (Optional)DisplaysthecurrentvalueofthecontrolledPortcontrol parameterfortheport. (Optional)Displaysthevaluesetformaximumrequestscurrentlyinuseby thebackendauthenticationstatemachine. (Optional)Displaysthevaluesetforquietperiodcurrentlyinusebythe authenticatorPAEstatemachine. (Optional)Displaysthestateofreauthenticationcontrolusedbythe ReauthenticationTimerstatemachine. (Optional)Displaysthevalue,inseconds,setforthereauthentication periodusedbythereauthenticationtimerstatemachine. (Optional)Displaystheservertimeoutvalue,inseconds,currentlyinuse bythebackendauthenticationstatemachine. (Optional)Displaystheauthenticationsupplicanttimeoutvalue,in seconds,currentlyinusebythebackendauthenticationstatemachine. (Optional)Displaysthetransmissionperiodvalue,inseconds,currentlyin usebytheauthenticatorPAEstatemachine. (Optional)Limitsthedisplayofdesiredinformationinformationtospecific port(s).Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,all802.1Xsettingswillbedisplayed. Ifportstringisnotspecified,informationforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaytheEAPOLportcontrolmodeforge.1.1:
B2(su)->show dot1x auth-config authcontrolled-portcontrol ge.1.1 Port 1: Auth controlled port control: Auto

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythe802.1Xquietperiodsettingsforge.1.1:
B2(su)->show dot1x auth-config quietperiod ge.1.1 Port 1: Quiet period: 30

Thisexampleshowshowtodisplayall802.1Xauthenticationconfigurationsettingsforge.1.1:
B2(ro)->show dot1x auth-config Port : 1 Auth-Config PAE state: Backend auth state: Admin controlled directions: Oper controlled directions: Auth controlled port status: Auth controlled port control: Quiet period: Transmission period: Supplicant timeout: ge.1.1 Initialize Initialize Both Both Authorized Auto 60 30 30

16-12

Security Configuration

set dot1x

Server timeout: Maximum requests: Reauthentication period: Reauthentication control:

30 2 3600 Disabled

set dot1x
Usethiscommandtoenableordisable802.1Xauthentication,toreauthenticateoneormoreaccess entities,ortoreinitializeoneormoresupplicants.

Syntax
set dot1x {enable | disable | port {init | reauth} {true | false} [port-string]}

Parameters
enable|disable port init|reauth true|false portstring Enablesordisables802.1X. Enableordisable802.1Xreauthenticationorinitializationcontrolononeor moreports. Configureinitializationorreauthenticationcontrol. Enable(true)ordisable(false)reinitialization/reauthentication. (Optional)Specifiestheport(s)toreinitializeorreauthenticate.

Defaults
Ifnoportsarespecified,thereinitializationorreauthenticationsettingwillbeappliedtoallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Disabling802.1Xauthenticationglobally,bynotenteringaspecificportstringvalue,willenable theEAPpassthroughfeature.EAPpassthroughallowsclientauthenticationpacketstobe forwardedunmodifiedthroughtheswitchtoanupstreamdevice.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtoenable802.1X:
B2(su)->set dot1x enable

Thisexampleshowshowtoreinitializege.1.2:
B2(rw)->set dot1x port init true ge.1.2

set dot1x auth-config

Usethiscommandtoconfigure802.1Xauthentication.

Syntax
set dot1x auth-config {[authcontrolled-portcontrol {auto | forced-auth | forced-unauth}] [maxreq value] [quietperiod value] [reauthenabled {false | true}]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-13

set dot1x auth-config

[reauthperiod value] [servertimeout timeout] [supptimeout timeout] [txperiod value]} [port-string]

Parameters
authcontrolled portcontrol auto|forcedauth| forcedunauth Specifiesthe802.1Xportcontrolmode. maxreqvalue autoSetportcontrolmodetoautocontrolledportcontrol.This isthedefaultvalue. forcedauthSetportcontrolmodetoForcedAuthorized controlledportcontrol. forcedunauthSetportcontrolmodetoForcedUnauthorized controlledportcontrol.

Specifiesthemaximumnumberofauthenticationrequestsallowed bythebackendauthenticationstatemachine.Validvaluesare110. Defaultvalueis2. Specifiesthetime(inseconds)followingafailedauthentication beforeanotherattemptcanbemadebytheauthenticatorPAEstate machine.Validvaluesare065535.Defaultvalueis60seconds. Enables(true)ordisables(false)reauthenticationcontrolofthe reauthenticationtimerstatemachine.Defaultvalueisfalse. Specifiesthetimelapse(inseconds)betweenattemptsbythe reauthenticationtimerstatemachinetoreauthenticateaport.Valid valuesare065535.Defaultvalueis3600seconds. Specifiesatimeoutperiod(inseconds)fortheauthenticationserver, usedbythebackendauthenticationstatemachine.Validvaluesare1 300.Defaultvalueis30seconds. Specifiesatimeoutperiod(inseconds)fortheauthentication supplicantusedbythebackendauthenticationstatemachine.Valid valuesare1300.Defaultvalueis30seconds. Specifiestheperiod(inseconds)whichpassesbetweenauthenticator PAEstatemachineEAPtransmissions.Validvaluesare065535. Defaultvalueis30seconds. (Optional)Limitstheconfigurationofdesiredsettingstospecified port(s).Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refer toPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

quietperiodvalue

reauthenabledfalse| true reauthperiodvalue

servertimeouttimeout

supptimeouttimeout

txperiodvalue

portstring

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,authenticationparameterswillbesetonallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtoenablereauthenticationcontrolonportsge.1.13:
B2(su)->set dot1x auth-config reauthenabled true ge.1.1-3

Thisexampleshowshowtosetthe802.1Xquietperiodto120secondsonportsge.1.13:
B2(su)->set dot1x auth-config quietperiod 120 ge.1.1-3

16-14

Security Configuration

clear dot1x auth-config

clear dot1x auth-config

Usethiscommandtoreset802.1Xauthenticationparameterstodefaultvaluesononeormore ports.

Syntax
clear dot1x auth-config [authcontrolled-portcontrol] [maxreq] [quietperiod] [reauthenabled] [reauthperiod] [servertimeout] [supptimeout] [txperiod] [portstring]

Parameters
authcontrolled portcontrol maxreq quietperiod reauthenabled reauthperiod servertimeout supptimeout txperiod portstring (Optional)Resetsthe802.1Xportcontrolmodetoauto. (Optional)Resetsthemaximumrequestsvalueto2. (Optional)Resetsthequietperiodvalueto60seconds. (Optional)Resetsthereauthenticationcontrolstatetodisabled(false). (Optional)Resetsthereauthenticationperiodvalueto3600seconds. (Optional)Resetstheservertimeoutvalueto30seconds. (Optional)Resetstheauthenticationsupplicanttimeoutvalueto30 seconds. (Optional)Resetsthetransmissionperiodvalueto30seconds. (Optional)Resetssettingsonspecificport(s).Foradetaileddescriptionof possibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIon page 52.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,allauthenticationparameterswillbereset. Ifportstringisnotspecified,parameterswillbesetonallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtoresetthe802.1Xportcontrolmodetoautoonallports:
B2(su)->clear dot1x auth-config authcontrolled-portcontrol

Thisexampleshowshowtoresetreauthenticationcontroltodisabledonportsge.1.13:
B2(su)->clear dot1x auth-config reauthenabled ge.1.1-3

Thisexampleshowshowtoresetthe802.1Xquietperiodto60secondsonportsge.1.13:
B2(su)->clear dot1x auth-config quietperiod ge.1.1-3

show eapol
UsethiscommandtodisplayEAPOLstatusorsettingsforoneormoreports.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-15

show eapol

Syntax
show eapol [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysEAPOLstatusforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,onlyEAPOLenablestatuswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayEAPOLstatusforportsge.1.13:
B2(su)->show eapol ge.1.1-3 EAPOL is disabled. Port -------ge.1.1 ge.1.2 ge.1.3 Authentication State -------------------Initialize Initialize Initialize Authentication Mode -------------------Auto Auto Auto

Table 1649providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.Fordetailsonusingtheseteapol commandtoenabletheprotocolandassignanauthenticationmode,refertoseteapolon page 1617. Table 16-49

Output Port

show eapol Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2.

16-16

Security Configuration

set eapol

Table 16-49
Output

show eapol Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Current EAPOL authentication state for each port. Possible internal states for the authenticator (switch) are: initialize: A port is in the initialize state when:

Authentication State

authentication is disabled, authentication is enabled and the port is not linked, or authentication is enabled and the port is linked. (In this case very little time is spent in this state, it immediately transitions to the connecting state, via disconnected.

disconnected: The port passes through this state on its way to connected whenever the port is reinitialized, via link state change, reauthentication failure, or management intervention. connecting: While in this state, the authenticator sends request/ID messages to the end user. authenticating: The port enters this state from connecting after receiving a response/ID from the end user. It remains in this state until the entire authentication exchange between the end user and the authentication server completes. authenticated: The port enters this state from authenticating state after the exchange completes with a favorable result. It remains in this state until linkdown, logoff, or until a reauthentication begins. aborting: The port enters this state from authenticating when any event occurs that interrupts the login exchange. held: After any login failure the port remains in this state for the number of seconds equal to quietPeriod (can be set using MIB). forceAuth: Management is allowing normal, unsecured switching on this port. forceUnauth: Management is preventing any frames from being forwarded to or from this port. Authentication Mode Mode enabling network access for each port. Modes include: Auto: Frames are forwarded according to the authentication state of each port. Forced Authorized Mode: Meant to disable authentication on a port. It is intended for ports that support ISLs and devices that cannot authenticate, such as printers and file servers. If a default policy is applied to the port via the policy profile MIB, then frames are forwarded according to the configuration set by that policy, otherwise frames are forwarded according to the current configuration for that port. Authentication using 802.1X is not possible on a port in this mode. Forced Unauthorized Mode: All frames received on the port are discarded by a filter. Authentication using 802.1X is not possible on a port in this mode.

set eapol
UsethiscommandtoenableordisableEAPOLportbaseduserauthenticationwiththeRADIUS serverandtosettheauthenticationmodeforoneormoreports.

Syntax
set eapol [enable | disable] [auth-mode {auto | forced-auth | forced-unauth} port-string

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-17

clear eapol

Parameters
enable|disable authmode auto| forcedauth| forcedunauth EnablesordisablesEAPOL. Specifiestheauthenticationmodeas: autoAutoauthorizationmode.Thisisthedefaultmodeandwill forwardframesaccordingtotheauthenticationstateoftheport.For detailsonthismode,refertoTable 1649. forcedauthForcedauthorizedmode,whichdisablesauthentication ontheport. forcedunauthForcedunauthorizedmode,whichfiltersanddiscards allframesreceivedontheport.

portstring

Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtosetEAPOLparameters.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableEAPOL:
B2(su)->set eapol enable

ThisexampleshowshowtoenableEAPOLwithforcedauthorizedmodeonportge.1.1:
B2(su)->set eapol auth-mode forced-auth ge.1.1

clear eapol
UsethiscommandtogloballycleartheEAPOLauthenticationmode,ortoclearsettingsforoneor moreports.

Syntax
clear eapol [auth-mode] [port-string]

Parameters
authmode portstring (Optional)GloballyclearstheEAPOLauthenticationmode. Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoclearEAPOLparameters.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifauthmodeisnotspecified,allEAPOLsettingswillbecleared. Ifportstringisnotspecified,settingswillbeclearedforallports.

16-18

Security Configuration

Configuring MAC Authentication

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheEAPOLauthenticationmodeforportge.1.3:
B2(su)->clear eapol auth-mode ge.1.3

Configuring MAC Authentication

Purpose
Toreview,disable,enableandconfigureMACauthentication.Thisauthenticationmethodallows thedevicetoauthenticatesourceMACaddressesinanexchangewithanauthenticationserver. Theauthenticator(switch)selectsasourceMACseenonaMACauthenticationenabledportand submitsittoabackendclientforauthentication.ThebackendclientusestheMACaddressstored password,ifrequired,ascredentialsforanauthenticationattempt.Ifaccepted,astring representinganaccesspolicymaybereturned.Ifpresent,theswitchappliestheassociatedpolicy rules. YoucanspecifyamasktoapplytoMACaddresseswhenauthenticatingusersthroughaRADIUS server(seesetmacauthenticationsignificantbitsonpage 1629).Themostcommonuseof significantbitmasksisforauthenticationofallMACaddressesforaspecificvendor.

Commands
For information about... show macauthentication show macauthentication session set macauthentication set macauthentication password clear macauthentication password set macauthentication port set macauthentication portinitialize set macauthentication portquietperiod clear macauthentication portquietperiod set macauthentication macinitialize set macauthentication reauthentication set macauthentication portreauthenticate set macauthentication macreauthenticate set macauthentication reauthperiod clear macauthentication reauthperiod set macauthentication significant-bits Refer to page... 16-20 16-21 16-22 16-22 16-23 16-23 16-24 16-25 16-25 16-26 16-26 16-27 16-27 16-28 16-28 16-29

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-19

show macauthentication

For information about... clear macauthentication significant-bits

Refer to page... 16-29

show macauthentication
UsethiscommandtodisplayMACauthenticationinformationforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show macauthentication [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysMACauthenticationinformationforspecificport(s). Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,MACauthenticationinformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayMACauthenticationinformationforge.2.1through8:
B2(su)->show macauthentication ge.2.1-8 MAC authentication: - enabled MAC user password: - NOPASSWORD Port username significant bits - 48 Port ------ge.2.1 ge.2.2 ge.2.3 ge.2.4 ge.2.5 ge.2.6 ge.2.7 ge.2.8 Port State -------disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Reauth Period ---------3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 Auth Allowed -------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Auth Allocated --------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reauthentications ----------------disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled

Table 1650providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 16-50

Output MAC authentication

show macauthentication Output Details

What It Displays... Whether MAC authentication is globally enabled or disabled. Set using the set macauthentication command as described in set macauthentication on page 16-22. User password associated with MAC authentication on the device. Set using the set macauthentication password command as described in set macauthentication password on page 16-22.

MAC user password

16-20

Security Configuration

show macauthentication session

Table 16-50
Output Port username significant bits

show macauthentication Output Details (Continued)

What It Displays... Number of significant bits in the MAC addresses to be used starting with the leftmost bit of the vendor portion of the MAC address. The significant portion of the MAC address is sent as a user-name credential when the primary attempt to authenticate the full MAC address fails. Any other failure to authenticate the full address, (i.e., authentication server timeout) causes the next attempt to start once again with a full MAC authentication. Default value of 48 can be changed with the set macauthentication significant-bits command. Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. Whether or not MAC authentication is enabled or disabled on this port. Reauthentication period for this port. Default value of 30 can be changed using the set macauthentication reauthperiod command (page 16-28). Number of concurrent authentications supported on this port. Default is 1 and cannot be reset. Maximum number of MAC authentications permitted on this port. Default is 1 and cannot be reset Whether or not reauthentication is enabled or disabled on this port. Set using the set macauthentication reauthentication command (page 16-26).

Port Port State Reauth Period Auth Allowed Auth Allocated Reauthentications

show macauthentication session

UsethiscommandtodisplaytheactiveMACauthenticatedsessions.

Syntax
show macauthentication session

Parameters
None.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,MACsessioninformationwillbedisplayedforallMAC authenticationports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Usage
ChangingtheReauthPeriodwiththesetmacauthenticationreauthperiodcommanddoesnot affectcurrentsessions.Newsessionsdisplaythecorrectperiod.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-21

set macauthentication

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayMACsessioninformation:
B2(su)->show macauthentication session Port MAC Address Duration Reauth Period --------------------- ---------- ------------ge.1.2 00:60:97:b5:4c:07 0,00:52:31 3600 Reauthentications ----------------disabled

Table 1651providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 16-51

Output Port MAC Address Duration Reauth Period

show macauthentication session Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. MAC address associated with the session. Time this session has been active. Reauthentication period for this port, set using the set macauthentication reauthperiod command described in set macauthentication reauthperiod on page 16-28. Whether or not reauthentication is enabled or disabled on this port. Set using the set macauthentication reauthentication command described in set macauthentication reauthentication on page 16-26.

Reauthentications

set macauthentication
UsethiscommandtogloballyenableordisableMACauthentication.

Syntax
set macauthentication {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable GloballyenablesordisablesMACauthentication.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Defaults
None.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtogloballyenableMACauthentication:
B2(su)->set macauthentication enable

set macauthentication password

UsethiscommandtosetaMACauthenticationpassword.

16-22

Security Configuration

clear macauthentication password

Syntax
set macauthentication password password

Parameters
password SpecifiesatextstringMACauthenticationpassword.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheMACauthenticationpasswordtomacauth:
B2(su)->set macauthentication password macauth

clear macauthentication password

UsethiscommandtocleartheMACauthenticationpassword.

Syntax
clear macauthentication password

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocleartheMACauthenticationpassword:
B2(su)->clear macauthentication password

set macauthentication port

UsethiscommandtoenableordisableoneormoreportsforMACauthentication.

Syntax
set macauthentication port {enable | disable} port-string

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-23

set macauthentication portinitialize

Parameters
enable|disable portstring EnablesordisablesMACauthentication. Specifiesport(s)onwhichtoenableordisableMACauthentication.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Enablingport(s)forMACauthenticationrequiresgloballyenablingMACauthenticationonthe switchasdescribedinsetmacauthenticationonpage 1622,andthenenablingitonaportby portbasis.Bydefault,MACauthenticationisgloballydisabledanddisabledonallports.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableMACauthenticationonge.2.1though5:
B2(su)->set macauthentication port enable ge.2.1-5

set macauthentication portinitialize

UsethiscommandtoforceoneormoreMACauthenticationportstoreinitializeandremoveany currentlyactivesessionsonthoseports.

Syntax
set macauthentication portinitialize port-string

Parameters
portstring SpecifiestheMACauthenticationport(s)toreinitialize.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoforcege.2.1through5toinitialize:
B2(su)->set macauthentication portinitialize ge.2.1-5

16-24

Security Configuration

set macauthentication portquietperiod

set macauthentication portquietperiod

Thissetsthenumberofsecondsfollowingafailedauthenticationbeforeanotherattemptmaybe madeontheport.

Syntax
set macauthentication portquietperiod time port-string

Parameters
time portstring Periodinsecondstowaitafterafailedauthentication Specifiestheportsforwhichthequitperiodistobeapplied.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexamplesetsport1towait5secondsafterafailedauthenticationattemptbeforeanew attemptcanbemade:
B2(su)->set macauthentication portquietperiod 5 ge.1.1

clear macauthentication portquietperiod

Thissetsthequietperiodbacktothedefaultvalue.

Syntax
clear macauthentication portquietperiod [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Specifiestheportsforwhichthequietperiodistobereset.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifaportstringisnotspecifiedthenallportswillbesettothedefaultportquietperiod.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleresetsthedefaultquitperiodonport1:
B2(su)->clear macauthentication portquietperiod ge.1.1

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-25

set macauthentication macinitialize

set macauthentication macinitialize

UsethiscommandtoforceacurrentMACauthenticationsessiontoreinitializeandremovethe session.

Syntax
set macauthentication macinitialize mac-addr

Parameters
macaddr SpecifiestheMACaddressofthesessiontoreinitialize.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Defaults
None.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoforcetheMACauthenticationsessionforaddress006097b54c07 toreinitialize:
B2(su)->set macauthentication macinitialize 00-60-97-b5-4c-07

set macauthentication reauthentication

UsethiscommandtoenableordisablereauthenticationofallcurrentlyauthenticatedMAC addressesononeormoreports.

Syntax
set macauthentication reauthentication {enable | disable} port-string

Parameters
enable|disable portstring EnablesordisablesMACreauthentication. Specifiesport(s)onwhichtoenableordisableMACreauthentication.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableMACreauthenticationonge.4.1though5:
B2(su)->set macauthentication reauthentication enable ge.4.1-5

16-26

Security Configuration

set macauthentication portreauthenticate

set macauthentication portreauthenticate

Usethiscommandtoforceanimmediatereauthenticationofthecurrentlyactivesessionsonone ormoreMACauthenticationports.

Syntax
set macauthentication portreauthenticate port-string

Parameters
portstring SpecifiesMACauthenticationport(s)tobereauthenticated.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoforcege.2.1though5toreauthenticate:
B2(su)->set macauthentication portreauthentication ge.2.1-5

set macauthentication macreauthenticate

UsethiscommandtoforceanimmediatereauthenticationofaMACaddress.

Syntax
set macauthentication macreauthenticate mac-addr

Parameters
macaddr SpecifiestheMACaddressofthesessiontoreauthenticate.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoforcetheMACauthenticationsessionforaddress006097b54c07 toreauthenticate:
B2(su)->set macauthentication macreauthenticate 00-60-97-b5-4c-07

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-27

set macauthentication reauthperiod

set macauthentication reauthperiod

UsethiscommandtosettheMACreauthenticationperiod(inseconds).Thisisthetimelapse betweenattemptstoreauthenticateanycurrentMACaddressauthenticatedtoaport.

Syntax
set macauthentication reauthperiod time port-string

Parameters
time portstring Specifiesthenumberofsecondsbetweenreauthenticationattempts.Valid valuesare14294967295. Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtosettheMACreauthenticationperiod.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ChangingtheReauthPeriodwiththesetmacauthenticationreauthperiodcommanddoesnot affectcurrentsessions.Newsessionswillusethecorrectperiod.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosettheMACreauthenticationperiodto7200seconds(2hours)on ge.2.1through5:
B2(su)->set macauthentication reauthperiod 7200 ge.2.1-5

clear macauthentication reauthperiod

UsethiscommandtocleartheMACreauthenticationperiodononeormoreports.

Syntax
clear macauthentication reauthperiod [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)ClearstheMACreauthenticationperiodonspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,thereauthenticationperiodwillbeclearedonallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.
16-28 Security Configuration

set macauthentication significant-bits

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtogloballycleartheMACreauthenticationperiod:
B2(su)->clear macauthentication reauthperiod

set macauthentication significant-bits

UsethiscommandtosetthenumberofsignificantbitsoftheMACaddresstousefor authentication.

Syntax
set macauthentication significant-bits number

Parameters
number Specifiesthenumberofsignificantbitstobeusedforauthentication.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ThiscommandallowsyoutospecifyamasktoapplytoMACaddresseswhenauthenticating usersthroughaRADIUSserver.Themostcommonuseofsignificantbitmasksisfor authenticationofallMACaddressesforaspecificvendor. OnswitchesusingMACauthentication,theMACaddressofauserattemptingtologinissentto theRADIUSserverastheusername.Ifaccessisdenied,andifasignificantbitmaskhasbeen configured(otherthan48)withthiscommand,theswitchwillapplythemaskandresendthe maskedaddresstotheRADIUSserver.Forexample,ifauserwithMACaddressof0016CF12 3456isdeniedaccess,anda32bitmaskhasbeenconfigured,theswitchwillapplythemaskand resendaMACaddressof0016CF120000totheRADIUSserver. Touseasignificantbitsmaskforauthenticationofdevicesbyaparticularvendor,specifya24bit mask,tomaskouteverythingexceptthevendorportionoftheMACaddress.

Example
ThisexamplesetstheMACauthenticationsignificantbitsmaskto24.
B2(su)->set macauthentication significant-bits 24

clear macauthentication significant-bits

UsethiscommandtoresetthenumberofsignificantbitsoftheMACaddresstousefor authenticationtothedefaultof48.

Syntax
clear macauthentication significant-bits

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-29

Configuring Multiple Authentication Methods

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleresetstheMACauthenticationsignificantbitsto48.
B2(su)->clear macauthentication significant-bits

Configuring Multiple Authentication Methods

Note: B2 devices support up to eight authenticated users per port.

About Multiple Authentication Types

Whenenabled,multipleauthenticationtypesallowuserstoauthenticateusinguptotwomethods onthesameport.Inorderformultipleauthenticationtofunctiononthedevice,eachpossible methodofauthentication(MACauthentication,802.1X,PWA)mustbeenabledgloballyand configuredappropriatelyonthedesiredportswithitscorrespondingcommandsetdescribedin thischapter. Multipleauthenticationmodemustbegloballyenabledonthedeviceusingthesetmultiauth modecommand.

Configuring Multi-User Authentication (User + IP phone)

TheUser+IPphonemultiuserauthenticationfeatureallowsauserandtheirIPphonetobothuse asingleportontheB2buttohaveseparatepolicyroles.
Note: The only Multi-User Authentication supported on the B2 is User + IP phone. The IP phone and the user may authenticate using 802.1x or MAC authentication.

User+IPPhoneAuthenticationontheSecureStackB2isimplementedbyassigninganingressed packetreceivedonaporttoapolicyrolebasedontheVLANthepacketwasassignedto,andnot thepacketssourceMACaddress.Therefore,onaportconfiguredforUser+IPPhone Authentication,thereexiststwodifferentVLANtopolicyrolemappings. ThepolicyrolefortheIPphoneisstaticallymappedusingtheVLANtopolicymappingfeature whichassignsanypacketsreceivedwithaVLANtagsettoaspecificVID(forexample,Voice VLAN)toanindicatedpolicyrole(forexample,IPPhonepolicyrole).Therefore,itisrequiredthat IPphoneisconfiguredtosendVLANtaggedpacketstotheVoiceVLAN. Thesecondpolicyrole,fortheuser,caneitherbestaticallyconfiguredwiththedefaultpolicyrole ontheportordynamicallyassignedthroughauthenticationtothenetwork.Whenthedefault policyroleisassignedonaport,theVLANsetastheportsPVIDismappedtothedefaultpolicy
16-30 Security Configuration

show multiauth

role.Whenapolicyroleisdynamicallyappliedtoaportastheresultofasuccessfully authenticatedsession,theauthenticatedVLANismappedtothepolicyrolesetintheFilterID returnedfromtheRADIUSserver.TheauthenticatedVLANmayeitherbethePVIDoftheport, ifthePVIDOverrideforthepolicyprofileisdisabled,ortheVLANspecifiedinthePVID OverrideifthePVIDOverrideisenabled.

Commands
For information about... show multiauth set multiauth mode clear multiauth mode set multiauth precedence clear multiauth precedence show multiauth port set multiauth port clear multiauth port show multiauth station show multiauth session show multiauth idle-timeout set multiauth idle-timeout clear multiauth idle-timeout show multiauth session-timeout set multiauth session-timeout clear multiauth session-timeout Refer to page... 16-31 16-32 16-32 16-33 16-34 16-34 16-35 16-35 16-36 16-36 16-37 16-38 16-39 16-39 16-40 16-41

show multiauth
Usethiscommandtodisplaymultipleauthenticationsystemconfiguration.

Syntax
show multiauth

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-31

set multiauth mode

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaymultipleauthenticationsystemconfiguration:
B2(rw)->show multiauth Multiple authentication system configuration ------------------------------------------------Supported types : dot1x, pwa mac Maximum number of users : Current number of users : 0 System mode : multi Default precedence : dot1x, pwa, mac Admin precedence Operational precedence : dot1x, pwa, mac

set multiauth mode

Usethiscommandtosetthesystemauthenticationmodetoallowmultipleauthenticators simultaneously(802.1xPWA,andMACAuthentication)onasingleport,ortostrictlyadhereto 802.1xauthentication.

Syntax
set multiauth mode {multi | strict}

Parameters
multi strict Allowsthesystemtousemultipleauthenticatorssimultaneously(802.1x, PWA,andMACAuthentication)onaport.Thisisthedefaultmode. Usermustauthenticateusing802.1xauthenticationbeforenormaltraffic (anythingotherthanauthenticationtraffic)canbeforwarded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
MultiauthmultimoderequiresthatMAC,PWA,and802.1Xauthenticationbeenabledglobally, andconfiguredappropriatelyonthedesiredportsaccordingtotheircorrespondingcommand setsdescribedinthischapter.RefertoConfiguring802.1XAuthenticationonpage 169and ConfiguringMACAuthenticationonpage 1619andConfiguringPortWebAuthentication (PWA)onpage 1657.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenablesimultaneousmultipleauthentications:
B2(rw)->set multiauth mode multi

clear multiauth mode

Usethiscommandtoclearthesystemauthenticationmode.
16-32 Security Configuration

set multiauth precedence

Syntax
clear multiauth mode

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthesystemauthenticationmode:
B2(rw)->clear multiauth mode

set multiauth precedence

Usethiscommandtosetthesystemsmultipleauthenticationadministrativeprecedence.

Syntax
set multiauth precedence {[dot1x] [mac] }

Parameters
dot1x mac pwa Setsprecedencefor802.1Xauthentication. SetsprecedenceforMACauthentication. Setsprecedenceforportwebauthentication

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Whenauserissuccessfullyauthenticatedbymorethanonemethodatthesametime,the precedenceoftheauthenticationmethodswilldeterminewhichRADIUSreturnedfilterIDwillbe processedandresultinanappliedtrafficpolicyprofile.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetprecedenceforMACauthentication:
B2(rw)->set multiauth precedence mac dot1x

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-33

clear multiauth precedence

clear multiauth precedence

Usethiscommandtoclearthesystemsmultipleauthenticationadministrativeprecedence.

Syntax
clear multiauth precedence

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthemultipleauthenticationprecedence:
B2(rw)->clear multiauth precedence

show multiauth port

Usethiscommandtodisplaymultipleauthenticationpropertiesforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show multiauth port [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Displaysmultipleauthenticationinformationforspecificport(s).

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,multipleauthenticationinformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaymultipleauthenticationinformationforportsge.3.14:
B2(rw)->show multiauth port ge.3.1-4 Port Max users ------------ ------------ ---------ge.3.1 auth-opt 2 ge.3.2 auth-opt 2 ge.3.3 auth-opt 2 ge.3.4 auth-opt 2 Mode Allowed users ---------8 8 8 8 Current users ---------0 0 0 0

16-34

Security Configuration

set multiauth port

set multiauth port

Usethiscommandtosetmultipleauthenticationpropertiesforoneormoreports.

Syntax
set multiauth port mode {auth-opt | auth-reqd | force-auth | force-unauth} | numusers numusers port-string

Parameters
mode authopt| authreqd| forceauth| forceunauth Specifiestheport(s)multipleauthenticationmodeas: authoptAuthenticationoptional(nonstrictbehavior).Ifauser doesnotattempttoauthenticateusing802.1x,orif802.1x authenticationfails,theportwillallowtraffictobeforwarded accordingtothedefineddefaultVLAN. authreqdAuthenticationisrequired. forceauthAuthenticationconsidered. forceunauthAuthenticationdisabled.

numusers numusers portstring

Specifiesthenumberofusersallowedauthenticationonport(s).Valid valuesare0to8. Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtosetmultipleauthenticationproperties.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtosettheportmultipleauthenticationmodetorequiredonge.3.14:
B2(rw)->set multiauth port mode auth-reqd ge.3.14

clear multiauth port

Usethiscommandtoclearmultipleauthenticationpropertiesforoneormoreports.

Syntax
clear multiauth port {mode | numusers} port-string

Parameters
mode numusers portstring Clearsthespecifiedportsmultipleauthenticationmode. Clearsthevaluesetforthenumberofusersallowedauthenticationonthe specifiedport. Specifiestheportorportsonwhichtoclearmultipleauthentication properties.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-35

show multiauth station

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtocleartheportmultipleauthenticationmodeonportge.3.14:
B2(rw)->clear multiauth port mode ge.3.14

Thisexampleshowshowtoclearthenumberofusersonportge.3.14:
B2(rw)->clear multiauth port numusers ge.3.14

show multiauth station

Usethiscommandtodisplaymultipleauthenticationstation(enduser)entries.

Syntax
show multiauth station [mac address] [port port-string]

Parameters
macaddress portportstring (Optional)DisplaysmultipleauthenticationstationentriesforspecificMAC address(es). (Optional)Displaysmultipleauthenticationstationentriesforspecific port(s).

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Defaults
Ifnooptionsarespecified,multipleauthenticationstationentrieswillbedisplayedforallMAC addressesandports.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaymultipleauthenticationstationentries.Inthiscase,twoend userMACaddressesareshown:
B2(rw)->show Port -----------ge.1.20 ge.2.16 multiauth station Address type Address ------------ -----------------------mac 00-10-a4-9e-24-87 mac 00-b0-d0-e5-0c-d0

show multiauth session

Usethiscommandtodisplaymultipleauthenticationsessionentries.

Syntax
show multiauth session [all] [agent {dot1x | mac | pwa}] [mac address] [port port-string]
16-36 Security Configuration

show multiauth idle-timeout

Parameters
all agentdot1x|mac| pwa macaddress portportstring (Optional)Displaysinformationaboutallsessions,includingthosewith terminatedstatus. (Optional)Displays802.1X,orMAC,orportwebauthenticationsession information. (Optional)Displaysmultipleauthenticationsessionentriesforspecific MACaddress(es). (Optional)Displaysmultipleauthenticationsessionentriesforthe specifiedportorports.

Defaults
Ifnooptionsarespecified,multipleauthenticationsessionentrieswillbedisplayedforall sessions,authenticationtypes,MACaddresses,andports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaymultipleauthenticationsessioninformationforportge.1.1.
B2(su)->show multiauth session port ge.1.1 __________________________________________ Port | ge.1.1 Station address Auth status | success Last attempt Agent type | dot1x Session applied Server type | radius VLAN-Tunnel-Attr Policy index | 0 Policy name Session timeout | 0 Session duration Idle timeout | 5 Idle time Termination time | Not Terminated

| | | | | | |

00-01-03-86-0A-87 FRI MAY 18 11:16:36 2007 true none Administrator 0,00:00:25 0,00:00:00

show multiauth idle-timeout

Usethiscommandtodisplaythetimeoutvalue,inseconds,foranidlesessionforall authenticationmethods.

Syntax
show multiauth idle-timeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-37

set multiauth idle-timeout

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaytimeoutvaluesforanidlesessionforallauthenticationtypes.
B2(su)->show multiauth idle-timeout Authentication type Timeout (sec) ------------------- ------------dot1x 0 pwa 0 mac 0

set multiauth idle-timeout

Usethiscommandtosetthemaximumnumberofconsecutivesecondsanauthenticatedsession maybeidlebeforeterminationofthesession.

Syntax
set multiauth idle-timeout [dot1x | mac | pwa] timeout

Parameters
dot1x mac pwa timeout (Optional)SpecifiestheIEEE802.1Xportbasednetworkaccesscontrol authenticationmethodforwhichtosetthetimeoutvalue. (Optional)SpecifiestheEnterasysMACauthenticationmethodfor whichtosetthetimeoutvalue. (Optional)SpecifiestheEnterasysPortWebAuthenticationmethodfor whichtosetthetimeoutvalue. Specifiesthetimeoutvalueinseconds.Thevaluecanrangefrom0to 65535.Avalueof0meansthatnoidletimeoutwillbeappliedunlessan idletimeoutvalueisprovidedbytheauthenticatingserver.

Defaults
Ifnoauthenticationmethodisspecified,theidletimeoutvalueissetforallauthentication methods.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Usage
Ifyousetanidletimeoutvalue,aMACuserwhoseMACaddresshasagedoutoftheforwarding databasewillbeunauthenticatedifnotraffichasbeenseenfromthataddressforthespecifiedidle timeoutperiod. Avalueofzeroindicatesthatnoidletimeoutwillbeappliedunlessanidletimeoutvalueis providedbytheauthenticatingserver.Forexample,ifasessionisauthenticatedbyaRADIUS server,thatservermayencodeaIdleTimeoutAttributeinitsauthenticationresponse.

Example
Thisexamplesetstheidletimeoutvalueforallauthenticationmethodsto300seconds.
B2(su)->set multiauth idle-timeout 300

16-38

Security Configuration

clear multiauth idle-timeout

clear multiauth idle-timeout

Usethiscommandtoresetthemaximumnumberofconsecutivesecondsanauthenticatedsession maybeidlebeforeterminationofthesessiontoitsdefaultvalueof0.

Syntax
clear multiauth idle-timeout [dot1x | mac | pwa]

Parameters
dot1x (Optional)SpecifiestheIEEE802.1Xportbasednetworkaccesscontrol authenticationmethodforwhichtoresetthetimeoutvaluetoits default. (Optional)SpecifiestheEnterasysMACauthenticationmethodfor whichtoresetthetimeoutvaluetoitsdefault. (Optional)SpecifiestheEnterasysPortWebAuthenticationmethodfor whichtoresetthetimeoutvaluetoitsdefault.

mac pwa

Defaults
Ifnoauthenticationmethodisspecified,theidletimeoutvalueisresettoitsdefaultvalueof0for allauthenticationmethods.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleresetstheidletimeoutvalueforallauthenticationmethodsto0seconds.
B2(su)->clear multiauth idle-timeout

show multiauth session-timeout

Usethiscommandtodisplaythesessiontimeoutvalue,inseconds,forallauthenticationmethods.

Syntax
show multiauth session-timeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchmode,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-39

set multiauth session-timeout

Example
Thisexampledisplaysthesessiontimeoutvaluesforallauthenticationmethods.
B2(su)->show multiauth session-timeout Authentication type Timeout (sec) ------------------- ------------dot1x 0 pwa 0 mac 0

set multiauth session-timeout

Usethiscommandtosetthemaximumnumberofsecondsanauthenticatedsessionmaylast beforeterminationofthesession.

Syntax
set multiauth session-timeout [dot1x | mac | pwa] timeout

Parameters
dot1x mac pwa timeout (Optional)SpecifiestheIEEE802.1Xportbasednetworkaccesscontrol authenticationmethodforwhichtosetthesessiontimeoutvalue. (Optional)SpecifiestheEnterasysMACauthenticationmethodfor whichtosetthesessiontimeoutvalue. (Optional)SpecifiestheEnterasysPortWebAuthenticationmethodfor whichtosetthesessiontimeoutvalue. Specifiesthetimeoutvalueinseconds.Thevaluecanrangefrom0to 65535.Avalueof0meansthatnosessiontimeoutwillbeappliedunless asessiontimeoutvalueisprovidedbytheauthenticatingserver.

Defaults
Ifnoauthenticationmethodisspecified,thesessiontimeoutvalueissetforallauthentication methods.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Usage
Avalueofzeromaybesupersededbyasessiontimeoutvalueprovidedbytheauthenticating server.Forexample,ifasessionisauthenticatedbyaRADIUSserver,thatservermayencodea SessionTimeoutAttributeinitsauthenticationresponse.

Example
ThisexamplesetsthesessiontimeoutvaluefortheIEEE802.1Xauthenticationmethodto300 seconds.
B2(su)->set multiauth session-timeout dot1x 300

16-40

Security Configuration

clear multiauth session-timeout

clear multiauth session-timeout

Usethiscommandtoresetthemaximumnumberofconsecutivesecondsanauthenticatedsession maylastbeforeterminationofthesessiontoitsdefaultvalueof0.

Syntax
clear multiauth session-timeout [dot1x | mac | pwa]

Parameters
dot1x (Optional)SpecifiestheIEEE802.1Xportbasednetworkaccesscontrol authenticationmethodforwhichtoresetthetimeoutvaluetoits default. (Optional)SpecifiestheEnterasysMACauthenticationmethodfor whichtoresetthetimeoutvaluetoitsdefault. (Optional)SpecifiestheEnterasysPortWebAuthenticationmethodfor whichtoresetthetimeoutvaluetoitsdefault.

mac pwa

Defaults
Ifnoauthenticationmethodisspecified,thesessiontimeoutvalueisresettoitsdefaultvalueof0 forallauthenticationmethods.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleresetsthesessiontimeoutvaluefortheIEEE802.1Xauthenticationmethodto0 seconds.
B2(su)->clear multiauth session-timeout dot1x

Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)

Purpose
RFC3580TunnelAttributesprovideamechanismtocontainan802.1Xauthenticatedusertoa VLANregardlessofthePVID.Uptothreeuserscan be configured per Gigabit port. Pleaseseesection331ofRFC3580fordetailsonconfiguringaRADIUSservertoreturnthe desiredtunnelattributes.AsstatedinRFC3580,...itmaybedesirabletoallowaporttobeplaced intoaparticularVirtualLAN(VLAN),definedin[IEEE8021Q],basedontheresultofthe authentication. TheRADIUSservertypicallyindicatesthedesiredVLANbyincludingtunnelattributeswithinits AccessAcceptparameters.However,theIEEE802.1Xauthenticatorcanalsobeconfiguredto instructtheVLANtobeassignedtothesupplicantbyincludingtunnelattributeswithinAccess Requestparameters. ThefollowingtunnelattributesareusedinVLANauthorizationassignment,: TunnelTypeVLAN(13) TunnelMediumType802 TunnelPrivateGroupIDVLANID
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 16-41

show policy maptable response

InordertoauthenticatemultipleRFC3580users,policymaptableresponsemustbesettotunnel asdescribedinthissection.

Commands
For information about... show policy maptable response set policy maptable response set vlanauthorization set vlanauthorization egress clear vlanauthorization show vlanauthorization Refer to page... 16-42 16-42 16-43 16-44 16-44 16-45

show policy maptable response

Displaysthecurrentpolicymaptableresponsesetting.Whenmaptableresponseissettopolicy (thedefaultsetting)themaximumnumberofmultiauthusersallowedperportis2.Whenthe maptableresponseissettotunnelthemaximumnumberofmultiauthusersallowedperportis 3.WhenVLANauthorizationisenabled(asdescribedinthissection)andthepolicymaptable responseistunnel,youcanusethesetmultiauthportonpage 1635commandtosetthe numberofRFC3580users(numusers)allowedperGigabitporttoavaluebetween1and3.

Syntax
show policy maptable response

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtodisplaythecurrentpolicymaptableresponsesetting:
B2(rw)->show policy maptable response

policy

set policy maptable response

Setsthemaptableresponsefromthedefaultofpolicytotunneltoallowupto3 VLAN authorizeduserstobeconfiguredperGigabitport.

16-42

Security Configuration

set vlanauthorization

Syntax
set policy maptable response {policy | tunnel}

Parameters
policy tunnel Setsthemaptableresponsetopolicy.Thisisthedefaultsetting,which allowsauthenticationofupto2multiauthusersperport. Setsthemaptableresponsetotunnel,whichallowsauthenticationofup to3multiauthusersperport.ThissettingisrequiredtoconfigureVLAN authorizationformultipleusersperGigabitport.

Defaults
Settopolicy.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
Thisexampleshowshowtosetthepolicymaptableresponsetotunnel:
B2(rw)-> set policy maptable response tunnel

set vlanauthorization
EnableordisabletheuseoftheRADIUSVLANtunnelattributetoputaportintoaparticular VLANbasedontheresultofauthentication.

Syntax
set vlanauthorization {enable | disable} [port-string]

Parameters
enable|disable portstring Enablesordisablesvlanauthorization/tunnelattributes. (Optional)SpecifieswhichportstoenableordisabletheuseofVLAN tunnelattributes/authorization.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleport stringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
VLANauthenticationisdisabledbydefault.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Examples
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableVLANauthenticationforallGigabitEthernetports:
B2(rw)-> set vlanauthorization enable ge.*.*

ThisexampleshowshowtodisableVLANauthenticationforallGigabitEthernetportsonswitch unit/module 3:

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-43

set vlanauthorization egress

B2(rw)-> set vlanauthorization disable ge.3.*

set vlanauthorization egress

ControlsthemodificationofthecurrentVLANegresslistof802.1xauthenticatedportsforthe VLANsreturnedintheRADIUSauthorizationfilteridstring.

Syntax
set vlanauthorization egress {none | tagged | untagged} port-string

Parameters
none tagged untagged portstring Specifiesthatnoegressmanipulationwillbemade. Specifiesthattheauthenticatingportwillbeaddedtothecurrenttagged egressfortheVLANIDreturned. Specifiesthattheauthenticatingportwillbeaddedtothecurrent untaggedegressfortheVLANIDreturned(default). Specifiesthattheportorlistofports.towhichthiscommandwillapply. Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPort StringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Bydefault,administrativeegressissettountagged.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenabletheinsertionoftheRADIUSassignedVLANtoan802.1qtag foralloutboundframesforports10through15onunit/modulenumber3.
B2(rw)->set vlanauthorization egress tagged ge.3.10-15

clear vlanauthorization
Usethiscommandtoreturnport(s)tothedefaultconfigurationofVLANauthorizationdisabled, egressuntagged.

Syntax
clear vlanauthorization [port-string]

16-44

Security Configuration

show vlanauthorization

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Specifieswhichportsaretoberestoredtodefault configuration.Ifnoportstringisentered,theactionwillbeaglobal setting.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifnoportstringisentered,allportsawillberesettodefaultconfigurationwithVLAN authorizationdisabledandegressframesuntagged.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowhowtoclearVLANauthorizationforallportsonslots3,4,and5:
B2(rw)->clear vlanauthorization ge.3-5.*

show vlanauthorization
DisplaystheVLANauthenticationstatusandconfigurationinformationforthespecifiedports.

Syntax
show vlanauthorization [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysVLANauthenticationstatusforthespecifiedports.If noportstringisentered,thentheglobalstatusofthesettingisdisplayed. Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPort StringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifnoportstringisentered,thestatusforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThiscommandshowshowtodisplayVLANauthorizationstatusforge.1.1:
B2(rw)-> show vlanauthorization ge.1.1 port ----ge.1.1 status ------enabled administrative egress ------------------------untagged operational egress --------------------none vlan id -------0

Table 1652providesanexplanationofcommandoutput.Fordetailsonenablingandassigning protocolandegressattributes,refertosetvlanauthorizationonpage 1643andset vlanauthorizationegressonpage 1644.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-45

Configuring MAC Locking

Table 16-52
Output port status administrative egress

show vlanauthorization Output Details

What It Displays... Port identification Port status as assigned by set vlanauthorization command Port status as assigned by the set vlanauthorization egress command If authentication has succeeded, displays the VLAN id assigned for egress. If authentication has succeeded, displays the assigned VLAN id for ingress.

operational egress vlan id

Configuring MAC Locking

ThisfeaturelocksaMACaddresstooneormoreports,preventingconnectionofunauthorized devicesthroughtheport(s).WhensourceMACaddressesarereceivedonspecifiedports,the switchdiscardsallsubsequentframesnotcontainingtheconfiguredsourceaddresses.Theonly framesforwardedonalockedportarethosewiththelockedMACaddress(es)forthatport. TherearetwomethodsoflockingaMACtoaport:firstarrivalandstatic.Thefirstarrivalmethod isdefinedtobelockingthefirstnnumberofMACswhicharriveonaportconfiguredwithMAC lockingenabled.Thevaluenisconfiguredwiththesetmaclockfirstarrivalcommand. ThestaticmethodisdefinedtobestaticallyprovisioningaMACportlockusingthesetmaclock command.ThemaximumnumberofstaticMACaddressesallowedforMAClockingonaport canbeconfiguredwiththesetmaclockstaticcommand. YoucanconfiguretheswitchtoissueaviolationtrapifapacketarriveswithasourceMAC addressdifferentfromanyofthecurrentlylockedMACaddressesforthatport. MACsareunlockedasaresultof: Alinkdownevent WhenMAClockingisdisabledonaport WhenaMACisagedoutoftheforwardingdatabasewhenFirstArrivalagingisenabled

Whenproperlyconfigured,MAClockingisanexcellentsecuritytoolasitpreventsMACspoofing onconfiguredports.AlsoifaMACweretobesecuredbysomethinglikeDragonDynamic IntrusionDetection,MAClockingwouldmakeitmoredifficultforahackertosendpacketsinto thenetworkbecausethehackerwouldhavetochangetheirMACaddressandmovetoanother port.Inthemeantimethesystemadministratorwouldbereceivingamaclocktrapnotification.

Purpose
Toreview,disable,enable,andconfigureMAClocking.

Commands
For information about... show maclock show maclock stations set maclock enable Refer to page... 16-47 16-48 16-49

16-46

Security Configuration

show maclock

For information about... set maclock disable set maclock clear maclock set maclock static clear maclock static set maclock firstarrival clear maclock firstarrival set maclock agefirstarrival clear maclock agefirstarrival set maclock move set maclock trap

Refer to page... 16-50 16-50 16-51 16-52 16-52 16-53 16-54 16-54 16-55 16-55 16-56

show maclock
UsethiscommandtodisplaythestatusofMAClockingononeormoreports.

Syntax
show maclock [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysMAClockingstatusforspecifiedport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,MAClockingstatuswillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayMAClockinginformationforge.1.1.
B2(su)->show maclock ge.1.1 MAC locking is globally enabled Port Number ------ge.1.1 Port Trap Status Status ------- -------enabled disabled Aging Status ------enabled Max Static Max FirstArrival Last Violating Allocated Allocated MAC Address ---------- --------------- --------------20 1 00:a0:c9:39:5c:b4

Table 1653providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-47

show maclock stations

Table 16-53
Output Port Number Port Status

show maclock Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. Whether MAC locking is enabled or disabled on the port. MAC locking is globally disabled by default. For details on enabling MAC locking on the switch and on one or more ports, refer to set maclock enable on page 16-49 and set maclock on page 16-50. Whether MAC lock trap messaging is enabled or disabled on the port. For details on setting this status, refer to set maclock trap on page 16-56. Whether aging of FirstArrival MAC addresses is enabled or disabled on the port. Refer to set maclock agefirstarrival on page 16-54.

Trap Status Aging Status

Max Static Allocated The maximum static MAC addresses allowed locked to the port. For details on setting this value, refer to set maclock static on page 16-52. Max FirstArrival Allocated Last Violating MAC Address The maximum end station MAC addresses allowed locked to the port. For details on setting this value, refer to set maclock firstarrival on page 16-53. Most recent MAC address(es) violating the maximum static and first arrival value(s) set for the port.

show maclock stations

UsethiscommandtodisplayMAClockinginformationaboutendstationsconnectedtothe switch.

Syntax
show maclock stations [firstarrival | static] [port-string]

Parameters
firstarrival static portstring (Optional)DisplaysMAClockinginformationaboutendstationsfirst connectedtoMAClockedports. (Optional)DisplaysMAClockinginformationaboutstatic(management defined)endstationsconnectedtoMAClockedports. (Optional)Displaysendstationinformationforspecifiedport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifnoparametersarespecified,MAClockinginformationwillbedisplayedforallendstations.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

16-48

Security Configuration

set maclock enable

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayMAClockinginformationfortheendstationsconnectedtoall GigabitEthernetportsinunit/module2:
B2(su)->show maclock stations ge.2.* Port Number MAC Address Status ------------ -----------------------------ge.2.1 00:a0:c9:39:5c:b4 active ge.2.7 00:a0:c9:39:1f:11 active State -------------first arrival static Aging ----true false

Table 1654providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput. Table 16-54

Output Port Number MAC address Status State Aging

show maclock stations Output Details

What It Displays... Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to Port String Syntax Used in the CLI on page 5-2. MAC address of the end station(s) locked to the port. Whether the end stations are active or inactive. Whether the end station locked to the port is a first arrival or static connection. When true, FirstArrival MACs that have aged out of the forwarding database will be removed for the associated port lock.

set maclock enable

UsethiscommandtoenableMAClockinggloballyorononeormoreports.

Note: MAC locking needs to be enabled globally and on appropriate ports for it to function.

Syntax
setmaclockenable[portstring]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)EnablesMAClockingonspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,MAClockingwillbeenabledglobally.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Whenenabledandconfigured,MAClockingdefineswhichMACaddresses,aswellashowmany MACaddressesarepermittedtousespecificport(s).

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-49

set maclock disable

MAClockingisdisabledbydefaultatdevicestartup.ConfiguringoneormoreportsforMAC lockingrequiresgloballyenablingitonthedeviceandthenenablingitonthedesiredports.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableMAClockingonge.2.3:
B2(su)->set maclock enable ge.2.3

set maclock disable

UsethiscommandtodisableMAClockinggloballyorononeormoreports.

Syntax
set maclock disable [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisablesMAClockingonspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,MAClockingwillbedisabledgloballyonthestackorstandalone device.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisableMAClockingonge.2.3:
B2(su)->set maclock disable ge.2.3

set maclock
UsethiscommandtocreateastaticMACaddresstoportlocking,andtoenableordisableMAC lockingforthespecifiedMACaddressandport.

Syntax
set maclock mac-address port-string {create | enable | disable}

16-50

Security Configuration

clear maclock

Parameters
macaddress portstring SpecifiestheMACaddressforwhichMAClockingwillbecreated, enabledordisabled. Specifiestheportonwhichtocreate,enableordisableMAClockingfor thespecifiedMAC.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstring values,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. EstablishesaMAClockingassociationbetweenthespecifiedMAC addressandport.CreateautomaticallyenablesMAClockingbetweenthe specifiedMACaddressandport. EnablesordisablesMAClockingbetweenthespecifiedMACaddressand port.

create

enable|disable

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
ConfiguringoneormoreportsforMAClockingrequiresgloballyenablingitontheswitchfirst usingthesetmaclockenablecommandasdescribedinsetmaclockenableonpage 1649.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtocreateaMAClockingassociationbetweenMACaddress0e03efd8 4455andportge.3.2:
B2(rw)->set maclock 0e-03-ef-d8-44-55 ge.3.2 create

clear maclock
UsethiscommandtoremoveastaticMACaddresstoportlockingentry.

Syntax
clear maclock mac-address port-string

Parameters
macaddress portstring SpecifiestheMACaddressthatwillberemovedfromthelistofstatic MACsallowedtocommunicateontheport. SpecifiestheportonwhichtocleartheMACaddress.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.
SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide 16-51

set maclock static

Usage
TheMACaddressthatisclearedwillnolongerbeabletocommunicateontheportunlessthefirst arrivallimithasbeensettoavaluegreaterthan0andthislimithasnotyetbeenmet. Forexample,ifuserBsMACisremovedfromthestaticMACaddresslistandthefirstarrival limithasbeensetto0,thenuserBwillnotbeabletocommunicateontheport.IfuserAsMACis removedfromthestaticMACaddresslistandthefirstarrivallimithasbeensetto10,butonlyhas 7entries,userAwillbecomethe8thentryandallowedtocommunicateontheport.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoremoveaMACfromthelistofstaticMACsallowedtocommunicate onportge.3.2:
B2(rw)->clear maclock 0e-03-ef-d8-44-55 ge.3.2

set maclock static

UsethiscommandtosetthemaximumnumberofstaticMACaddressesallowedperport.Static MACsareadministrativelydefined.

Syntax
set maclock static port-string value

Parameters
portstring SpecifiestheportonwhichtosetthemaximumnumberofstaticMACs allowed.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. SpecifiesthemaximumnumberofstaticMACaddressesallowedper port.Validvaluesare0to20.

value

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthemaximumnumberofallowablestaticMACsto2onge.3.1:
B2(rw)->set maclock static ge.3.1 2

clear maclock static

UsethiscommandtoresetthenumberofstaticMACaddressesallowedperporttothedefault valueof20.

Syntax
clear maclock static port-string

16-52

Security Configuration

set maclock firstarrival

Parameters
portstring SpecifiestheportonwhichtoresetnumberofstaticMACaddresses allowed.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetthenumberofallowablestaticMACsonge.2.3:
B2(rw)->clear maclock static ge.2.3

set maclock firstarrival

UsethiscommandtorestrictMAClockingonaporttoamaximumnumberofendstation addressesfirstconnectedtothatport.

Syntax
set maclock firstarrival port-string value

Parameters
portstring SpecifiestheportonwhichtolimitMAClocking.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52. SpecifiesthenumberoffirstarrivalendstationMACaddressestobe allowedconnectionstotheport.Validvaluesare0to600.

value

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Themaclockfirstarrivalcountresetswhenthelinkgoesdown.Thisfeatureisbeneficialifyou haveroamingusersthefirstarrivalcountwillbereseteverytimeausermovestoanotherport, butwillstillprotectagainstconnectingmultipledevicesonasingleportandwillprotectagainst MACaddressspoofing. IfyouwishtohaveonlystaticallysetMACs,setaportsfirstarrivallimitto0.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtorestrictMAClockingto6MACaddressesonge.2.3:

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-53

clear maclock firstarrival

B2(su)->set maclock firstarrival ge.2.3 6

clear maclock firstarrival

UsethiscommandtoresetthenumberoffirstarrivalMACaddressesallowedperporttothe defaultvalueof600.

Syntax
clear maclock firstarrival port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheportonwhichtoresetthefirstarrivalvalue.Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetMACfirstarrivalsonge.2.3:
B2(su)->clear maclock firstarrival ge.2.3

set maclock agefirstarrival

UsethiscommandtoenableordisabletheagingoffirstarrivalMACaddresses.Whenenabled, firstarrivalMACaddressesthatareagedoutoftheforwardingdatabasewillberemovedfrom theassociatedportMAClock.

Syntax
set maclock agefirstarrival port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtoenableordisablefirstarrivalaging.For adetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. Enableordisablefirstarrivalaging.Bydefault,firstarrivalagingis disabled.

enable|disable

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

16-54

Security Configuration

clear maclock agefirstarrival

Example
Thisexampleenablesfirstarrivalagingonportge.1.1.
B2(su)-> set maclock agefirstarrival ge.1.1 enable

clear maclock agefirstarrival

Usethiscommandtoresetfirstarrivalagingononeormoreportstoitsdefaultstateofdisabled.

Syntax
clear maclock agefirstarrival port-string

Parameters
portstring Specifiestheport(s)onwhichtodisablefirstarrivalaging.Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchmode,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampledisablesfirstarrivalagingonportge.1.1.
B2(su)-> clear maclock agefirstarrival ge.1.1 enable

set maclock move

UsethiscommandtomoveallcurrentfirstarrivalMACstostaticentries.

Syntax
set maclock move port-string

Parameters
portstring SpecifiestheportonwhichMACwillbemovedfromfirstarrivalMACs tostaticentries.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues, refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-55

set maclock trap

Usage
IftherearemorefirstarrivalMACsthantheallowedmaximumstaticMACs,thenonlythelatest firstarrivalMACswillbemovedtostaticentries.Forexample,ifyousetthemaximumnumberof staticMACsto2withthesetmaclockstaticcommand,andthenexecutedthesetmaclockmove command,eventhoughtherewerefiveMACsinthefirstarrivaltable,onlythetwomostrecent MACentrieswouldbemovedtostaticentries.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtomoveallcurrentfirstarrivalMACstostaticentriesonportsge.3.140:
B2(rw)->set maclock move ge.3.1-40

set maclock trap

UsethiscommandtoenableordisableMAClocktrapmessaging.

Syntax
set maclock trap port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
portstring SpecifiestheportonwhichMAClocktrapmessagingwillbeenabledor disabled.Foradetaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,referto PortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52. EnablesordisablesMAClocktrapmessaging.

enable|disable

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
Whenenabled,thisfeatureauthorizestheswitchtosendanSNMPtrapmessageifanendstation isconnectedthatexceedsthemaximumvaluesconfiguredusingthesetmaclockfirstarrivaland setmaclockstaticcommands.ViolatingMACaddressesaredroppedfromthedevices(or stacks)filteringdatabase.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenableMAClocktrapmessagingonge.2.3:
B2(su)->set maclock trap ge.2.3 enable

16-56

Security Configuration

Configuring Port Web Authentication (PWA)

Configuring Port Web Authentication (PWA)

Note: A license is required to enable PWA on the SecureStack B2 and B3. Refer to Activating Licensed Features on page 3-26 for more information.

About PWA
PWAprovidesawayofauthenticatingusersbeforeallowinggeneralaccesstothenetwork.A PWAusersaccesstothenetworkisrestricteduntilaftertheusersuccessfullylogsinviaaweb browserusingtheEnterasysNetworkswebbasedsecurityinterface.TheSecureStackB2device willvalidatealllogincredentialsfromtheuserwithaRADIUSserverbeforeallowingnetwork access. PWAisanalternativeto802.1XandMACauthentication.Itallowsonlytheessentialprotocols andservicesrequiredbytheauthenticationprocessbetweentheendstationandthenetwork.All othertrafficisdiscarded.Whenauserisintheunauthenticatedstate,anyusertrafficrequesting networkresourceswillnotbeallowed. TologonusingPWA,theusermakesarequestviaawebbrowserforthePWAwebpageoris automaticallyredirectedtothisloginpageafterrequestingaURLinabrowser. Dependingupontheauthenticatedstateoftheuser,aloginpageoralogoutpagewilldisplay. Whenausersubmitsusernameandpassword,theswitchthenauthenticatestheuserviaa preconfiguredRADIUSserver.Iftheloginissuccessful,thentheuserwillbegrantedfullnetwork accessaccordingtotheuserspolicyconfigurationontheswitch.
Note: One user per PWA-configured port can be authenticated on SecureStack B2 devices. Only one method of authentication can be deployed per port.

Purpose
Toreview,enable,disable,andconfigurePortWebAuthentication(PWA).

Commands
For information about... show pwa set pwa show pwa banner set pwa banner clear pwa banner set pwa displaylogo set pwa ipaddress set pwa protocol set pwa guestname clear pwa guestname set pwa guestpassword Refer to page... 16-58 16-59 16-60 16-60 16-61 16-61 16-62 16-62 16-63 16-63 16-64

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-57

show pwa

For information about... set pwa gueststatus set pwa initialize set pwa quietperiod set pwa maxrequest set pwa portcontrol show pwa session set pwa enhancedmode

Refer to page... 16-64 16-65 16-66 16-66 16-67 16-67 16-68

show pwa
Usethiscommandtodisplayportwebauthenticationinformationforoneormoreports.

Syntax
show pwa [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysPWAinformationforspecificport(s).

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,PWAinformationwillbedisplayedforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayPWAinformationforge.2.1:
B2(su)->show pwa ge.2.1 PWA Status PWA IP Address PWA Protocol PWA Enhanced Mode PWA Logo PWA Guest Networking Status PWA Guest Name PWA Redirect Time Port Mode -------- ---------------ge.2.1 disabled enabled 192.168.62.99 PAP N/A enabled disabled guest N/A QuietPeriod ----------60 MaxReq --------16

AuthStatus -------------disconnected

Table 1655providesanexplanationofthecommandoutput.

16-58

Security Configuration

set pwa

Table 16-55
Output PWA Status

show pwa Output Details

What It Displays... Whether or not port web authentication is enabled or disabled. Default state of disabled can be changed using the set pwa command as described in set pwa on page 16-59. IP address of the end station from which PWA will prevent network access until the user is authenticated. Set using the set pwa ipaddress command as described in set pwa ipaddress on page 16-62. Whether PWA protocol is CHAP or PAP. Default setting of PAP can be changed using the set pwa protocol command as described in set pwa protocol on page 16-62. Whether PWA enhanced mode is enabled or disabled. Default state of disabled can be changed using the set pwa enhancedmode command as described in set pwa enhancedmode on page 16-68. Whether the Enterasys Networks logo will be displayed or hidden at user login. Default state of enabled (displayed) can be changed using the set pwa displaylogo command as described in set pwa displaylogo on page 16-61. Whether PWA guest user status is disabled or enabled with RADIUS or no authentication. Default state of disabled can be changed using the set pwa gueststatus command as described in set pwa gueststatus on page 16-64. Guest user name for PWA enhanced mode networking. Default value of guest can be changed using the set pwa guestname command as described in set pwa guestname on page 16-63. Guest users password. Default value of an empty string can be changed using the set pwa guestpassword command as described in set pwa guestpassword on page 16-64. Time in seconds after login success before the user is redirected to the PWA home page. PWA port designation. Whether PWA is enabled or disabled on his port. Whether or not the port state is disconnected, authenticating, authenticated, or held (authentication has failed). Amount of time a port will be in the held state after a user unsuccessfully attempts to log on to the network. Default value of 60 can be changed using the set pwa quietperiod command as described in set pwa quietperiod on page 16-66. Maximum number of log on attempts allowed before transitioning the port to a held state. Default value of 2 can be changed using the set pwa maxrequests command as described in set pwa maxrequest on page 16-66.

PWA IP Address

PWA Protocol

PWA Enhanced Mode PWA Logo

PWA Guest Networking Status PWA Guest Name

PWA Guest Password PWA Redirect Time Port Mode Auth Status Quiet Period

MaxReq

set pwa
Usethiscommandtoenableordisableportwebauthentication.

Syntax
set pwa {enable | disable}

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-59

show pwa banner

Parameters
enable|disable Enablesordisablesportwebauthentication.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoenableportwebauthentication:
B2(su)->set pwa enable

show pwa banner

Usethiscommandtodisplaytheportwebauthenticationloginbannerstring.

Syntax
show pwa banner

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaythePWAloginbanner:
B2(su)->show pwa banner Welcome to Enterasys Networks

set pwa banner

UsethiscommandtoconfigureastringtobedisplayedasthePWAloginbanner.

Syntax
set pwa banner string

Parameters
string SpecifiesthePWAloginbanner.

16-60

Security Configuration

clear pwa banner

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthePWAloginbannertoWelcometoEnterasysNetworks:
B2(su)->set pwa banner Welcome to Enterasys Networks

clear pwa banner

UsethiscommandtoresetthePWAloginbannertoablankstring.

Syntax
clear pwa banner

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoresetthePWAloginbannertoablankstring
B2(su)->clear pwa banner

set pwa displaylogo

UsethiscommandtosetthedisplayoptionsfortheEnterasysNetworkslogo.

Syntax
set pwa displaylogo {display | hide}

Parameters
display|hide DisplaysorhidestheEnterasysNetworkslogowhenthePWAwebsite displays.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-61

set pwa ipaddress

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtohidetheEnterasysNetworkslogo:
B2(su)->set pwa displaylogo hide

set pwa ipaddress

UsethiscommandtosetthePWAIPaddress.ThisistheIPaddressoftheendstationfromwhich PWAwillpreventnetworkaccessuntiltheuserisauthenticated.

Syntax
set pwa ipaddress ip-address

Parameters
ipaddress SpecifiesagloballyuniqueIPaddress.Thissamevaluemustbe configuredintoeveryauthenticatingswitchinthedomain.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetaPWAIPaddressof1.2.3.4:
B2(su)->set pwa ipaddress 1.2.3.4

set pwa protocol

Usethiscommandtosettheportwebauthenticationprotocol.

Syntax
set pwa protocol {chap | pap}

Parameters
chap|pap SetsthePWAprotocolto: CHAP(PPPChallengeHandshakeProtocol)encryptstheusername andpasswordbetweentheendstationandtheswitchport. PAP(PasswordAuthenticationProtocoldoesnotprovideany encryptionbetweentheendstationtheswitchport.

Defaults
None.
16-62 Security Configuration

set pwa guestname

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetathePWAprotocoltoCHAP:
B2(su)->set pwa protocol chap

set pwa guestname

UsethiscommandtosetaguestusernameforPWAnetworking.PWAwillusethisnametogrant networkaccesstoguestswithoutestablishedloginnamesandpasswords.

Syntax
set pwa guestname name

Parameters
name Specifiesaguestusername.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthePWAguestusernametoguestuser:
B2(su)->set pwa guestname guestuser

clear pwa guestname

UsethiscommandtoclearthePWAguestusername.

Syntax
clear pwa guestname

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-63

set pwa guestpassword

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoclearthePWAguestusername
B2(su)->clear pwa guestname

set pwa guestpassword

UsethiscommandtosettheguestuserpasswordforPWAnetworking.

Syntax
set pwa guestpassword

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
PWAwillusethispasswordandtheguestusernametograntnetworkaccesstoguestswithout establishedloginnamesandpasswords.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthePWAguestuserpasswordname:
B2(su)->set pwa guestpassword Guest Password: ********* Retype Guest Password: *********

set pwa gueststatus

Usethiscommandtoenableordisableguestnetworkingforportwebauthentication.

Syntax
set pwa gueststatus {authnone | authradius | disable}

Parameters
authnone authradius Enablesguestnetworkingwithnoauthenticationmethod. EnablesguestnetworkingwithRADIUSauthentication.Uponsuccessful authenticationfromRADIUS,PWAwillapplythepolicyreturnedfrom RADIUStothePWAport. Disablesguestnetworking.

disable

Defaults
None.
16-64 Security Configuration

set pwa initialize

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Usage
PWAwilluseaguestpasswordandguestusernametograntnetworkaccesswithdefaultpolicy privilegestouserswithoutestablishedloginnamesandpasswords.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenablePWAguestnetworkingwithRADIUSauthentication:
B2(su)->set pwa guestnetworking authradius

set pwa initialize

UsethiscommandtoinitializeaPWAporttoitsdefaultunauthenticatedstate.

Syntax
set pwa initialize [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)Initializesspecificport(s).Foradetaileddescriptionofpossible portstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsedintheCLIon page 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,allportswillbeinitialized.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
Thisexampleshowshowtoinitializeportsge.1.57:
B2(su)->set pwa initialize ge.1.5-7

set pwa quietperiod

Usethiscommandtosettheamountoftimeaportwillremainintheheldstateafterauser unsuccessfullyattemptstologontothenetwork.

Syntax
set pwa quietperiod time [port-string]

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-65

set pwa maxrequest

Parameters
time portstring Specifiesquiettimeinseconds. (Optional)Setsthequietperiodforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,quietperiodwillbesetforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthePWAquietperiodto30secondsforportsge.1.57:
B2(su)->set pwa quietperiod 30 ge.1.5-7

set pwa maxrequest

Usethiscommandtosetthemaximumnumberoflogonattemptsallowedbeforetransitioning thePWAporttoaheldstate.

Syntax
set pwa maxrequests requests [port-string]

Parameters
maxrequests portstring Specifiesthemaximumnumberoflogonattempts. (Optional)Setsthemaximumrequestsforspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,maximumrequestswillbesetforallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

16-66

Security Configuration

set pwa portcontrol

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtosetthePWAmaximumrequeststo3forallports:
B2(su)->set pwa maxrequests 3

set pwa portcontrol

ThiscommandenablesordisablesPWAauthenticationonselectports.

Syntax
set pwa portcontrol {enable | disable} [port-string]

Parameters
enable|disable portstring EnablesordisablesPWAonspecifiedports. (Optional)Setsthecontrolmodeonspecificport(s).Foradetailed descriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortStringSyntaxUsed intheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,PWAwillenabledonallports.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenablePWAonports122:
B2(su)->set pwa portcontrol enable ge.1.1-22

show pwa session

UsethiscommandtodisplayinformationaboutcurrentPWAsessions.

Syntax
show pwa session [port-string]

Parameters
portstring (Optional)DisplaysPWAsessioninformationforspecificport(s).Fora detaileddescriptionofpossibleportstringvalues,refertoPortString SyntaxUsedintheCLIonpage 52.

Defaults
Ifportstringisnotspecified,sessioninformationforallportswillbedisplayed.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-67

set pwa enhancedmode

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplayPWAsessioninformation:
B2(su)->show pwa session Port MAC -------- ----------------ge.2.19 00-c0-4f-20-05-4b ge.2.19 00-c0-4f-24-51-70 ge.2.19 00-00-f8-78-9c-a7 IP --------------172.50.15.121 172.50.15.120 172.50.15.61 User ------------pwachap10 pwachap1 pwachap11 Duration -----------0,14:46:55 0,15:43:30 0,14:47:58 Status --------active active active

set pwa enhancedmode

ThiscommandenablesPWAURLredirection.TheswitchinterceptsallHTTPpacketsonport80 fromtheenduser,andsendstheenduserarefreshpagedestinedforthePWAIPAddress configured.

Syntax
set pwa enhancedmode {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable|disable EnablesordisablesPWAenhancedmode.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

16-68

Security Configuration

Configuring Secure Shell (SSH)

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoenablePWAenhancedmode:
B2(su)->set pwa enhancedmode enable

Configuring Secure Shell (SSH)

Purpose
Toreview,enable,disable,andconfiguretheSecureShell(SSH)protocol,whichprovidessecure Telnet.

Commands
For information about... show ssh status set ssh set ssh hostkey Refer to page... 16-69 16-69 16-70

show ssh status

UsethiscommandtodisplaythecurrentstatusofSSHontheswitch.

Syntax
show ssh status

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readonly.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisplaySSHstatusontheswitch:
B2(su)->show ssh status SSH Server status: Disabled

set ssh
Usethiscommandtoenable,disableorreinitializeSSHserverontheswitch.Bydefault,theSSH serverisdisabled.

SecureStack B2 Configuration Guide

16-69

set ssh hostkey

Syntax
set ssh {enable | disable | reinitialize}

Parameters
enable|disable reinitialize EnablesordisablesSSH,orreinitializestheSSHserver. ReinitializestheSSHserver.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtodisableSSH:
B2(su)->set ssh disable

set ssh hostkey

UsethiscommandtosetorreinitializenewSSHauthenticationkeys.

Syntax
set ssh hostkey [reinitialize]

Parameters
reinitialize (Optional)Reinitializestheserverhostauthenticationkeys.

Defaults
Ifreinitializeisnotspecified,theusermustsupplySSHauthenticationkeyvalues.

Mode
Switchcommand,readwrite.

Example
ThisexampleshowshowtoregenerateSSHkeys:
B2(su)->set ssh hostkey reinitialize

16-70

Security Configuration

Index
Numerics
802.1D 7-1 802.1p 10-15, 11-1 802.1Q 8-1 802.1s 7-1 802.1w 7-1 802.1x 16-5, 16-17 DHCP server, configuring 15-1 Differentiated Services adding classes to policies 9-11 assigning policies to service ports 9-15 configuring policies 9-9 creating classes and matching conditions 9-2 deleting classes 9-4 deleting policies 9-10 displaying class information 9-3 displaying status information 9-2 globally enabling or disabling 9-1 marking packets 9-11 matching classes to conditions 9-5 setting policing styles for policies 9-12 Diffserv, see Differentiated Services Dynamic policy profile assignment 16-2

K
Keyword Lookups 1-7

L
licenses activating 3-26 license key field descriptions 3-26 procedure for stack environment 3-27 Line Editing Commands 1-9 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuring 4-13 LLDP configuring 4-13 LLDP-MED configuring 4-14 Lockout set system 3-6 Logging 13-1 Login administratively configured 1-6 default 1-6 setting accounts 3-1 via Telnet 1-5

A
Advertised Ability 5-13 Alias node 13-32 Authentication EAPOL 16-17 MAC 16-19 Port web 16-57 RADIUS server 16-5, 16-8 SSH 16-70 Auto-negotiation 5-13

B
banner motd 3-20 Baud Rate 3-26 Broadcast suppression, enabling on ports 5-27

E
EAP pass-through 16-2, 16-13 EAPOL 16-17

C
CDP Discovery Protocol 4-1 Cisco Discovery Protocol 4-6 Class of Service 10-7, 10-11, 10-15 to 10-21, 11-1 Classification Policies 10-1 Clearing NVRAM 3-51 CLI closing 3-49 scrolling screens 1-8 starting 1-5 Command History Buffer 13-11, 13-12 Command Line Interface. See also CLI Configuration clearing switch parameters 3-51 Configuration Files copying 3-45 deleting 3-46 displaying 3-44 executing 3-45 show running config 3-46 Contexts (SNMP) 6-3 Copying Configuration or Image Files 3-45 Cost Spanning Tree port 7-37

F
Flow Control 5-17 Forbidden VLAN port 8-13

M
MAC Addresses displaying 13-18 MAC Authentication 16-19 MAC Locking 16-46 maximum static entries 16-52 static 16-52 Management VLAN 8-1 motd 3-20 Multicast Filtering 12-1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 7-1

G
Getting Help xxi GVRP enabling and disabling 8-22 purpose of 8-19 timer 8-23

H
Hardware show system 3-12, 3-21 Help keyword lookups 1-7 Host VLAN 8-16

N
Name setting for a VLAN 8-5 setting for the system 3-22 Network Management addresses and routes 13-15 monitoring switch events and status 13-11 Node Alias 13-32 NVRAM clearing 3-51

I
ICMP 13-13 IGMP 12-1 enabling and disabling 12-2 Image File copying 3-45 downloading 3-34 Ingress Filtering 8-6, 8-9 IP routes, managing in switch mode 13-15

P
Password aging 3-5 history 3-5, 3-6 set new 3-4 setting the login 3-4 Ping 13-13

D
Defaults CLI behavior, described 1-6 factory installed 1-2

J
Jumbo Frame Support 5-11

Index-1

Policy Management assigning ports 10-14 classifying to a VLAN or Class of Service 10-7, 10-11 dynamic assignment of profiles 16-2 profiles 10-1, 10-15 Port Mirroring 5-29 Port Priority configuring 11-1 Port String syntax used in the CLI 5-2 Port Trunking 5-32 Port web authentication configuring 16-57 Port(s) alias 5-8 assignment scheme 5-2 auto-negotiation and advertised ability 5-13 broadcast suppression 5-27 counters, reviewing statistics 5-5 duplex mode, setting 5-9 flow control 5-17 link flap about 5-19 configuration defaults 5-21 configuring 5-20 link traps, configuring 5-18 MAC lock 16-49 priority, configuring 11-1 speed, setting 5-9 status, reviewing 5-3 Power over Ethernet (PoE), configuring 3-31 Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping 11-4 Prompt set 3-19 PWA 16-57

downloading upgrades via 3-34 show system utilization cpu 3-13 SNMP access rights 6-15 accessing in router mode 6-3 enabling on the switch 6-17 MIB views 6-18 notification parameters 6-28 notify filters 6-28 security models and levels 6-2 statistics 6-3 target addresses 6-25 target parameters 6-22 trap configuration example 6-36 users, groups and communities 6-7 SNTP 13-25 Spanning Tree 7-1 backup root 7-21 bridge parameters 7-3 features 7-2 port parameters 7-31 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 7-1 SSL WebView 3-54 stacks installing units 2-2 operation 2-1 virtual switch configuration 2-4 Syslog 13-1 System Information displaying basic 3-11 setting basic 3-8

authentication 16-41, 16-45 classifying to 10-7, 10-11 creating static 8-4 dynamic egress 8-16 egress lists 8-12, 16-44 enabling GVRP 8-18 forbidden ports 8-13 host, setting 8-16 ingress filtering 8-6 naming 8-5 RADIUS 16-41 secure management, creating 8-1

W
WebView 1-2, 3-52 WebView SSL 3-54

T
Technical Support xxi Telnet disconnecting 13-14 enabling in switch mode 3-38 Terminal Settings 3-23 TFTP downloading firmware upgrades via 3-34 Timeout CLI, system 3-25 RADIUS 16-5 Trap SNMP configuration example 6-36 Tunnel Attributes RFC 3580 RADIUS attributes 16-41

R
RADIUS 16-3 realm 16-6 RADIUS Filter-ID 16-2 attribute formats 16-3 RADIUS server 16-5, 16-8 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 7-1 Rate Limiting 11-9 Related Manuals xx Reset 3-51 RFC 3580 16-41

U
User Accounts default 1-6 setting 3-1

S
Scrolling Screens 1-8 Secure Shell (SSH) 16-69 enabling 16-69 regenerating new keys 16-70 Security methods, overview of 16-1 Serial Port

V
Version Information 3-21 virtual switch, configuring 2-4 VLANs assigning ingress filtering 8-9 assigning port VLAN IDs 8-6

Index-2